624680
6
Verklein
Vergroot
Pagina terug
1/342
Pagina verder
CLS
Operator's Manual
Order no. P218 0053 13 Part no. 218 584 22 02 Edition B 2016
É2185842202-ËÍ
2185842202
CLS Operator's Manual
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehi-
cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the
following websites:
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
Editorial office
©
Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or
otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-
out written permission from Daimler AG.
Vehicle manufacturer
Daimler AG
Mercedesstraße 137
70327 Stuttgart
Germany
Symbols
Registered trademarks:
R
Bluetooth
®
is a registered trademark of Blue-
tooth SIG Inc.
R
DTS™ is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.
R
Dolby
®
and MLP™ are registered trademarks
of DOLBY Laboratories.
R
BabySmart™, ESP
®
and PRE-SAFE
®
are reg-
istered trademarks of Daimler AG.
R
HomeLink
®
is a registered trademark of John-
son Controls.
R
iPod
®
and iTunes
®
are registered trademarks
of Apple Inc.
R
Logic7
®
is a registered trademark of Harman
International Industries.
R
Microsoft
®
and Windows media
®
are regis-
tered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
R
SIRIUS
®
is a registered trademark of Sirius
XM Radio Inc.
R
HD Radio™ is a registered trademark of iBiq-
uity Digital Corporation.
R
Gracenote
®
is a registered trademark of
Gracenote, Inc.
R
ZAGAT Survey
®
and related brands are regis-
tered trademarks of Zagat Survey, LLC.
In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-
lowing symbols:
G
WARNING
Warning notes make you aware of dangers
which could pose a threat to your health or
life, or to the health and life of others.
H
Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with infor-
mation on environmentally aware actions or
disposal.
!
Notes on material damage alert you to dan-
gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-
cle.
i
Practical tips or further information that
could be helpful to you.
X
This symbol indicates an instruction
that must be followed.
X
Several of these symbols in succession
indicate an instruction with several
steps.
(Y
page)
This symbol tells you where you can find
more information about a topic.
YY
This symbol indicates a warning or an
instruction that is continued on the next
page.
Dis‐
play
This text indicates a message on the
multifunction display/multimedia dis-
play.
~
This symbol tells you that you can find
further information in the Digital Oper-
ator's Manual.
As at 01.04.2015
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual
carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehi-
cle before driving. For your own safety and a
longer vehicle life, follow the instructions and
warning notices in this manual. Ignoring them
could result in damage to the vehicle or personal
injury to you or others.
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow
instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-
Benz Limited Warranty.
The equipment or product designation of your
vehicle may vary depending on:
R
Model
R
Order
R
Country specification
R
Availability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reserves the right to
introduce changes in the following areas:
R
Design
R
Equipment
R
Technical features
The equipment in your vehicle may therefore
differ from that shown in the descriptions and
illustrations.
The following are integral components of the
vehicle:
R
Digital Operator's Manual
R
Printed Operator's Manual
R
Maintenance Booklet
R
Equipment-dependent supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicle at all
times. If you sell the vehicle, always pass all
documents on to the new owner.
Your Operator's Manual:
Digital form inside the vehicle
The Digital Operator's Manual provides
comprehensive and specifically adapted
information on your vehicle's equipment
and multimedia system. It contains infor-
mative animations, individual language
settings and an intuitive search function.
Booklet inside the vehicle
In addition to this manual and the afore-
mentioned digital media, you also have the
option to obtain a comprehensive printed
version of the Supplement for your multi-
media system from your authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Digital form via the Internet
The Operator's Manual on the Internet pro-
vides easy access to all information
regarding your vehicle and multimedia sys-
tem. It also provides helpful animations,
interesting background information and a
wide array of search options.
Digital form as an App
Using the Mercedes-Benz Guides App, you
can view all the information on your vehicle
and multimedia system via mobile Internet
or download it independently of network
access. Available for smartphones or tab-
lets.
Please note that the Mercedes-Benz Guides App
may not yet be available in your country.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
A Daimler Company
2185842202
É2185842202-ËÍ
Index ....................................................... 3
Digital Operator's Manual .................. 23
Introduction ......................................... 25
At a glance ........................................... 33
Safety ................................................... 41
Opening and closing ........................... 76
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 94
Lights and windshield wipers .......... 107
Climate control ................................. 114
Driving and parking .......................... 126
On-board computer and displays .... 196
Multimedia system ........................... 245
Stowage and features ...................... 251
Maintenance and care ...................... 274
Breakdown assistance ..................... 286
Wheels and tires ............................... 301
Technical data ................................... 329
2
Contents
1, 2, 3 ...
4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-
tion System)
4MATIC (permanent all-wheel
drive)
Function/notes .............................169
12 V socket
see Sockets
360° camera
Cleaning ......................................... 283
Display in the multimedia system .. 183
Function/notes .............................181
A
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Display message ............................ 213
Function/notes ................................ 64
Important safety notes .................... 64
Warning lamp ................................. 238
Accident
Automatic measures after an acci-
dent ................................................. 58
Activating media mode
General notes ................................ 250
Activating/deactivating cooling
with air dehumidification ................. 120
Active Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating (on-
board computer) ............................ 205
Display message ............................ 226
Function/information .................... 190
Active Driving Assistance package .. 190
Active Lane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating (on-
board computer) ............................ 205
Display message ............................ 226
Function/information .................... 193
Active multicontour seat
Adjusting (on the seat) ..................... 98
Active Parking Assist
Detecting parking spaces .............. 174
Display message ............................ 227
Exiting a parking space .................. 176
Function/notes ............................. 173
Important safety notes .................. 173
Parking .......................................... 175
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 72
Adaptive Brake Assist
Function/notes ................................ 68
Adaptive Damping System (ADS) ..... 167
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Display message ............................ 221
Function/notes ............................. 109
Switching on/off ........................... 110
Additives (engine oil) ........................ 334
Address book
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 245
Adjusting the volume
Audio 20 ........................................ 246
COMAND ....................................... 246
Air bags
Deployment ..................................... 53
Display message ............................ 219
Front air bag (driver, front
passenger) ....................................... 47
Important safety notes .................... 46
Introduction ..................................... 46
Knee bag .......................................... 47
Occupant
Cla
ssification System
(OCS) ............................................... 49
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indica-
tor lamp ........................................... 42
Pelvis air bag ................................... 48
Side impact air bag .......................... 48
Window curtain air bag .................... 49
AIR FLOW ........................................... 121
Air vents
Glove box ....................................... 125
Important safety notes .................. 125
Setting ........................................... 125
Setting the side air vents ............... 125
Air-conditioning system
see Climate control
AIRMATIC
Display message ............................ 224
Function/notes ............................. 166
Alarm
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 75
Switching off (ATA) .......................... 75
Switching the function on/off
(ATA) ................................................ 75
Index
3
Alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Ambient lighting
Setting the brightness (on-board
computer) ...................................... 206
Setting the color (on-board com-
puter) .............................................207
AMG adaptive sport suspension
system ................................................ 167
Anti-lock braking system
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Anti-Theft Alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Ashtray ............................................... 260
Assistance display (on-board com-
puter) ..................................................203
Assistance menu (on-board com-
puter) ..................................................203
ASSYST PLUS
Displaying a service message ........278
Hiding a service message .............. 278
Resetting the service interval dis-
play ................................................ 278
Service message ............................ 277
Special service requirements ......... 278
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Activating/deactivating ................... 75
Function ...........................................75
Switching off the alarm .................... 75
ATTENTION ASSIST
Activating/deactivating ................. 205
Display message ............................ 224
Function/notes ............................. 184
Audio 20
Switching on/off ........................... 246
Audio system
see separate operating instructions
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
see Qualified specialist workshop
Authorized workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
AUTO lights
Display message ............................ 221
see Lights
Automatic car wash (care) ............... 279
Automatic engine start (ECO start/
stop functio
n) .................................... 131
A
utomatic engine switch-off (ECO
start/stop function) .......................... 130
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 107
Automatic transmission
Accelerator pedal position ............. 137
Automatic drive program ............... 139
Changing gear ............................... 137
DIRECT SELECT lever ..................... 135
Display message ............................ 232
Drive program display .................... 135
Driving tips .................................... 137
Emergency running mode .............. 143
Engaging drive position .................. 136
Engaging neutral ............................ 136
Engaging park position
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .............. 134
Engaging park position automati-
cally ............................................... 135
Engaging reverse gear ................... 135
Engaging the park position ............ 135
Kickdown ....................................... 138
Manual drive program .................... 140
Manual drive program (Mercedes-
AMG vehicles) ................................ 141
Manual drive program (vehicles
with Sports package AMG) ............ 141
Overview ........................................ 134
Problem (malfunction) ................... 143
Program selector button ................ 138
Pulling away ................................... 129
Selector lever ................................ 134
Starting the engine ........................ 129
Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 139
Transmission position display ........ 134
Transmission position display
(DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... 135
Transmission positions .................. 137
Automatic transmission emer-
gency mode ....................................... 143
B
Back button ....................................... 246
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 65
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System
PLUS) with Cross-Traffic Assist
Function/notes ................................ 65
4
Index
BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist
(Brake Assist PLUS with Cross-
Traffic Assist)
Important safety notes .................... 65
Battery (SmartKey)
Checking .......................................... 79
Important safety notes .................... 78
Replacing ......................................... 79
Battery (vehicle)
Charging ........................................ 293
Display message ............................ 223
Important safety notes .................. 291
Jump starting ................................. 294
Belt
see Seat belts
Blind Spot Assist
Activating/deactivating (on-
board computer) ............................ 205
Display message ............................ 226
Notes/function .............................. 187
see Active Blind Spot Assist
Bluetooth
®
Connecting another mobile
phone ............................................ 250
Searching for a mobile phone ........ 249
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 245
Telephony ...................................... 248
Box (trunk) ......................................... 255
Brake Assist
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake fluid
Display message ............................ 215
Notes ............................................. 334
Brake force distribution
see EBD (electronic brake force
distribution)
Brake lamps
Display message ............................ 221
Brakes
ABS .................................................. 64
Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 68
BAS .................................................. 65
BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic
Assist ............................................... 65
Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 334
Display message ............................ 213
High-performance brake system .... 151
HOLD function ............................... 164
Important safety notes .................. 150
Maintenance .................................. 151
Parking brake ................................ 147
Riding tips ...................................... 150
Warning lamp ................................. 237
Breakdown
Where will I find...? ........................ 286
see Flat tire
see Towing away
Brightness control (instrument
cluster lighting) ................................... 34
C
California
Important notice for retail cus-
tomers and lessees .......................... 26
Calling up a malfunction
see Display messages
Car
see Vehicle
Care
360° camera ................................. 283
Car wash ........................................ 279
Carpets .......................................... 285
Display ........................................... 283
Exhaust pipe .................................. 283
Exterior lights ................................ 282
Gear or selector lever .................... 284
Interior ........................................... 283
Matte finish ................................... 281
Notes ............................................. 279
Paint .............................................. 280
Plastic trim .................................... 283
Power washer ................................ 280
Rear view camera .......................... 282
Roof lining ...................................... 285
Seat belt ........................................ 284
Seat cover ..................................... 284
Sensors ......................................... 282
Steering wheel ............................... 284
Trim pieces .................................... 284
Washing by hand ........................... 280
Wheels ........................................... 281
Windows ........................................ 281
Wiper blades .................................. 282
Wooden trim .................................. 284
Index
5
Cargo tie down rings .........................255
CD
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................245
CD player (on-board computer) ........201
Center console
Lower section .................................. 37
Lower section (AMG vehicles) .......... 38
Upper section .................................. 36
Central locking
Automatic locking (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 207
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........76
Child
Restraint system .............................. 59
Child seat
Forward-facing restraint system ...... 62
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
anchors ............................................ 60
On the front-passenger seat ............ 62
Rearward-facing restraint system .... 62
Top Tether .......................................61
Child-proof locks
Important safety notes .................... 62
Rear doors .......................................63
Children
Special seat belt retractor ...............59
Cigarette lighter ................................ 261
Cleaning
Mirror turn signal ...........................282
Climate control
Automatic climate control (3-
zone) .............................................. 117
Controlling automatically ...............120
Cooling with air dehumidification .. 120
Defrosting the windows ................. 122
Defrosting the windshield .......
....... 122
Du
al-zone automatic climate con-
trol ................................................. 115
General notes ................................ 114
Indicator lamp ................................ 120
Information about using auto-
matic climate control ..................... 118
Maximum cooling .......................... 122
Overview of systems ......................114
Problem with the rear window
defroster ........................................ 124
Problems with cooling with air
dehumidification ............................ 120
Rear control panel ......................... 117
Refrigerant ..................................... 335
Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 336
Setting the air distribution ............. 121
Setting the air vents ......................125
Setting the airflow ......................... 122
Setting the climate mode (AIR
FLOW) ............................................ 121
Setting the temperature ................ 121
Setting the temperature with 3-
zone automatic climate control ..... 121
Setting the temperature with dual-
zone automatic climate control ..... 121
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off ............................................ 124
Switching on/off ........................... 119
Switching residual heat on/off ...... 124
Switching the rear window
defroster on/off ............................ 123
Switching the ZONE function on/
off ..................................................122
Cockpit
Overview .......................................... 33
see Instrument cluster
Collapsible spare wheel
Inflating ......................................... 327
see Emergency spare wheel
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
PLUS
Activating/deactivating ................. 204
Display message ............................ 215
Operation/notes .............................. 67
COMAND
Switching on/off ........................... 246
COMAND display
Cleaning ......................................... 283
Combination switch .......................... 108
Connecting a USB device
see also
Digital Operator's Ma
n-
ual ..................................................245
Consumption statistics (on-board
computer) .......................................... 199
Controller ...........................................246
Convenience box ............................... 255
Convenience closing feature .............. 88
6
Index
Convenience opening feature ............ 88
Coolant (engine)
Checking the level .........................276
Display message ............................ 222
Filling capacity ............................... 335
Important safety notes .................. 334
Temperature (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ...............209
Temperature gauge ........................ 196
Warning lamp ................................. 241
Cooling
see Climate control
Copyright ............................................. 32
Cornering light function
Display message ............................ 221
Function/notes .............................109
Cruise control
Activation conditions ..................... 154
Cruise control lever ....................... 153
Deactivating ................................... 155
Display message ............................ 229
Driving system ............................... 153
Function/notes .............................153
Important safety notes .................. 153
Setting a speed .............................. 154
Storing and maintaining current
speed ............................................. 154
Cup holder
Center console .............................. 258
Center console in the rear com-
partment ........................................ 258
Important safety notes .................. 257
Rear compartment ......................... 258
Customer Assistance Center
(CAC) ..................................................... 29
Customer Relations Department ....... 29
D
Dashboard
see Instrument cluster
Data
see Technical data
Data carrier
Selecting ........................................ 201
Daytime running lamps
Display message ............................ 221
Function/notes .............................107
Switching on/off (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 206
Declarations of conformity ................. 28
Delayed switch-off
Exterior lighting (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 207
Interior lighting .............................. 207
Diagnostics connection ......................29
Digital Operator's Manual
Help .................................................23
Introduction .....................................23
Digital speedometer .........................199
DIRECT SELECT lever
Automatic transmission ................. 135
Display messages
ASSYST PLUS ................................ 277
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 212
Driving systems .............................224
Engine ............................................ 222
General notes ................................ 212
Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 212
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 234
Lights ............................................. 221
Safety systems .............................. 213
SmartKey ....................................... 234
Tires ............................................... 230
Vehicle ...........................................232
Distance recorder .............................198
Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 243
Distance warning function
Function/notes ................................ 67
DISTRONIC PLUS
Activating ....................................... 157
Activation conditions ..................... 157
Deactivating ................................... 161
Display message ............................ 227
Displays in the multifunction dis-
play ................................................ 160
Function/note
s ............................. 155
Imp
ortant safety notes .................. 156
Setting the specified minimum
distance ......................................... 159
Stopping ........................................ 159
Doors
Automatic locking (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 207
Automatic locking (switch) ............... 82
Index
7
Central locking/unlocking
(SmartKey) .......................................76
Control panel ...................................40
Display message ............................ 233
Emergency locking ........................... 83
Emergency unlocking ....................... 83
Important safety notes .................... 81
Opening (from inside) ...................... 81
Drinking and driving ......................... 149
Drive program
Automatic ...................................... 139
Display ........................................... 134
Display (DIRECT SELECT lever) ...... 135
Manual ........................................... 140
Manual (Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles) ............................................... 141
Manual (vehicles with Sports
package AMG) ............................... 141
SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 209
Drive program selector ..................... 139
Driver's door
see Doors
Driving abroad
Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 278
Driving on flooded roads .................. 152
Driving safety systems
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 64
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 72
Adaptive Brake Assist ...................... 68
BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 65
BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic
Assist ............................................... 65
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
PLUS ................................................ 67
Distance warning function ............... 67
EBD (electronic brake force distri-
bution) ............................................. 72
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Pro-
gram) ............................................... 69
Important safety information ........... 64
Overview .......................................... 64
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake ............................. 73
Driving system
RACE START (Mercedes-AMG
vehicles) ........................................ 165
Driving systems
360°camera .................................. 181
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 190
Active Driving Assistance pack-
age ................................................. 190
Active Lane Keeping Assist
............ 193
Acti
ve Parking Assist ..................... 173
AIRMATIC ...................................... 166
AMG adaptive sport suspension
system ........................................... 167
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 184
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 187
Cruise control ................................ 153
Display message ............................ 224
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 155
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering
Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ............... 162
HOLD function ............................... 164
Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 189
Lane Tracking package .................. 187
PARKTRONIC ................................. 170
Rear view camera .......................... 177
Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 186
Driving tips
AMG ceramic brakes ..................... 151
Automatic transmission ................. 137
Brakes ........................................... 150
Break-in period .............................. 126
Downhill gradient ........................... 150
Drinking and driving ....................... 149
Driving in winter ............................. 152
Driving on flooded roads ................ 152
Driving on wet roads ...................... 152
Exhaust check ............................... 149
Fuel ................................................ 149
General .......................................... 148
Hydroplaning ................................. 152
Icy road surfaces ........................... 152
Limited braking efficiency on sal-
ted roads ....................................... 151
Snow chains .................................. 303
Wet road surface ........................... 151
DVD video
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 202
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 245
8
Index
E
E10
see Fuel
EASY-ENTRY feature
Activating/deactivating .................208
Function/notes .............................102
EASY-EXIT feature
Crash-responsive ........................... 103
Function/notes .............................102
Switching on/off ........................... 208
EASY-PACK trunk box ....................... 255
EBD (electronic brake force distri-
bution)
Display message ............................ 214
Function/notes ................................ 72
ECO display
Function/notes .............................149
On-board computer ....................... 199
ECO start/stop function
Automatic engine start .................. 131
Automatic engine switch-off .......... 130
Deactivating/activating ................. 131
General information ....................... 130
Important safety notes .................. 130
Introduction ................................... 130
Electronic Stability Program
see ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
Emergency
Automatic measures after an acci-
dent ................................................. 58
Emergency release
Driver's door ....................................83
Fuel filler flap ................................. 145
Trunk ............................................... 86
Vehicle ............................................. 83
Emergency spare wheel
General notes ................................ 326
Important safety notes .................. 326
Removing ....................................... 326
Storage location ............................ 326
Stowing .......................................... 327
Technical data ............................... 326
Emergency Tensioning Devices
Activation ......................................... 53
Emissions control
Service and warranty information .... 26
Engine
Check Engine warning lamp ........... 241
Display message ............................ 222
ECO start/stop function ................ 130
Engine number ............................... 331
Irregular running ............................ 133
Jump-starting ................................. 294
Starting problems .......................... 133
Starting the engine with the
SmartKey ....................................... 129
Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 129
Switching off .................................. 147
Tow-starting (vehicle) .....................
299
E
ngine electronics
Problem (malfunction) ................... 133
Engine jump starting
see Jump starting (engine)
Engine oil
Adding ........................................... 276
Additives ........................................ 334
Checking the oil level ..................... 275
Checking the oil level using the
dipstick .......................................... 275
Display message ............................ 223
Filling capacity ............................... 334
Notes about oil grades ................... 333
Notes on oil level/consumption .... 275
Temperature (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 209
Entering an address
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 245
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Pro-
gram)
AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 209
Characteristics ................................. 70
Deactivating/activating (button
in Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............. 71
Deactivating/activating (except
MercedesAMG vehicles) ................. 70
Deactivating/activating (on-
board computer, except
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 204
Display message ............................ 213
Function/notes ................................ 69
General notes .................................. 69
Important safety information ........... 69
Trailer stabilization ........................... 72
Index
9
Warning lamp ................................. 238
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-
tem) ...................................................... 69
Exhaust check ................................... 149
Exhaust pipe (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 283
Exterior lighting
Setting options .............................. 107
see Lights
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting ....................................... 103
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 104
Folding in when locking (on-board
computer) ...................................... 208
Folding in/out (automatically) .......104
Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 104
Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 104
Setting ...........................................104
Storing settings (memory func-
tion) ............................................... 105
Storing the parking position .......... 105
Eyeglasses compartment ................. 252
F
Favorites
Overview ........................................ 247
Filler cap
see Refueling
Flat tire
MOExtended tires .......................... 287
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 287
TIREFIT kit ...................................... 288
see Emergency spare wheel
Floormats ...........................................272
Frequencies
Mobile phone ................................. 329
Two-way radio ................................ 329
Fuel
Consumption statistics .................. 199
Displaying the current consump-
tion ................................................ 199
Displaying the range ......................199
Driving tips ....................................149
Fuel gauge ....................................... 34
Grade (gasoline) ............................ 332
Important safety notes .................. 332
Problem (malfunction) ................... 146
Refueling ........................................ 143
Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 332
Fuel filler flap
Emergency release ........................ 145
Opening ......................................... 144
Fuel level
Calling up the range (on-board
computer) ...................................... 199
Fuel tank
Capacity ........................................ 332
Problem (malfunction) ................... 146
Fuse allocation chart (vehicle tool
kit) ...................................................... 286
Fuses
Allocation chart .............................299
Before changing .............................299
Fuse box in the engine compart-
ment .............................................. 300
Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 300
Important safety notes .................. 299
G
Garage door opener
Clearing the memory ..................... 272
General notes ................................ 269
Important safety notes .................. 270
Opening/closing the garage door .. 272
Problems when programming ........272
Programming (button in the rear-
view mirror) ................................... 270
Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 271
Gasoline ............................................. 332
Gear indicator (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 209
Genuine parts ...................................... 25
Glove box ...........................................252
Google™ Local Search
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................245
H
Handbrake
see Parking brake
Hazard warning lamps ......................109
Head bags
Display message ............................ 218
10
Index
Head restraints
Adjusting .........................................96
Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 96
Adjusting (rear) ................................ 96
Installing/removing (rear) ................ 97
Luxury .............................................. 96
see NECK-PRO head restraints
see NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
Headlamps
Cleaning system (notes) ................ 335
Fogging up .....................................110
see Automatic headlamp mode
Heating
see Climate control
High beam flasher .............................108
High-beam headlamps
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 109
Display message ............................ 221
Switching on/off ........................... 108
Hill start assist .................................. 130
HOLD function
Activating ....................................... 165
Deactivating ................................... 165
Display message ............................ 225
Function/notes .............................164
Home address
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................245
Hood
Closing ...........................................275
Display message ............................ 233
Important safety notes .................. 274
Opening ......................................... 274
Horn ...................................................... 33
Hydroplaning ..................................... 152
I
Ignition lock
see Key positions
Immobilizer .......................................... 74
Indicator and warning lamps
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
PLUS .............................................. 243
Indicator lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Indicators
see Turn signals
Instrument cluster
Overview .......................................... 34
Settings ......................................... 205
Warning and indicator lamps ........... 34
Instrument cluster lighting .............. 206
Interior lighting
Automatic control .......................... 111
Delayed switch-off (on-board
computer) ...................................... 207
Overview ........................................ 110
Reading lamp ................................. 110
Setting the brightness of the
ambient lighting (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 206
Setting the brightness of the dis-
play/switch (on-board computer) .. 206
Setting the color of the ambient
lighting (on-board computer) ......... 207
iPod
®
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................245
J
Jack
Storage location ............................ 286
Using ............................................. 322
Jump starting (engine) ......................294
K
Key positions
KEYLESS-GO .................................. 127
SmartKey ....................................... 127
KEYLESS-GO
Convenience closing feature ............ 88
Deactivation ..................................... 76
Display message ............................ 234
Locking ............................................ 76
Removing the Start/Stop button ... 128
Start/Stop button .......................... 127
Starting the engine ........................ 129
Unlocking ......................................... 76
Kickdown
Driving tips ....................................138
Manual drive program .................... 142
Knee bag .............................................. 47
Index
11
L
Lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Lane Keeping Assist
Activating/deactivating .................205
Display message ............................ 226
Function/information .................... 189
Lane Tracking package ..................... 187
Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 210
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat
anchors ................................................ 60
License plate lamp (display mes-
sage) ................................................... 221
Light function, active
Display message ............................ 221
Light sensor (display message) ....... 221
Lights
Activating/deactivating the inte-
rior lighting delayed switch-off ....... 207
Adaptive Highbeam Assist ............. 109
Automatic headlamp mode ............ 107
Cornering light function ................. 109
Hazard warning lamps ................... 109
High beam flasher .......................... 108
High-beam headlamps ................... 108
Light switch ................................... 107
Low-beam headlamps .................... 108
Parking lamps ................................ 108
Setting the brightness of the
ambient lighting (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 206
Setting the brightness of the dis-
play/switch (on-board computer) .. 206
Setting the color of the ambient
lighting (on-board computer) ......... 207
Standing lamps .............................. 108
Switching the daytime running
lamps on/off (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 206
Switching the exterior lighting
delayed switch-off on/off (on-
board computer) ............................ 207
Switching the surround lighting
on/off (on-board computer) .......... 207
Turn signals ................................... 108
see Interior lighting
Loading guidelines ............................ 251
Locking
see Central locking
Locking (doors)
Automatic ........................................ 82
Emergency locking ........................... 83
From inside
(centra
l locking but-
ton) .................................................. 82
Locking centrally
see Central locking
Locking verification signal (on-
board computer) ............................... 208
Low-beam headlamps
Display message ............................ 221
Switching on/off ........................... 108
Lumbar support
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-
port .................................................. 98
Luxury head restraints ....................... 96
M
M+S tires ............................................ 303
Malfunction message
see Display messages
Matte finish (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 281
mbrace
Call priority .................................... 266
Display message ............................ 215
Downloading destinations
(COMAND) ..................................... 266
Downloading routes ....................... 269
Emergency call .............................. 264
General notes ................................ 263
Geo fencing ................................... 269
Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 268
MB info call button ........................ 265
Remote fault diagnosis .................. 268
Remote vehicle locking .................. 268
Roadside Assistance button .......... 265
Search & Send ............................... 267
Self-test ......................................... 263
Speed alert .................................... 269
System .......................................... 263
Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 269
Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 267
Mechanical key
Function/notes ................................ 78
12
Index
General notes .................................. 78
Inserting .......................................... 78
Locking vehicle ................................ 83
Removing .........................................78
Unlocking the driver's door .............. 83
Media Interface
USB port in the armrest of the
center console ...............................253
see Separate operating instructions
Memory card (audio) ......................... 201
Memory function ............................... 105
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive
360°camera .................................. 181
Active Blind Spot Assist ................. 190
Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 193
Active Parking Assist ..................... 173
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 184
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 187
Cruise control ................................ 153
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 155
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering
Assist and Stop&Go Pilot ...............162
General notes ................................ 153
Lane Keeping Assist ......................189
PARKTRONIC ................................. 170
PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occu-
pant protection) ............................... 56
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection PLUS) .............. 57
Rear view camera .......................... 177
Traffic Sign Assist .......................... 186
Message memory (on-board com-
puter) ..................................................212
Messages
see Display messages
Mirrors
see Exterior mirrors
see Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)
Mobile phone
Connecting (Bluetooth
®
inter-
face) .............................................. 248
Connecting another mobile
phone ............................................ 250
Frequencies ................................... 329
Installation ............................
......... 329
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 202
Tra
nsmission output (maximum) .... 329
Modifying the programming
(SmartKey) ...........................................77
MOExtended tires .............................. 287
Mounting wheels
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 324
Mounting a new wheel ................... 324
Preparing the vehicle .....................321
Raising the vehicle ......................... 322
Removing a wheel .......................... 323
Securing the vehicle against roll-
ing away ........................................ 321
MP3
Operation ....................................... 201
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................245
Multicontour seat
Adjusting (on the seat) ..................... 97
Multifunction display
Function/notes .............................198
Permanent display ......................... 206
Multifunction steering wheel
Operating the on-board computer .. 197
Overview .......................................... 35
Multimedia system
see Separate operating instructions
Music files
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................245
N
Navigation
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 200
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................245
NECK-PRO head restraints
Operation ......................................... 55
Resetting triggered .......................... 56
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
Important safety notes .................... 55
Operation ......................................... 55
Resetting when triggered ................. 56
Notes on breaking-in a new vehi-
cle ....................................................... 126
Index
13
O
Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
Conditions ....................................... 49
Faults ............................................... 53
Operation ......................................... 49
System self-test ...............................51
Occupant safety
Air bags ...........................................46
Automatic measures after an acci-
dent ................................................. 58
Children in the vehicle ..................... 58
Important safety notes .................... 41
Introduction to the restraint sys-
tem .................................................. 41
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) ............................................... 49
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
lamps ............................................... 42
Pets in the vehicle ........................... 63
PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occu-
pant protection) ............................... 56
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection PLUS) .............. 57
Restraint system warning lamp ........ 41
OCS
Conditions ....................................... 49
Faults ............................................... 53
Operation ......................................... 49
System self-test ............................... 51
Odometer ........................................... 198
Oil
see Engine oil
On-board computer
AMG menu ..................................... 209
Assistance menu ........................... 203
Audio menu ................................... 201
Convenience submenu .................. 208
Display messages .......................... 212
Displaying a service message ........ 278
DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 160
Factory settings submenu ............. 209
Important safety notes .................. 196
Instrument cluster submenu .......... 205
Lighting submenu .......................... 206
Menu overview .............................. 198
Message memory .......................... 212
Navigation menu ............................ 200
Operation ....................................... 197
RACETIMER ................................... 210
Service menu ................................. 205
Settings menu ............................... 205
Standard display ............................ 198
Telephone menu ............................ 202
Trip menu ...................................... 198
Vehicl
e su
bmenu ........................... 207
Video DVD operation ..................... 202
Operating safety
Declaration of conformity ................ 28
Important safety notes .................... 28
Operating system
see On-board computer
Operation
Digital Operator's Manual ................ 23
Operator's Manual
Vehicle equipment ........................... 26
Outside temperature display ........... 196
Overhead control panel ...................... 39
Override feature
Rear side windows ........................... 63
P
Paint code number ............................ 330
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 280
Panic alarm .......................................... 41
Parking
Important safety notes .................. 146
Parking brake ................................ 147
Position of exterior mirror, front-
passenger side ............................... 105
Rear view camera .......................... 177
see PARKTRONIC
Parking aid
Active Parking Assist ..................... 173
see Exterior mirrors
see PARKTRONIC
Parking assistance
see PARKTRONIC
Parking brake
Display message ............................ 214
Notes/function .............................. 147
Warning lamp ................................. 237
Parking lamps
Switching on/off ........................... 108
14
Index
PARKTRONIC
Deactivating/activating ................. 172
Driving system ...............................170
Function/notes .............................170
Important safety notes .................. 170
Problem (malfunction) ................... 173
Range of the sensors ..................... 170
Warning display ............................. 171
PASSENGER AIR BAG
Display message ............................ 219
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
Indicator lamp .................................. 42
Problems (malfunctions) ................ 219
Pets in the vehicle ............................... 63
Phone book
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 245
Plastic trim (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 283
Power washers .................................. 280
Power windows
see Side windows
PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occupant
protection)
Display message ............................ 215
Operation ......................................... 56
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake
Activating/deactivating ................. 204
Display message ............................ 216
Function/notes ................................ 73
Important safety notes .................... 73
Warning lamp ................................. 243
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS (anticipatory
occupant protection PLUS)
Display message ............................ 216
Operation ......................................... 57
Program selector button .................. 138
Protection against theft
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 75
Immobilizer ...................................... 74
Protection of the environment
General notes .................................. 25
Pulling away
General notes ................................ 129
Pulling away (automatic transmis-
sion) .................................................... 129
Q
QR code
Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1
Rescue card ..................................... 30
Qualified specialist workshop ........... 29
R
RACE START (Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles) .................................................... 165
RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 210
Radio
Selecting a station ......................... 201
see separate operating instructions
Radio mode
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 245
Radio-wave reception/transmis-
sion in the vehicle
Declaration of conformity ................ 28
Reading lamp ..................................... 110
Rear compartment
Setting the airflow ......................... 122
Setting the temperature ................ 121
Rear fog lamp
Display message ............................ 221
Rear seat (folding the backrest for-
wards/back) ...................................... 254
Rear seats
Display message ............................ 234
Rear view camera
Cleaning instructions ..................... 282
Display in the multimedia system .. 178
Function/notes ............................. 177
Switching on/off ........................... 178
Rear window blind ............................ 260
Rear window defroster
Problem (malfunction) ................... 124
Switching on/off ........................... 123
Rear-view mirror
Dipping (automatic) ....................... 104
Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-
tem)
Important safety notes .................. 335
Refueling
Fuel gauge ....................................... 34
Important safety notes .................. 143
Index
15
Refueling process .......................... 144
see Fuel
Remote control
Garage door opener .......................269
Programming (garage door
opener) .......................................... 270
Replacing bulbs
General notes ................................ 111
Reporting safety defects .................... 29
Rescue card ......................................... 30
Reserve (fuel tank)
see Fuel
Reserve fuel
Display message ............................ 224
Warning lamp ................................. 241
see Fuel
Residual heat (climate control) ........124
Restraint system
Display message ............................ 217
Introduction ..................................... 41
Problem (malfunction) ................... 240
Warning lamp (function) ................... 41
Reverse gear (selector lever) ........... 134
Reversing feature
Side windows ................................... 87
Sliding sunroof ................................. 91
Trunk lid ...........................................83
Reversing lamps (display mes-
sage) ................................................... 221
Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 27
Roller sunblind
Rear window .................................. 260
Roof lining and carpets (cleaning
guidelines) ......................................... 285
Roof load (maximum) ........................ 336
Route guidance
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 245
S
Safety
Children in the vehicle ..................... 58
see Occupant safety
Safety system
see Driving safety systems
SD memory card
Ejecting .......................................... 250
Inserting ........................................ 250
Inserting/removing ........................ 250
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 245
Selecting ........................................ 201
Search & Send
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 245
Seat belts
Adjusting the driver's and front-
passenger seat belt ......................... 45
Adjusting the height ......................... 44
Cleaning ......................................... 284
Correct usage .................................. 44
Fastening ......................................... 44
Important safety guidelines ............. 43
Introduction ..................................... 42
Releasing ......................................... 45
Switching belt adjustment on/off
(on-board computer) ...................... 208
Warning lamp ................................. 236
Warning lamp (function) ................... 45
Seats
Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 95
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar sup-
port .................................................. 98
Adjusting the active multicontour
seat .................................................. 98
Adjusting the head restraint ............ 96
Adjusting the multicontour seat ....... 97
Cleaning the cover ......................... 284
Correct driver's seat position ........... 94
Important safety notes .................... 94
Overview .......................................... 94
Seat heating .................................... 98
Seat heating problem .................... 100
Storing settings (memory func-
tion) ............................................... 105
Switching seat heating on/off ......... 98
Switching seat ventilation on/
off .................................................... 98
Section
Trunk ............................................... 83
Securing cargo .................................. 255
Selector lever
Cleaning ......................................... 284
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 282
16
Index
Service menu (on-board com-
puter) .................................................. 205
Service message
see ASSYST PLUS
Service products
Brake fluid .....................................334
Coolant (engine) ............................ 334
Engine oil ....................................... 333
Fuel ................................................ 332
Important safety notes .................. 331
Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-
tem) ............................................... 335
Washer fluid ................................... 335
Setting the air distribution ...............121
Setting the airflow ............................ 122
Setting the date/time format
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................245
Setting the language
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................245
Setting the time
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................245
Settings
Factory (on-board computer) ......... 209
On-board computer ....................... 205
SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 209
Side impact air bag .............................48
Side marker lamp (display mes-
sage) ................................................... 221
Side windows
Cleaning ......................................... 281
Convenience closing feature ............ 88
Convenience opening feature ..........88
Important safety information ........... 86
Opening/closing .............................. 87
Problem (malfunction) .....................90
Resetting .........................................89
Reversing feature .............................87
SIRIUS services
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................
................. 245
Sliding sunroof
Important safet
y notes .................... 90
Opening/closing .............................. 91
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 93
Resetting ......................................... 91
SmartKey
Changing the battery ....................... 79
Changing the programming .............77
Checking the battery .......................79
Convenience closing feature ............ 88
Convenience opening feature .......... 88
Display message ............................ 234
Door central locking/unlocking .......76
Important safety notes .................... 76
Loss .................................................80
Mechanical key ................................ 78
Overview .......................................... 76
Positions (ignition lock) ................. 127
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 80
Starting the engine ........................ 129
SMS
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 245
Snow chains ...................................... 303
Sockets
Center console .............................. 262
General notes ................................ 262
Rear compartment .........................263
Sound
Switching on/off ........................... 246
Spare wheel
Stowing .......................................... 327
Special seat belt retractor .................. 59
Specialist workshop ............................ 29
Speed, controlling
see Cruise control
Speedometer
Digital ............................................ 199
In the Instru
ment cluster ................. 34
Segments ...................................... 196
Selecting the display unit ...............205
SPORT handling mode
Deactivating/activating
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................ 71
Warning lamp ................................. 240
Standing lamps
Display message ............................ 221
Switching on/off ........................... 108
Start/stop function
see ECO start/stop function
Starting (engine) ................................ 128
Index
17
Steering
Display message ............................234
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
(DISTRONIC PLUS)
Activating/deactivating ................. 204
Display message ............................ 229
Steering wheel
Adjusting (electrically) ................... 100
Button overview ............................... 35
Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 197
Cleaning ......................................... 284
Important safety notes .................. 100
Paddle shifters ............................... 139
Steering wheel heating .................. 100
Storing settings (memory func-
tion) ............................................... 105
Steering wheel heating
Problem (malfunction) ................... 102
Switching on/off ........................... 100
Steering wheel paddle shifters ........139
Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 210
Stowage areas ................................... 251
Stowage compartments
Armrest (under) .............................253
Center console .............................. 252
Center console (rear) ..................... 253
Cup holders ................................... 257
Eyeglasses compartment ...............252
Glove box ....................................... 252
Important safety information ......... 251
Rear ............................................... 253
Stowage net ................................... 254
Under driver's seat/front-
passenger seat .............................. 253
Stowage net ....................................... 254
Stowage well beneath the trunk
floor .................................................... 256
Summer tires ..................................... 303
Sun visor ............................................ 259
Surround lighting (on-board com-
puter) .................................................. 207
Suspension setting
AIRMATIC ...................................... 167
AMG adaptive sport suspension
system ........................................... 168
Suspension settings
SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 209
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off ................................................. 124
Switching on media mode
Via the device list .......................... 250
T
Tachometer ........................................ 196
Tail lamps
Display message ............................ 221
Tank
see Fuel tank
Tank content
Fuel gauge ....................................... 34
Technical data
Capacities ...................................... 331
Emergency spare wheel ................. 326
Information .................................... 329
Tires/wheels ................................. 325
Vehicle data ................................... 336
Telephone
Accepting a call (multifunction
steering wheel) .............................. 202
Authorizing a mobile phone (con-
necting) ......................................... 249
Connecting a mobile phone (gen-
eral information) ............................ 248
Display message ............................ 234
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 202
Number from the phone book ........ 203
Redialing ........................................ 203
Rejecting/ending a call ................. 203
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 245
Switching between mobile
phones ........................................... 250
Temperature
Coolant .......................................... 196
Coolant (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 209
Engine oil (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ............... 209
Outside temperature ...................... 196
Setting (climate control) ................ 121
Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 210
Tire pressure
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 308
Checking manually ........................ 307
18
Index
Display message ............................ 230
Maximum ....................................... 307
Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 290
Notes ............................................. 306
Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 290
Recommended ............................... 304
Tire pressure loss warning system
General notes ................................ 307
Important safety notes .................. 307
Restarting ...................................... 308
Tire pressure monitor
Checking the tire pressure elec-
tronically ........................................ 310
Function/notes ............................. 308
General notes ................................ 308
Important safety notes .................. 309
Restarting ...................................... 311
Warning lamp ................................. 244
Warning message .......................... 310
Tire-change tool kit ........................... 286
TIREFIT kit .......................................... 288
Important safety notes .................. 288
Storage location ............................ 286
Tire pressure not reached .............. 290
Tire pressure reached .................... 290
Tires
Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 320
Average weight of the vehicle
occupants (definition) .................... 318
Bar (definition) ............................... 318
Changing a wheel .......................... 320
Characteristics .............................. 318
Checking ........................................ 301
Curb weight (definition) ................. 319
Definition of terms ......................... 318
Direction of rotation ...................... 321
Display message ............................ 230
Distribution of the vehicle occu-
pants (definition) ............................ 320
DOT (Department of Transporta-
tion) (definition) ............................. 318
DOT, Tire Identification Number
(TIN) ............................................... 318
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
(definition) ..................................... 319
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) (def-
inition) ........................................... 319
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
ing) (definition) .............................. 319
Important safety notes .................. 301
Increased vehicle
wei
ght due to
optional equipment (definition) ...... 319
Information on driving .................... 301
Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 319
Labeling (overview) ........................ 315
Load bearing index (definition) ...... 320
Load index ..................................... 317
Load index (definition) ................... 319
Maximum load on a tire (defini-
tion) ............................................... 319
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
(definition) ..................................... 319
Maximum permissible tire pres-
sure (definition) ............................. 319
Maximum tire load ......................... 317
Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 319
MOExtended tires .......................... 303
Optional equipment weight (defi-
nition) ............................................ 320
PSI (pounds per square inch) (def-
inition) ........................................... 320
Replacing ....................................... 320
Service life ..................................... 302
Sidewall (definition) ....................... 320
Speed rating (definition) ................ 319
Storing ........................................... 321
Structure and characteristics
(definition) ..................................... 318
Temperature .................................. 315
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
(definition) ..................................... 320
Tire bead (definition) ...................... 320
Tire pressure (definition) ................ 320
Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 319
Tire size (data) ............................... 325
Tire size designation, load-bearing
capacity, speed rating .................... 315
Tire tread ....................................... 302
Tire tread (definition) ..................... 320
Total load limit (definition) ............. 320
Traction ......................................... 314
Traction (definition) ....................... 320
Tread wear ..................................... 314
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards ...................................... 314
Index
19
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards (definition) .................... 319
Wear indicator (definition) .............320
Wheel and tire combination ........... 325
Wheel rim (definition) .................... 319
see Flat tire
Top Tether ............................................ 61
Tow-starting
Emergency engine starting ............ 299
Important safety notes .................. 296
Towing a trailer
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Pro-
gram) ............................................... 72
Towing away
Important safety guidelines ........... 296
Installing the towing eye ................ 297
Removing the towing eye ...............298
Transporting the vehicle ................ 298
With both axles on the ground ....... 298
With the rear axle raised ................ 298
Towing eye ......................................... 286
Traffic reports
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual ..................................................245
Traffic Sign Assist
Display message ............................ 225
Function/notes .............................186
Important safety notes .................. 186
Instrument cluster display ............. 186
Transmission
see Automatic transmission
Transmission position display ......... 135
Transmission position display
(DIRECT SELECT lever) ......................135
Transporting the vehicle .................. 298
Trim pieces (cleaning instruc-
tions) ..................................................284
Trip computer (on-board com-
puter) ..................................................199
Trip odometer
Calling up ....................................... 198
Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 199
Trunk
Emergency release .......................... 86
Important safety notes .................... 83
Opening/closing (automatically
from inside) ...................................... 85
Opening/closing (automatically
from outside) ................................... 84
Opening/closing (manually from
outside) ............................................ 84
Trunk lid
Displ
ay message ............................ 233
Opening di
mensions ......................336
Trunk load (maximum) ......................336
Turn signals
Display message ............................ 221
Switching on/off ........................... 108
Two-way radio
Frequencies ................................... 329
Installation ..................................... 329
Transmission output (maximum) .... 329
Type identification plate
see Vehicle identification plate
U
Unlocking
Emergency unlocking ....................... 83
From inside the vehicle (central
unlocking button) .............................82
Upshift indicator (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) .......209
USB devices
Connecting to the Media Inter-
face ............................................... 250
V
Vanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........259
Vehicle
Correct use ...................................... 29
Data acquisition ............................... 30
Display message ............................ 232
Equipment ....................................... 26
Individual settings .......................... 205
Limited Warranty .............................30
Loading .......................................... 311
Locking (in an emergency) ............... 83
Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 76
Lowering ........................................ 324
Maintenance .................................... 27
Parking for a long period ................ 148
Pulling away ................................... 129
Raising ........................................... 322
20
Index
Reporting problems .........................29
Securing from rolling away ............ 321
Towing away .................................. 296
Transporting .................................. 298
Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 83
Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 76
Vehicle data ................................... 336
Vehicle data ....................................... 336
Vehicle dimensions ........................... 336
Vehicle emergency locking ................ 83
Vehicle identification number
see VIN
Vehicle identification plate .............. 330
Vehicle level
AIRMATIC ...................................... 166
Vehicle level (display message) ....... 224
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 286
Video
Operating the DVD ......................... 202
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 245
VIN
Seat ............................................... 331
Type plate ...................................... 330
Voice Control System
see Separate operating instructions
W
Warning and indicator lamps
ABS ................................................ 238
Brakes ........................................... 237
Check Engine ................................. 241
Coolant .......................................... 241
Distance warning ........................... 243
ESP
®
.............................................. 238
ESP
®
OFF ....................................... 239
Fuel tank ........................................ 241
General notes ................................ 235
Overview .......................................... 34
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ............... 42
Reserve fuel ................................... 241
Restraint system ............................ 240
Seat belt ........................................ 236
SPORT handling mode ................... 240
Tire pressure monitor .................... 244
Warranty .............................................. 26
Washer fluid
Display message ............................ 234
Wheel and tire combinations
Tires ............................................... 325
Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 324
Wheel chock ...................................... 321
Wheels
Changing a wheel .......................... 320
Checking ........................................ 301
Cleaning ......................................... 281
Emergency spare wheel ................. 326
Important safety notes .................. 301
Information on driving .................... 301
Interchanging/changing ................ 320
Mounting a new wheel ................... 324
Mounting a wheel .......................... 321
Removing a wheel .......................... 323
Storing ........................................... 321
Tightening torque ........................... 324
Wheel size/tire size ....................... 325
Window curtain air bag
Operation ......................................... 49
Windows
see Side windows
Windshield
Defrosting ...................................... 122
Windshield washer fluid
see Windshield washer system
Windshield washer system
Adding washer fluid ....................... 277
Important safety notes .................. 335
Windshield wipers
Problem (malfunction) ................... 113
Replacing the wiper blades ............ 112
Switching on/off ........................... 111
Winter driving
Important safety notes .................. 303
Slippery road surfaces ................... 152
Snow chains .................................. 303
Winter tires
M+S tires ....................................... 303
Wiper blades
Cleaning ......................................... 282
Important safety
notes .................. 112
R
eplacing ....................................... 112
Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 284
Index
21
Workshop
see Qualified specialist workshop
Z
ZONE function
Switching on/off ........................... 122
22
Index
Introduction
The printed Operator's Manual provides infor-
mation about the safe operation of your vehicle.
The Digital Operator's Manual additionally
describes further functions and equipment
installed in your vehicle. The functions of the
vehicle and multimedia system are described in
the Digital Operator's Manual. You can call up
the Digital Operator's Manual via the multimedia
system.
i
You will not incur any costs when calling up
the Digital Operator's Manual. The Digital
Operator's Manual works without connecting
to the Internet.
There are three ways to access the topics of the
Digital Operator's Manual:
R
Visual search
The visual search allows you to explore your
vehicle "virtually". Starting from either the
vehicle exterior view or interior view, you can
access many of the different topics covered
by the Digital Operator's Manual. To access
the vehicle interior section, select the "Vehi-
cle interior" view.
R
Keyword search
The keyword search allows you to search for a
keyword by entering characters. Further
information can be found in the Digital Oper-
ator's Manual in the "Audio 20" or "COMAND"
section under the "Character entry (teleph-
ony)" keyword.
R
Contents
You can select individual sections in the con-
tents
.
i
The Digital Operator's Manual is deactiva-
ted for safety reasons while driving.
Operation
Calling up the Digital Operator's Man-
ual
X
Press the Ø button in the center console.
The overview relating to the vehicle appears.
X
Select the "Operator's Manual" menu item by
turning 3 or pressing 7 the controller.
X
Confirm 7 the message about the warning
and safety notes.
The basic menu for the Digital Operator's
Manual appears.
Operating the Digital Operator's Man-
ual
General notes
Please observe the information about the oper-
ation of the controller (
Y page 246).
Content pages
The content pages can be accessed by means of
a visual search, a keyword search or using the
contents.
X
To scroll forwards/backwards: turn 3
the controller.
X
To display in full-screen or animation: slide
8 the controller to the left :.
X
To select information texts or save book-
marks: slide 9 the controller to the
right ;.
X
To select a link: slide 6 the controller
downwards =.
X
To exit a content page: select the %
symbol ?.
Digital Operator's Manual
23
X
To call up the basic menu of the Digital
Operator's Manual: select Þ symbol A.
X
To switch functions to the multimedia
system using the buttons on the center
console: press the $, %, Õ or Ø
button.
The selected menu appears. The Digital Oper-
ator's Manual remains open in the back-
ground.
24
Digital Operator's Manual
Protection of the environment
General notes
H
Environmental note
Daimler's declared policy is one of compre-
hensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources
that form the basis of our existence on this
planet to be used sparingly and in a manner
that takes the requirements of both nature
and humanity into account.
You too can help to protect the environment
by operating your vehicle in an environmen-
tally responsible manner.
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,
transmission, brake and tire wear are affected
by these factors:
R
operating conditions of your vehicle
R
your personal driving style
You can influence both factors. You should
bear the following in mind:
Operating conditions:
R
avoid short trips as these increase fuel con-
sumption.
R
always make sure that the tire pressures
are correct.
R
do not carry any unnecessary weight.
R
remove roof racks once you no longer need
them.
R
a regularly serviced vehicle will contribute
to environmental protection. You should
therefore adhere to the service intervals.
R
always have service work carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Personal driving style:
R
do not depress the accelerator pedal when
starting the engine.
R
do not warm up the engine when the vehicle
is stationary.
R
drive carefully and maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front.
R
avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and
braking.
R
change gear in good time and use each gear
only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
R
switch off the engine in stationary traffic.
R
keep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-
tion.
Environmental concerns and recom-
mendations
Wherever the operating instructions require you
to dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or
re-use them. Observe the relevant environmen-
tal rules and regulations when disposing of
materials. In this way you will help to protect the
environment.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
H
Environmental note
Daimler AG also supplies reconditioned major
assemblies and parts which are of the same
quality as new parts. They are covered by the
same Limited Warranty entitlements as new
parts.
!
Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-
ces, as well as control units and sensors for
these restraint systems, may be installed in
the following areas of your vehicle:
R
doors
R
door pillars
R
door sills
R
seats
R
cockpit
R
instrument cluster
R
center console
Do not install accessories such as audio sys-
tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs
or welding. You could impair the operating
efficiency of the restraint systems.
Have aftermarket accessories installed at a
qualified specialist workshop.
You could jeopardize the operating safety of
your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as
well as accessories relevant to safety which
have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This
could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
25
Introduction
Z
systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genu-
ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equal qual-
ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that
have been specifically approved for your vehi-
cle.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to
strict quality control. Every part has been spe-
cifically developed, manufactured or selected
for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should
therefore be used.
More than 300,000 different genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts are available for
Mercedes-Benz models.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain
a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for
necessary service and repair work. In addition,
strategically located parts delivery centers pro-
vide quick and reliable parts service.
Always specify the vehicle identification number
(VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts (
Y page 330).
Operator's Manual
Vehicle equipment
i
This Operator's Manual describes all models
and all standard and optional equipment of
your vehicle available at the time of going to
print. Country-specific differences are possi-
ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions. The equipment in your vehicle may
therefore differ from that shown in the
descriptions and illustrations.
The original purchase agreement lists all sys-
tems installed in your vehicle.
Should you have any questions concerning
equipment and operation, please consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Book-
let are important documents and should be kept
in the vehicle.
Service and vehicle operation
Warranty
The implied warranty for your vehicle applies in
accordance with the warranty terms and condi-
tions in the Service and Warranty Information
booklet.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
replace and repair all factory-installed parts in
accordance with the following warranty terms
and conditions:
R
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
R
Emission System Warranty
R
Emission Performance Warranty
R
California, Connecticut, Maine, Massachu-
setts, New York, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island
and Vermont Emission Control System War-
ranty
R
State warranty enforcement laws (lemon
laws)
Replacement parts and accessories are covered
by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Accessories
warranties. These are available at any author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i
Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Information booklet, have an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a replace-
ment. The new Service and Warranty Infor-
mation booklet will be posted to you.
Information for customers in Califor-
nia
Under California law you may be entitled to a
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the
purchase price or lease price, if after a reason-
able number of repair attempts Mercedes-Benz
USA, LLC and/or its authorized repair or service
facilities fail to fix one or more substantial
defects or malfunctions in the vehicle that are
covered by its express warranty.
During the period of 18 months from original
delivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of
18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs first,
a reasonable number of repair attempts is pre-
sumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or more
of the following occurs:
(1) the same substantial defect or malfunction
results in a condition that is likely to cause
death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is
driven, that defect or malfunction has been
subject to repair two or more times, and you
26
Service and vehicle operation
Introduction
have directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,
LLC in writing of the need for its repair.
(2) the same substantial defect or malfunction
of a less serious nature than category (1)
has been subject to repair four or more
times and you have directly notified
Mercedes-Benz in writing of the need for its
repair.
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of
repair of the same or different substantial
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative
total of more than 30 calendar days.
Please send your written notice to:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Maintenance
The Service and Warranty Booklet describes all
the necessary maintenance work which should
be done at regular intervals.
Always have the Service and Warranty Booklet
with you when you bring the vehicle to an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. The service
advisor will record every service for you in the
Service and Warranty Booklet.
Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-
gram offers technical help in the event of a
breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assis-
tance Hotline are answered by our agents 24
hours a day, 365 days a year.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)
(USA)
1-800-387-0100 (Canada)
For additional information, refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program
brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"
section in the Service and Warranty booklet
(Canada). You will find both in your vehicle lit-
erature portfolio.
Change of address or change of own-
ership
In the event of a change of address, please send
us the "Notification of Address Change" in the
Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
(USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service Center (Canada) at
1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in contact-
ing you in a timely manner should the need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave the entire
literature in the vehicle so that it is available to
the next owner.
If you have purchased a used car, please send us
the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in the
Service and Guarantee booklet or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
(USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
Vehicle operation outside the USA
and Canada
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign
countries, please be aware that:
R
service facilities or replacement parts may
not be readily available.
R
unleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic
converter may not be available. Leaded fuel
may cause damage to the catalytic converter.
R
the fuel may have a considerably lower octane
rating. Unsuitable fuel can cause engine dam-
age.
Some Mercedes-Benz models are available for
delivery in Europe through our European Deliv-
ery Program. For details, consult an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or write to one of the
following addresses.
In the USA
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
European Delivery Department
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Service and vehicle operation
27
Introduction
Z
Operating safety
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you do not have the prescribed service/
maintenance work or any required repairs
carried out, this can result in malfunctions or
system failures. There is a risk of an accident.
Always have the prescribed service/mainte-
nance work as well as any required repairs
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
hot parts of the exhaust system. There is a risk
of fire.
When driving off road or on unpaved roads,
check the vehicle's underside regularly. In
particular, remove parts of plants or other
flammable materials which have become
trapped. In the case of damage, contact a
qualified specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
Modifications to electronic components, their
software as well as wiring can impair their
function and/or the function of other net-
worked components. In particular, systems
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
result, these may no longer function as inten-
ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
accident and injury.
Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-
tronic components or their software. You
should have all work to electrical and elec-
tronic equipment carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
!
There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:
R
the vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a high
curb or an unpaved road
R
you drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a
curb or a hole in the road
R
a heavy object strikes the undercarriage or
parts of the chassis
In situations like this, the body, the undercar-
riage, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be
damaged without the damage being visible.
Components damaged in this way can unex-
pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no
longer withstand the strain they are designed
to.
If the underbody paneling is damaged, com-
bustible materials such as leaves, grass or
twigs can gather between the underbody and
the underbody paneling. If these materials
come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust
system, they can catch fire.
In such situations, have the vehicle checked
and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour-
ney you notice that driving safety is impaired,
pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,
paying attention to road and traffic condi-
tions. In such cases, consult a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Declarations of conformity
Vehicle components which receive
and/or transmit radio waves
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com-
ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the two following two conditions: 1)
These devices may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and 2) These devices must accept any
interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation. Changes
or modifications not expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment."
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with Industry Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) These devices may
not cause interference, and (2) These devices
must accept any interference, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired operation of
the device."
28
Operating safety
Introduction
Diagnostics connection
The diagnostics connection is only intended for
the connection of diagnostic equipment at a
qualified specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
If you connect equipment to the diagnostics
connection in the vehicle, it may affect the
operation of the vehicle systems. As a result,
the operating safety of the vehicle could be
affected. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not connect any equipment to a diagnos-
tics connection in the vehicle.
G
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
!
If the engine is switched off and equipment
on the diagnostics connection is used, the
starter battery may discharge.
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con-
nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor-
mation being reset, for example. This may lead
to the vehicle failing to meet the requirements of
the next emissions test during the main inspec-
tion.
Qualified specialist workshop
An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is a quali-
fied specialist workshop. It has the necessary
specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to
correctly carry out the work required on your
vehicle. This is especially the case for work rel-
evant to safety.
Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet.
Always have the following work carried out at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
R
work relevant to safety
R
service and maintenance work
R
repair work
R
alterations, installation work and modifica-
tions
R
work on electronic components
Correct use
If you remove any warning stickers, you or oth-
ers could fail to recognize certain dangers.
Leave warning stickers in position.
Observe the following information when driving
your vehicle:
R
the safety notes in this manual
R
the vehicle technical data
R
traffic rules and regulations
R
laws and safety standards pertaining to motor
vehicles
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi-
ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti-
fied. If the problem is not resolved to your sat-
isfaction, please discuss the problem again with
a Mercedes-Benz Center or contact us at one of
the following addresses.
In the USA
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Reporting safety defects
USA only:
Operating safety
29
Introduction
Z
The following text is published as required of
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Fed-
eral Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
"National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of
1966".
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz
USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or Mercedes-Benz
USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Admin-
istrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov
Limited Warranty
!
Follow the instructions in this manual about
the proper operation of your vehicle as well as
about possible vehicle damage. Damage to
your vehicle that arises from culpable contra-
ventions against these instructions is not cov-
ered either by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty or by the New or Used-Vehicle War-
ranty.
QR codes for the rescue card
The QR codes are secured in the fuel filler flap
and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the
event of an accident, rescue services can use
the QR code to quickly find the appropriate res-
cue card for your vehicle. The current rescue
card contains the most important information
about your vehicle in a compact form, e.g. the
routing of the electric cables.
You can find more information under http://
portal.aftersales.i.daimler.com/public/
content/asportal/en/communication/
informationen_fuer/QRCode.html.
Data stored in the vehicle
Data storage
A wide range of electronic components in your
vehicle contain data memories.
These data memories temporarily or perma-
nently store technical information about:
R
vehicle's operating state
R
incidents
R
malfunctions
In general, this technical information docu-
ments the state of a component, a module, a
system or the surroundings.
These include, for example:
R
operating conditions of system components,
e.g. fluid levels
R
the vehicle's status messages and those of its
individual components, e.g. number of wheel
revolutions/speed, deceleration in move-
ment, lateral acceleration, accelerator pedal
position
R
malfunctions and defects in important system
components, e.g. lights, brakes
R
vehicle reactions and operating conditions in
special driving situations, e.g. air bag deploy-
ment, intervention of stability control sys-
tems
R
ambient conditions, e.g. outside temperature
This data is of an exclusively technical nature
and can be used to:
R
assist in recognizing and rectifying malfunc-
tions and defects
R
analyze vehicle functions, e.g. after an acci-
dent
R
optimize vehicle function
The data cannot be used to trace the vehicle's
movements.
When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor-
mation can be read from the event data memory
and malfunction data memory.
Services include, for example:
R
repair services
R
service processes
R
warranties
R
quality assurance
30
Data stored in the vehicle
Introduction
The vehicle is read out by employees of the ser-
vice network (including the manufacturer) using
special diagnostic testers. More detailed infor-
mation is obtained from it, if required.
After a malfunction has been rectified, the infor-
mation is deleted from the malfunction memory
or is continually overwritten.
When operating the vehicle, situations are con-
ceivable in which this technical data, in connec-
tion with other information (if necessary, under
consultation with an authorized expert), could
be traced to a person.
Examples include:
R
accident reports
R
damage to the vehicle
R
witness statements
Further additional functions that have been con-
tractually agreed upon with the customer allow
certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi-
cle as well. The additional functions include, for
example, vehicle location in case of an emer-
gency.
COMAND/mbrace
If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or
mbrace, additional data about the vehicle's
operation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit-
uations, and the location of the vehicle may be
compiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys-
tem.
For additional information please refer to the
COMAND User Manual or the Digital Operator's
Manual and/or the mbrace Terms and Condi-
tions.
Event data recorders
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). This vehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of
an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an air bag deploy-
ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
such data as:
R
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating
R
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened
R
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal and
R
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better under-
standing of the circumstances in which acci-
dents and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are
recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial
crash situation occurs; no data is recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no
personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and acci-
dent location) are recorded. However, other par-
ties, such as law enforcement could combine
EDR data with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash investi-
gation.
Access to the vehicle and/or the EDR is needed
to read data that is recorded by the EDR, and
special equipment is required. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have
the special equipment, such as law enforce-
ment, can read the information by accessing the
vehicle or the EDR.
EDR data may be used in civil and criminal mat-
ters as a tool in accident reconstruction, acci-
dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash
Data Retrieval CDR tool that is used to extract
data from the EDR is commercially available,
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA") expressly
disclaims any and all liability arising from the
extraction of this information by unauthorized
Mercedes-Benz personnel.
MBUSA will not share EDR data with others
without the consent of
the vehicle owners or, if
t
he vehicle is leased, without the consent of the
lessee. Exceptions to this representation
include responses to subpoenas by law enforce-
ment; by federal, state or local government; in
connection with or arising out of litigation involv-
ing MBUSA or its subsidiaries and affiliates; or,
as required by law.
Warning: The EDR is a component of the
Restraint System Module. Tampering with, alter-
ing, modifying or removing the EDR component
may result in a malfunction of the Restraint Sys-
tem Module and other systems.
State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that
conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.
Data stored in the vehicle
31
Introduction
Z
This means that in the event of such conflict, the
federal regulation governs. As of February 2013,
13 states have enacted laws relating to EDRs.
Information on copyright
General information
Information on license for free and open-source
software used in your vehicle and its electronic
components is available on the following web-
site:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
32
Information on copyright
Introduction
Cockpit
Function Page
:
Steering wheel paddle shift-
ers
139
;
Combination switch 108
=
Instrument cluster 34
?
Horn
A
DIRECT SELECT lever 135
B
PARKTRONIC warning dis-
play
170
C
Overhead control panel 39
D
Climate control systems 114
E
Ignition lock 127
Start/Stop button 127
Function Page
F
Adjusts the steering wheel
manually
100
G
Adjusts the steering wheel
electrically
100
Steering wheel heating 100
H
Cruise control lever 153
I
Parking brake 147
J
Diagnostics connection 29
K
Opens the hood 274
L
Releases the parking brake 147
M
Light switch 107
Cockpit
33
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Function Page
:
Fuel gauge (left)
Coolant temperature (right) 196
Warning and indicator lamps:
÷ ESP
®
238
M SPORT handling mode
in Mercedes-AMG vehicles
240
· Distance warning
243
å ESP
®
OFF
238
# Turn signal, left
108
? Coolant
241
K High-beam headlamps
108
L Low-beam headlamps
108
T Parking lamps
108
R This lamp has no func-
tion
8 Reserve fuel
241
Fuel filler flap location indi-
cator: the fuel filler cap is on
the right-hand side.
Function Page
;
Speedometer with segments 196
=
Multifunction display 198
?
Tachometer 196
Warning and indicator lamps:
$ Brakes (USA only)
237
J Brakes (Canada only)
237
! Turn signal, right
108
! ABS
238
6 Restraint system
41
; Check Engine
241
h Tire pressure monitor
244
ü Seat belt
236
÷ ESP
®
in Mercedes-
AMG vehicles
240
Information on the display of the outside tem-
perature in the multifunction display can be
found under "Outside temperature display"
(
Y page 196).
Set the lighting in the instrument cluster, in the
displays and the controls in the vehicle interior
using the on-board computer (
Y page 206).
34
Instrument cluster
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Function Page
:
Multifunction display 198
;
Multimedia system display
= ?
Switches on voice-operated
navigation or the Voice Con-
trol System
8
Mute
WX
Adjusts the volume
~
Rejects or ends a call 202
Exits the telephone book/
redial memory
6
Makes or accepts a call
Switches to the redial mem-
ory
Function Page
?
=;
Selects a menu 197
9:
Selects a submenu or scrolls
through lists
197
a
Confirms a selection 197
Hides display messages 212
%
Back 197
Switches off voice-operated
navigation or the Voice Con-
trol System
i In vehicles with the COMAND multimedia
system you can find further information:
R
on the multimedia system in the Digital
Operator's Manual
R
on the Voice Control System in the sepa-
rate operating instructions
i In vehicles with the Audio 20 multimedia
system you can find further information:
R
on the multimedia system in the Digital
Operator's Manual
R
on the voice-operated control of the navi-
gation in the manufacturer's operating
instructions
Multifunction steering wheel
35
At a glance
Center console
Center console, upper section
Function Page
:
Multimedia system (see the
separate operating instruc-
tions)
;
c Seat heating
98
=
s Seat ventilation
98
?
c PARKTRONIC
170
A
¤ ECO start/stop func-
tion (Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)
130
Function Page
B
45Indicator lamp
49
C
£ Hazard warning lamps
109
D
u Roller sunblind in the
rear window
260
36
Center console
At a glance
Center console, lower section
Function Page
E
Stowage compartment 251
Ashtray 260
Cigarette lighter 261
Socket 262
Cup holder 257
F
Cup holder 257
G
e Adjusts the suspension
settings
167
Function Page
H
É Sets the vehicle level
166
I
Stowage compartment with
Media Interface
253
J
Ú Selects the drive pro-
gram
138
K
Multimedia system control-
ler (see the separate operat-
ing instructions)
Center console
37
At a glance
Center console, lower section (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Function Page
F
Cup holder 257
G
Engages park position P
147
H
Selector lever 134
I
Ashtray 260
Cigarette lighter 261
Socket 262
J
Multimedia system control-
ler (see the separate operat-
ing instructions)
Function Page
K
Stowage compartment with
Media Interface
253
L
ß Calls up or saves the
suspension settings
168
M
à Adjusts the suspension
settings
168
N
å ESP
®
71
O
Drive program selector 139
38
Center console
At a glance
Overhead control panel
Function Page
:
u Switches the rear inte-
rior lighting on/off
110
;
| Switches the automatic
interior lighting control
on/off
110
=
p Switches the right-
hand reading lamp on/off
110
?
ï MB Info call button
(mbrace system)
265
A
3 Opens/closes the slid-
ing sunroof
91
B
G SOS button (mbrace
system)
264
C
Rear-view mirror 104
Function Page
D
Buttons for the garage door
opener
270
E
Microphone for mbrace
(emergency call system),
telephone and Voice Control
System (see the separate
operating instructions)
F
F Roadside Assistance
call button (mbrace system)
265
G
p Switches the left-hand
reading lamp on/off
110
H
c Switches the front inte-
rior lighting on/off
110
Overhead control panel
39
At a glance
Door control panel
Function Page
:
r 45=
Stores seat, exterior mirror
and steering column adjust-
ment settings
105
;
Adjusts the seats electrically 95
=
%&Unlocks/locks
the vehicle
82
?
Opens the door 81
A
7Zö\
Adjusts and folds the exterior
mirrors in/out electrically
103
Function Page
B
W Opens/closes the side
windows
87
C
n Activates/deactivates
the override feature for the
side windows in the rear
compartment
63
D
p Opens/closes the
trunk lid
85
40
Door control panel
At a glance
Panic alarm
X
To activate: press the ! button : for
approximately one second.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
alarm system is armed.
X
To deactivate: press the ! button :
again.
or
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
or, on vehicles with KEYLESSGO:
X
Press the Start/Stop button.
The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
Occupant safety
Introduction to the restraint system
The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi-
cle occupants coming into contact with parts of
the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident.
Furthermore, the restraint system may also
reduce the forces exerted on the vehicle occu-
pants when an accident occurs.
The restraint system includes:
R
Seat belt system
R
Air bags
R
Child restraint system
R
Child seat securing system
The components of the restraint system work in
conjunction with each other. They can only offer
the intended level of protection if all vehicle
occupants:
R
are correctly wearing their seat belts.
(
Y page 44)
R
adjust their seat and head restraint properly
(
Y page 94).
The driver is also responsible for ensuring that
the steering wheel has been correctly posi-
tioned. Observe the information relating to the
correct driver's seat position (
Y page 94).
Always ensure the air bag can inflate properly if
deployed (
Y page 46).
An air bag supplements a correctly fastened
seat belt. As an additional safety device, the air
bag increases the level of protection for vehicle
occupants in the event of an accident. For exam-
ple, if the protection already provided by a cor-
rectly fastened seat belt will suffice, the air bags
are not deployed. Furthermore, only the air bags
that would increase the degree of protection
afforded to the vehicle occupants in the event of
an accident are deployed. Seat belts and air
bags generally do not protect against objects
penetrating the vehicle from the outside.
Information on restraint system operation can
be found under "Triggering of Emergency Ten-
sioning Devices and air bags" (
Y page 53).
See “Children in the vehicle” for information on
children traveling with you as well as vehicle
restraint systems (
Y page 58).
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Modifications to the restraint system may
cause it to no longer work as intended. The
restraint system may then not perform its
intended protective function and may fail in an
accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.
This poses an increased risk of injury or even
fatal injury.
Never modify parts of the restraint system.
Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic
components or their software.
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system to
accommodate a person with disabilities, con-
tact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
details. USA only: for further information con-
tact our Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (18003676372).
Restraint system warning lamp
The functions of the restraint system are
checked after the ignition is switched on and at
Occupant safety
41
Safety
Z
regular intervals while the engine is running.
Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in
good time.
The 6 restraint system warning lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is
switched on. It goes out no later than a few sec-
onds after the vehicle is started. The compo-
nents of the restraint system are in operational
readiness.
A malfunction has occurred if the 6 restraint
system warning lamp:
R
does not light up after the ignition is switched
on
R
does not go out after a few seconds with the
engine running
R
lights up again while the engine is running
G
WARNING
If restraint system is malfunctioning, restraint
system components may be triggered unin-
tentionally or might not be triggered at all in
the event of an accident with a high rate of
vehicle deceleration. This can affect the Emer-
gency Tensioning Device or air bag, for exam-
ple. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Have the restraint system checked and
repaired in a qualified specialist workshop as
soon as possible.
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp : is
part of the Occupant Classification System
(OCS).
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
informs you about the status of the front-
passenger front air bag.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp:
R
is lit: the front-passenger front air bag is
deactivated. It will then not be deployed in the
event of an accident.
R
is not lit: the front-passenger front air bag is
enabled. If, in the event of an accident, all
deployment criteria are met, the front-
passenger front air bag is deployed.
Depending on the person in the front-passenger
seat, the front-passenger front air bag must
either be deactivated or enabled; see the fol-
lowing points. You must make sure of this both
before and during a journey.
R
Children in a child restraint system:
whether the front-passenger front air bag is
enabled or deactivated depends on the instal-
led child restraint system, and the age and
size of the child. Therefore, be sure to observe
the notes on the "Occupant Classification
System (OCS)" (
Y page 49) and on "Chil-
dren in the vehicle" (
Y page 58). There you
will also find instructions on rearward and
forward-facing child restraint systems on the
front-passenger seat.
R
All other persons: depending on the classi-
fication of the person in the front-passenger
seat, the front-passenger front air bag is ena-
bled or deactivated (
Y page 49). Be sure to
observe the notes on "Seat
belts“ (
Y page 42) and "Air bags"
(
Y page 46). There you can also find infor-
mation on the correct seat position.
Seat belts
Introduction
Seat belts are the most effective means of
restricting the movement of vehicle occupants
in the event of an accident or the vehicle rolling
over. This reduces the risk of vehicle occupants
coming into contact with parts of the vehicle
interior or being ejected from the vehicle. Fur-
thermore, the seat belt helps to keep the vehicle
occupant in the best position in relation to the
air bag.
42
Occupant safety
Safety
The seat belt system comprises:
R
Seat belts
R
Emergency Tensioning Devices for the front
seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear
R
Seat belt force limiters for the front seat belts
and the outer seat belts in the rear
If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outlet
quickly or with a jerky movement, the belt
retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extrac-
ted any further.
The Emergency Tensioning Device tightens the
seat belt in an accident, pulling the belt close
against the body. However it does not pull the
vehicle occupant back in the direction of the
backrest.
The Emergency Tensioning Device does not cor-
rect an incorrect seat position or the routing of
an incorrectly fastened seat belt.
When triggered, a seat belt force limiter helps to
reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on the
vehicle occupant.
The seat belt force limiters for the front seats are
synchronized with the front air bags, which
absorb part of the deceleration force. This can
reduce the force exerted on the vehicle occu-
pants during an accident.
!
If the front-passenger seat is not occupied,
do not engage the seat belt tongue in the
buckle on the front-passenger seat. Other-
wise, in the event of an accident, the Emer-
gency Tensioning Device and front-passenger
front air bag may be triggered and would need
to be replaced.
Important safety notes
The use of seat belts and child restraint systems
is required by law in:
R
all 50 states
R
the U.S. territories
R
the District of Columbia
R
all Canadian provinces
Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle
occupants should correctly fasten their seat
belts before starting the journey.
G
WARNING
If the seat belt is incorrectly fastened, it can-
not protect as intended. Furthermore, an
incorrectly fastened seat belt can cause addi-
tional injury, for example, in an accident, dur-
ing braking or when abruptly changing direc-
tion. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants are
seated properly with a correctly fastened seat
belt.
G
WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended level
of protection if you have not moved the back-
rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
ing or in the event of an accident, you could
slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
injury.
Adjust the seat properly before beginning
your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
is in an almost vertical position and that the
shoulder section of your seat belt is routed
across the center of your shoulder.
G
WARNING
Persons under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height cannot
fasten the seat belt correctly without an addi-
tional suitable restraint system. If the seat
belt is incorrectly fastened, it cannot protect
as intended. Furthermore, an incorrectly fas-
tened seat belt can cause additional injury, for
example, in an accident, during braking or an
abrupt change of direction. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
For this reason, always secure persons under
5 ft (1.50 m) in height in suitable restraint
systems.
If a child younger than twelve years old and
under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the
vehicle:
R
always secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi-
cle. The child restraint system must be appro-
priate to the age, weight and size of the child
R
always observe the instructions and safety
notes on "Children in the vehicle"
(
Y page 58) in addition to the child restraint
Occupant safety
43
Safety
Z
system manufacturer's installation and oper-
ating instructions
R
be sure to observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant classification system
(OCS)" (
Y page 49)
G
WARNING
The seat belts may not perform their intended
protective function if:
R
they are damaged, modified, extremely
dirty, bleach or dyed
R
the seat belt buckle is damaged or
extremely dirty
R
the Emergency Tensioning Devices, belt
anchorages or inertia reels have been modi-
fied
Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in
an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modi-
fied or damaged seat belts may tear or fail,
e.g. in an accident. Modified Emergency Ten-
sioning Devices could accidentally trigger or
fail to deploy when necessary. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Never modify the seat belts, Emergency Ten-
sioning Devices, belt anchorages or inertia
reels. Make sure that the seat belts are
undamaged, not worn out and clean. Follow-
ing an accident, have the seat belts checked
immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Only use seat belts that have been approved for
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Proper use of the seat belts
Pay attention to the safety notes about the seat
belt (
Y page 43).
All vehicle occupants must fasten the seat belt
correctly before setting off. Make sure that all
occupants are wearing their seat belts correctly
for the entire journey.
When fastening the seat belt, make sure that:
R
The seat belt tongue is inserted into the belt
buckle that belongs to the seat.
R
The seat belt is tightened across your body.
Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter
coat.
R
The seat belt is not twisted.
Only then can the forces produced in the
event of an accident be evenly distributed
across the belt.
R
The shoulder section of the belt must always
be routed across the center of the shoulder.
The shoulder section of the belt should not
come into contact with your neck and must
not be routed under the arm. Where possible,
adjust the seat belt to the appropriate height.
R
The lap belt must be taut and as low as pos-
sible over your lap.
The lap belt must always pass across your hip
joints and never across your stomach or
abdomen. Pregnant women must take partic-
ular care. If necessary, the lap belt can be
pushed down across the hip joints and pulled
tight using the shoulder section.
R
The seat belt is not routed over sharp, pointed
or fragile objects.
If these items are on or in your clothing, e.g.
eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., stow these items
in a more suitable location.
R
Only one person should use each seat belt at
any one time.
On no account should babies or children
travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle
occupant. During an accident, they could be
crushed between the occupant and seat belt.
R
Objects are not secured with a seat belt if the
seat belt is being used by one of the vehicle’s
occupants.
Also make sure that there are no objects, e.g.
cushions, between the occupant and the seat.
Seat belts are solely intended for the protection
and restraint of the vehicle occupants. To
secure objects, luggage or loads, always
observe the "Loading guidelines" (
Y page 251).
Fastening and adjusting the seat belts
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(
Y page 43) and the notes on correct use of seat
belts (
Y page 44).
44
Occupant safety
Safety
Basic illustration
X
Adjust the seat (Y page 94).
The seat backrest must be in an almost ver-
tical position.
X
Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt outlet
and engage belt tongue ; into belt
buckle :.
The seat belt on the driver’s seat and the
front-passenger seat may be tightened auto-
matically, see "Belt adjustment"
(
Y page 45).
X
If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder
section of the seat belt to tighten the belt
across your body.
The shoulder section of the seat belt must
always be routed across the center of the shoul-
der. Adjust the belt outlet if necessary.
X
To raise: slide the belt outlet upwards.
The belt outlet will engage in various posi-
tions.
X
To lower: hold belt outlet release = and slide
belt outlet downwards.
X
Let go of belt outlet release = in the desired
position and make sure that the belt outlet
engages.
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are
equipped with a special seat belt retractor to
securely fasten child restraint systems in the
vehicle. Further information can be found under
"Special seat belt retractor" (
Y page 59).
Releasing seat belts
!
Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled up.
Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue will be
trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism.
This could damage the door, the door trim
panel and the seat belt. Damaged seat belts
can no longer fulfill their protective function
and must be replaced. Visit a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
X
Press the release button in the belt buckle,
hold the belt tongue firmly and guide the belt
back.
Seat belt adjustment
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of
the PRE-SAFE
®
convenience function. This func-
tion adjusts the driver's and front-passenger
seat belt to the upper body of the occupants.
The belt strap is tightened slightly when:
R
the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle and
R
the ignition is switched on
The seat-belt adjustment will apply a certain
retraction force if any slack is detected between
the vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not
hold on to the seat belt tightly while it is adjust-
ing.
You can switch the seat-belt adjustment on and
off in the on-board computer (
Y page 208).
Belt warning for the driver and front
passenger
The 7 seat belt warning lamp in the instru-
ment cluster is a reminder that all vehicle occu-
pants must wear their seat belts. It may light up
continuously or flash. In addition, there may be
a warning tone.
Regardless of whether the driver's seat belt has
already been fastened, the 7 seat belt warn-
ing lamp lights up for six seconds each time the
engine is started. If, after six seconds, the driver
or front-passenger seat belt has not been fas-
tened and the doors are closed, the 7 seat
belt warning lamp lights up. As soon as the driv-
er's and front-passenger seat belts are fastened
or a front door is opened again, the 7 seat
belt warning lamp goes out.
If the driver's seat belt is not fastened after the
engine is started, an additional warning tone will
sound. The warning tone switches off after six
Occupant safety
45
Safety
Z
seconds or once the driver's seat belt is fas-
tened.
If the vehicle's speed exceeds 15 mph
(25 km/h) once and the driver's and front-
passenger seat belts are not fastened, a warning
tone sounds. A warning tone also sounds with
increasing intensity for 60 seconds or until the
driver or front passenger have fastened their
seat belts.
If the driver or front passenger unfasten their
seat belts during the journey, the seat belt warn-
ing is activated again.
i
More information on the 7 seat belt
warning lamp can be found under "Warning
and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster,
seat belt" (
Y page 236).
Air bags
Introduction
The air bag installation point is identified by the
label AIR BAG.
An air bag supplements a correctly fastened
seat belt. However, it is not intended as a sub-
stitute for the seat belt. Air bags provide addi-
tional protection in the event of an accident.
Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The
various air bag systems work independently of
each other (
Y page 53).
There is, however, no system available today
that can completely rule out injury or death.
It is also not possible to rule out a risk of injury
caused by an air bag due to the high speed at
which the air bag must be deployed.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you do not sit in the correct seat position,
the air bag cannot protect as intended and
could even cause additional injury when
deployed. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
To avoid hazardous situations, always make
sure that all of the vehicle's occupants:
R
have fastened their seat belts correctly,
including pregnant women
R
are sitting correctly and maintain the great-
est possible distance to the air bags
R
follow the following instructions
Always make sure that there are no objects
between the air bag and the vehicle's occu-
pants.
R
Adjust the seats properly before beginning
your journey. Always make sure that the seat
is in an almost upright position. The center of
the head restraint must support the head at
about eye level.
R
Move the driver's and front-passenger seats
as far back as possible. The driver's seat posi-
tion must allow the vehicle to be driven safely.
R
Only hold the steering wheel on the outside.
This allows the air bag to be fully deployed.
R
Always lean against the backrest while driv-
ing. Do not lean forwards or lean against the
door or side window. You may otherwise be in
the deployment area of the air bags.
R
Always keep your feet in the footwell in front
of the seat. Do not put your feet on the dash-
board, for example. Your feet may otherwise
be in the deployment area of the air bag.
R
For this reason, always secure persons less
than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable restraint sys-
tems. Up to this height, the seat belt cannot
be worn correctly.
If a child is traveling in your vehicle, also
observe the following notes:
R
Always secure children under twelve years of
age and less than 5 ft (1.50 m) tall in suitable
child restraint systems.
R
Child restraint systems should be installed on
the rear seats.
R
Only secure a child in a rearward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat
when the front-passenger front air bag is
deactivated. If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp is permanently lit, the
front-
p
assenger front air bag is deactivated
(
Y page 42).
R
Always observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant Classification System
(OCS)" (
Y page 49) and on "Children in the
46
Occupant safety
Safety
vehicle" (Y page 58) in addition to the child
restraint system manufacturer's installation
and operating instructions.
Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent
an air bag from functioning correctly. Before
starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting
from the speed of the air bag as it deploys, make
sure that:
R
there are no people, animals or objects
between the vehicle occupants and an air
bag.
R
there are no objects between the seat, door
and B-pillar.
R
no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hang on
the grab handles or coat hooks.
R
no accessories, such as cup holders, are
attached to the vehicle within the deployment
area of an air bag, e.g. to doors, side windows,
rear side trim or side walls.
R
no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects are in
the pockets of your clothing. Store such
objects in a suitable place.
G
WARNING
If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects
such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer
function correctly. There is an increased risk
of injury.
Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects
to it.
G
WARNING
Sensors to control the air bags are located in
the doors. Modifications or work not per-
formed correctly to the doors or door panel-
ing, as well as damaged doors, can lead to the
function of the sensors being impaired. The air
bags might therefore not function properly
anymore. Consequently, the air bags cannot
protect vehicle occupants as they are
designed to do. There is an increased risk of
injury.
Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
Always have work on the doors or door pan-
eling carried out at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Front air bags
Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the steer-
ing wheel. Front-passenger front air bag ;
deploys in front of and above the glove box.
When deployed, the front air bags offer addi-
tional head and thorax protection for the occu-
pants in the front seats.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
informs you about the status of the front-
passenger front air bag (
Y page 42).
The front-passenger front air bag will only
deploy if:
R
the system, based on the OCS weight sensor
readings, detects that the front-passenger
seat is occupied (
Y page 49)
R
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
does not light up (
Y page 49)
R
the restraint system control unit predicts a
high accident severity
Knee bags
Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steering
column and front-passenger knee bag ; under
the glove box. The driver's and front-passenger
knee bags are triggered together with the front
air bags.
Occupant safety
47
Safety
Z
The driver's and front-passenger knee bags
offer additional thigh, knee and lower leg pro-
tection for the occupants in the front seats.
Side impact air bags
G
WARNING
Unsuitable seat covers could restrict or even
prevent the deployment of the air bags inte-
grated into the seats. Consequently, the air
bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as
they are designed to do. In addition, the func-
tion of the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) could be restricted. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
You should only use seat covers that have
been approved for the respective seat by
Mercedes-Benz.
Front side impact air bags : and rear side
impact air bags ; deploy next to the outer bol-
ster of the seat backrest.
When deployed, the side impact air bag offers
additional thorax protection. However, it does
not protect the:
R
head
R
neck
R
arms
In the event of a side impact, the side impact air
bag is deployed on the side on which the impact
occurs.
The side impact air bag on the front-passenger
side (front) deploys under the following condi-
tions:
R
the OCS system detects that the front-
passenger seat is occupied or
R
the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle
of the front-passenger seat
If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle,
the side impact air bag on the front-passenger
side deploys if an appropriate accident situation
occurs. In this case, deployment is independent
of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied
or not.
Pelvis air bags
G
WARNING
Unsuitable seat covers could restrict or even
prevent the deployment of the air bags inte-
grated into the seats. Consequently, the air
bags cannot protect vehicle occupants as
they are designed to do. In addition, the func-
tion of the Occupant Classification System
(OCS) could be restricted. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
You should only use seat covers that have
been approved for the respective seat by
Mercedes-Benz.
Pelvis air bags : deploy below next to the outer
seat cushions.
When activated, the pelvis air bag enhances the
level of protection of the vehicle occupants on
the side of the vehicle on which the impact
occurs.
The pelvis air bag is deployed on the side of the
impact.
The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger side
does not deploy under the following conditions:
R
OCS has detected that the front-passenger
seat is unoccupied.
R
the front-passenger seat belt is not fastened.
If the belt tongue is engaged in the belt buckle,
the pelvis air bag on the front-passenger side
deploys if an appropriate accident situation
occurs. In this case, deployment is independent
48
Occupant safety
Safety
of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied
or not.
Window curtain air bags
Window curtain air bags : are integrated into
the side of the roof frame and deployed in the
area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.
When deployed, the window curtain air bag
enhances the level of protection for the head.
However, it does not protect the chest or arms.
In the event of a side impact, the window curtain
air bag is deployed on the side on which the
impact occurs.
If the system determines that they can offer
additional protection to that provided by the
seat belt, a window curtain air bag may be
deployed in other accident situations
(
Y page 53).
Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
Introduction
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) cat-
egorizes the person in the front-passenger seat.
Depending on that result, the front-passenger
front air bag and front-passenger knee bag are
either enabled or deactivated.
The system does not deactivate:
R
the side impact air bag
R
the pelvis air bag
R
the window curtain air bag
R
the Emergency Tensioning Devices
Prerequisites
To be classified correctly, the front passenger
must sit:
R
with the seat belt fastened correctly
R
in an almost upright position with their back
against the seat backrest
R
with their feet resting on the floor, if possible
If the front passenger does not observe these
conditions, OCS may produce a false classifica-
tion, e.g. because the front passenger:
R
transfers their weight by supporting them-
selves on a vehicle armrest
R
sits in such a way that their weight is raised
from the seat cushion
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be
sure to observe the correct positioning of the
child restraint system. Never place objects
under or behind the child restraint system, e.g.
cushions. The entire base of the child restraint
system must always rest on the seat cushion of
the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the
forward-facing child restraint system must lie as
flat as possible against the backrest of the front-
passenger seat.
The child restraint system must not touch the
roof or be subjected to a load by the head
restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest
and the head restraint position accordingly.
Only then can OCS be guaranteed to function
correctly. Always observe the child restraint sys-
tem manufacturer's installation instructions.
Occupant Classification System opera-
tion (OCS)
Occupant safety
49
Safety
Z
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp :
indicates whether the front-passenger front air
bag is disabled.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock, or in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,
press the start/stop button once or twice.
The system carries out a self-diagnosis test.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
must light up for about six seconds.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
then shows the status of the front-passenger
front air bag. If the status of the front-passenger
front air bag changes whilst the vehicle is in
motion, an air bag display message may appear
in the instrument cluster (
Y page 219). Always
observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp when the front-passenger seat is occu-
pied. Make sure that the status of the front-
passenger front air bag is correct before and
during a journey.
If the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator
lamp:
R
lights up, the front-passenger front air bag is
disabled. It will then not be deployed in the
event of an accident.
R
does not light up, the front-passenger front
air bag is enabled. If, in the case of an acci-
dent, all deployment criteria are met, the
front-passenger front air bag is deployed.
G
WARNING
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, the front-passenger front air bag is
disabled. It will not be deployed in the event of
an accident and cannot perform its intended
protective function. A person in the front-
passenger seat could then, for example, come
into contact with the vehicle's interior, espe-
cially if the person is sitting too close to the
dashboard. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
R
the classification of the person in the front-
passenger seat is correct and the front-
passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-
bled in accordance with the person in the
front-passenger seat
R
the front-passenger seat has been moved
back as far back as possible.
R
the person is seated correctly.
Make sure, both before and during the jour-
ney, that the status of the front-passenger
front air bag is correct.
G
WARNING
If you secure a child in a child restraint system
on the front-passenger seat and the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is
off, the front-passenger front air bag can
deploy in the event of an accident. The child
could be struck by the air bag. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that the front-passenger front air
bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit.
G
WARNING
If you secure a child in a forward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat
and you position the front-passenger seat too
close to the dashboard, the child could, in the
event of an accident:
R
come into contact with the vehicle's inte-
rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
cator lamp is lit, for example
R
be struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off
This poses an increased risk of injury or even
fatal injury.
Move the front-passenger seat as far back as
possible. Always make sure that the shoulder
belt strap is correctly routed from the vehicle
belt sash guide to the shoulder belt guide on
the child restraint system. The shoulder belt
strap must be routed forwards and down-
wards from the vehicle belt sash guide. If nec-
essary, adjust the vehicle belt sash guide and
the front-passenger seat accordingly. Always
observe the child restraint system manufac-
turer's installation instructions.
50
Occupant safety
Safety
If OCS detects that:
R
the front-passenger seat is not occupied, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
lights up continuously after the system's self-
diagnosis test. This indicates that the front-
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
R
the front-passenger seat is occupied by a
child aged up to twelve months in a standard
child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up continu-
ously after the system's self-diagnosis test.
This indicates that the front-passenger front
air bag is deactivated.
In the case of a twelve-month-old child in a
standard child restraint system, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp may
go out after the system's self-diagnosis test.
This indicates that the front-passenger front
air bag is activated. Categorization is depend-
ent on the type of child restraint system and
the stature of the child, for example. In this
case, always install the child restraint system
on a suitable rear seat.
R
the front-passenger seat is occupied by a per-
son of smaller stature (e.g. a teenager or a
small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp lights up continuously or goes
off after the system's self-diagnosis test
depending on the categorization.
-
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is off, position the front-passenger
seat as far back as possible. Alternatively, a
person of smaller stature can sit on a rear
seat.
-
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp lights up, a person of smaller stature
should not sit on the front-passenger seat.
R
the front-passenger seat is occupied by an
adult or a person of an appropriate size, the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
goes out after the system's self-diagnosis
test. This indicates that the front-passenger
front air bag is activated.
If children are traveling in the vehicle, be sure to
observe the notes on "Children in the vehicle"
(
Y page 58).
If the OCS is malfunctioning, both the red 6
restraint system warning lamp in the instrument
cluster and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indi-
cator lamp light up simultaneously. In this case,
the front-passenger air bag is deactivated and
does not deploy during an
accident. Ha
ve the
system checked by qualified technicians as
soon as possible. Consult an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Only have the front-
passenger seat repaired at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the
seat cushion are damaged, have the necessary
repair work carried out at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use seat accessories that
have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not
mean that the front-passenger front air bag will
also deploy. The Occupant Classification Sys-
tem (OCS) categorizes the occupant on the
front-passenger seat. Depending on the result,
the front-passenger air bag is activated or deac-
tivated.
System self-test
G
DANGER
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp does not light up during the system self-
test, then the system is malfunctioning. The
front-passenger front air bag might be trig-
gered unintentionally or might not be trig-
gered at all in the event of an accident with
high deceleration. This poses an increased
risk of injury or even fatal injury.
In this case the front-passenger seat may not
be used. Do not install a child restraint system
on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu-
pant Classification System (OCS) checked
and repaired immediately at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
G
WARNING
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the
front-passenger front air bag is disabled. It will
not be deployed in the event of an accident. In
this case, the front-passenger front air bag
cannot perform its intended protective func-
tion, e.g. when a person is seated in the front-
passenger seat.
That person could, for example, come into
contact with the vehicle's interior, especially
if the person is sitting too close to the dash-
Occupant safety
51
Safety
Z
board. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
R
the classification of the person in the front-
passenger seat is correct and the front-
passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-
bled in accordance with the person in the
front-passenger seat
R
the person is seated properly with a cor-
rectly fastened seatbelt
R
the front-passenger seat has been moved
as far back as possible
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit when it should not, the front-
passenger seat may not be used. Do not
install a child restraint system on the front-
passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi-
cation System (OCS) checked and repaired
immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
G
WARNING
Objects between the seat surface and the
child restraint system could affect OCS oper-
ation. This could result in the front-passenger
air bag not functioning as intended during an
accident. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Do not place any objects between the seat
surface and the child restraint system. The
entire base of the child restraint system must
always rest on the seat cushion of the front-
passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-
facing child restraint system must, as far as
possible, be resting on the backrest of the
front-passenger seat. Always comply with the
child restraint system manufacturer's instal-
lation instructions.
After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp displays the status of
the front-passenger front air bag (
Y page 49).
For more information about the OCS, see "Prob-
lems with the Occupant Classification System"
(
Y page 53).
52
Occupant safety
Safety
Problems with the Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page 51).
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp
lights up and remains lit,
even though the front-
passenger seat is occu-
pied by an adult or a per-
son of a stature corre-
sponding to that of an
adult.
The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incor-
rect.
X
Make sure the conditions for a correct classification of the person
on the front-passenger seat are met (
Y page 49).
X
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-
passenger seat may not be used.
X
Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp
does not light up and/or
does not stay on.
The front-passenger seat
is:
R
unoccupied
R
occupied with the
weight of a child up to
twelve months old in a
child restraint system
OCS is malfunctioning.
X
Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the child
seat.
X
Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on
the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the
forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible
against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary,
adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.
X
When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat
belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passenger
seat adjustment. This could result in the seat belt and the child
restraint system being pulled too tightly.
X
Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.
Make sure that the head restraint does not apply a load to the child
restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accord-
ingly.
X
Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight onto the
seat.
X
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off, do not
install a child restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is
recommended that you install the child restraint system on a suit-
able rear seat.
X
Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Deployment of Emergency Tensioning
Devices and air bags
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has
been deployed. There is a risk of injury.
Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a
deployed air bag replaced at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop as soon as possible.
G
WARNING
A deployed air bag no longer offers any pro-
tection and cannot provide the intended pro-
tection in an accident. There is an increased
risk of injury.
Occupant safety
53
Safety
Z
Have the vehicle towed to a qualified special-
ist workshop in order to have a deployed air
bag replaced.
It is important for your safety and that of your
passenger to have deployed air bags replaced
and to have any malfunctioning air bags
repaired. This will help to make sure the air bags
continue to perform their protective function for
the vehicle occupants in the event of a crash.
G
WARNING
Pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devices
that have been deployed are no longer opera-
tional and are unable to perform their inten-
ded protective function. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Therefore, have pyrotechnic Emergency Ten-
sioning Devices which have been triggered
immediately replaced at a qualified specialist
workshop.
An electric motor is used by PRE-SAFE
®
to trig-
ger the tightening of the seat belt in hazardous
situations. This procedure is reversible.
If Emergency Tensioning Devices are triggered
or air bags are deployed, you will hear a bang,
and a small amount of powder may also be
released. The 6 restraint system warning
lamp lights up.
Only in rare cases will the bang affect your hear-
ing. The powder that is released generally does
not constitute a health hazard, but it may cause
short-term breathing difficulties in people with
asthma or other respiratory problems. Provided
it is safe to do so, you should leave the vehicle
immediately or open the window in order to pre-
vent breathing difficulties.
Air bags and pyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning
Devices (ETDs) contain perchlorate material,
which may require special handling and regard
for the environment. National guidelines must
be observed during disposal. In California, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/
Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Method of operation
During the first stage of a collision, the restraint
system control unit evaluates important physi-
cal data relating to vehicle deceleration or accel-
eration, such as:
R
duration
R
direction
R
intensity
Based on the evaluation of this data, the
restraint system control unit triggers the Emer-
gency Tensioning Devices during a frontal or
rear collision.
An Emergency Tensioning Device can only be
triggered, if:
R
the ignition is switched on
R
the components of the restraint system are
operational. You can find further information
under: "Restraint system warning lamp"
(
Y page 41)
R
the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle on
the respective front-passenger seat
The Emergency Tensioning Devices in the rear
compartment are triggered independently of the
lock status of the seat belts.
If the restraint system control unit detects a
more severe accident, further components of
the restraint system are activated independ-
ently of each other in certain frontal collision
situations:
R
Front air bags and driver's knee bag
R
Window curtain air bag, if the system deter-
mines that deployment can offer additional
protection to that provided by the seat belt
The front-passenger front air bag is activated or
deactivated depending on the person on the
front-passenger seat. The front-passenger front
air bag can only deploy in an accident if the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off.
Observe the information on the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp (
Y page 42).
Your vehicle has two-stage front air bags. During
the fi
rst deployment stage, the front air bag is
filled with propellant gas to reduce the risk of
injuries. The front air bag is fully deployed with
the maximum amount of propellant gas if a sec-
ond deployment threshold is reached within a
few milliseconds.
The activation threshold of the Emergency Ten-
sioning Devices and the air bag are determined
by evaluating the rate of vehicle deceleration or
acceleration which occurs at various points in
54
Occupant safety
Safety
the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in
nature. Deployment should take place in good
time at the start of the collision.
The rate of vehicle deceleration or acceleration
and the direction of the force are essentially
determined by:
R
the distribution of forces during the collision
R
the collision angle
R
the deformation characteristics of the vehicle
R
the characteristics of the object with which
the vehicle has collided
Factors which can only be seen and measured
after a collision has occurred do not play a deci-
sive role in the deployment of an air bag. Nor do
they provide an indication of air bag deploy-
ment.
The vehicle can be deformed considerably, with-
out an air bag being deployed. This is the case if
only parts which are relatively easily deformed
are affected and the rate of deceleration is not
high. Conversely, air bags may be deployed even
though the vehicle suffers only minor deforma-
tion. This is the case if, for example, very rigid
vehicle parts such as longitudinal body mem-
bers are hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs
as a result.
If the control unit of the restraint system
dete
cts
a side impact or a vehicle rollover, the relevant
components of the restraint system are activa-
ted separately depending on the anticipated
type of accident.
R
Side impact air bags and pelvis air bag on the
side the impact takes place, independently of
the Emergency Tensioning Device and the use
of the seat belt on the driver's seat and outer
seats in the second row
-
the OCS system detects that the front-
passenger seat is occupied or
-
the belt tongue is engaged in the belt
buckle of the front-passenger seat
R
Window curtain air bag on the side of impact,
independently of the use of the seat belt and
independently of whether the front-
passenger seat is occupied
R
Emergency Tensioning Devices, if the system
determines that deployment can offer addi-
tional protection in this situation
R
Window curtain air bags on the driver's and
front-passenger side in certain situations
when the vehicle rolls over, if the system
determines that deployment can offer addi-
tional protection to that provided by the seat
belt
i
Not all air bags are deployed in an accident.
The different air bag systems work independ-
ently o
f each other.
How the air bag system works is determined
by the severity of the accident detected,
especially the vehicle deceleration or accel-
eration and the apparent type of accident:
R
Frontal collision
R
Side impact
R
Rollover
NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-
PRO luxury head restraints
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The function of the head restraint may be
impaired if you:
R
attach objects such as coat hangers to the
head restraints, for example
R
use head restraint covers
If you do so, the head restraints cannot fulfill
their intended protective function in the event
of an accident. In addition, objects attached
to the head restraints could endanger other
vehicle occupants. There is an increased risk
of injury.
Do not attach any objects to the head
restraints and do not use head restraint cov-
ers.
Method of operation
NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury
head restraints offer additional protection
against head and neck injuries. In the event of a
rear collision of a certain severity, the NECK-
PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head
restraints on the driver's and front-passenger
seats are moved forwards and upwards. This
provides better head support.
If the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO
luxury head restraints have been triggered in an
accident, reset the NECK-PRO head restraints/
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints on the driver's
Occupant safety
55
Safety
Z
seat and the front-passenger seat
(
Y page 56). Otherwise, the additional protec-
tion will not be available in the event of another
rear-end collision. You can see that a NECK-PRO
head restraint/NECK-PRO luxury head restraint
has been triggered if it is tilted forward and can
no longer be adjusted.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
functionality of the NECK-PRO head restraints/
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints checked at a
qualified specialist workshop after a rear-end
collision.
Resetting a triggered NECK-PRO head
restraint/NECK-PRO luxury head
restraint
NECK-PRO head restraints
Do not insert your finger between the cushion of
the head restraint and the cover. Pay particular
attention while resetting the NECK-PRO head
restraints.
X
Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraint
cushion forwards in the direction of arrow :.
X
Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushion
down as far as it will go in the direction of
arrow ;.
X
With your hand flat, firmly push the NECK-
PRO head restraint cushion backwards in the
direction of arrow = until it engages.
X
Repeat this procedure for the second NECK-
PRO head restraint.
i
Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints
requires a lot of strength. If you have difficulty
resetting the NECK-PRO head restraints, have
this work carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
NECK-PRO luxury head restraints
Do not insert your finger between the cushion of
the head restraint and the cover. Pay particular
attention while resetting the NECK-PRO luxury
head restraints.
X
Remove resetting tool : from the vehicle
document wallet.
X
Slide resetting tool : into guide ; between
the NECK-PRO luxury head restraint and the
rear cover of the head restraint.
X
Push resetting tool : downwards until you
hear the head restraint deployment mecha-
nism engage.
X
Pull out resetting tool :.
X
With your hand flat, firmly push the NECK-
PRO luxury head restraint cushion backwards
in the direction of arrow = until it engages.
X
Repeat this procedure for the second NECK-
PRO luxury head restraint.
X
Put resetting tool : back into the vehicle
document wallet.
i
If you have difficulty resetting the NECK-
PRO luxury head restraints, have this work
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFE
®
(anticipatory occupant
protection system)
Introduction
In certain hazardous situations, PRE-SAFE
®
takes pre-emptive measures to protect the vehi-
cle occupants.
56
Occupant safety
Safety
Important safety notes
!
Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell or behind the seats. There is a danger
that the seats and/or objects could be dam-
aged when PRE-SAFE
®
is activated.
Although your vehicle is equipped with PRE-
SAFE
®
, the possibility of injury in the event of an
accident cannot be ruled out. Always adapt your
driving style to suit the prevailing road and
weather conditions and maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.
Function
PRE-SAFE
®
intervenes:
R
in emergency braking situations, e.g. when
BAS is activated
R
in critical driving situations, e.g. when physi-
cal limits are exceeded and the vehicle under-
steers or oversteers severely
R
on vehicles with the Driving Assistance pack-
age: if BAS PLUS intervenes powerfully or the
radar sensor system detects an imminent
danger of collision in certain situations
PRE-SAFE
®
takes the following measures
depending on the hazardous situation detected:
R
the front seat belts are pre-tensioned.
R
the front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in
an unfavorable position.
R
if the vehicle skids, the side windows and the
sliding sunroof are closed.
R
vehicles with a multicontour seat or active
multicontour seat: the air pressure in the side
bolsters of the backrest is increased.
If the hazardous situation passes without result-
ing in an accident, PRE-SAFE
®
slackens the belt
pre-tensioning. On vehicles with multicontour
seats or active multicontour seats, the air pres-
sure in the side bolsters is reduced again. All
settings made by PRE-SAFE
®
can then be
reversed.
If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced:
X
Move the seat backrest or seat back slightly
when the vehicle is stationary.
The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced and
the locking mechanism is released.
The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part of
the PRE-SAFE
®
convenience function. Informa-
tion about the convenience function can be
found under "Belt adjustment" (
Y page 45).
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS (anticipatory occu-
pant protection system PLUS)
Introduction
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS is only available in vehicles
with the Driving Assistance package.
Using the radar sensor system, PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS is able to detect that a head-on or rear-end
collision is imminent. In certain hazardous sit-
uations, PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS takes pre-emptive
measures to protect the vehicle occupants.
Important safety notes
The intervention of PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS cannot
prevent an imminent collision.
The driver is not warned about the intervention
of PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS.
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS does not intervene if the vehi-
cle is backing up.
When driving, or when parking or exiting a park-
ing space with assistance from Active Parking
Assist, PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS will not apply the
brakes.
Function
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS intervenes in certain situa-
tions if the radar sensor system detects an
imminent head-on or rear-end collision.
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS takes the following measures
depending on the hazardous situation detected:
R
if the radar sensor system detects that a
head-on collision is imminent, the seat belts
are pre-tensioned.
R
if the radar sensor system detects that a rear-
end collision is imminent:
-
the brake pressure is increased if the driver
applies the brakes when the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
-
the seat belts are pre-tensioned.
The PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS braking application is can-
celed:
R
if the accelerator pedal is depressed when a
gear is engaged
R
if the risk of a collision passes or is no longer
detected
R
if DISTRONIC PLUS indicates an intention to
pull away
Occupant safety
57
Safety
Z
If the hazardous situation passes without result-
ing in an accident, the original settings are
restored.
Automatic measures after an acci-
dent
Immediately after an accident, the following
measures are implemented, depending on the
type and severity of the impact:
R
the hazard warning lamps are activated
R
the emergency lighting is activated
R
the vehicle doors are unlocked
R
the front side windows are lowered
R
vehicles with a memory function: the electri-
cally adjustable steering wheel is raised
R
the engine is switched off and the fuel supply
is cut off
R
vehicles with mbrace: automatic emergency
call
Children in the vehicle
Important safety notes
Accident statistics show that children secured
in the rear seats are safer than children secured
in the front-passenger seat. For this reason,
Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install
a child restraint system on a rear seat. Children
are generally better protected there.
If a child younger than twelve years old and
under 5 ft (1.50 m) in height is traveling in the
vehicle:
R
always secure the child in a child restraint
system suitable for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
The child restraint system must be appropri-
ate to the age, weight and size of the child
R
be sure to observe the instructions and safety
notes in this section in addition to the child
restraint system manufacturer's installation
instructions
R
be sure to observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant classification system
(OCS)" (
Y page 49)
G
WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shift the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
R
start the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
G
WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
G
WARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
dren may burn themselves on these parts,
particularly on the metal parts of the child
restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
you, always ensure that the child restraint
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
restraint system has been exposed to direct
sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
child in it. Never leave children unattended in
the vehicle.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have
their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting
properly. Particular attention must be paid to
children.
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(
Y page 43) and the notes on correct use of seat
belts (
Y page 44).
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper seat belt positioning for children over
41 lbs (18 kg) until they reach a height where a
58
Children in the vehicle
Safety
three-point seat belt can be properly fastened
without a booster seat.
Special seat belt retractor
G
WARNING
If the seat belt is released while driving, the
child restraint system will no longer be
secured properly. The special seat belt retrac-
tor is disabled and the inertia real draws in a
portion of the seat belt. The seat belt cannot
be immediately refastened. There is an
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Stop the vehicle immediately, paying atten-
tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate
the special seat belt retractor and secure the
child restraint system properly.
All seat belts except the driver's seat belt are
equipped with a special seat belt retractor.
When activated, the special seat belt retractor
ensures that the seat belt will not slacken once
the child restraint system has been secured.
Installing a child restraint system:
X
Always comply with the child restraint system
manufacturer's installation instructions.
X
Pull the seat belt smoothly from the belt out-
let.
X
Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt buckle.
Activating the special seat belt retractor:
X
Pull the seat belt out fully and let the inertia
reel retract it again.
While the seat belt is retracting, you shoul
d
h
ear a ratcheting sound. The special seat belt
retractor is activated.
X
Push the child seat restraint system down so
that the seat belt is tight and does not loosen.
Removing a child restraint system and deacti-
vating the special seat belt retractor:
X
Always comply with the child restraint system
manufacturer's installation instructions.
X
Press the release button of the belt buckle,
hold the belt tongue firmly and guide it back
towards the belt outlet.
The special seat belt retractor is deactivated.
Child restraint system
The use of seat belts and child restraint systems
is required by law in:
R
all 50 states
R
the U.S. territories
R
the District of Columbia
R
all Canadian provinces
You can obtain further information about the
correct child restraint system from any author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center.
G
WARNING
If the child restraint system is installed incor-
rectly on a suitable seat, it cannot protect as
intended. The child cannot then be restrained
in the event of an accident, heavy braking or
sudden changes of direction. There is an
increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Make sure that you observe the child restraint
system manufacturer's installation instruc-
tions and the notes on use. Please ensure,
that the base of the child restraint system is
always resting completely on the seat cush-
ion. Never place objects, e.g. cushions, under
or behind the child restraint system. Only use
child restraint systems with the original cover
designed for them. Only replace damaged
covers with genuine covers.
G
WARNING
If the child restraint system is installed incor-
rectly or is not secured, it can come loose in
the event of an accident, heavy braking or a
sudden change in direction. The child
restraint system could be thrown about, strik-
ing vehicle occupants. There is an increased
risk of injury, possibly even fatal.
Always install child restraint systems prop-
erly, even if they are not being used. Make
sure that you observe the child restraint sys-
tem manufacturer's installation instructions.
You will find further information on stowing
objects, luggage or loads under "Loading guide-
lines" (
Y page 251).
Children in the vehicle
59
Safety
Z
G
WARNING
Child restraint systems or their securing sys-
tems which have been damaged or subjected
to a load in an accident can no longer protect
as intended. The child cannot then be
restrained in the event of an accident, heavy
braking or sudden changes of direction. There
is an increased risk of injury, possibly even
fatal.
Replace child restraint systems which have
been damaged or subjected to a load in an
accident as soon as possible. Have the secur-
ing systems on the child restraint system
checked at a qualified specialist workshop,
before you install a child restraint system
again.
The securing systems of child restraint systems
are:
R
the seat belt system
R
the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings
R
the Top Tether anchorages
If it is absolutely necessary to carry a child on
the front-passenger seat, be sure to observe the
information on the "Occupant Classification
System (OCS)" (
Y page 49). There you will also
find information on deactivating the front-
passenger front air bag.
All child restraint systems must meet the fol-
lowing standards:
R
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 225
R
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
213 and 210.2
Confirmation that the child restraint system cor-
responds to the standards can be found on an
instruction label on the child restraint system.
This confirmation can also be found in the instal-
lation instructions that are included with the
child restraint system.
Observe the warning labels in the vehicle inte-
rior and on the child restraint system.
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat secur-
ing system
G
WARNING
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems
do not offer sufficient protective effect for
children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs
(22 kg) who are secured using the safety belt
integrated in the child restraint system. In the
event of an accident, a child might not be
restrained correctly. This poses an increased
risk of injury or even fatal injury.
If the child weighs more than 48 lbs (22 kg),
only use LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
systems with which the child is also secured
with the vehicle seat belt. Also secure the
child restraint system with the Top Tether
belt, if available.
Always comply with the manufacturer's instal-
lation and operating instructions for the child
restraint system used.
Before every trip, make sure that the LATCH-
type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged
correctly in both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
rings
When installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child
restraint system, fold protective caps ; of
securing rings : inwards.
X
Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
system on both LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
rings :.
ISOFIX is a standardized securing system for
specially designed child restraint systems on
the rear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
rings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
systems are installed on the left and right of the
rear seats.
60
Children in the vehicle
Safety
Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may also
be used and can be installed using the vehicle's
seat belt system. Install the child seat according
to the manufacturer's instructions.
Top Tether
Introduction
Top Tether provides an additional connection
between the child restraint system secured with
a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) system and the vehicle.
This helps reduce the risk of injury even further.
If the child restraint system is equipped with a
Top Tether belt, this should always be used.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the rear seat backrests are not locked, they
could fold forwards in the event of an acci-
dent, heavy braking or sudden changes of
direction. As a result, child restraint systems
cannot perform their intended protective
function. Rear seat backrests that are not
locked can also cause additional injuries, e.g.
in the event of an accident. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Always lock rear seat backrests after instal-
ling a Top Tether belt. Observe the lock veri-
fication indicator. Adjust the rear seat backr-
ests so that they are in an upright position.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and
locked, this will be shown in the multifunction
display in the instrument cluster. A warning tone
also sounds.
Top Tether anchorages
Top Tether anchorage points = are installed in
the rear compartment behind the outer head
restraints.
X
Move head restraint : upwards.
X
Fold up cover ; of Top Tether anchorage =.
X
Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
system with Top Tether. Always comply with
the child restraint system manufacturer's
installation instructions when doing so.
X
Route Top Tether belt A under head
restraint : between the two head restraint
bars.
X
Hook Top Tether hook ? into Top Tether
anchorage =.
X
Make sure that Top Tether belt A is not twis-
ted.
X
Tension Top Tether belt A. Always comply
with the child restraint system manufactur-
er's installation instructions when doing so.
X
Fold down cover ; of Top Tether anchorage
=.
X
Move head restraint : back down again
slightly if necessary (
Y page 96).
Make sure that you do not interfere with the
correct routing of Top Tether belt A.
Children in the vehicle
61
Safety
Z
Child restraint system on the front-
passenger seat
General notes
Accident statistics show that children secured
in the rear seats are safer than children secured
in the front-passenger seat. For this reason,
Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you install
the child restraint system on a rear seat.
If it is absolutely necessary to install a child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat,
always observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant Classification System
(OCS)" (
Y page 49).
You can thus avoid the risks that could arise as
a result of:
R
an incorrectly categorized person in the front-
passenger seat
R
the unintentional deactivation of the front-
passenger front air bag
R
the unsuitable positioning of the child
restraint system, e.g. too close to the dash-
board
Rearward-facing child restraint system
If it is absolutely necessary to install a rearward-
facing child restraint system on the front-
passenger seat, always make sure that the
front-passenger front air bag is deactivated.
Only if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is permanently lit (
Y page 42) is the front-
passenger front air bag deactivated.
Always observe the child restraint system man-
ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-
tions.
Forward-facing child restraint system
If it is absolutely necessary to install a forward-
facing child restraint system on the front-
passenger seat, always move the front-
passenger seat as far back as possible. The
entire base of the child restraint system must
always rest on the seat cushion of the front-
passenger seat. The backrest of the child
restraint system must lie as flat as possible
against the backrest of the front-passenger
seat. The child restraint system must not touch
the roof or be subjected to a load by the head
restraint. Adjust the angle of the seat backrest
and the head restraint position accordingly.
Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is
correctly routed from the vehicle belt outlet to
the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint
system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed
forwards and downwards from the vehicle belt
outlet. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt out-
let and the front-passenger seat accordingly.
Always observe the child restraint system man-
ufacturer's installation and operating instruc-
tions.
Child-proof locks
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If children are traveling in the vehicle, they
could:
R
open doors, thus endangering other people
or road users
R
exit the vehicle and be caught by oncoming
traffic
R
operate vehicle equipment and become
trapped
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Always activate the child-proof locks and
override feature if children are traveling in the
vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take
the key with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Override feature for:
R
the rear doors (Y page 63)
R
the rear side windows (Y page 63)
G
WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shift the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
R
start the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
62
Children in the vehicle
Safety
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
G
WARNING
If persons, particularly children are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heat or
cold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even
fatal. Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
G
WARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
dren may burn themselves on these parts,
particularly on the metal parts of the child
restraint system. There is a risk of injury.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
you, always ensure that the child restraint
system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Pro-
tect it with a blanket, for example. If the child
restraint system has been exposed to direct
sunlight, let it cool down before securing the
child in it. Never leave children unattended in
the vehicle.
Child-proof locks for the rear doors
You secure each door individually with the child-
proof locks on the rear doors. A door secured
with a child-proof lock cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is unlocked,
the door can be opened from the outside.
X
To activate: press the child-proof lock lever
up in the direction of arrow :.
X
Make sure that the child-proof locks are work-
ing properly.
X
To deactivate: press the child-proof lock
lever down in the direction of arrow ;.
Override feature for the rear side win-
dows
X
To activate/deactivate: press button ;.
If indicator lamp : is lit, operation of the rear
side windows is disabled. Operation is only
possible using the switches in the driver's
door. If indicator lamp : is off, operation is
possible using the switches in the rear com-
partment.
Pets in the vehicle
G
WARNING
If you leave animals unattended or unsecured
in the vehicle, they could press buttons or
switches, for example.
As a result, they could:
R
activate vehicle equipment and become
trapped, for example
R
activate or deactivate systems, thereby
endangering other road users
Unsecured animals could also be flung around
the vehicle in the event of an accident or sud-
den steering or braking, thereby injuring vehi-
cle occupants. There is a risk of an accident
and injury.
Pets in the vehicle
63
Safety
Z
Never leave animals unattended in the vehi-
cle. Always secure animals properly during
the journey, e.g. use a suitable animal trans-
port box.
Driving safety systems
Overview of driving safety systems
In this section, you will find information about
the following driving safety systems:
R
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
(
Y page 64)
R
BAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 65)
R
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS) with
Cross-Traffic Assist (
Y page 65)
R
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
(
Y page 67)
R
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
(
Y page 69)
R
EBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)
(
Y page 72)
R
ADAPTIVE BRAKE (Y page 72)
R
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake (Y page 73)
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are
inattentive, the driving safety systems can nei-
ther reduce the risk of an accident nor override
the laws of physics. Driving safety systems are
merely aids designed to assist driving. You are
responsible for maintaining the distance to the
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in
good time, and for staying in lane. Always adapt
your driving style to suit the prevailing road and
weather conditions and maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front. Drive carefully.
The driving safety systems described only work
as effectively as possible when there is ade-
quate contact between the tires and the road
surface. Please pay special attention to the
notes on tires, recommended minimum tire
tread depths, etc. (
Y page 301).
In wintry driving conditions, always use winter
tires (M+S tires) and if necessary, snow chains.
Only in this way will the driving safety systems
described in this section work as effectively as
possible.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
General information
ABS regulates brake pressure in such a way that
the wheels do not lock when you brake. This
allows you to continue steering the vehicle when
braking.
The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the ignition is switched
on. It goes out when the engine is running.
ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph
(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface conditions.
ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you
only brake gently.
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (
Y page 64).
G
WARNING
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
braking. The steerability and braking charac-
teristics may be severely impaired. Addition-
ally, further driving safety systems are deac-
tivated. There is an increased danger of skid-
ding and accidents.
Drive on carefully. Have ABS checked imme-
diately at a qualified specialist workshop.
When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,
including driving safety systems, will also
become inoperative. Observe the information
on the ABS warning lamp (
Y page 238) and dis-
play messages which may be shown in the
instrument cluster (
Y page 213).
Braking
X
If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
brake pedal vigorously until the braking sit-
uation is over.
X
To make a full brake application: depress
the brake pedal with full force.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a
pulsing in the brake pedal.
The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication
of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a
reminder to take extra care while driving.
64
Driving safety systems
Safety
BAS (Brake Assist System)
General information
BAS operates in emergency braking situations.
If you depress the brake pedal quickly, BAS
automatically boosts the braking force, thus
shortening the stopping distance.
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (
Y page 64).
G
WARNING
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
in an emergency braking situation is
increased. There is a risk of an accident.
In an emergency braking situation, depress
the brake pedal with full force. ABS prevents
the wheels from locking.
Braking
X
Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until
the emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will function as usual once you
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) with
Cross-Traffic Assist
General information
BAS PLUS can help you to minimize the risk of a
collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian and
reduce the effects of such a collision. If BAS
PLUS detects a danger of collision, you are
assisted when braking.
i
Pay attention to the important safety notes
in the "Driving safety systems" section
(
Y page 64).
BAS PLUS is only available on vehicles with the
Driving Assistance package.
For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, the
radar sensor system and the camera system
must be operational.
With the help of a sensor system and a camera
system, BAS PLUS can detect obstacles:
R
that are in the path of your vehicle for an
extended period of time
R
that cross the path of your vehicle
In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehi-
cle can be detected.
BAS PLUS detects pedestrians by using typical
characteristics such as the body contours and
posture of a person standing upright.
If the radar sensor system or the camera system
is malfunctioning, BAS PLUS functions are
restricted or no longer available. The brake sys-
tem is still available with complete brake boost-
ing effect and BAS.
i
Observe the restrictions described in the
"Important safety notes" section
(
Y page 65).
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify
objects and complex traffic situations.
In such cases, BAS PLUS may:
R
intervene unnecessarily
R
not intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the
intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
G
WARNING
BAS PLUS cannot always clearly identify peo-
ple, this is especially the case if they are mov-
ing. BAS PLUS cannot intervene in these
cases. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and be ready to brake.
G
WARNING
BAS PLUS does not react:
R
to small people, e.g. children
R
to animals
R
to oncoming vehicles
R
when cornering
Driving safety systems
65
Safety
Z
As a result, BAS PLUS may not intervene in all
critical situations. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and be ready to brake.
In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-
ognition can be impaired.
Recognition by the radar sensor system is also
impaired if:
R
there is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
R
there is interference by other radar sources
R
there are strong radar reflections, for exam-
ple in parking garages
R
a narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike
R
a vehicle is traveling in front on a different line
R
vehicles quickly move into the radar sensor
system detection range
Recognition by the camera system is also
impaired in the event of:
R
dirt on the camera or if the camera is covered
R
glare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun
being low in the sky
R
darkness
R
or if:
-
pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path
of the vehicle
-
the camera system no longer recognizes a
pedestrian as a person due to special cloth-
ing or other objects
-
a pedestrian is concealed by other objects
-
the typical outline of a person is not distin-
guishable from the background
Following damage
to the fro
nt end of the vehicle,
have the configuration and operation of the
radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist
workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow
speeds where there is no visible damage to the
front of the vehicle.
Following damage to the windshield, have the
configuration and operation of the camera sys-
tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Function
To avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates the
brake force necessary if:
R
you approach an obstacle, and
R
BAS PLUS has detected a risk of collision
When driving at a speed under 20 mph
(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal, BAS
PLUS is activated. The increase in brake pres-
sure will be carried out at the last possible
moment.
When driving at a speed above 20 mph
(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal
sharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises the
brake pressure to a value adapted to the traffic
situation.
BAS PLUS provides braking assistance in haz-
ardous situations with vehicles in front within a
speed range between 4 mph (7 km/h) and
155 mph (250 km/h).
Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph
(70 km/h), BAS PLUS may react to:
R
stationary objects in the path of your vehicle,
e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
R
pedestrians in the path of your vehicle
R
obstacles crossing your path, which move in
the detection range of the sensors and are
recognized by them
i
If BAS PLUS demands particularly high brak-
ing force, preventative passenger protection
measures (PRE-SAFE
®
) are activated simulta-
neously.
X
Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakes func-
tion as usual, if:
R
you release the brake pedal.
R
there is no longer a risk of collision.
R
no obstacle is detected in front of your vehi-
cle.
R
you depress the accelerator pedal.
R
you activate kickdown.
66
Driving safety systems
Safety
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
PLUS
General information
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (
Y page 64).
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS consists
of a distance warning function with an autono-
mous braking function and adaptive Brake
Assist.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS can help
you to minimize the risk of a front-end collision
with a vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of
such a collision.
If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will
be warned visually and acoustically. If you do not
react to the visual and audible collision warning,
autonomous braking can be initiated in critical
situations. If you apply the brake yourself in a
critical situation, the COLLISION PREVENTION
ASSIST PLUS adaptive Brake Assist assists you.
Important safety notes
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
impaired if:
R
there is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
R
there is snow or heavy rain
R
there is interference by other radar sources
R
there are strong radar reflections, for exam-
ple in parking garages
R
a narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike
R
a vehicle is traveling in front on a different line
R
new vehicles or after a service on the COLLI-
SION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS system
Observe the notes in the section on breaking-
in (
Y page 126).
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,
have the configuration and operation of the
radar sensor checked at a qualified specialist
workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow
speeds where there is no visible damage to the
front of the vehicle.
Activating/deactivating
The COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is
automatically active after switching on the igni-
tion.
You can activate or deactivate COLLISION PRE-
VENTION ASSIST PLUS in the on-board com-
puter (
Y page 204). When deactivated, the dis-
tance warning function and the autonomous
braking function are also deactivated.
If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is
deactivated, the æ symbol appears in the
assistance graphics display.
Distance warning function
General information
The distance warning function can help you to
minimize the risk of a front-end collision with a
vehicle ahead or reduce the effects of such a
collision. If the distance warning function
detects that there is a risk of a collision, you will
be warned visually and acoustically.
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion for driving safety systems (
Y page 64).
G
WARNING
The distance warning function does not react:
R
to people or animals
R
to oncoming vehicles
R
to crossing traffic
R
when cornering
Thus, the distance warning function cannot
provide a warning in all critical situations.
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and be ready to brake.
G
WARNING
The distance warning function cannot always
clearly identify objects and complex traffic
situations.
In such cases, the distance warning function
may:
R
give an unnecessary warning
R
not give a warning
Driving safety systems
67
Safety
Z
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and do not rely solely on the distance
warning function.
Function
Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h),
the distance warning function warns you if you
rapidly approach a vehicle in front. An intermit-
tent warning tone will then sound, and the ·
distance warning lamp will light up in the instru-
ment cluster.
X
Brake immediately in order to increase the
distance from the vehicle in front.
or
X
Take evasive action, provided it is safe to do
so.
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
complicated but non-critical driving conditions
may also cause the system to display a warning.
With the help of the radar sensor system, the
distance warning function can detect obstacles
that are in the path of your vehicle for an exten-
ded period of time.
Up to a speed of around 44 mph (70 km/h), the
distance warning function can also react to sta-
tionary obstacles, such as stopped or parked
vehicles.
Autonomous braking function
If the driver does not react to the distance warn-
ing signal in a critical situation, COLLISION PRE-
VENTION ASSIST PLUS can assist with the
autonomous braking function.
The autonomous braking function:
R
gives the driver more time to react to critical
driving situations
R
can help the driver to avoid an accident or
R
reduces the effects of an accident
The autonomous braking function is available in
the following speed ranges:
R
from 4 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 65 mph
(105 km/h) for moving objects
R
from 4 mph (7 km/h) to approx. 31 mph
(50 km/h) for stationary objects
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
complicated but non-critical driving conditions
may also cause the Autonomous Braking Func-
tion to intervene.
If the autonomous braking function requires a
particularly high braking force, preventative
passenger protection measures (PRE-SAFE
®
)
are activated simultaneously.
Adaptive Brake Assist
General information
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (
Y page 64).
With the help of adaptive Brake Assist, the dis-
tance warning signal can detect obstacles that
are in the path of your vehicle for an extended
period of time.
If adaptive Brake Assist detects a risk of colli-
sion with the vehicle in front, it calculates the
braking force necessary to avoid a collision. If
you apply the brakes forcefully, adaptive Brake
Assist will automatically increase the braking
force to a level suitable for the traffic conditions.
Adaptive Brake Assist provides braking assis-
tance in hazardous situations at speeds above
4 mph (7 km/h). It uses radar sensor technology
to assess the traffic situation.
Up to a speed of approximately 155 mph
(250 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist is capable of
reacting to moving objects that have already
been detected as such at least once over the
period of observation.
Up to a speed of approximately 44 mph
(70 km/h), adaptive Brake Assist reacts to sta-
tionary obstacles.
If adaptive Brake Assist demands particularly
high braking force, preventative passenger pro-
tection measures (PRE-SAFE
®
) are activated
simultaneously (
Y page 56).
X
Keep the brake pedal depressed until the
emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will work normally again if:
R
you release the brake pedal.
R
there is no longer any danger of a collision.
R
no obstacle is detected in front of your vehi-
cle.
Adaptive Brake Assist is then deactivated.
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion for driving safety systems (
Y page 64).
68
Driving safety systems
Safety
G
WARNING
Adaptive Brake Assist cannot always clearly
identify objects and complex traffic situa-
tions.
In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist can:
R
intervene unnecessarily
R
not intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the
intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
G
WARNING
Adaptive Brake Assist does not react:
R
to people or animals
R
to oncoming vehicles
R
to crossing traffic
R
when cornering
As a result, the Adaptive Brake Assist may not
intervene in all critical conditions. There is a
risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and be ready to brake.
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
complicated but non-critical driving conditions
may also cause Brake Assist to intervene.
If adaptive Brake Assist is not available due to a
malfunction in the radar sensor system, the
brake system remains available with full brake
boosting effect and BAS.
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
General notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (
Y page 64).
ESP
®
monitors driving stability and traction, i.e.
power transmission between the tires and the
road surface.
If ESP
®
detects that the vehicle is deviating from
the direction desired by the driver, one or more
wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The
engine output is also modified to keep the vehi-
cle on the desired course within physical limits.
ESP
®
assists the driver when pulling away on
wet or slippery roads. ESP
®
can also stabilize
the vehicle during braking.
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
ETS traction control is part of ESP
®
. On vehicles
with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP
®
.
Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-
vidually if they spin. This enables you to pull
away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for
example if the road surface is slippery on one
side. In addition, more drive torque is transfer-
red to the wheel or wheels with traction.
Traction control remains active, even if you
deactivate ESP
®
.
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (
Y page 64).
G
WARNING
If ESP
®
is malfunctioning, ESP
®
is unable to
stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-
ing safety systems are deactivated. This
increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
Drive on carefully. Have ESP
®
checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
!
Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or perform-
ance tests may only be carried out on a 2-axle
dynamometer. Before you operate the vehicle
on such a dynamometer, please consult a
qualified workshop. You could otherwise
damage the drive train or the brake system.
Vehicles without 4MATIC: observe the notes on
ESP
®
(Y page 298) when towing the vehicle
with a raised rear axle.
If the å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp lights up
continuously, then ESP
®
is deactivated.
If the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp and the å
ESP
®
OFF warning lamp are lit continuously,
ESP
®
is not available due to a malfunction.
Observe the information on warning lamps
(
Y page 238) and display messages which may
be shown in the instrument cluster
(
Y page 213).
i
Only use wheels with the recommended tire
sizes. Only then will ESP
®
function properly.
Driving safety systems
69
Safety
Z
Characteristics of ESP
®
General information
If the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out before
beginning the journey, ESP
®
is automatically
active.
If ESP
®
intervenes, the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp
flashes in the instrument cluster.
If ESP
®
intervenes:
X
Do not deactivate ESP
®
under any circum-
stances.
X
Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary when pulling away.
X
Adapt your driving style to suit the prevailing
road and weather conditions.
ECO start/stop function
The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically when the vehicle stops
moving. The engine starts automatically when
the driver wants to pull away again. ESP
®
remains in its previously selected status. Exam-
ple: if ESP
®
was deactivated before the engine
was switched off, ESP
®
remains deactivated
when the engine is switched on again.
Deactivating/activating ESP
®
(except
MercedesAMG vehicles)
Important safety notes
You can select between the following states of
ESP
®
:
R
ESP
®
is activated.
R
ESP
®
is deactivated.
G
WARNING
If you deactivate ESP
®
, ESP
®
no longer sta-
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivate ESP
®
in the situations descri-
bed in the following.
!
Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an
extended period with ESP
®
deactivated. You
could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
It may be best to deactivate ESP
®
in the follow-
ing situations:
R
when using snow chains
R
in deep snow
R
on sand or gravel
i
Activate ESP
®
as soon as the situations
described above no longer apply. ESP
®
will
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if
the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to
spin.
Deactivating/activating ESP
®
You can deactivate or activate ESP
®
via the on-
board computer (
Y page 204).
ESP
®
deactivated:
The å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
ESP
®
activated:
The å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp in the instru-
ment cluster goes out.
Characteristics when ESP
®
is deactivated
If ESP
®
is deactivated and one or more wheels
start to spin, the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp in the
instrument cluster flashes. In such situations,
ESP
®
will not stabilize the vehicle.
If you deactivate ESP
®
:
R
ESP
®
no longer improves driving stability.
R
Engine torque is no longer limited and the
drive wheels are able to spin.
The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting
action for better traction on loose surfaces.
R
Traction control is still activated.
R
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no longer
available; nor is it activated if you brake firmly
with assistance from ESP
®
.
R
PRE-SAFE
®
is no longer available, nor is it
activated if you brake firmly and ESP
®
inter-
venes.
R
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake is no longer available, it is
also not activated if you brake firmly and ESP
®
intervenes.
R
ESP
®
still provides support when you brake
firmly.
70
Driving safety systems
Safety
Deactivating/activating ESP
®
(MercedesAMG vehicles)
Important safety notes
You can select between the following states of
ESP
®
:
R
ESP
®
is activated.
R
SPORT handling mode is activated.
R
ESP
®
is deactivated.
G
WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is activated,
there is a greater risk of skidding and acci-
dents.
Only activate SPORT handling mode in the sit-
uations described in the following.
G
WARNING
If you deactivate ESP
®
, ESP
®
no longer sta-
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivate ESP
®
in the situations descri-
bed in the following.
!
Avoid spinning the driven wheels for an
extended period with ESP
®
deactivated. You
could otherwise damage the drivetrain.
In the following situations, it may be better to
activate SPORT handling mode or deactivate
ESP
®
:
R
when using snow chains
R
in deep snow
R
on sand or gravel
R
on specially designated roads when the vehi-
cle's own oversteering and understeering
characteristics are desired
Driving in SPORT handling mode or without
ESP
®
requires an extremely qualified and expe-
rienced driver.
i
Activate ESP
®
as soon as the situations
described above no longer apply. ESP
®
will
otherwise not be able to stabilize the vehicle if
the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to
spin.
Deactivating/activating ESP
®
X
To activate SPORT handling mode: briefly
press button :.
The M SPORT handling mode warning
lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The
SPORT handling mode
message appears in
the multifunction display.
X
To deactivate SPORT handling mode:
briefly press button :.
The M SPORT handling mode warning
lamp in the instrument cluster goes out.
X
To deactivate ESP
®
: press button : until
the å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp lights up in
the instrument cluster.
The ÷ OFF
message appears in the multi-
function display.
X
To activate ESP
®
: briefly press button :.
The å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out. The ÷ ESP
®
ON message appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
Characteristics of activated SPORT han-
dling mode
If SPORT handling mode is activated and one or
more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP
®
warn-
ing lamp in the instrument cluster flashes. ESP
®
only stabilizes the vehicle to a limited degree.
When SPORT handling mode is activated:
R
ESP
®
no longer improves driving stability.
R
Engine torque is no longer limited and the
drive wheels are able to spin.
The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting
action for better traction on loose surfaces.
R
Traction control is still activated.
R
ESP
®
still provides support when you brake
firmly.
Driving safety systems
71
Safety
Z
Characteristics when ESP
®
is deactivated
If ESP
®
is deactivated and one or more wheels
start to spin, the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp in the
instrument cluster does not flash. In such situa-
tions, ESP
®
will not stabilize the vehicle.
If you deactivate ESP
®
:
R
ESP
®
no longer improves driving stability.
R
Engine torque is no longer limited and the
drive wheels are able to spin.
The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting
action for better traction on loose surfaces.
R
Traction control is still activated.
R
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST is no longer
available; nor is it activated if you brake firmly
with assistance from ESP
®
.
R
PRE-SAFE
®
is no longer available, nor is it
activated if you brake firmly and ESP
®
inter-
venes.
R
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake is no longer available, it is
also not activated if you brake firmly and ESP
®
intervenes.
R
ESP
®
still provides support when you brake
firmly.
ESP
®
trailer stabilization
General information
ESP
®
trailer stabilization is not available in
Mercedes-AMG vehicles.
If your vehicle/trailer combination begins to
swerve, ESP
®
assists you in this situation. ESP
®
slows the vehicle down by braking and limiting
the engine output until the vehicle/trailer com-
bination has stabilized.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If road and weather conditions are poor,
trailer stabilization will not be able to prevent
the vehicle/trailer combination from swerv-
ing. Trailers with a high center of gravity can
tip over before ESP
®
can detect this. There is
a risk of an accident.
Always adapt your driving style to the prevail-
ing road and weather conditions.
If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer com-
bination) begins to lurch, you can only stabilize
the vehicle/trailer combination by depressing
the brake firmly.
ESP
®
trailer stabilization is active above speeds
of about 65 km/h.
ESP
®
trailer stabilization does not work if ESP
®
is deactivated or disabled because of a malfunc-
tion.
EBD (electronic brake force distribu-
tion)
General information
EBD monitors and controls the brake pressure
on the rear wheels to improve driving stability
while braking.
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion for driving safety systems (
Y page 64).
G
WARNING
If EBD is malfunctioning, the rear wheels can
lock, e.g. under full braking. This increases the
risk of skidding and an accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving style
to the different handling characteristics. Have
the brake system checked at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Observe information regarding indicator and
warning lamps (
Y page 238) as well as display
messages (
Y page 214).
ADAPTIVE BRAKE
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (
Y page 64).
ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safety and
offers increased braking comfort. In addition to
the braking function, ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has
the HOLD function (
Y page 164) and hill start
assist (
Y page 130).
72
Driving safety systems
Safety
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake
General information
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake can help you to minimize the
risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead or a
pedestrian, and reduce the effects of such a
collision. If PRE-SAFE
®
Brake has detected a risk
of collision, you will be warned visually and
acoustically as well as by automatic braking.
i
Pay attention to the important safety notes
in the "Driving safety systems" section
(
Y page 64).
PRESAFE
®
Brake is only available in vehicles
with the Driving Assistance Plus package.
For PRE-SAFE
®
Brake to assist you when driving,
the radar sensor system and the camera system
must be switched on and be operational.
With the help of the radar sensor system and the
camera system, PRE-SAFE
®
Brake can detect
obstacles that are in front of your vehicle for an
extended period of time.
In addition, pedestrians in the path of your vehi-
cle can be detected.
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake detects pedestrians using
typical characteristics such as the body con-
tours and posture of a person standing upright.
i
Observe the restrictions described in the
"Important safety notes" sec-
tion“ (
Y page 73).
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake will initially brake your vehi-
cle by a partial application of the brakes if a
danger of collision is detected. There may be
a collision unless you brake yourself. Even
after subsequent full application of the brakes
a collision cannot always be avoided, partic-
ularly when approaching at too high a speed.
There is a risk of an accident.
Always apply the brakes yourself and try to
take evasive action, provided it is safe to do
so.
In the event of a partial application of the brakes,
the vehicle is braked with up to 50% of the full
braking pressure.
G
WARNING
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake cannot always clearly iden-
tify objects and complex traffic conditions.
In these cases, PRE-SAFE
®
Brake may:
R
give an unnecessary warning and then
brake the vehicle
R
not give a warning or intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake, especially if
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake warns you. Terminate the
intervention in a non-critical driving situation.
G
WARNING
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake cannot always clearly iden-
tify people, especially if they are moving. In
these cases, PRE-SAFE
®
Brake cannot inter-
vene. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and be ready to brake, especially if
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake warns you.
In order to maintain the appropriate distance to
the vehicle in front and thus prevent a collision,
you must apply the brakes yourself.
G
WARNING
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake does not react:
R
to small people, e.g. children
R
to animals
R
to oncoming vehicles
R
to crossing traffic
R
when cornering
As a result, PRE-SAFE
®
Brake may neither
give warnings nor intervene in all critical sit-
uations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and be ready to brake.
In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, the rec-
ognition can be impaired.
Driving safety systems
73
Safety
Z
Recognition by the radar sensor system is also
impaired if:
R
there is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
R
there is interference by other radar sources
R
there are strong radar reflections, for exam-
ple in parking garages
R
a narrow vehicle is traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike
R
a vehicle is traveling in front on a different line
relative to the center of your vehicle
Recognition by the camera system is also
impaired in the event of:
R
dirt on the camera or if the camera is covered
R
glare on the camera system, e.g. from the sun
being low in the sky
R
darkness
R
or if:
-
pedestrians move quickly, e.g. into the path
of the vehicle
-
the camera system no longer recognizes a
pedestrian as a person due to special cloth-
ing or other objects
-
a pedestrian is concealed by other objects
-
the typical outline of a person is not distin-
guishable from the background
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,
have the configuration and operation of the
radar sensors checked at a qualified specialist
workshop. This also applies to collisions at slow
speeds where there is no visible damage to the
front of the vehicle.
Following damage
to the w
indshield, have the
configuration and operation of the camera sys-
tem checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Function
X
To activate/deactivate: activate or deacti-
vate PRE-SAFE
®
Brake in the on-board com-
puter (
Y page 204).
If the PRE-SAFE
®
Brake is not activated, the
æ symbol appears in the multifunction dis-
play.
Starting at a speed of around 4 mph (7 km/h),
this function warns you if you rapidly approach a
vehicle in front. An intermittent warning tone
will then sound and the · distance warning
lamp will light up in the instrument cluster.
X
Brake immediately to defuse the situation.
or
X
Take evasive action provided it is safe to do
so.
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake can also brake the vehicle
automatically under the following conditions:
R
the driver and front-passenger have their seat
belts fastened
and
R
the vehicle speed is between approximately
4 mph (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h)
At speeds of up to approximately 44 mph
(70 km/h) PRE-SAFE
®
Brake can also detect:
R
stationary objects in the path of your vehicle,
e.g. stopped or parked vehicles
R
pedestrians in the path of your vehicle
i
If there is an increased risk of a collision,
preventive passenger protection measures
(PRE-SAFE
®
) are triggered (Y page 56).
If the risk of collision with the vehicle in front
remains and you do not brake, take evasive
action or accelerate significantly, the vehicle
may perform automatic emergency braking, up
to the point of full brake application. Automatic
emergency braking is not performed until imme-
diately prior to an imminent accident.
You can prevent the intervention of the PRE-
SAFE
®
Brake at any time by:
R
depressing the accelerator pedal further.
R
activating kickdown.
R
releasing the brake pedal.
The braking action of PRE-SAFE
®
Brake is ended
automatically if:
R
you maneuver to avoid the obstacle.
R
there is no longer a risk of collision.
R
there is no longer an obstacle detected in
front of your vehicle.
Protection against theft
Immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents your vehicle from
being started without the correct SmartKey.
74
Protection against theft
Safety
X
To activate with the SmartKey: remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X
To activate with KEYLESS-GO: switch the
ignition off and open the driver's door.
X
To deactivate: switch on the ignition.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone
can start the engine if a valid SmartKey has been
left inside the vehicle.
i
The immobilizer is always deactivated when
you start the engine.
In the event that the engine cannot be started
(yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the sys-
tem is not operational. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
ATA (anti-theft alarm system)
X
To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or
KEYLESS-GO.
Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system
is armed after approximately 15 seconds.
X
To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
or
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
A visual and audible alarm is triggered if the
alarm system is armed and you open:
R
a door
R
the vehicle with the mechanical key
R
the trunk lid
R
the hood
X
To switch the alarm off with the Smart-
Key: press the % or & button on the
SmartKey.
The alarm is switched off.
or
X
Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-
tion lock.
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
The alarm is switched off.
X
To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
grasp the outside door handle. The SmartKey
must be outside the vehicle.
The alarm is switched off.
or
X
Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-
board. The SmartKey must be inside the vehi-
cle.
The alarm is switched off.
The alarm is not switched off, even if you close
the open door that triggered it, for example.
i
If the alarm continues for more than
30 seconds, the mbrace emergency call sys-
tem automatically notifies the Customer
Assistance Center. This is done either by text
message or data connection.
The emergency call system sends the mes-
sage or data
provi
ded that:
R
you have subscribed to the mbrace service.
R
the mbrace service has been activated
properly.
R
the necessary mobile phone network is
available.
Protection against theft
75
Safety
Z
SmartKey
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
R
open the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
R
get out and disrupt traffic.
R
operate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
R
Start the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
G
WARNING
If you attach heavy or large objects to the
SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-
tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could
cause the engine to be switched off. There is a
risk of an accident.
Do not attach any heavy or large objects to the
SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before
inserting the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
!
Keep the SmartKey away from strong mag-
netic fields. Otherwise, the remote control
function could be affected.
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicin-
ity of powerful electrical installations.
Do not keep the SmartKey:
R
with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone
or another SmartKey.
R
with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.
R
inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.
This can affect the functionality of the Smart-
Key.
SmartKey functions
:
& To lock the vehicle
;
F To unlock the trunk lid
=
% To unlock the vehicle
X
To unlock centrally: press the % button.
If you do not open the vehicle within approx-
imately 40 seconds of unlocking:
R
the vehicle is locked again.
R
anti-theft protection is reactivated.
X
To lock centrally: press the & button.
The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:
R
the doors
R
the trunk lid
R
the fuel filler flap
The turn signals flash once when unlocking and
three times when locking.
You can also set an audible signal to confirm
that the vehicle has been locked. The audible
signal can be activated and deactivated using
the on-board computer (
Y page 208).
When it is dark, the surround lighting also comes
on if it is activated in the on-board computer
(
Y page 207).
KEYLESS-GO
General notes
Bear in mind that the engine can be started by
any of the vehicle occupants if there is a KEY-
LESS-GO key in the vehicle (
Y page 129).
Locking/unlocking centrally
You can start, lock or unlock the vehicle using
KEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carry the
SmartKey with you. You can combine the func-
76
SmartKey
Opening and closing
tions of KEYLESS-GO with those of a conven-
tional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicle by using
KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lock it using the
& button on the SmartKey.
When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO,
the distance between the SmartKey and the cor-
responding door handle must not be greater
than 3 ft (1 m).
A check which periodically establishes a radio
connection between the vehicle and the Smart-
Key determines whether a valid SmartKey is in
the vehicle. This occurs, for example:
R
when the external door handles are touched
R
when starting the engine
R
while the vehicle is in motion
X
To unlock the vehicle: touch the inner sur-
face of the door handle.
X
To lock the vehicle: touch sensor sur-
face :.
X
Convenience closing feature: touch
recessed sensor surface ; for an extended
period.
Further information on the convenience clos-
ing feature (
Y page 88).
X
To unlock the trunk lid: pull the handle on
the trunk lid.
The vehicle only unlocks the trunk lid.
Deactivating and activating
If you do not intend to use a SmartKey for an
extended period of time, you can deactivate the
KEYLESS-GO function of the SmartKey. The
SmartKey will then use very little power, thereby
conserving battery power. For the purposes of
activation/deactivation, the vehicle must not be
nearby.
X
To deactivate: press the & button on the
SmartKey twice in rapid succession.
The battery check lamp of the SmartKey
(
Y page 79) flashes twice briefly and lights
up once, then KEYLESS-GO is deactivated.
X
To activate: press any button on the Smart-
Key.
or
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
KEYLESS-GO and all of its associated features
are available again.
Changing the settings of the locking
system
You can change the settings of the locking sys-
tem. This means that only the driver's door and
the fuel filler flap are unlocked when the vehicle
is unlocked. This is useful if you frequently travel
alone.
X
To change the setting: simultaneously press
the % and & buttons on the SmartKey
for approximately six seconds until the bat-
tery check lamp flashes twice (
Y page 79).
If the setting of the locking system is changed
within the signal range of the vehicle, pressing
the & or % button:
R
locks or
R
unlocks the vehicle
The SmartKey now functions as follows:
X
To unlock: press the % button once.
X
To unlock centrally: press the % button
twice.
X
To lock centrally: press the & button.
SmartKey
77
Opening and closing
Z
The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol-
lows:
X
To unlock the driver's door: touch the inner
surface of the door handle on the driver's
door.
X
To unlock centrally: touch the inner surface
of the door handle on the front-passenger
door or the rear door.
X
To lock centrally: touch the outer sensor
surface on one of the door handles.
X
To restore the factory settings: press and
hold down the % and & buttons simul-
taneously for approximately six seconds until
the battery check lamp flashes twice
(
Y page 79).
Mechanical key
General notes
If the vehicle can no longer be locked or
unlocked with the SmartKey, use the mechani-
cal key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door or the trunk lid, the anti-
theft alarm system will be triggered. Switch off
the alarm (
Y page 75).
If you unlock the vehicle using the mechanical
key, the fuel filler flap will not be unlocked auto-
matically.
X
To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert the
SmartKey into the ignition lock.
Removing the mechanical key
X
Push release catch : in the direction of the
arrow and at the same time remove mechan-
ical key ; from the SmartKey.
For further information about:
R
unlocking the driver's door (Y page 83)
R
unlocking the trunk (Y page 86)
R
locking the vehicle (Y page 83)
Inserting the mechanical key
X
Push mechanical key ; completely into the
SmartKey until it engages and release
catch : is back in its basic position.
SmartKey battery
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-
ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in
severe health problems. There is a risk of fatal
injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
a battery is swallowed, seek medical attention
immediately.
H
Environmental note
Batteries contain dangerous
substances. It is against the
law to dispose of them with
the household rubbish. They
must be collected separately
and recycled to protect the
environment.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally friendly
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified spe-
cialist workshop or a special
collection point for used bat-
teries.
The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate
material, which may require special handling
and regard for the environment. National guide-
lines must be observed during disposal. In Cal-
ifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
78
SmartKey
Opening and closing
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
batteries replaced at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Checking the battery
X
Press the & or % button.
The battery is working properly if battery
check lamp : lights up briefly.
The battery is discharged if battery check
lamp : does not light up briefly.
X
Change the battery (Y page 79).
If the SmartKey battery is checked within the
signal reception range of the vehicle, pressing
the & or % button:
R
locks or
R
unlocks the vehicle
i
You can get a battery at any qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Replacing the battery
You require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.
X
Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey
(
Y page 78).
X
Press mechanical key ; into the SmartKey
opening in the direction of the arrow until bat-
tery compartment cover : opens. Do not
hold battery compartment cover : closed
while doing so.
X
Remove battery compartment cover :.
X
Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your
palm until battery = falls out.
X
Insert the new battery with the positive ter-
minal facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to
do so.
X
Make sure that the surface of the battery is
free of lint, grease and other contaminants.
X
Insert the front tabs of battery compartment
cover : into the housing and then press to
close it.
X
Insert mechanical key ; into the SmartKey
(
Y page 78).
X
Check the function of all SmartKey buttons on
the vehicle.
SmartKey
79
Opening and closing
Z
Problems with the SmartKey
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
You can no longer lock or
unlock the vehicle using
the SmartKey.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 79) and replace it if necessary
(
Y page 79).
If this does not work:
X
Unlock (Y page 83) or lock (Y page 83) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X
Unlock (Y page 83) or lock (Y page 83) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
The SmartKey is faulty.
X
Unlock (Y page 83) or lock (Y page 83) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
X
Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
You can no longer lock or
unlock the vehicle using
KEYLESS-GO.
KEYLESS-GO was deactivated.
X
Reactivate KEYLESS-GO (Y page 76).
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 79) and replace it if necessary
(
Y page 79).
If this does not work:
X
Unlock (Y page 83) or lock (Y page 83) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X
Unlock (Y page 83) or lock (Y page 83) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.
X
Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the
SmartKey.
X
Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote con-
trol function:
X
Unlock (Y page 83) or lock (Y page 83) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
X
Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
80
SmartKey
Opening and closing
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The engine cannot be
started using the Smart-
Key.
The on-board voltage is too low.
X
Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
lighting, and try to start the engine again.
If this does not work:
X
Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 293).
or
X
Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 294).
or
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be
started using KEYLESS-
GO. The SmartKey is in
the vehicle.
The vehicle is locked.
X
Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.
There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.
X
Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
You have lost a Smart-
Key.
X
Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X
If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
You have lost the
mechanical key.
X
Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X
If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
Doors
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
R
open the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
R
get out and disrupt traffic.
R
operate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
R
Start the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
Unlocking and opening doors from
the inside
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked.
If the vehicle has previously been locked from
the outside, opening a door from the inside will
trigger the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off
the alarm (
Y page 75).
You can only open the rear doors from inside the
vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof
locks (
Y page 63).
Doors
81
Opening and closing
Z
X
To unlock a front door: pull door handle ;.
Locking knob : pops up.
The door is unlocked and can be opened.
X
To open a front door: pull door handle ;.
X
To unlock a rear door: pull up locking
knob :.
The door is unlocked and can be opened.
X
To open a rear door: pull door handle ;.
Centrally locking and unlocking the
vehicle from the inside
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from
the inside. The switches are on the driver’s door.
X
To unlock: press button :.
X
To lock: press button ;.
If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks.
Meanwhile, the fuel filler flap will not be locked
or unlocked.
If the vehicle has been locked from the outside,
it cannot be centrally unlocked from the inside.
You can open a door from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked.
You can only open the rear doors from inside the
vehicle if they are not secured by the child-proof
locks (
Y page 63).
If a locked door is opened from the inside, the
previous unlock status of the vehicle will be
taken into consideration if:
R
the vehicle was locked using the locking but-
ton for the central locking, or
R
if the vehicle was locked automatically
The vehicle will be fully unlocked if it had previ-
ously been fully unlocked. If only the driver's
door had been previously unlocked, only the
door which has been opened from the inside is
unlocked.
Automatic locking feature
X
To deactivate: press and hold button : for
about five seconds until a tone sounds.
X
To activate: press and hold button ; for
about five seconds until a tone sounds.
If you press one of the two buttons and do not
hear a tone, the relevant setting has already
been selected.
The vehicle is locked automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn-
ing.
You could therefore lock yourself out if:
R
the vehicle is being pushed.
R
the vehicle is being towed.
R
the vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.
You can also switch the automatic locking func-
tion on and off using the on-board computer
(
Y page 207).
82
Doors
Opening and closing
Unlocking/locking the driver's door
using the mechanical key
i
If you want to centrally lock the vehicle using
the mechanical key, begin by pressing the
locking button for the interior locking mech-
anism while the driver's door is open. Then
lock the driver's door using the mechanical
key.
X
To unlock: turn the mechanical key counter-
clockwise as far as it will go to position 1.
X
To lock: turn the mechanical key clockwise as
far as it will go to position 1.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver's door, the anti-theft alarm sys-
tem will be triggered. Switch off the alarm
(
Y page 75).
Trunk
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a
risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
open.
!
The trunk lid swings upwards when opened.
Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient
clearance above the trunk lid.
The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be
found in the "Vehicle data" section
(
Y page 336).
You should preferably place luggage or loads in
the trunk. Observe the loading guidelines
(
Y page 251).
Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. You
could otherwise lock yourself out.
Vehicles without the trunk lid remote clos-
ing feature: the trunk lid can be:
R
opened and closed manually from outside
R
opened automatically from outside
R
opened automatically from inside
R
locked separately
R
opened with the emergency release button
R
unlocked with the mechanical key
Vehicles with the trunk lid remote closing
feature: the trunk lid can be:
R
opened and closed manually from outside
R
opened/closed automatically from outside
R
opened/closed automatically from inside
R
locked separately
R
opened with the emergency release button
R
unlocked with the mechanical key
Trunk lid reversing feature
The trunk lid is equipped with an automatic
reversing feature. It reacts if a solid object
obstructs or restricts the trunk lid during the
closing procedure. The trunk lid opens again
automatically. The automatic reversing feature
is only an aid and is not a substitute for your
attentiveness to the trunk lid while it is closing.
G
WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
R
to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
gers
R
over the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closing
movement
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
uations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure.
Trunk
83
Opening and closing
Z
If somebody becomes trapped:
R
press the F button on the SmartKey, or
R
pull or press the remote operating switch
on the driver's door or
R
press the closing or locking button on the
trunk lid, or
R
pull on the trunk lid handle
Opening/closing from outside
Opening
X
Press the % button on the SmartKey .
X
Pull handle :.
X
Raise the trunk lid.
Closing
X
Pull the trunk lid down using recess :.
X
If necessary, lock the vehicle with the &
button on the SmartKey (
Y page 76) or with
KEYLESS-GO (
Y page 76).
If KEYLESS-GO detects only one SmartKey in the
trunk after it closed, the trunk lid opens again. If
KEYLESS-GO detects a second SmartKey out-
side the vehicle, the trunk lid remains closed.
Opening/closing automatically from
outside
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped dur-
ing automatic closing of the trunk lid. More-
over, people, e.g. children, may be standing in
the closing area or may enter the closing area
during the closing process. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
closing area during the closing process.
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
R
press the F button on the SmartKey.
R
pull or press the remote operating switch
on the driver's door.
R
press the closing or locking button on the
trunk lid.
R
pull the trunk lid handle
G
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a
risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
open.
!
The trunk lid swings upwards when opened.
Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient
clearance above the trunk lid.
The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be
found in the "Vehicle data" section
(
Y page 336).
84
Trunk
Opening and closing
Opening
You can open the trunk lid automatically using
the SmartKey or the handle in the trunk lid.
X
Press and hold the F button on the Smart-
Key until the trunk lid opens.
or
X
If the trunk is unlocked, pull the trunk lid han-
dle and release it again immediately
(
Y page 84).
Closing
X
Press closing button : in the trunk lid.
Vehicles with trunk lid remote closing fea-
ture: you can simultaneously close the trunk lid
and lock the vehicle. The KEYLESS-GO key must
be in the rear detection range of the vehicle.
X
Press locking button ; in the trunk lid.
If all the doors are closed, the vehicle locks.
If KEYLESS-GO detects only one SmartKey in the
trunk after it closed, the trunk lid opens again. If
KEYLESS-GO detects a second SmartKey out-
side the vehicle, the trunk lid remains closed.
Opening/closing automatically from
inside
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
R
to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
gers
R
over the last 1/3 in (8 mm) of the closing
movement
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
uations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure.
If somebody becomes trapped:
R
press the F button on the SmartKey, or
R
pull or press the remote operating switch
on the driver's door or
R
press the closing or locking button on the
trunk lid, or
R
pull on the trunk lid handle
G
WARNING
The trunk lid can be automatically opened or
closed even if the SmartKey is not in the vehi-
cle. If children are left unsupervised in the
vehicle, they could activate the functions.
There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
G
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a
risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
open.
!
The trunk lid swings upwards when opened.
Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient
clearance above the trunk lid.
The opening dimensions of the trunk lid can be
found in the "Vehicle data" section
(
Y page 336).
Trunk
85
Opening and closing
Z
Opening and closing
X
To open: pull remote operating switch for
trunk lid : until the trunk lid opens.
X
To close: press remote operating switch for
trunk lid : until the trunk lid is completely
closed.
You can open and close the trunk lid from the
driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary and
unlocked.
Unlocking the trunk
!
The trunk lid swings upwards when opened.
Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient
clearance above the trunk lid.
If the trunk cannot be unlocked with the Smart-
Key or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical key.
If you use the mechanical key to unlock and
open the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm system
will be triggered. Switch off the alarm
(
Y page 75).
X
Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey
(
Y page 78).
X
Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lid
lock as far as it will go.
X
Turn the mechanical key from position 1
counter-clockwise as far as it will go to posi-
tion 2. Simultaneously pull the trunk lid han-
dle.
The trunk is unlocked.
X
Turn the mechanical key back to position 1
and remove it.
X
Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey
(
Y page 78).
Trunk emergency release
You can open the trunk lid from inside the vehi-
cle with the emergency release button.
X
Press emergency release button : briefly.
The trunk lid unlocks and opens.
The trunk lid can be unlocked and opened with
the trunk lid emergency release when the vehi-
cle is stationary or while driving.
The trunk lid emergency release does not open
the trunk lid if the battery is disconnected or
discharged.
Trunk lid emergency release light:
R
Emergency release button : flashes for
30 minutes after the trunk lid is opened.
R
Emergency release button : flashes for
60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed.
Side windows
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts
could become trapped between the side win-
dow and the door frame as the side window
moves. There is a risk of injury.
86
Side windows
Opening and closing
Make sure that nobody touches the side win-
dow during the opening procedure. If some-
body becomes trapped, release the switch or
pull the switch to close the side window again.
G
WARNING
While closing the side windows, body parts in
the closing area could become trapped. There
is a risk of injury.
When closing make sure that no parts of the
body are in the closing area. If somebody
becomes trapped, release the switch or press
the switch to open the side window again.
G
WARNING
If children operate the side windows they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
Activate the override feature for the rear side
windows. When leaving the vehicle, always
take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-
cle. Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
Side window reversing feature
The side windows are equipped with an auto-
matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks
or restricts a side window during the closing
process, the side window opens again automat-
ically. However, the automatic reversing feature
is only an aid and is not a substitute for your
attentiveness when closing a side window.
G
WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
R
to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
gers
R
over the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closing
movement
R
during resetting
R
when closing the side window again man-
ually immediately after automatic reversing
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
uations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure. If
someone becomes trapped, press the switch
to open the side window again.
Opening and closing the side win-
dows
The switches for all side windows are located on
the driver's door. There is also a switch on each
door for the corresponding side window.
The switches on the driver's door take prece-
dence.
:
Front left
;
Front right
=
Rear right
?
Rear left
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X
To open manually: press and hold the cor-
responding switch.
X
To open fully: press the switch beyond the
point of resistance and release it.
Automatic operation is started.
X
To close manually: pull and hold the corre-
sponding switch.
X
To close fully: pull the corresponding switch
beyond the pressure point.
Automatic operation is started.
X
To interrupt automatic operation: press/
pull the corresponding switch again.
If you press/pull the switch beyond the point of
resistance, automatic operation is started in the
corresponding direction. You can stop auto-
matic operation by pressing/pulling the switch
again.
Side windows
87
Opening and closing
Z
You can continue to operate the side windows
after you switch off the engine or remove the
SmartKey. This function is available for up to five
minutes or until the driver's or front-passenger
door is opened.
When the override feature for the side windows
is activated, the side windows cannot be oper-
ated from the rear (
Y page 63).
Convenience opening
General notes
You can ventilate the vehicle before you start
driving. To do this, the SmartKey is used to carry
out the following functions simultaneously:
R
unlock the vehicle
R
open the side windows
R
open the sliding sunroof
R
switch on the seat ventilation for the driver's
seat
The convenience opening feature can only be
operated using the SmartKey. The SmartKey
must be in close proximity to the vehicle.
The "convenience opening" feature is also avail-
able when the vehicle is unlocked.
Convenience opening
X
Press and hold the % button until the side
windows and the sliding sunroof are in the
desired position.
X
To interrupt convenience opening: release
the % button.
Convenience closing feature
Important safety notes
Information on the side window reversing fea-
ture (
Y page 87).
G
WARNING
When the convenience closing feature is oper-
ating, parts of the body could become trapped
in the closing area of the side window and the
sliding sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Observe the complete closing procedure
when the convenience closing feature is oper-
ating. Make sure that no body parts are in
close proximity during the closing procedure.
Proceed as follows if someone is trapped:
With the SmartKey:
X
Release the & button.
X
Press and hold the % button until the side
windows and the sliding sunroof or the pano-
rama roof with power tilt/sliding panel open
again.
With KEYLESS-GO:
X
Release the sensor surface on the door han-
dle.
X
Pull the door handle immediately and hold it.
The side windows and the sliding sunroof or
the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel open.
General notes
When you lock the vehicle, you can simultane-
ously:
R
close the side windows
R
close the sliding sunroof
Using the SmartKey
X
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: point the tip
of the SmartKey at the door handle on the
driver's door.
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: the SmartKey
must be in close proximity to the vehicle.
X
Press and hold the & button until the side
windows and the sliding sunroof are fully
closed.
X
Press and hold the & button until the side
windows are fully closed.
X
Make sure that all the side windows and the
sliding sunroof are closed.
X
Make sure that all the side windows are
closed.
X
To interrupt convenience closing: release
the & button.
Using KEYLESS-GO
The driver's door and the door at which the han-
dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey
must be outside the vehicle. The gap between
88
Side windows
Opening and closing
the SmartKey and the corresponding door han-
dle should not be greater than 3 ft (1 m).
X
Touch recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle until the side windows and the
sliding sunroof are fully closed.
X
Touch recessed sensor surface : on the
door handle until the side windows are fully
closed.
i
Make sure you only touch recessed sensor
surface :.
X
Make sure that all the side windows and the
sliding sunroof are closed.
X
Make sure that all the side windows are
closed.
X
To interrupt convenience closing: release
recessed sensor surface : on the door han-
dle.
Resetting the side windows
If a side window can no longer be closed fully,
you must reset it.
X
Close all the doors.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X
Pull the corresponding switch on the door
control panel until the side window is com-
pletely closed (
Y page 87).
X
Hold the switch for an additional second.
If the side window opens again slightly:
X
Immediately pull the corresponding switch on
the door control panel until the side window is
completely closed (
Y page 87).
X
Hold the switch for an additional second.
X
If the respective side window remains closed
after the button is released, then it has been
set correctly. If this is not the case, repeat the
steps above again.
Side windows
89
Opening and closing
Z
Problems with the side windows
G
WARNING
If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side window
closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of the
body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release
the switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
A side window cannot be
closed because it is
blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window
guide.
X
Remove the objects.
X
Close the side window.
A side window cannot be
closed and you cannot
see the cause.
If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again
slightly:
X
Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch
again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased force.
If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again
slightly:
X
Immediately after the window blocks, pull the corresponding switch
again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the automatic reversing feature.
Sliding sunroof
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
While opening and closing the sliding sunroof,
body parts in close proximity could become
trapped. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the opening and closing pro-
cedures.
If somebody becomes trapped:
R
release the switch immediately, or
R
during automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
The opening or closing procedure will be stop-
ped.
G
WARNING
If children operate the sliding sunroof they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
!
Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of
snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may
occur.
Do not allow anything to protrude from the
sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be
damaged.
!
The weather can change abruptly. It could
start to rain or snow. Make sure that the slid-
ing sunroof is closed when you leave the vehi-
cle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged if
water enters the vehicle interior.
90
Sliding sunroof
Opening and closing
Resonance noises can occur in addition to the
usual airflow noises when the sliding sunroof is
open. They are caused by minor pressure fluc-
tuations in the vehicle interior. Change the posi-
tion of the sliding sunroof or open a side window
slightly to reduce or eliminate these noises.
Sliding sunroof reversing feature
The sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto-
matic reversing feature. If a solid object blocks
or restricts the sliding sunroof during the closing
process, the sliding sunroof opens again auto-
matically. However, the automatic reversing
feature is only an aid and is not a substitute for
your attentiveness when closing the sliding sun-
roof.
G
WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
R
to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
gers
R
over the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the closing
movement
R
during resetting
R
when closing the sliding sunroof again man-
ually immediately after automatic reversing
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
uations. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure.
If somebody becomes trapped:
R
release the switch immediately, or
R
press the switch in any direction during the
automatic closing process
The closing process is stopped.
Operating the sliding sunroof
Opening and closing
:
To raise
;
To open
=
To close/lower
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
X
Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre-
sponding direction.
If you press the 3 switch beyond the point of
resistance, an automatic opening/closing proc-
ess is started in the corresponding direction.
You can stop automatic operation by pressing/
pulling the switch again. The automatic opening
and raising feature is available only when the
sliding sunroof is closed.
The sun protection cover automatically opens
along with the sliding sunroof. You can open or
close the sun protection cover manually when
the sliding sunroof is raised or closed.
You can continue to operate the sliding sunroof
after switching off the engine or removing the
SmartKey from the ignition lock. This function
remains active for five minutes or until you open
a front door.
Resetting
!
If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened
or closed fully after resetting, contact a quali-
fied specialist workshop.
Reset the sliding sunroof if it does not move
smoothly.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
X
Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear
(
Y page 91).
Sliding sunroof
91
Opening and closing
Z
X
Keep the 3 switch pressed for another
second.
X
Make sure that the sliding sunroof can be fully
opened and closed again (
Y page 91).
X
If this is not the case, repeat the steps above.
92
Sliding sunroof
Opening and closing
Problems with the sliding sunroof
G
WARNING
If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding
sunroof closes with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts
of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
If somebody becomes trapped:
R
release the switch immediately, or
R
press the switch in any direction during the automatic closing process
The closing process is stopped.
!
If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as a result of a malfunction, contact a
qualified specialist workshop.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The sliding sunroof can-
not be closed and you
cannot see the cause.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again
slightly:
X
Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3 switch in
the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold
it until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed with increased force.
If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again during closing and then
reopens slightly:
X
Immediately after the sliding sunroof blocks, pull the 3 switch in
the overhead control panel down to the point of resistance and hold
it until the sliding sunroof is closed.
The sliding sunroof is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.
Sliding sunroof
93
Opening and closing
Z
Correct driver's seat position
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
Observe the following when adjusting steering
wheel :, seat belt ; and driver's seat =:
R
you are as far away from the driver's air bag as
possible.
R
you are sitting in a normal upright position.
R
your thighs are slightly supported by the seat
cushion.
R
your legs are not entirely stretched and you
can depress the pedals properly.
R
the back of your head is supported at eye level
by the center of the head restraint.
R
you can hold the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent.
R
you can move your legs freely.
R
you can see all the displays in the instrument
cluster clearly.
R
you should have a good overview of traffic
conditions.
R
the seat belt is pulled snugly against the body
and is routed across the center of your shoul-
der and across your hips in the pelvic area.
Further related subjects:
R
Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 95)
R
Adjusting the steering wheel (Y page 100)
R
Fastening the seat belt correctly (Y page 44).
R
Adjusting the rear-view mirror and exterior
mirrors (
Y page 103).
R
Storing the seat, steering wheel and exterior
mirror settings using the memory function
(
Y page 105).
Seats
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Children could become trapped if they adjust
the seats, particularly when unattended.
There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
The seats can still be adjusted when there is no
SmartKey in the ignition lock.
G
WARNING
If the head restraints are not installed or not
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-
tection as intended. There is an increased risk
of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints instal-
led. Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head
restraint supports the back of the head at
about eye level.
Observe the safety notes on "Air bags"
(
Y page 46) and "Children in the Vehicle"
(
Y page 58).
94
Seats
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
G
WARNING
If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or
other vehicle occupants could be trapped and
thereby injured. Children in particular could
accidentally press the electrical seat adjust-
ment buttons and become trapped. There is a
risk of injury.
While moving the seats, make sure that your
hands or other body parts do not get under the
lever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-
tem.
G
WARNING
When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle
occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the
seat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one
has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.
!
To avoid damage to the seats and the seat
heating, observe the following information:
R
keep liquids from spilling on the seats. If
liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as
soon as possible.
R
if the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
switch on the seat heating. The seat heat-
ing should also not be used to dry the seats.
R
clean the seat covers as recommended;
see "Interior care".
R
do not transport heavy loads on the seats.
Do not place sharp objects on the seat
cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools. The
seats should only be occupied by passen-
gers, if possible.
R
when the seat heating is in operation, do
not cover the seats with insulating materi-
als, e.g. blankets, coats, bags, seat covers,
child seats or booster seats.
!
Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwell under or behind the seats when mov-
ing the seats back. There is a risk that the
seats and/or the objects could be damaged.
i
The head restraints in the front seats are
installed with the NECK-PRO system
(
Y page 55). For this reason, it is not possible
to remove the head restraints from the front
seats.
For more information, contact a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
i Further related subjects:
R
Rear bench seat through-loading feature
(
Y page 46)
Adjusting the seats
:
Head restraint height
;
Seat cushion angle
=
Seat height
?
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment
A
Backrest angle
i
If PRE-SAFE
®
is activated and the front-
passenger seat is in an unfavorable position,
it is moved to a better position.
i
You can store the seat settings using the
memory function (
Y page 105).
i
Vehicles with the through-loading feature: if
you fold down a rear seat backrest, the
respective front seat is moved forwards
slightly if necessary. This prevents the seats
from colliding.
Seats
95
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
Adjusting the head restraints
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
G
WARNING
If the head restraints are not installed or not
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-
tection as intended. There is an increased risk
of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints instal-
led. Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head
restraint supports the back of the head at
about eye level.
Do not rotate the head restraints of the front and
rear seats. Otherwise, you cannot adjust the
height and angle of the head restraints to the
correct position.
Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the
head restraint so that it is as close as possible to
your head.
Observe the important safety notes regarding
the seats (
Y page 94).
Adjusting the head restraint height
electrically
X
Slide switch for head restraint height adjust-
ment : up or down in the direction of the
arrow.
Adjusting the luxury head restraints
X
To adjust the side bolsters of the head
restraint: push or pull right and/or left-hand
side bolster : into the desired position.
X
To adjust the angle of the head restraint:
push or pull the head restraint in the direction
of arrow ;.
i
Adjust the head restraint so that the back of
your head is as close to the head restraint as
possible.
Rear seat head restraints
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraints so that they are as
close as possible to your head. This will
96
Seats
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
reduce the potential for injury to the head and
neck in the event of an accident or similar sit-
uation.
Whenever the rear seats are occupied, only
drive the vehicle with the head restraints
installed and engaged. Head restraints are
intended to help reduce injuries during an
accident.
Adjusting the rear seat head restraint
angle
X
Pull or push the top of the head restraint until
it is in the desired position.
Removing and installing the rear seat
head restraints
G
WARNING
If the head restraints are not installed or not
adjusted correctly, they cannot provide pro-
tection as intended. There is an increased risk
of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the
event of an accident or when braking.
Always drive with the head restraints instal-
led. Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicle occupant that the center of the head
restraint supports the back of the head at
about eye level.
!
Make sure that the rear window roller sun-
blind has been retracted before the rear head
restraints are removed. You could otherwise
damage the roller sunblind.
The head restraints can only be removed if the
rear seat folds forward.
X
To remove: press release catch : and pull
the head restraint out of the guides.
X
To re-install: insert the head restraint so that
the notches on the bar are on the left when
viewed in the direction of travel.
X
Push the head restraint down until you hear it
engage in position.
Adjusting the multicontour seat
The multicontour seat function is only available
for vehicles in Canada.
:
To adjust the thigh cushion
;
To adjust the backrest contour in the lumbar
region
=
To adjust the backrest contour in the upper
back region
?
To adjust the side bolsters of the seat back-
rest
You can adjust the contour of the front seat
individually so as to provide optimum support
for your back and sides.
Seats
97
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 127).
Adjusting the active multicontour
seat
The active multicontour seat is only available for
the driver's side.
You can adjust the active multicontour seat via
the multimedia system. You can find further
information in the separate multimedia system
operating instructions.
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
:
To raise the backrest contour
;
To soften the backrest contour
=
To lower the backrest contour
?
To harden the backrest contour
You can adjust the contour of the front seat
backrests individually to provide optimum sup-
port for your back.
Seat heating and seat ventilation
Switching the seat heating on/off
G
WARNING
Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can
cause the seat cushion and backrest pads to
become very hot. The health of persons with
limited temperature sensitivity or a limited
ability to react to excessively high tempera-
tures may be affected or they may even suffer
burn-like injuries. There is a risk of injury.
Therefore, do not switch the seat heating on
repeatedly.
Driver's and front-passenger seat
The three red indicator lamps in the button indi-
cate the heating level you have selected.
The system automatically switches down from
level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight
minutes.
The system automatically switches down from
level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
minutes.
The system automatically switches off approx-
imately 20 minutes after it is set to level 1.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (
Y page 127).
X
To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired heating level is set.
X
To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
Switching the seat ventilation on/off
Driver's and front-passenger seat
The three blue indicator lamps in the buttons
indicate the ventilation level you have selected.
98
Seats
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (
Y page 127).
X
To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until the desired ventilation level is set.
X
To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all the indicator lamps go out.
i
If the battery voltage is too low, the seat
ventilation may switch off.
i
You can open the side windows and the slid-
ing sunroof using the "Convenience opening"
feature (
Y page 88). The seat ventilation of
the driver's seat automatically switches to the
highest level.
Seats
99
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
Problems with the seat heating or seat ventilation
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The seat heating or seat
ventilation has switched
off prematurely or can-
not be switched on.
The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-
ers are switched on.
X
Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the
rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating or seat
ventilation can be switched back on manually.
Steering wheel
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
G
WARNING
Children could injure themselves if they
adjust the steering wheel. There is a risk of
injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
The electrically adjustable steering wheel can
still be adjusted when there is no SmartKey in
the ignition lock.
Adjusting the steering wheel electri-
cally
:
To adjust the steering wheel height
;
To adjust the steering wheel position (fore-
and-aft adjustment)
i Further related subjects:
R
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature (Y page 102)
R
Storing settings (Y page 105)
Steering wheel heating
Switching on/off
100
Steering wheel
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 127).
X
To switch on/off: turn the lever in the direc-
tion of arrow : or ;.
Indicator lamp = lights up or goes out.
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: when you
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock, the
steering wheel heating is deactivated.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: when you switch off
the ignition and open the driver's door, the
steering wheel heating is deactivated.
i The steering wheel heating may switch off
temporarily if:
R
the temperature in the vehicle interior is
above 86 (30 †)
R
the temperature of the steering wheel is
above 95 (35 †).
Indicator lamp = remains on.
Steering wheel
101
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
Problems with the steering wheel heating
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The steering wheel heat-
ing has switched off pre-
maturely or cannot be
switched on.
The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-
ers are switched on.
X
Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the
rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the steering wheel heating
will switch back on automatically.
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
the steering wheel, you and other vehicle
occupants particularly children could
become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-
ing adjustments, make sure that no one has
any body parts in the sweep of the steering
wheel.
Move the steering wheel adjustment lever if
there is a risk of entrapment by the steering
wheel. The adjustment process is stopped.
Vehicles with a memory function: if there is a
risk of becoming trapped by the steering wheel,
you can also one of the memory function posi-
tion buttons. The adjustment process is stop-
ped.
G
WARNING
If children activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT fea-
ture, they can become trapped, particularly
when unattended. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
G
WARNING
If you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT
feature is making adjustments, you could lose
control of the vehicle. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always wait until the adjustment process is
complete before driving off.
The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes getting in
and out of your vehicle easier.
You can activate and deactivate the EASY-
ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-board computer
(
Y page 208).
Position of the steering wheel when the
EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is active
The steering wheel swings upwards when you:
R
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
R
with KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door;
KEYLESS-GO must be in position 1
R
with the SmartKey: open the driver's door;
the SmartKey is in position 0 or 1 must be in
the ignition lock (
Y page 127).
i
The steering wheel only moves upwards if it
has not already reached the upper stop.
Position of the steering wheel for driv-
ing
The steering wheel is moved to the last selected
position when:
R
the driver's door is closed
R
with KEYLESS-GO: you press the Start/Stop
button once
or
R
with the SmartKey: you insert the SmartKey
into the ignition lock
When you close the driver's door with the igni-
tion switched on, the steering wheel is also
automatically moved to the previously set posi-
tion.
102
Steering wheel
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
The last position of the steering wheel is stored
when you switch off the ignition or when you
store the setting with the memory function
(
Y page 105).
Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature
If the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is trig-
gered in an accident, the steering column will
move upwards when the driver's door is opened.
This occurs irrespective of the position of the
SmartKey in the ignition lock. This makes it eas-
ier to exit the vehicle and rescue the occupants.
The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature is only
operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRY feature is
activated in the on-board computer
(
Y page 208).
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is a risk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting the engine.
G
WARNING
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side reduces the size of the image. Visible
objects are actually closer than they appear.
This means that you could misjudge the dis-
tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.
when changing lane. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
For this reason, always make sure of the
actual distance from the road users traveling
behind by glancing over your shoulder.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (
Y page 127).
X
Press button : for the left-hand exterior mir-
ror or button ; for the right-hand exterior
mirror.
The indicator lamp in the corresponding but-
ton lights up in red.
The indicator lamp goes out again after some
time. You can adjust the selected mirror using
adjustment button = as long as the indicator
lamp is lit.
X
Press adjustment button = up, down, or to
the left or right until you have adjusted the
exterior mirror to the correct position. You
should have a good overview of traffic condi-
tions.
The convex exterior mirrors provide a larger field
of vision.
After the engine has been started, the exterior
mirrors are automatically heated if the rear win-
dow defroster is switched on and the outside
temperature is low. Heating takes a maximum of
ten minutes.
i
You can also heat up the exterior mirrors
manually by switching on the rear window
defroster.
Mirrors
103
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
electrically
This function is only available in Canada.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (
Y page 127).
X
Briefly press button :.
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
i
Make sure that the exterior mirrors are
always folded out fully while driving. They
could otherwise vibrate.
i
If you are driving faster than 30 mph
(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exte-
rior mirrors.
Setting the exterior mirrors
If the battery has been disconnected or com-
pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be
reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not
fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when
locking" function in the on-board computer
(
Y page 208).
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 127).
X
Briefly press button :.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
automatically
This function is only available in Canada.
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is
activated in the on-board computer
(
Y page 208):
R
the exterior mirrors fold in automatically as
soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside.
R
the exterior mirrors fold out again automati-
cally as soon as you unlock the vehicle and
then open the driver's or front-passenger
door.
i
If the exterior mirrors have been folded in
manually, they do not fold out.
Exterior mirror pushed out of position
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of
position, proceed as follows:
X
Vehicles without electrically folding exte-
rior mirrors: move the exterior mirror into
the correct position manually.
X
Vehicles with electrically folding exterior
mirrors: press and hold mirror-folding button
until you hear a click and then the mirrors
engage in position (
Y page 104).
The mirror housing is engaged again and you
can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual
(
Y page 103).
Automatic anti-glare mirrors
G
WARNING
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto-
matic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte
is harmful and causes irritation. It must not
come into contact with your skin, eyes, res-
piratory organs or clothing or be swallowed.
There is a risk of injury.
If you come into contact with the electrolyte,
observe the following:
R
Rinse off the electrolyte from your skin
immediately with water.
R
Immediately rinse the electrolyte out of
your eyes thoroughly with clean water.
R
If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not
induce vomiting.
R
If electrolyte comes into contact with your
skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical
attention immediately.
R
Immediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with electrolyte.
R
If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
attention immediately.
104
Mirrors
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on
the driver's side automatically go into anti-glare
mode if the following conditions are met simul-
taneously:
R
the ignition is switched on and
R
incident light from headlamps strikes the sen-
sor in the rear-view mirror
The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if
reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting
is switched on.
Parking position for the exterior mir-
ror on the front-passenger side
Setting and storing the parking position
You can position the front-passenger side exte-
rior mirror in such a way that you can see the
rear wheel on that side as soon as you engage
reverse gear. You can store this position.
Using reverse gear
:
Button for the driver's side exterior mirror
;
Button for the front-passenger side exterior
mirror
=
Adjustment button
?
Memory button M
X
Stop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey to
position 2 in the ignition lock (
Y page 127).
X
Press button ; for the exterior mirror on the
front-passenger side.
X
Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the preset parking position.
X
Use adjustment button = to adjust the exte-
rior mirror to a position that allows you to see
the rear wheel and the curb.
The parking position is stored.
i
If you shift the transmission to another posi-
tion, the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side returns to the driving position.
Using the memory button
You can store the parking position of the exte-
rior mirror on the front-passenger side using
memory button M ?. The reverse gear must not
be engaged.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 127).
X
With the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side activated, use adjustment
button = to adjust the exterior mirror. In the
exterior mirror, the rear wheel and the curb
should be visible.
X
Press memory button M ? and one of the
arrows on adjustment button = within three
seconds.
The parking position is stored if the exterior
mirror does not move.
X
If the mirror moves out of position, repeat
these steps.
Calling up a stored parking position set-
ting
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 127).
X
Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-
passenger side using button ;.
X
Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the stored parking position.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side
moves back to its original position:
R
as soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph
(15 km/h)
R
if you press button : for the exterior mirror
on the driver's side
Memory function
Storing settings
G
WARNING
If you use the memory function on the driver's
side while driving, you could lose control of
Memory function
105
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
the vehicle as a result of the adjustments
being made. There is a risk of an accident.
Only use the memory function on the driver's
side when the vehicle is stationary.
G
WARNING
Children could become trapped if they acti-
vate the memory function, particularly when
unattended. There is a risk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
G
WARNING
When the memory function adjusts the seat or
steering wheel, you and other vehicle occu-
pants particularly children could become
trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While the memory function is making adjust-
ments, make sure that no one has any body
parts in the sweep of the seat or steering
wheel. If somebody becomes trapped, imme-
diately release the memory function position
button. The adjustment process is stopped.
The memory function can be used at any time,
e.g. even when the SmartKey isn't in the ignition
lock.
With the memory function, you can store up to
three different settings, e.g. for three different
people.
The following settings are stored as a single
memory preset:
R
position of the seat, backrest and head
restraint
R
active multicontour seat: seat contour,
dynamic function level
R
driver's side: position of the exterior mirrors
on the driver's and front-passenger sides
X
Adjust the seat (Y page 95).
X
On the driver's side, adjust the steering wheel
(
Y page 100) and the exterior mirrors
(
Y page 103).
X
Press memory button M and one of the stor-
age position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within three
seconds.
The settings are stored in the selected preset
position. A tone sounds when the settings
have been completed.
Calling up a stored setting
X
Press and hold the relevant storage position
button 1, 2 or 3, until the seat, steering wheel
and exterior mirrors are in the stored position.
i
The setting procedure is interrupted as soon
as you release the storage position button.
106
Memory function
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Exterior lighting
General notes
For reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you drive with the lights switched on
even during the daytime. Therefore, your vehicle
is equipped with special daytime running lamps.
In some countries, operation of the headlamps
varies due to legal requirements and self-
imposed obligations.
If you wish to drive during the daytime without
lights, switch off the daytime running lamps
function in the on-board computer
(
Y page 206).
Setting the exterior lighting
Setting options
Exterior lighting can be set using:
R
the light switch
R
the combination switch (Y page 108)
R
the on-board computer (Y page 206)
Light switch
Operation
1 W
Left-hand standing lamps
2 X
Right-hand standing lamps
3 T
Parking lamps, license plate and
instrument cluster lighting
4 Ã
Automatic headlamp mode, controlled
by the light sensor
5 L
Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
If you hear a warning tone when you leave the
vehicle, the lights may still be switched on.
X
Turn the light switch to Ã.
The exterior lighting (except the parking/stand-
ing lamps) switches off automatically if you:
R
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
R
open the driver's door with the SmartKey in
position 0 in the ignition lock
Automatic headlamp mode
G
WARNING
When the light switch is set to Ã, the low-
beam headlamps may not be switched on
automatically if there is fog, snow or other
causes of poor visibility due to the weather
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an
accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid.
The driver is responsible for the vehicle's light-
ing at all times.
à is the favored light switch setting. The light
setting is automatically selected according to
the brightness of the ambient light (exception:
poor visibility due to weather conditions such as
fog, snow or spray):
R
SmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock: the
parking lamps are switched on or off auto-
matically depending on the brightness of the
ambient light.
R
With the engine running: if you have activated
the Daytime Running Lights
function via
the on-board computer, the daytime running
lamps or the parking lamps and the low-beam
headlamps are switched on or off automati-
cally depending on the brightness of the ambi-
ent light.
X
To switch on automatic headlamp mode:
turn the light switch to Ã.
Canada only:
The daytime running lamps improve the visibility
of your vehicle during the day. The daytime run-
ning lamps function is required by law in Can-
ada. It cannot therefore be deactivated.
When the engine is running and the vehicle is
stationary: if you move the selector lever from a
drive position to P, the daytime running lamps/
low-beam headlamps go out after three
minutes.
When the engine is running, the vehicle is sta-
tionary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the
Exterior lighting
107
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
light switch to T, the daytime running lamps
and parking lamps switch on.
If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to L, the manual settings take prec-
edence over the daytime running lamps.
USA only:
The daytime running lamps improve the visibility
of your vehicle during the day. To do this, the
daytime running lamps function must be
switched on using the on-board computer
(
Y page 206).
If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to T or L, the manual settings
take precedence over the daytime running
lamps.
Low-beam headlamps
G
WARNING
When the light switch is set to Ã, the low-
beam headlamps may not be switched on
automatically if there is fog, snow or other
causes of poor visibility due to the weather
conditions such as spray. There is a risk of an
accident.
In such situations, turn the light switch to
L.
Even if the light sensor does not detect that it is
dark, the parking lamps and low-beam head-
lamps switch on when the ignition is switched on
and the light switch is set to the L position.
This is a particularly useful function in the event
of rain and fog.
X
To switch on the low-beam headlamps:
turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to posi-
tion 2 or start the engine.
X
Turn the light switch to L.
The green L indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
Parking lamps
!
If the battery charge is very low, the parking
lamps or standing lamps are automatically
switched off to enable the next engine start.
Always park your vehicle safely and suffi-
ciently lit according to legal standards. Avoid
using the parking lamps T over a period of
several hours. If possible, switch on the right-
hand X or left-hand W standing lamp.
X
To switch on: turn the light switch to T.
The green T indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
Standing lamps
Switching on the standing lamps ensures the
corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.
X
To switch on the standing lamps: the
SmartKey should not be in the ignition lock or
it should be in position 0.
X
Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side of
the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the
vehicle).
Combination switch
:
High-beam headlamps
;
Turn signal, right
=
High-beam flasher
?
Turn signal, left
X
To indicate briefly: press the combination
switch briefly to the pressure point in the
direction of arrow ; or ?.
The corresponding turn signal flashes three
times.
X
To indicate: press the combination switch
beyond the pressure point in the direction of
arrow ; or ?.
X
To switch on the high-beam headlamps
manually: turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
the ignition lock or start the engine.
X
Vehicles without Adaptive Highbeam Assist:
turn the light switch to L or Ã.
X
Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: turn
the light switch to L.
108
Exterior lighting
Lights and windshield wipers
X
Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
In the à position, the high-beam head-
lamps are only switched on when it is dark and
the engine is running.
The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up when the high-beam
headlamps are switched on.
X
To switch off the high-beam headlamps:
move the combination switch back to its nor-
mal position.
The blue K indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster goes out.
Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist: if
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, it auto-
matically controls activation and deactivation of
the high-beam headlamps (
Y page 109).
Hazard warning lamps
X
To switch on the hazard warning lamps:
press button :.
All turn signals flash. If you now switch on a
turn signal using the combination switch, only
the turn signal lamp on the corresponding
side of the vehicle will flash.
X
To switch off the hazard warning lamps:
press button :.
The hazard warning lamps automatically switch
on if:
R
an air bag is deployed or
R
the vehicle decelerates rapidly from a speed
of above 45 mph (70 km/h) and comes to a
standstill
The hazard warning lamps switch off automati-
cally if the vehicle reaches a speed of above
6 mph (10 km/h) again after a full brake appli-
cation.
i
The hazard warning lamps still operate if the
ignition is switched off.
Cornering light function
The cornering light function improves the illu-
mination of the road over a wide angle in the
direction you are turning, enabling better visi-
bility in tight bends, for example. It can only be
activated when the low-beam headlamps are
switched on.
Active:
R
if you are driving at speeds below 25 mph
(40 km/h) and switch on the turn signal or
turn the steering wheel
R
if you are driving at speeds between 25 mph
(40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn
the steering wheel
The cornering lamp may remain lit for a short
time, but is automatically switched off after no
more than three minutes.
Cornering light function with traffic circle
function:
The cornering light function is activated on both
sides before entering a traffic circle through an
evaluation of the current GPS position of the
vehicle. It remains active until after the vehicle
has left the traffic circle. In this way, pedestrians
crossing the road, for example, are illuminated
by your vehicle in good time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist
General notes
You can use this function to set the headlamps
to change between low beam and high beam
automatically. The system recognizes vehicles
with their lights on, either approaching from the
opposite direction or traveling in front of your
vehicle, and consequently switches the head-
lamps from high beam to low beam.
The system automatically adapts the low-beam
headlamp range depending on the distance to
the other vehicle. Once the system no longer
detects any other vehicles, it reactivates the
high-beam headlamps.
The system's optical sensor is located behind
the windshield near the overhead control panel.
Exterior lighting
109
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not recognize
road users:
R
who have no lights, e.g. pedestrians
R
who have poor lighting, e.g. cyclists
R
whose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrier
In very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assist
may fail to recognize other road users that
have lights, or may recognize them too late. In
this or similar situations, the automatic high-
beam headlamps will not be deactivated or
activated regardless. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Always carefully observe the traffic conditions
and switch off the high-beam headlamps in
good time.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into
account road, weather or traffic conditions.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are
responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting
to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic con-
ditions.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
restricted if there is:
R
poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
snow
R
dirt on the sensors or the sensors are
obscured
Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist
on/off
X
To switch on: turn the light switch to Ã.
X
Press the combination switch beyond the
pressure point in the direction of arrow :.
The _ indicator lamp in the multifunction
display lights up when it is dark and the light
sensor activates the low-beam headlamps.
If you are driving at speeds above approx-
imately 16 mph (25 km/h):
The headlamp range is set automatically
depending on the distance between the vehi-
cle and other road users.
If you are driving at speeds above approx-
imately 19 mph (30 km/h) and no other road
users have been detected:
The high-beam headlamps are switched on
automatically. The K indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster also lights up.
If you are driving at speeds below approx-
imately 16 mph (25 km/h) or other road users
have been detected or the roads are ade-
quately lit:
The high-beam headlamps are switched off
automatically. The K indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster goes out. The _ indi-
cator lamp in the multifunction display
remains lit.
X
To switch off: move the combination switch
back to its normal position or move the light
switch to another position.
The _ indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out.
Headlamps fogged up on the inside
Certain climatic and physical conditions may
cause moisture to form in the headlamp. This
moisture does not affect the functionality of the
headlamp.
Interior lighting
Overview of interior lighting
Front overhead control panel
:
u Switches the rear compartment inte-
rior lighting on/off
;
| Switches the automatic interior light-
ing control on/off
=
p Switches the right-hand front reading
lamp on/off
110
Interior lighting
Lights and windshield wipers
?
c Switches the front interior lighting on/
off
A
p Switches the left-hand front reading
lamp on/off
Rear-compartment overhead control panel
:
p Switches the right-hand reading lamp
on/off
;
p Switches the left-hand reading lamp
on/off
Interior lighting control
General notes
In order to prevent the vehicle's battery from
discharging, the interior lighting functions are
automatically deactivated after some time
except when the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
The color and brightness of the ambient lighting
may be set using the on-board computer
(
Y page 206).
Automatic interior lighting control
X
To switch on/off: press the | button.
When the automatic interior lighting control is
activated, the button is flush with the over-
head control panel.
The interior lighting automatically switches on if
you:
R
unlock the vehicle
R
open a door
R
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
The interior light is activated for a short while
when the SmartKey is removed from the ignition
lock. You can activate this delayed switch-off
using the on-board computer (
Y page 207).
Replacing bulbs
The front and rear light clusters of your vehicle
are equipped with LED light bulbs. Do not
replace the bulbs yourself. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop which has the necessary
specialist knowledge and tools to carry out the
work required.
Lamps are an important aspect of vehicle safety.
You must therefore make sure that these func-
tion correctly at all times. Have the headlamp
setting checked regularly.
Windshield wipers
Switching the windshield wipers
on/off
!
Do not operate the windshield wipers when
the windshield is dry, as this could damage
the wiper blades. Moreover, dust that has col-
lected on the windshield can scratch the glass
if wiping takes place when the windshield is
dry.
If it is necessary to switch on the windshield
wipers in dry weather conditions, always use
washer fluid when operating the windshield
wipers.
!
If the windshield wipers leave smears on the
windshield after the vehicle has been washed
in an automatic car wash, wax or other resi-
dues may be the reason for this. Clean the
windshield using washer fluid after washing
the vehicle in an automatic car wash.
!
Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: due to
optical influences and the windshield becom-
ing dirty in dry weather conditions, the wind-
shield wipers may be activated inadvertently.
This could then damage the windshield wiper
blades or scratch the windshield.
For this reason, you should always switch off
the windshield wipers in dry weather.
Windshield wipers
111
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
1
$ Windshield wiper off
2
Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor set
to low sensitivity)
3
Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor
set to high sensitivity)
4
° Continuous wipe, slow
5
¯ Continuous wipe, fast
B
í Single wipe
î To wipe with washer fluid
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Turn the combination switch to the corre-
sponding position.
In the Ä or Å position, the appropriate
wiping frequency is set automatically according
to the intensity of the rain. In the Å position,
the rain sensor is more sensitive than in the
Ä position, causing the windshield wiper to
wipe more frequently.
If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will
no longer be wiped properly. This could prevent
you from observing the traffic conditions.
Replacing the wiper blades
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the windshield wipers begin to move while
you are changing the wiper blades, you could
be trapped by the wiper arm. There is a risk of
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
ignition before changing the wiper blades.
!
To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make
sure that you touch only the wiper arm of the
wiper.
!
Never open the hood if a windshield wiper
arm has been folded away from the wind-
shield.
Never fold a windshield wiper arm without a
wiper blade back onto the windshield.
Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly when
you change the wiper blade. If you release the
windshield wiper arm without a wiper blade
and it falls onto the windshield, the windshield
may be damaged by the force of the impact.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the wiper blades changed at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Replacing the wiper blades
Removing the wiper blades
X
Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock
or turn it to position 0 (KEYLESS-GO).
X
Fold the wiper arm away from the windshield.
X
Firmly press release knob : and pull the
wiper blade upwards from the wiper arm in
the direction of the arrow.
Installing the wiper blades
X
Position new wiper blade : in the retainer on
the wiper arm and slide it into place in the
opposite direction of the arrow.
The wiper blade audibly engages.
X
Make sure that the wiper blade is seated cor-
rectly.
X
Fold the wiper arm back onto the windshield.
112
Windshield wipers
Lights and windshield wipers
Problems with the windshield wipers
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The windshield wipers
are jammed.
Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wiper
movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X
For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the igni-
tion lock.
or
X
Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open the
driver's door.
X
Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X
Switch the windshield wipers back on.
The windshield wipers
fail completely.
The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.
X
Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
X
Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Windshield wipers
113
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
Overview of climate control systems
General notes
Observe the settings recommended on the fol-
lowing pages. The windows could otherwise fog
up.
To prevent the windows from fogging up:
R
switch off climate control only briefly
R
switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly
R
switch on the cooling with air dehumidifica-
tion function
R
switch on the defrost windshield function
briefly, if required
Climate control regulates the temperature and
the humidity in the vehicle interior and filters
undesirable substances out of the air.
Climate control can only be operated when the
engine is running. Optimum operation is only
achieved with the side windows and roof closed.
The residual heat function can only be activated
or deactivated with the ignition switched off
(
Y page 124).
i
Ventilate the vehicle for a brief period during
warm weather, e.g. using the convenience
opening feature (
Y page 88). This will speed
up the cooling process and the desired inte-
rior temperature will be reached more
quickly.
i
The integrated filter filters out most parti-
cles of dust and soot and completely filters
out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants
and odors. A clogged filter reduces the
amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior.
For this reason, you should always observe
the interval for replacing the filter, which is
specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it
depends on environmental conditions, e.g.
heavy air pollution, the interval may be
shorter than stated in the Maintenance Book-
let.
114
Overview of climate control systems
Climate control
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control
Canada only
:
Sets the temperature, left (Y page 121)
;
Defrosts the windshield (Y page 122)
=
Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 122)
?
Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 120)
A
Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 123)
B
Sets the temperature, right (Y page 121)
C
Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 124)
D
Sets the air distribution (Y page 121)
E
Increases the airflow (Y page 122)
F
Reduces the airflow (Y page 122)
G
Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 119)
H
Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 120)
Overview of climate control systems
115
Climate control
USA only
:
Sets the temperature, left (Y page 121)
;
Defrosts the windshield (Y page 122)
=
Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (Y page 122)
?
Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 120)
A
Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 123)
B
Sets the temperature, right (Y page 121)
C
Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 124)
D
Sets the air distribution (Y page 121)
E
Increases the airflow (Y page 122)
F
Reduces the airflow (Y page 122)
G
Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 119)
H
Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 120)
116
Overview of climate control systems
Climate control
Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control
Canada only
Front control panel
:
Sets the temperature, left (Y page 121)
;
Defrosts the windshield (Y page 122)
=
Switches the residual heat on or off (Y page 124)
?
Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 120)
A
Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 123)
B
Sets the temperature, right (Y page 121)
C
Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 122)
D
Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 119)
E
Sets the air distribution (Y page 121)
F
Increases the airflow (Y page 122)
G
Reduces the airflow (Y page 122)
H
Adjusts the climate mode settings (Y page 121)
I
Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 124)
J
Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 120)
Rear control panel
K
Increases the airflow (Y page 122)
L
Reduces the airflow (Y page 122)
M
Display
N
Reduces the temperature (Y page 121)
O
Increases the temperature (Y page 121)
Overview of climate control systems
117
Climate control
USA only
Front control panel
:
Sets the temperature, left (Y page 121)
;
Defrosts the windshield (Y page 122)
=
Switches the maximum cooling MAX COOL on or off (Y page 122)
?
Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 120)
A
Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 123)
B
Sets the temperature, right (Y page 121)
C
Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 122)
D
Activates/deactivates climate control (Y page 119)
E
Sets the air distribution (Y page 121)
F
Increases the airflow (Y page 122)
G
Reduces the airflow (Y page 122)
H
Adjusts the climate mode settings (Y page 121)
I
Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (Y page 124)
J
Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 120)
Rear control panel
K
Increases the airflow (Y page 122)
L
Reduces the airflow (Y page 122)
M
Display
N
Reduces the temperature (Y page 121)
O
Increases the temperature (Y page 121)
Notes on using automatic climate
control
Climate control system
Below, you can find a number of notes and rec-
ommendations to help you use climate control
optimally.
R
Activate climate control using the à and
¿ buttons. The indicator lamps above the
à and ¿ buttons light up.
R
In automatic mode, you can also use the ñ
button to set the climate mode (FOCUS,
MEDIUM or DIFFUSE). The MEDIUM level is
recommended.
R
Set the temperature to 72 (22 †).
118
Overview of climate control systems
Climate control
R
Only use the "Windshield defrosting" function
briefly until the windshield is clear again.
R
Only use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g. if
there are unpleasant outside odors or when in
a tunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up,
since no fresh air is drawn into the vehicle in
air-recirculation mode.
R
Use the ZONE function to adopt the temper-
ature settings on the driver's side for the
front-passenger side and the rear compart-
ment as well. The indicator lamp above the
á button goes out.
R
Vehicles with 3-zone automatic climate con-
trol: use the residual heat function if you want
to heat or ventilate the vehicle interior when
the ignition is switched off. The residual heat
function can only be activated or deactivated
with the ignition switched off.
R
If you change the settings of the climate con-
trol system, the climate status display
appears for approximately three seconds at
the bottom of the screen in the multimedia
system display. You will see the current set-
tings of the various climate control functions.
ECO start/stop function
During automatic engine switch-off, the climate
control system only operates at a reduced capa-
city. If you require the full climate control output,
you can switch off the ECO start/stop function
by pressing the ECO button (
Y page 131).
Operating the climate control sys-
tems
Activating/deactivating climate con-
trol
General notes
When the climate control is switched off, the air
supply and air circulation are also switched off.
The windows could fog up. Therefore, switch off
climate control only briefly
i
Activate climate control primarily using the
à button (
Y page 120).
Activating/deactivating
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 127).
X
To activate: press the à button.
The indicator lamp in the à button lights
up. Airflow and air distribution are set to auto-
matic mode.
X
To deactivate: press the ^ button.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
up.
Operating the climate control systems
119
Climate control
Switching cooling with air dehumidification on/off
General notes
If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside the vehicle will not
be cooled. The air inside the vehicle will also not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up more
quickly. Therefore, deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidification function only briefly.
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function is only available when the engine is running. The air
inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected.
Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This is normal
and not a sign that there is a malfunction.
Switching on/off
X
To activate: press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights up.
X
To deactivate: press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button goes out. The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
has a delayed switch-off feature.
Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The indicator lamp in the
¿ button flashes
three times or remains
off. The "Cooling with air
dehumidification" func-
tion cannot be switched
on.
Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to a mal-
function.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Setting climate control to automatic
General notes
In automatic mode, the set temperature is main-
tained automatically at a constant level. The
system automatically regulates the temperature
of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air dis-
tribution.
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
is activated automatically in automatic mode.
Automatic control
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 127).
X
Set the desired temperature.
X
To activate: press the à button.
The indicator lamp in the à button lights
up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are
activated.
i
3-zone automatic climate control: when
automatic mode is activated, you can set the
climate mode (
Y page 121).
X
To switch to manual mode: press the _
button.
or
X
Press the I or K button.
The indicator lamp in the à button goes
out.
120
Operating the climate control systems
Climate control
Adjusting the climate mode settings
The "Set climate mode" function is only available
with 3-zone automatic climate control.
You can select the following climate mode set-
tings in automatic mode:
FOCUS high airflow, slightly cooler setting
MEDIUM medium airflow, standard setting
DIFFUSElow airflow, slightly warmer and draft-
free setting
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 127).
X
Press the à button.
X
Press the ñ button repeatedly until the
desired climate mode appears in the display.
Setting the temperature
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Different temperatures can be set for the driv-
er's and front-passenger sides.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 127).
X
To increase or reduce: turn temperature
control : or B counter-clockwise or clock-
wise (
Y page 115).
Only change the temperature setting in small
increments. Start at 72 (22 †).
3-zone automatic climate control
You can select different temperature settings
for the driver's and front-passenger sides as well
as for the rear compartment.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 127).
X
To increase or reduce the temperature in
the front compartment: turn temperature
control : or B counter-clockwise or clock-
wise (
Y page 117).
Only change the temperature setting in small
increments. Start at 72 (22 †).
X
To increase or reduce the temperature in
the rear compartment using the front con-
trol panel: press the á button.
The indicator lamp in the á button goes
out.
The temperature setting for the driver's side
is adopted for the rear compartment and the
front-passenger side.
X
Turn temperature control : counter-clock-
wise or clockwise (
Y page 117).
Only change the temperature setting in small
increments. Start at 72 (22 †).
X
To increase or reduce the temperature in
the rear compartment using the rear con-
trol panel: press the r or s button on
the rear control panel.
Only change the temperature setting in small
increments. Start at 72 (22 †).
Setting the air distribution
Air distribution settings
P
Directs air through the center and side air
vents
O
Directs air through the footwell air vents
S
Directs air through the center, side and
footwell vents
¯
Directs air through the defroster vents
b
Directs the airflow through the defroster,
center and side air vents (Canada only)
a
Directs air through the defroster and
footwell vents
_
Directs the airflow through the defroster
vents, the center and side air vents as
well as the footwell air vents (Canada
only)
i
Regardless of the air distribution setting,
airflow is always directed through the side air
vents. The side air vents can only be closed
when the controls on the side air vents are
turned downwards.
Setting the air distribution
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 127).
X
Press the _ button repeatedly until the
desired symbol appears in the display.
Operating the climate control systems
121
Climate control
Setting the airflow
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 127).
X
To increase: press the K button.
X
To reduce: press the I button.
i
You can use 3-zone automatic climate con-
trol to set the airflow in the rear compartment
separately.
If the battery is not sufficiently charged, blower
output may be reduced. As soon as the battery
is sufficiently charged, full blower output will be
available.
Switching the ZONE function on/off
X
To activate: press the á button.
The indicator lamp in the á button lights
up.
Dual-zone automatic climate control: the tem-
perature setting for the driver's side is not
adopted for the front-passenger side.
3-zone automatic climate control: the tem-
perature setting for the driver's side is not
adopted for the front-passenger side and the
rear compartment.
X
To deactivate: press the á button.
The indicator lamp in the á button goes
out.
Dual-zone automatic climate control: the tem-
perature setting for the driver's side is adop-
ted for the front-passenger side.
3-zone automatic climate control: the tem-
perature setting for the driver's side is adop-
ted for the front-passenger side and the rear
compartment.
Defrosting the windshield
You can use this function to defrost the wind-
shield or to clear a fogged up windshield or side
windows on the inside.
Switch off the "Windshield defrosting" function
as soon as the windshield is clear again.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 127).
X
To activate: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights
up.
The climate control system switches to the
following functions:
R
high airflow
R
high temperature
R
air distribution to the windshield and front
side windows
R
air-recirculation mode off
If the battery is not sufficiently charged, blower
output may be reduced. Once the battery is suf-
ficiently charged again, full blower output will be
available again.
X
To deactivate: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
out. The previously selected settings are
restored. Air-recirculation mode remains
deactivated.
MAX COOL maximum cooling
The MAX COOL function is only available in vehi-
cles for the USA.
MAX COOL is only operational when the engine
is running.
X
To activate: press the Ù button.
The indicator lamp in the Ù button lights
up.
X
To deactivate: press the Ù button.
The indicator lamp in the Ù button goes
out. The previously selected settings are
restored.
When you activate MAX COOL, climate control
switches to the following functions:
R
maximum cooling
R
maximum airflow
R
air-recirculation mode on
Defrosting the windows
Windows fogged up on the inside
X
Activate the ¿ cooling with air dehumidi-
fication function.
X
Activate automatic mode Ã.
X
Adjust the side air vents so that the warmed
air is directed to the side windows.
X
If the windows continue to fog up, activate the
"windshield defrosting" function ¬.
122
Operating the climate control systems
Climate control
i
You should only select this setting until the
windshield is clear again.
Windows fogged up on the outside
X
Press the _ button repeatedly until the
P or O symbol appears in the display.
X
Adjust the side air vents so that no air is
directed to the side windows.
Rear window defroster
General notes
The rear window defroster has a high current
draw. You should therefore switch it off as soon
as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear
window defroster switches off automatically
after several minutes.
If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window
defroster may switch off.
Activating or deactivating
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 127).
X
Press the ¤ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights
up or goes out.
Operating the climate control systems
123
Climate control
Problems with the rear window defroster
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The rear window
defroster has deactiva-
ted prematurely or can-
not be activated.
The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
X
Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,
interior lighting or the seat heating.
When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster
can be activated again.
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off
General notes
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if
unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle from
outside. The air already inside the vehicle will
then be recirculated.
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the win-
dows can fog up more quickly, in particular at
low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation
mode briefly to prevent the windows from fog-
ging up.
Activating or deactivating
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 127).
X
To activate: press the g button.
The indicator lamp in the g button lights
up.
i
Dual-zone automatic climate control: air-
recirculation mode is automatically activated
at high outside temperatures.
3-zone automatic climate control: air-recircu-
lation mode is automatically activated at high
levels of pollution or at high outside temper-
atures.
When air-recirculation mode is activated
automatically, the indicator lamp above the
g button does not light up. Outside air is
added after about 30 minutes.
X
To deactivate: press the g button.
The indicator lamp in the g button goes
out.
i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto-
matically:
R
after approximately five minutes at outside
temperatures below approximately 41
(5 †)
R
after approximately five minutes if cooling
with air dehumidification is deactivated
R
after approximately 30 minutes at outside
temperatures above approximately 41
(5 †) if the "Cooling with air dehumidifica-
tion" function is activated
Switching the residual heat on or off
General notes
The residual heat function is only available with
dual-zone automatic climate control.
It is possible to make use of the residual heat of
the engine to continue heating the vehicle for
approximately 30 minutes after the engine has
been switched off. The heating time depends on
the set interior temperature.
Activating/deactivating
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition
lock or remove it (
Y page 127).
X
To activate: press the Ì button.
The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights
up.
i
If the residual heat function is activated, the
windows may fog up on the inside.
i
The blower will run at a low speed regardless
of the airflow setting.
124
Operating the climate control systems
Climate control
i
If you activate the residual heat function at
high temperatures, only the ventilation will be
activated. The blower runs at medium speed.
X
To deactivate: press the Ì button.
The indicator lamp in the Ì button goes
out.
Residual heat is deactivated automatically:
R
after approximately 30 minutes
R
when the ignition is switched on
R
if the battery voltage drops
Air vents
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents. This could result in burns or frostbite in
the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There
is a risk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
maintain a sufficient distance to the air out-
lets. If necessary, redirect the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air
through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
please observe the following notes:
R
keep the air inlet between the windshield and
the hood free of blockages, such as ice, snow
or leaves.
R
never cover the air vents or air intake grilles in
the vehicle interior.
Setting the air vents
Example
:
Defroster vent
;
Side air vent
=
Thumbwheel for side air vent
X
To open or close: turn thumbwheel = up or
down.
Setting the glove box air vent
!
Close the air vent when heating the vehicle.
At high outside temperatures, open the air
vent and activate the "cooling with air dehu-
midification" function. Otherwise, tempera-
ture-sensitive items stored in the glove box
could be damaged.
:
Air vent control
;
Air vent
When the climate control system is activated,
the glove box can be ventilated, for instance to
cool its contents. The level of airflow depends on
the airflow and air distribution settings.
X
To open or close: turn control : to the
clockwise or counter-clockwise.
Air vents
125
Climate control
Z
Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle
Important safety notes
The sensor system of some driving and driving
safety systems adjusts automatically while a
certain distance is being driven after the vehicle
has been delivered or after repairs. Full system
effectiveness is not reached until the end of this
teach-in procedure.
New and replaced brake pads and discs only
reach their optimum braking effect after several
hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for
this by applying greater force to the brake pedal.
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
The more you look after the engine when it is
new, the more satisfied you will be with its per-
formance in the future.
R
You should therefore drive at varying vehicle
and engine speeds for the first 1000 miles
(1500 km).
R
Avoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full throttle,
during this period.
R
Change gear in good time, before the tach-
ometer needle is Ô of the way to the red area
of the tachometer.
R
Do not manually shift to a lower gear to brake
the vehicle.
R
Try to avoid depressing the accelerator pedal
beyond the point of resistance (kickdown).
Additional breaking-in notes for Mercedes-AMG
vehicles:
R
Do not drive faster than 85 mph (140 km/h)
for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km).
R
Only allow the engine to reach a maximum
engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.
R
Change gear in good time.
After 1000 miles (1500 km), you can increase
the engine speed gradually and accelerate the
vehicle to full speed.
You should also observe these notes on break-
ing in if the engine or parts of the drive train on
your vehicle have been replaced.
Always observe the respective
maximu
m per-
missible speed.
Self-locking rear axle differential
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Your vehicle is equipped with a self-locking dif-
ferential on the rear axle.
Change the oil to improve protection of the rear
axle differential:
R
after a breaking-in period of 1,850 miles
(3,000 km)
R
every 31,000 miles (50,000 km) or 3 years
These oil changes prolong the service life of the
differential. Have the oil change carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Driving
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
G
WARNING
Unsuitable footwear can hinder correct usage
of the pedals, e.g.:
R
shoes with thick soles
R
shoes with high heels
R
slippers
There is a risk of an accident.
Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
usage of the pedals.
G
WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
126
Driving
Driving and parking
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G
WARNING
If the parking brake has not been fully
released when driving, the parking brake can:
R
overheat and cause a fire
R
lose its hold function.
There is a risk of fire and an accident. Release
the parking brake fully before driving off.
!
Do not warm up the engine with the vehicle
stationary. Drive off immediately. Avoid high
engine speeds and driving at full throttle until
the engine has reached its operating temper-
ature.
Only shift the automatic transmission to the
desired drive position when the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
Where possible, avoid spinning the drive
wheels when pulling away on slippery roads.
You could otherwise damage the drive train.
!
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: at low engine oil
temperatures below 68 (+20 †), the max-
imum engine speed is restricted in order to
protect the engine. To protect the engine and
maintain smooth engine operation, avoid driv-
ing at full throttle when the engine is cold.
SmartKey positions
SmartKey
g
To remove the SmartKey
1
Power supply for some consumers, such as
the windshield wipers
2
Ignition (power supply for all consumers)
and drive position
3
To start the engine
i
The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition
lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for
the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on.
The engine cannot be started.
KEYLESS-GO
General notes
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with
Smartkeys featuring the integrated KEYLESS-
GO function and a detachable Start/Stop but-
ton.
The Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
ignition lock and the Smartkey must be in the
vehicle.
When you insert the Start/Stop button into the
ignition lock, the system needs approximately
two seconds recognition time. You can then use
the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in
succession corresponds to the different key
positions in the ignition lock. This is only the
case if you are not depressing the brake pedal.
If you depress the brake pedal and press the
Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-
ately.
A check which periodically establishes a radio
connection between the vehicle and the Smart-
key determines whether a valid Smartkey is in
Driving
127
Driving and parking
Z
the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when
starting the engine.
To start the vehicle without actively using the
Smartkey:
R
the Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
ignition lock.
R
the Smartkey must be in the vehicle.
R
the vehicle must not be locked with the
Smartkey or KEYLESS-GO (
Y page 76).
Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key:
R
with electronic devices, e.g. a mobile phone
or another Smartkey.
R
with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.
R
inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal case.
This can affect the functionality of KEYLESS-GO.
If you lock the vehicle with the Smartkey's
remote control or with KEYLESS-GO, after a
short time:
R
you will not be able to switch on the ignition
with the Start/Stop button.
R
you will not be able to start the engine with the
Start/Stop button until the vehicle is
unlocked again.
The engine can be switched off while the vehicle
is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/
Stop button for three seconds. This function
operates independently of the ECO start/stop
automatic engine switch-off function.
Key positions with KEYLESS-GO
:
Start/Stop button
;
Ignition lock
As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light
up. Further information on situations where an
indicator lamp either fails to go out after starting
the engine or lights up while driving
(
Y page 237).
If Start/Stop button : has not yet been
pressed, this corresponds to the Smartkey
being removed from the ignition.
X
To switch on the power supply: press
Start/Stop button : once.
The power supply is switched on. You can now
activate the windshield wipers, for example.
The power supply is switched off again if:
R
the driver's door is opened and
R
you press Start/Stop button : twice when in
this position
X
To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop
button : twice.
The ignition is switched on.
If you press Start/Stop button : once when
in this position, the ignition is switched off
again.
Removing the Start/Stop button
You can remove the Start/Stop button from the
ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal
using the Smartkey.
It is only possible to switch between Start/Stop
button mode and Smartkey operation when the
transmission is in position P.
X
Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition
lock ;.
Y
ou do not have to remove the Start/Stop but-
ton from the ignition lock when you leave the
vehicle. You should, however, always take the
Smartkey with you when leaving the vehicle. As
long as the Smartkey is in the vehicle:
R
the vehicle can be started using the Start/
Stop button
R
the electrically powered equipment can be
operated
Starting the engine
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
R
open the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
R
get out and disrupt traffic.
R
operate the vehicle's equipment.
128
Driving
Driving and parking
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
R
Start the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
G
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
out sufficient ventilation.
G
WARNING
Flammable materials introduced through
environmental influence or by animals can
ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or
parts of the engine that heat up. There is a risk
of fire.
Carry out regular checks to make sure that
there are no flammable foreign materials in
the engine compartment or in the exhaust
system.
General notes
i
The catalytic converter is preheated for up
to 30 seconds after a cold start. The sound of
the engine may change during this time.
Automatic transmission
X
Shift the transmission to position P.
The transmission position display in the mul-
tifunction display shows P.
i
You can start the engine in transmission
position P and N.
Starting procedure with the SmartKey
i
To start the engine using the SmartKey
instead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stop
button out of the ignition lock.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 127)and release it as soon as the
engine is running.
Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine
i
The Start/Stop button can be used to start
the vehicle manually without inserting the
SmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/
Stop button must be inserted in the ignition
lock and the SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
This mode for starting the engine operates
independently of the ECO start/stop auto-
matic engine start function.
X
Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X
Press the Start/Stop button once
(
Y page 127).
The engine starts.
Pulling away
General notes
G
WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or R,
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R,
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate.
!
If a warning tone sounds and the Release
Park. Brake message appears in the multi-
function display, the parking brake is still
applied. Release the parking brake.
Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling
away.
The vehicle locks centrally once you have pulled
away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down.
You can open the doors from the inside at any
time.
You can also deactivate the automatic locking
feature (
Y page 207).
Driving
129
Driving and parking
Z
It is only possible to shift the transmission from
position P to the desired position if you depress
the brake pedal. If the brake pedal is not
depressed, the DIRECT SELECT lever can still be
moved but the parking lock remains engaged.
i
Upshifts take place at higher engine speeds
after a cold start. This helps the catalytic con-
verter to reach its operating temperature
more quickly.
Hill start assist
Hill start assist helps you when pulling away for-
wards or in reverse on an uphill gradient. It holds
the vehicle for a short time after you have
removed your foot from the brake pedal. This
gives you enough time to move your foot from
the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and to
depress it before the vehicle begins to roll.
G
WARNING
After a short time, hill start assist will no lon-
ger brake your vehicle and it could roll away.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Therefore, quickly move your foot from the
brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Never
leave the vehicle when it is held by hill start
assist.
Hill start assist is not active if:
R
you are pulling away on a level road or on a
downhill gradient.
R
the transmission is in position N.
R
the parking brake is applied.
R
ESP
®
is malfunctioning.
ECO start/stop function
Introduction
The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically if the vehicle is stopped
under certain conditions.
The engine starts automatically when the driver
wants to pull away again. The ECO start/stop
function thereby helps you to reduce the fuel
consumption and emissions of your vehicle.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the engine is switched off automatically and
you exit the vehicle, the engine is restarted
automatically. The vehicle may begin moving.
There is a risk of accident and injury.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
the ignition and secure the vehicle against
rolling away.
General notes
:
ECO start/stop display
The ECO start/stop function is activated when-
ever you start the engine using the Smartkey or
the Start/Stop button.
If the engine has been switched off automati-
cally by the ECO start/stop function, the ¤
symbol is shown in the multifunction display.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the AMG menu in the
multifunction display additionally shows the
Stop/Start active
message.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop
function is only available in drive program C.
Automatic engine switch-off
If the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D or N,
the ECO start/stop function switches off the
engine automatically.
The ECO start/stop function is operational
when:
R
the indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit
green.
R
the outside temperature is within the range
that is suitable for the system.
R
the engine is at normal operating tempera-
ture.
R
the set temperature for the vehicle interior
has been reached.
R
the battery is sufficiently charged.
130
Driving
Driving and parking
R
the system detects that the windshield is not
fogged up when the air-conditioning system is
switched on.
R
the hood is closed.
R
the driver's door is closed and the driver's
seat belt is fastened.
i
All of the vehicle's systems remain active
when the engine is stopped automatically.
i
The HOLD function can also be activated if
the engine has been switched off automati-
cally. It is then not necessary to continue
applying the brakes during the automatic stop
phase. When you depress the accelerator
pedal, the engine starts automatically and the
braking effect of the HOLD function is deac-
tivated.
i
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles): automatic engine switch-off can take
place a maximum of four times in a row (initial
stop, then three subsequent stops).
i
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the number of
consecutive automatic engine switch-offs is
unlimited.
Automatic engine start
The engine starts automatically if:
R
you switch off the ECO start/stop function by
pressing the ECO button
R
in transmission position D or N the brake
pedal is released and the HOLD function is not
active
R
you depress the accelerator pedal
R
you engage reverse gear R
R
you move the transmission out of position P
R
you switch to drive program S, S+ or M
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
R
you unfasten your seat belt or open the driv-
er's door
R
the vehicle starts to roll
R
the brake system requires this
R
the temperature in the vehicle interior devi-
ates from the set range
R
the system detects moisture on the wind-
shield when the air-conditioning system is
switched on
R
the battery's condition of charge is too low
i
Shifting the transmission to position P does
not start the engine.
Deactivating or activating the ECO
start/stop function
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)
X
To deactivate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
X
To activate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop
function has been deactivated manually or as
the result of a malfunction. The engine will then
not be switched off automatically when the vehi-
cle stops.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
X
To deactivate: in drive program C, press ECO
button :.
or
X
Switch to drive program S, S+ or M
(
Y page 139).
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
X
To activate: press ECO button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
If drive program S, S+ or M is active, the auto-
matic transmission switches to drive program
C.
Driving
131
Driving and parking
Z
If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop
function has been deactivated manually or as
the result of a malfunction. The engine will then
not be switched off automatically when the vehi-
cle stops.
132
Driving
Driving and parking
Problems with the engine
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The engine does not
start. The starter motor
can be heard.
R
There is a malfunction in the engine electronics.
R
There is a malfunction in the fuel supply.
Before attempting to start the engine again:
X
Turn the Smartkey back to position 0 in the ignition lock.
or
X
Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster go out.
X
Try to start the engine again (Y page 128). Avoid excessively long
and frequent attempts to start the engine as these will drain the
battery.
If the engine does not start after several attempts:
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine does not
start. You cannot hear
the starter motor.
The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or
discharged.
X
Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 294).
If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.
X
Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes.
X
Try to start the engine again.
If the engine still does not start:
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The engine is not running
smoothly and is misfir-
ing.
There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanical
component of the engine management system.
X
Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter
and damage it.
X
Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
The coolant temperature
gauge shows a value
above 248 (120 †).
The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no
longer being cooled sufficiently.
X
Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to
cool down.
X
Check the coolant level (Y page 276). Observe the warning notes
as you do so and add coolant if necessary.
Driving
133
Driving and parking
Z
Automatic transmission
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the engine speed is above the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or R,
the vehicle could pull away suddenly. There is
a risk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R,
always firmly depress the brake pedal and do
not simultaneously accelerate.
G
WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
tral position N when you switch off the engine.
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an
accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-
cle from rolling away by applying the parking
brake.
Selector lever (Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)
Overview of transmission positions
j
Park position with parking lock
k
Reverse gear
i
Neutral
h
Drive
Transmission position and drive pro-
gram display
The current transmission position and drive pro-
gram appear in the multifunction display.
:
Transmission position display
;
Drive program display
Additionally, displays next to the selector lever
mark the current transmission position.
The indicators light up when the Smartkey is
inserted into the ignition lock. The indicators go
out when the Smartkey is removed from the
ignition lock.
If the transmission position display in the mul-
tifunction display is not working, you should pull
away carefully to check whether the desired
transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you
should select transmission position D and drive
program C or S.
Engaging park position P
X
When the vehicle is stationary, press but-
ton :.
134
Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
DIRECT SELECT lever
Overview of transmission positions
j
Park position with parking lock
k
Reverse gear
i
Neutral
h
Drive
The DIRECT SELECT lever is on the right of the
steering column.
The DIRECT SELECT lever always returns to its
original position. The current transmission posi-
tion P, R, N or D appears in the transmission
position display in the multifunction display
(
Y page 135).
Transmission position and drive pro-
gram display
The current transmission position and drive pro-
gram appear in the multifunction display.
:
Transmission position display
;
Drive program display
The arrows in the transmission position display
show how and into which transmission positions
you can shift using the DIRECT SELECT lever.
If the transmission position display in the mul-
tifunction display is not working, you should pull
away carefully to check whether the desired
transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you
should select transmission position D and drive
program E or S.
Engaging park position P
!
If the engine speed is too high or the vehicle
is moving, do not shift the automatic trans-
mission directly from D to R, from R to D or
directly to P. The automatic transmission
could otherwise be damaged.
X
Push the DIRECT SELECT lever in the direction
of arrow P.
Transmission position display P is shown in
the multifunction display.
Depressing the brake and pushing the DIRECT
SELECT lever up or down disengages the park-
ing lock. The transmission is in N neutral.
In order to shift from park position P directly into
R or D:
R
depress the brake pedal and
R
push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down
past the first point of resistance
Engaging park position P automatically
Park position P is automatically engaged if:
R
you switch off the engine using the Smartkey
and remove the SmartKey
R
you switch off the engine using the Smartkey
or using the Start/Stop button and open the
driver's door or front-passenger door
R
the driver's door is opened when the vehicle is
stationary or driving at very low speed and the
transmission is in position D or R
Under certain conditions, the automatic trans-
mission shifts automatically to transmission
position P if the HOLD function or DISTRONIC
PLUS is activated. Observe the information on
the HOLD function (
Y page 165) and on
DISTRONIC PLUS (
Y page 159).
Engaging reverse gear R
!
Only shift the automatic transmission to R
when the vehicle is stationary.
X
If the transmission is in position D or N: push
the DIRECT SELECT lever up past the first
point of resistance.
X
If the transmission is in position P: depress
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT
lever up past the first point of resistance.
The ECO start/stop function is not available
when reverse gear is engaged. Further informa-
Automatic transmission
135
Driving and parking
Z
tion on the ECO start/stop function
(
Y page 130).
Shifting to neutral N
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
R
open the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
R
get out and disrupt traffic.
R
operate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
R
Start the engine.
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
X
If the transmission is in position D or R: push
the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the
first point of resistance.
X
If the transmission is in position P: depress
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT
lever up or down to the first point of resist-
ance.
If you switch the engine off with the transmis-
sion in position R or D, the automatic transmis-
sion shifts to N automatically.
With the Smartkey: if you then open the driv-
er's door or the front-passenger door or remove
the Smartkey from the ignition, the automatic
transmis
sion shifts to P automatically.
With KEYLESS-GO: if you then open the driver's
or front-passenger door, the automatic trans-
mission shifts to P.
If you want the automatic transmission to
remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle
cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing
system:
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock.
X
Insert the Smartkey into the ignition lock.
X
All vehicles: switch the ignition on.
X
Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X
Shift to neutral N.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
Release the parking brake.
X
Switch off the ignition and leave the Smartkey
in the ignition lock.
Engaging drive position D
X
If the transmission is in position R or N: push
the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first
point of resistance.
X
If the transmission is in position P: depress
the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT
lever down past the first point of resistance.
136
Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
Transmission positions
B
Park position
Only shift the transmission into posi-
tion P when the vehicle is stationary
(
Y page 147). The parking lock
should not be used as a brake when
parking. Always apply the parking
brake in addition to the parking lock
in order to secure the vehicle.
If the vehicle electronics are malfunc-
tioning, the transmission may be
locked in position P. Have the vehicle
electronics checked immediately at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Park position P is automatically
engaged if:
R
you switch off the engine using the
SmartKey and remove the Smart-
Key
R
you switch off the engine using the
SmartKey or using the Start/Stop
button and open the driver's door
or front-passenger door
R
the driver's door is opened when
the vehicle is stationary or driving
at very low speed and the trans-
mission is in position D or R
C
Reverse gear
Only shift the transmission into posi-
tion R when the vehicle is stationary.
A
Neutral
Do not shift the transmission to N
while driving. Otherwise, the auto-
matic transmission could be dam-
aged.
No power is transmitted from the
engine to the drive wheels.
Releasing the brakes will allow you to
move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push
it or tow it.
If ESP
®
is deactivated or faulty: shift
the transmission only to position N if
the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
e.g. on icy roads.
If you switch the engine off with the
transmission in position R or D, the
automatic transmission shifts to N
automatically.
!
Rolling in neutral N can damage
the drive train.
7
Drive
The automatic transmission changes
gear automatically. All forward gears
are available.
Driving tips
Changing gear
The automatic transmission shifts to the indi-
vidual gears automatically when it is in trans-
mission position D. This automatic gear shifting
behavior is determined by:
R
the selected drive program
R
the position of the accelerator pedal
R
the road speed
Accelerator pedal position
Your style of driving influences how the auto-
matic transmission shifts gear:
R
little throttle: early upshifts
R
more throttle: late upshifts
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
When shifting down, the double-clutch function
is active regardless of the currently selected
drive program. The double-clutch function
Automatic transmission
137
Driving and parking
Z
reduces load change reactions and is conducive
to a sporty driving style. The sound generated by
the double-clutch function depends on the drive
program selected.
Kickdown
Use kickdown for maximum acceleration:
X
Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a lower
gear depending on the engine speed.
X
Ease off the accelerator pedal once the
desired speed is reached.
The automatic transmission shifts back up.
Rocking the vehicle free
Rocking the vehicle free by shifting back and
forth between transmission positions D and R
can help to free a vehicle that has become stuck
in mud or snow. The vehicle's engine manage-
ment restricts switching between transmission
positions D and R to speeds up to a maximum of
5 mph (9 km/h). To shift back and forth between
transmission positions D and R, move the
DIRECT SELECT lever up and down past the
point of resistance.
Program selector button
General notes
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles and
vehicles with AMG sports package)
X
Press program selector button : repeatedly
until the letter for the desired drive program
appears in the multifunction display.
Vehicles with the AMG Sports package
X
Press program selector button : repeatedly
until the letter for the desired drive program
appears in the multifunction display.
The program selector button allows you to
choose between different driving characteris-
tics.
i
Further information about permanent drive
program M (
Y page 141).
As well as this permanent drive program M,
you can also activate temporary drive pro-
gram M (
Y page 140).
E Economy Comfortable, economical
driving
S Sport Sporty driving style
M Manual Manual gear shifting
i
For further information on the automatic
drive program, see (
Y page 139).
i
The automatic transmission shifts to auto-
matic drive program E each time the engine is
started.
138
Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Drive program selector with manual drive program
X
Turn drive program selector : until the
desired drive program appears in the multi-
function display in the speedometer.
The drive program indicator on drive program
selector : lights up in red.
i
Further information about permanent drive
program M (
Y page 141).
As well as this permanent drive program M,
you can also activate temporary drive pro-
gram M (
Y page 140).
C Controlled
Efficiency
Comfortable, economical
driving
S Sport Sporty driving style
S+ SportPlus Particularly sporty driving
style
M Manual Manual gear shifting
RS RACE
START
Optimal vehicle accelera-
tion from a standstill
i
For further information on the automatic
drive program, see (
Y page 139).
i
The automatic transmission shifts to auto-
matic drive program C each time the engine is
started.
i
RS cannot be selected during normal driv-
ing. For further information on RACE START,
see (
Y page 165).
Steering wheel paddle shifters
In the manual drive program, you can change
gears manually using steering wheel paddle
shifters : and ;.
Further information about permanent drive pro-
gram M (
Y page 141).
Further information about temporary drive pro-
gram M (
Y page 140).
i
You can only change gear with the steering
wheel paddle shifters when the transmission
is in position D.
Automatic drive program
Automatic drive program E
Drive program E (drive program C on Mercedes-
AMG vehicles) is characterized by the following:
R
comfort-oriented engine and automatic trans-
mission settings.
R
optimal fuel consumption resulting from the
automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
R
the vehicle pulling away more gently in
forward and reverse gears, unless the accel-
erator pedal is depressed fully.
R
the vehicle having improved driving stability,
for example on slippery road surfaces.
R
the automatic transmission shifting up
sooner. This results in the vehicle being driven
at lower engine speeds and the wheels being
less likely to spin.
Automatic transmission
139
Driving and parking
Z
Automatic drive program S
Drive program S (or, in the case of Mercedes-
AMG vehicles, drive programs S and S+) is char-
acterized by the following:
R
sporty engine and automatic transmission
settings.
R
the automatic transmission shifting up later.
the fuel consumption possibly being higher as
a result of the later automatic transmission
shift points.
Manual drive program M
General notes
In this drive program, you can briefly change
gear yourself by using the steering wheel paddle
shifters. The transmission must be in position D.
You can activate manual drive program M in the
E and S automatic drive programs.
i
As well as temporary drive program M, you
can also activate permanent drive program M
(
Y page 138).
Further information about permanent drive
program M (
Y page 141).
Activating
X
Shift the transmission to position D.
X
Pull the left or right steering wheel paddle
shifter (
Y page 139).
Manual drive program M is temporarily acti-
vated. The selected gear and M appear in the
multifunction display.
Shifting gears
If you pull on the left or right steering wheel
paddle shifter, the automatic transmission
switches to manual drive program M for a limi-
ted amount of time. Depending on which paddle
shifter is pulled, the automatic transmission
immediately shifts into the next gear down or
up, if permitted.
X
To shift up: pull the right-hand steering wheel
paddle shifter (
Y page 139).
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear.
i
If the maximum engine speed on the cur-
rently engaged gear is reached and you con-
tinue to accelerate, the automatic
tra
nsmis-
sion automatically shifts up in order to pre-
vent engine damage.
X
To shift down: pull on the left-hand steering
wheel paddle shifter (
Y page 139).
The automatic transmission shifts down to
the next gear.
i
If the engine exceeds the maximum engine
speed when shifting down, the automatic
transmission protects against engine damage
by not shifting down.
i
Automatic down shifting occurs when
coasting.
Shift recommendation
The gearshift recommendations assist you in
adopting an economical driving style. The rec-
ommended gear is shown in the multifunction
display.
X
Shift to recommended gear ; according to
gearshift recommendation : when shown in
the multifunction display of the instrument
cluster.
Deactivating
If you have activated manual drive program M, it
will remain active for a certain amount of time.
Under certain conditions the minimum amount
of time is extended, e.g. in the case of lateral
acceleration, during an overrun phase or when
driving on steep terrain.
If manual drive program M has been deactiva-
ted, the automatic transmission shifts into the
automatic drive program that was last selected,
i.e. E or S.
You can also deactivate manual drive program
M yourself:
X
Pull on the right-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter and hold it in place (
Y page 139).
or
X
Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the
transmission position (
Y page 135).
140
Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
or
X
Use the program selector button to change
the drive program (
Y page 138).
Manual drive program M is deactivated. The
automatic transmission switches into the
automatic drive program that was last selec-
ted, i.e. E or S.
Manual drive program (Mercedes-
AMG vehicles and vehicles with the
AMG sports package)
General information
In this drive program, you can permanently
change gear yourself by using the steering
wheel paddle shifters. The transmission must be
in position D.
i
As well as this permanent drive program M,
you can also activate temporary drive pro-
gram M (
Y page 140).
Switching on the manual drive program
X
Press the program selector button
(
Y page 138) repeatedly until M appears in
the multifunction display.
X
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: turn the drive pro-
gram selector (
Y page 139) until M appears in
the multifunction display.
The indicator M on the drive program selector
lights up in red.
Manual drive program M is different from drive
programs S and S+ with regard to spontaneity,
responsiveness and smoothness of gear
changes.
Manual drive program M can be selected using
the drive program selector. In manual drive pro-
gram M, you can change gear using the steering
wheel paddle shifters if the transmission is in
position D. The gear currently selected and
engaged is shown in the multifunction display.
Upshifting
X
Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter.
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
!
In manual drive program M, the automatic
transmission does not shift up automatically
even when the engine limiting speed for the
current gear is reached. When the engine lim-
iting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to
prevent the engine from overrevving. Always
make sure that the engine speed does not
reach the red area of the tachometer. There is
otherwise a risk of engine damage.
:
Gear indicator
;
Upshift indicator
Before the engine speed reaches the red area,
an upshift indicator will be shown in the multi-
function display.
X
When the UP message appears in the multi-
function display, pull on the right-hand steer-
ing wheel paddle shifter.
Shift recommendation
The gearshift recommendations assist you in
adopting an economical driving style. The rec-
ommended gear is shown in the multifunction
display.
X
If corresponding gearshift recommenda-
tion : appears in the multifunction display
on the instrument cluster, pull on the right-
hand steering wheel paddle shifter
(
Y page 139).
The automatic transmission shifts to recom-
mended gear ;.
Automatic transmission
141
Driving and parking
Z
Downshifting
X
Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter.
The automatic transmission shifts down to
the next gear.
i
If you brake the vehicle or stop without shift-
ing down, the automatic transmission will
shift down to a gear that will allow the vehicle
to accelerate or pull away again.
i
For maximum acceleration, pull the left-
hand steering wheel paddle shifter until the
transmission selects the optimum gear for
the current speed.
Kickdown
You can also use kickdown for maximum accel-
eration in manual drive program M.
X
Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the
pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to a lower
gear depending on the engine speed.
X
Shift back up once the desired speed is
reached.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: it is not possible to
use kickdown in manual drive program M.
Switching off the manual drive program
X
Press the program selector button
(
Y page 138).
X
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: turn the drive pro-
gram selector (
Y page 139).
142
Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
Problems with the transmission
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The transmission has
problems shifting gear.
The transmission is losing oil.
X
Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
7G-TRONIC:
The acceleration ability
is deteriorating.
The transmission no lon-
ger changes gear.
The transmission is in emergency mode.
It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.
X
Stop the vehicle.
X
Shift the transmission to position P.
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X
Shift the transmission to position D or R.
If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R is
selected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.
X
Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
9G-TRONIC:
The acceleration ability
is deteriorating.
The transmission no lon-
ger changes gear.
The transmission is in emergency mode.
It is only partly possible to engage the gears or the transmission is in
position N.
X
Stop the vehicle.
X
Shift the transmission to position P.
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X
Shift the transmission to position D or R.
X
Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop
immediately.
Refueling
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-
sion.
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
refueling.
G
WARNING
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
There is a risk of injury.
You must make sure that fuel does not come
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following:
R
Wash away fuel from skin immediately
using soap and water.
R
If fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical assistance with-
out delay.
Refueling
143
Driving and parking
Z
R
If fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-
ing.
R
Immediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with fuel.
G
WARNING
Electrostatic buildup can create sparks and
ignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire and
explosion.
Always touch the vehicle body before opening
the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump
nozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup is
thereby discharged.
!
Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition
if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system and the
engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop
and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
completely.
!
Overfilling the fuel tank could damage the
fuel system.
!
Take care not to spill any fuel on painted
surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
paintwork.
!
Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.
Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injection sys-
tem could be blocked by particles from the
fuel can.
Do not get into the vehicle again during the refu-
eling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge
could build up again.
If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out
when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.
For further information on fuel and fuel quality
(
Y page 332).
Refueling
General information
Pay attention to the important safety notes
(
Y page 143).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked or locked auto-
matically when you unlock or lock the vehicle
with the key or using KEYLESS-GO.
The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed
8 in the instrument cluster. The arrow next
to the filling pump indicates the side of the vehi-
cle.
Opening the fuel filler flap
:
To open the fuel filler flap
;
To insert the fuel filler cap
=
Tire pressure table
?
Instruction label for fuel type to be refueled
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or, on vehicles with KEYLESSGO:
X
Open the driver's door.
The on-board electronics now have status 0.
This is the same as the SmartKey having been
removed.
X
Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 127).
X
Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
arrow :.
The fuel filler flap opens slightly.
X
Open the fuel filler flap fully.
X
Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and
remove it.
X
Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on the
inside of fuel filler flap ;.
X
Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
pump nozzle into the tank, hook in place and
refuel.
X
Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops
filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak
out.
144
Refueling
Driving and parking
Closing the fuel filler flap
X
Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
X
Close the fuel filler flap.
Close the fuel filler flap before locking the vehi-
cle. Otherwise, the locking pin of the central
locking prevents the fuel filler flap from closing.
If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the
8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. A mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display
(
Y page 224).
Fuel filler flap emergency release
X
Open the trunk lid.
X
Slide down the parcel net.
X
Open the right-hand side trim panel.
X
Detach the emergency release from
retainer :.
X
Pull the emergency release in the direction of
arrow ;.
The fuel filler flap is unlocked.
X
Open the fuel filler flap.
Refueling
145
Driving and parking
Z
Problems with fuel and the fuel tank
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Fuel is leaking from the
vehicle.
G
WARNING
The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
Risk of explosion or fire.
X
Apply the electric parking brake.
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or, on vehicles with KEYLESSGO:
X
Open the driver's door.
The on-board electronics now have status 0. This is the same as the
SmartKey having been removed.
X
Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
The fuel filler flap cannot
be opened.
The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
X
Unlock the vehicle (Y page 76).
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 78).
X
Open the trunk lid.
X
Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release
(
Y page 145).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Parking
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust
gas flow. There is a risk of fire.
Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-
rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-
cle which are hot. Take particular care not to
park on dry grassland or harvested grain
fields.
G
WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shift the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
R
start the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
!
Always secure the vehicle correctly against
rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicle or its driv-
etrain could be damaged.
146
Parking
Driving and parking
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against
rolling away unintentionally:
R
the parking brake must be applied.
R
the transmission must be in position P and the
Smartkey must be removed from the ignition
lock.
R
the front wheels must be turned towards the
curb on steep uphill or downhill gradients.
Switching off the engine
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
tral position N when you switch off the engine.
The vehicle may roll away. There is a risk of an
accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P. Prevent the parked vehi-
cle from rolling away by applying the parking
brake.
Vehicles with automatic transmission
X
Apply the parking brake firmly.
X
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles): shift the transmission to position P.
X
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: when the vehicle
is stationary, press button :.
X
With the Smartkey: turn the Smartkey to
position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it.
The immobilizer is activated.
X
With KEYLESS-GO: press the KEYLESS-GO
Start/Stop button (
Y page 127).
The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster go out.
When the driver's door is closed, this corre-
sponds to Smartkey position 1. When the
driver's door is open, this corresponds to
Smartkey position 0: "Smartkey removed".
If you switch the engine off with the transmis-
sion in position R or D, the automatic transmis-
sion shifts to N automatically.
With the Smartkey: if you then open the driv-
er's door or the front-passenger door or remove
the Smartkey from the ignition, the automatic
transmission shifts to P automatically.
With KEYLESS-GO: if you then open the driver's
or front-passenger door, the automatic trans-
mission shifts to P.
If you want the automatic transmission to
remain in neutral N, e.g. when having the vehicle
cleaned in an automatic car wash with a towing
system:
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove the
Start/Stop button from the ignition lock.
X
Insert the Smartkey into the ignition lock.
X
All vehicles: switch the ignition on.
X
Depress the brake pedal and keep it
depressed.
X
Shift to neutral N.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
Release the parking brake.
X
Switch off the ignition and leave the Smartkey
in the ignition lock.
The engine can be switched off while the vehicle
is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/
Stop button for about three seconds. This func-
tion operates independently of the ECO start/
stop automatic engine switch-off function.
Parking brake
G
WARNING
If you must brake the vehicle with the parking
brake, the braking distance is considerably
longer and the wheels could lock. There is an
increased danger of skidding and accidents.
Only use the parking brake to brake the vehi-
cle when the service brake is faulty. Do not
apply the parking brake too firmly. If the
wheels lock, release the parking brake until
the wheels begin turning again.
Parking
147
Driving and parking
Z
G
WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shift the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
R
start the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is a risk of
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
If you brake the vehicle with the parking brake,
the brake lamps will not light up.
X
To apply: depress parking brake ; firmly.
When the engine is running, the $ (USA
only) or J (Canada only) indicator lamp
lights up in the instrument cluster.
X
To release: depress the brake pedal and keep
it depressed.
X
Pull release handle :.
When the ignition is switched on or the engine
is running, the $ (USA only) or J (Can-
ada only) indicator lamp goes out in the instru-
ment cluster.
Parking the vehicle for a long period
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than
four weeks, the battery may be damaged by
exhaustive discharging.
If you leave the vehicle parked for longer than six
weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage as a
result of lack of use.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop and seek
advice.
i
You can obtain information about trickle
chargers from a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Driving tips
General notes
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you switch off the ignition while driving,
safety-relevant functions are only available
with limitations, or not at all. This could affect,
for example, the power steering and the brake
boosting effect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake. There is a risk
of an accident.
Do not switch off the ignition while driving.
G
WARNING
If you operate mobile communication equip-
ment while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate this equipment when the vehicle
is stationary.
Observe the legal requirements for the country
in which you are driving. Some jurisdictions pro-
hibit the driver from using a mobile phone while
driving a vehicle.
If you make a call while driving, always use
hands-free mode. Only operate the telephone
when the traffic situation permits. If you are
unsure, pull over to a safe location and stop
before operating the telephone.
Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle covers a
distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) per sec-
ond.
148
Driving tips
Driving and parking
Drive sensibly save fuel
Observe the following tips to save fuel:
X
The tires should always be inflated to the rec-
ommended tire pressure.
X
Remove unnecessary loads.
X
Remove roof racks when they are not needed.
X
Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.
X
Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.
X
Have all maintenance work carried out as
indicated by the service intervals in the Main-
tenance Booklet or by the service interval dis-
play.
Fuel consumption also increases when driving in
cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly ter-
rain.
Drinking and driving
G
WARNING
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
driving are very dangerous combinations.
Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-
ment.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal acci-
dent is greatly increased when you drink or
take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-
ing drugs.
Emission control
G
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
out sufficient ventilation.
Certain engine systems are designed to keep
the level of poisonous components in exhaust
fumes within legal limits.
These systems only work at peak efficiency if
they are serviced exactly in accordance with the
manufacturer's specifications. Always have
work on the engine carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center for this purpose. In particular, work
relevant to safety or on safety-related systems
must be carried out at a qualified specialist
workshop.
The engine settings must not be changed under
any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific
service work must be carried out at regular
intervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-
Benz service requirements. Details can be found
in the Maintenance Booklet.
ECO display
The ECO display provides feedback on how eco-
nomical your driving characteristics are. The
ECO display assists you in achieving the most
economical driving style for the selected set-
tings and prevailing conditions. Your driving
style can significantly influence the vehicle's
consumption.
The ECO display consists of three bars:
R
Acceleration
R
Constant
R
Coasting
The percent value is the average value of the
three bars. The three bars and the mean value
begin at the value of 50%. A higher percentage
indicates a more economical driving style.
The ECO display does not indicate the actual fuel
consumption. A fixed percentage count in the
ECO display does not indicate a fixed consump-
tion.
Apart from driving style, consumption is
dependent on many factors such as, e.g.:
R
load
R
tire pressure
R
cold start
R
choice of route
R
electrical consumers switched on
These factors are not included in the ECO dis-
play.
Driving tips
149
Driving and parking
Z
The evaluation of your driving style is carried out
using the following three categories:
R
Acceleration (evaluation of all acceleration
processes):
-
The bar fills up: moderate acceleration,
especially at higher speeds
-
The bar empties: sporty acceleration
R
Constant (assessment of driving behavior at
all times):
-
The bar fills up: constant speed and avoid-
ance of unnecessary acceleration and
deceleration
-
The bar empties: fluctuations in speed
R
Coasting (assessment of all deceleration
processes):
-
The bar fills up: anticipatory driving, keep-
ing your distance and early release of the
accelerator. The vehicle can coast without
use of the brakes.
-
The bar empties: frequent braking
i
An economical driving style specially
requires driving at moderate engine speeds.
To achieve a higher value in the categories
Acceleration
and Constant:
R
observe the gearshift recommendations.
R
drive in drive program E.
i
On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g.
on the highway, only the bar for Constant
will
change.
i
The ECO display summarizes the driving
characteristics from the start of the journey to
its completion. For this reason, the bars
change dynamically at the beginning of the
journey. On longer journeys, there are fewer
changes. For more dynamic changes, carry
out a manual reset.
For further information on the ECO display, see
(
Y page 199).
Braking
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
There is an increased danger of skidding and
accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
ing on a slippery road surface.
Downhill gradients
!
On long and steep gradients, you must
reduce the load on the brakes by shifting to a
lower gear in good time. This allows you to
take advantage of the engine's braking effect.
This helps you to avoid overheating the
brakes and wearing them out excessively.
When you take advantage of engine braking, a
drive wheel may not turn for some time, e.g.
on a slippery road surface. This could cause
damage to the drive train. This type of damage
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz war-
ranty.
Do not depress the brake pedal continuously
while the vehicle is in motion, e.g. causing the
brakes to rub by constantly applying light pres-
sure to the pedal. This results in excessive and
premature wear to the brake pads.
Change into a lower gear in good time on long
and steep downhill gradients. This is especially
important if the vehicle is laden.
Heavy and light loads
G
WARNING
If you rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving, the braking system can overheat. This
increases the stopping distance and can even
cause the braking system to fail. There is a
risk of an accident.
Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Never
depress the brake pedal and the accelerator
pedal at the same time.
!
Depressing the brake pedal constantly
results in excessive and premature wear to
the brake pads.
If the brakes have been subjected to a heavy
load, do not stop the vehicle immediately, but
drive on for a short while. This allows the airflow
to cool the brakes more quickly.
150
Driving tips
Driving and parking
Wet roads
If you have driven for a long time in heavy rain
without braking, there may be a delayed reac-
tion from the brakes when braking for the first
time. This may also occur after the vehicle has
been washed or driven through deep water.
You have to depress the brake pedal more
firmly. Maintain a greater distance from the
vehicle in front.
After driving on a wet road or having the vehicle
washed, brake firmly while paying attention to
the traffic conditions. This will warm up the
brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly
and protecting them against corrosion.
Limited braking performance on salt-
treated roads
If you drive on salted roads, a layer of salt resi-
due may form on the brake discs and brake
pads. This can result in a significantly longer
braking distance.
R
In order to prevent any salt build-up, apply the
brakes occasionally while paying attention to
the traffic conditions.
R
Carefully depress the brake pedal and the
beginning and end of a journey.
R
Maintain a greater distance to the vehicle
ahead.
Servicing the brakes
!
The brake fluid level may be too low, if:
R
if the red brake warning lamp lights up in
the instrument cluster and
R
you hear a warning tone while the engine is
running
Observe additional warning messages in the
multifunction display.
The brake fluid level may be too low due to
brake pad wear or leaking brake lines.
Have the brake system checked immediately.
Consult a qualified specialist workshop to
arrange this.
!
Vehicles with 4MATIC: function or per-
formance tests may only be carried out on a 2-
axle dynamometer. If you wish to operate the
vehicle on such a dynamometer, please con-
sult a qualified specialist workshop in
advance. You could otherwise damage the
drive train or the brake system.
!
Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP
®
sys-
tem operates automatically, the engine and
the ignition must be switched off (SmartKey in
position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock or Start/
Stop button in position 0 or 1) while the park-
ing brake is being tested on a brake dyna-
mometer.
Braking maneuvers triggered automatically
by ESP
®
may seriously damage the brake sys-
tem.
!
Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP
®
sys-
tem operates automatically, the engine and
the ignition system must be switched off
(SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the ignition
lock or Start/Stop button in position 0 or 1)
when:
R
testing the parking brake on a brake dyna-
mometer.
R
you intend to have the vehicle towed with
one of the axles raised.
Braking maneuvers triggered automatically
by ESP
®
may seriously damage the brake sys-
tem.
All checks and maintenance work on the brake
system must be carried out at a qualified spe-
cialist worksho
p.
Ha
ve brake pads installed and brake fluid
replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
If the brake system has only been subject to
moderate loads, you should test the functional-
ity of your brakes at regular intervals. To do so,
press firmly on the brake pedal when driving at a
high speed. This improves the grip of the brake
pads.
You can find a description of Brake Assist (BAS)
on (
Y page 65) or of BAS PLUS on (Y page 65).
The braking characteristics of the vehicle can be
seriously impaired if:
R
brake pads other than those recommended
are installed
R
the recommended brake fluid is not used
Safe braking can no longer be guaranteed.
AMG high-performance and ceramic
brakes
The high-performance brake system is only
installed on the Mercedes-AMG
CLS 63 S 4MATIC model.
Driving tips
151
Driving and parking
Z
The AMG brake systems are designed for heavy
loads. This may lead to noise when braking. This
will depend on:
R
Speed
R
Braking force
R
Environmental conditions, such as tempera-
ture and humidity
The wear of individual components of the brake
system, such as the brake pads/linings or brake
discs, depends on the individual driving style
and operating conditions.
For this reason, it is impossible to state a mile-
age that will be valid under all circumstances. An
aggressive driving style will lead to high wear.
You can obtain further information about this
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
New and replaced brake pads and discs only
reach their optimum braking effect after several
hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for
this by applying greater force to the brake pedal.
Keep this in mind, and adapt your driving and
braking accordingly during this break-in period.
Excessive heavy braking results in correspond-
ingly high brake wear. Observe the brake wear
warning lamp in the instrument cluster and note
any brake status messages in the multifunction
display. Especially for high performance driving,
it is important to maintain and have the brake
system checked regularly.
Driving on wet roads
Hydroplaning
If water has accumulated to a certain depth on
the road surface, there is a danger of hydro-
planing occurring, even if:
R
you drive at low speeds.
R
the tires have adequate tread depth.
For this reason, in the event of heavy rain or in
conditions in which hydroplaning may occur,
you must drive in the following manner:
R
lower your speed.
R
avoid ruts.
R
avoid sudden steering movements.
R
brake carefully.
Driving on flooded roads
!
Do not drive through flooded areas. Check
the depth of any water before driving through
it. Drive slowly through standing water. Oth-
erwise, water may enter the vehicle interior or
the engine compartment. This can damage
the electronic components in the engine or
the automatic transmission. Water can also
be drawn in by the engine's air suction nozzles
and this can cause engine damage.
Winter driving
G
WARNING
If you shift down on a slippery road surface in
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
effect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.
There is an increased danger of skidding and
accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
ing on a slippery road surface.
G
DANGER
If the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequate
ventilation is not possible, poisonous gases
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the
vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle
becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk of
fatal injury.
If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating
running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area
around the vehicle are clear of snow. To
ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a
window on the side of the vehicle that is not
facing into the wind.
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified
specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Drive particularly carefully on slippery road sur-
faces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and
braking maneuvers. Do not use the cruise con-
trol or DISTRONIC PLUS.
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
stopped when moving at low speed:
X
Shift the transmission to position N.
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
152
Driving tips
Driving and parking
Changes in the outside temperature are dis-
played after a short delay.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing
point do not guarantee that the road surface is
free of ice. The road may still be icy, especially in
wooded areas or on bridges. The vehicle could
skid if you fail to adapt your driving style. Always
adapt your driving style and drive at a speed to
suit the prevailing weather conditions.
You should pay special attention to road condi-
tions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
For more information on driving with snow
chains, see (
Y page 303).
For more information on driving with summer
tires, see (
Y page 303).
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" sec-
tion (
Y page 303).
Driving systems
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive stands for inno-
vative driver assistance and safety systems
which enhance comfort and support the driver in
critical situations. With these intelligent co-ordi-
nated systems Mercedes-Benz has set a mile-
stone on the path towards autonomous driving.
Mercedes-Benz Intelligent Drive embraces all
elements of active and passive safety in one well
thought out system for the safety of the vehi-
cle occupants and that of other road users.
Further information on driving safety systems
(
Y page 64).
Cruise control
General notes
Cruise control maintains a constant road speed
for you. It brakes automatically in order to avoid
exceeding the set speed. On long and steep
downhill gradients, especially if the vehicle is
laden, you must shift to a lower gear in time. By
doing so, you will make use of the braking effect
of the engine. This relieves the load on the brake
system and prevents the brakes from overheat-
ing and wearing too quickly.
Use cruise control only if road and traffic con-
ditions make it appropriate to maintain a steady
speed for a prolonged period. You can store any
road speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruise con-
trol can neither reduce the risk of an accident
nor override the laws of physics. Cruise control
cannot take into account the road, traffic and
weather conditions. Cruise control is only an
aid. You are responsible for the distance to the
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in
good time and for staying in your lane.
Do not use cruise control:
R
in road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in
heavy traffic or on winding roads
R
on slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
traction and the vehicle could then skid
R
when there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
heavy rain or snow
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the speed stored.
Cruise control lever
:
To activate or increase speed
;
To activate or reduce speed
=
To deactivate cruise control
?
To activate at the current speed/last stored
speed
When you activate cruise control, the stored
speed is shown in the multifunction display for
five seconds.
Driving systems
153
Driving and parking
Z
Activation conditions
To activate cruise control, all of the following
activation conditions must be fulfilled:
R
the parking brake must be released.
R
you are driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).
R
ESP
®
must be active, but not intervening.
R
the transmission must be in position D.
Storing and maintaining the current
speed
You can accept the current speed if you are
driving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).
X
Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed.
X
Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or
down ;.
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Cruise control is activated. The vehicle auto-
matically maintains the stored speed.
i
Cruise control may be unable to maintain
the stored speed on uphill gradients. The
stored speed is resumed when the gradient
evens out. Cruise control maintains the
stored speed on downhill gradients by auto-
matically applying the brakes.
Storing the current speed or calling up
the last stored speed
G
WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it is lower
than the current speed, the vehicle deceler-
ates. If you do not know the stored speed, the
vehicle could decelerate unexpectedly. There
is a risk of an accident.
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
tions before calling up the stored speed. If you
do not know the stored speed, store the
desired speed again.
X
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you :.
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
The first time cruise control is activated, it
stores the current speed or regulates the
speed of the vehicle to the previously stored
speed.
Setting a speed
X
Press the cruise control lever up : for a
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
X
To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-
ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press
the cruise control lever up : or down ; to
the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is pressed
up : or down ; the last speed stored is
increased or reduced.
X
To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-
ments (10 km/h increments): briefly press
154
Driving systems
Driving and parking
the cruise control lever up : or down ; to
the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is pressed
up : or down ; the last speed stored is
increased or reduced.
i
Cruise control is not deactivated if you
depress the accelerator pedal. For example, if
you accelerate briefly to overtake, cruise con-
trol adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last
speed stored after you have finished overtak-
ing.
Deactivating cruise control
There are several ways to deactivate cruise con-
trol:
X
Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
wards :.
or
X
Brake.
Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:
R
you depress the parking brake
R
you are driving at less than 20 mph (30 km/h)
R
ESP
®
intervenes or you deactivate ESP
®
R
you shift the transmission to position N while
driving
If cruise control is deactivated, you will hear a
warning tone. You will see the Cruise Con‐
trol Off message in the multifunction display
for approximately five seconds.
i
When you switch off the engine, the last
speed stored is cleared.
DISTRONIC PLUS
General notes
DISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed and auto-
matically helps you maintain the distance to the
vehicle detected in front. Vehicles are detected
with the aid of the radar sensor system.
DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically so that
the set speed is not exceeded.
Change into a lower gear in good time on long
and steep downhill gradients. This is especially
important if the vehicle is laden. By doing so, you
will make use of the braking effect of the engine.
This relieves the load on the brake system and
prevents the brakes from overheating and wear-
ing too quickly.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a risk of
a collision, you will be warned visually and
acoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent a
collision without your intervention. An intermit-
tent warning tone will then sound and the dis-
tance warning lamp will light up in the instru-
ment cluster. Brake immediately in order to
increase the distance to the vehicle in front or
take evasive action provided it is safe to do so.
For DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you, the radar
sensor system must be operational.
DISTRONIC PLUS operates in range between
0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (200
km/h)
.
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving on
roads with steep gradients.
As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves, it
can resemble the radar detectors of the respon-
sible authorities. You can refer to the relevant
chapter in the Operator's Manual if questions
are asked about this.
i
USA only: This device has been approved by
the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System". The
radar sensor is intended for use in an auto-
motive radar system only. Removal, tamper-
ing, or altering of the device will void any war-
ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC. Do
not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-
approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
i
Canada only: This device complies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
Driving systems
155
Driving and parking
Z
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the device
will void any warranties, and is not permitted.
Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-
approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:
R
people or animals
R
stationary obstacles on the road, e.g. stop-
ped or parked vehicles
R
oncoming and crossing traffic
As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither give
warnings nor intervene in such situations.
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and be ready to brake.
G
WARNING
DISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearly iden-
tify other road users and complex traffic sit-
uations.
In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:
R
give an unnecessary warning and then
brake the vehicle
R
neither give a warning nor intervene
R
accelerate or brake unexpectedly
There is a risk of an accident.
Continue to drive carefully and be ready to
brake, in particular when warned to do so by
DISTRONIC PLUS.
G
WARNING
DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with up
to 50% of the maximum possible deceleration.
If this braking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC
PLUS warns you visually and audibly. There is
a risk of an accident.
In such cases, apply the brakes yourself and
try to take evasive action.
!
If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is
activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in
certain situations.
To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
the following or other similar situations:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONIC
PLUS can neither reduce the risk of accident nor
override the laws of physics. DISTRONIC PLUS
cannot take into account the road, traffic and
weather conditions. DISTRONIC PLUS is only an
aid. You are responsible for the distance to the
vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in
good time and for staying in your lane.
Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:
R
in road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintain a constant speed, e.g. in
heavy traffic or on winding roads
R
on slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
traction and the vehicle could then skid
R
when there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,
heavy rain or snow
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrow vehi-
cles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, or vehi-
cles driving on a different line.
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
impaired if:
R
there is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
R
there is snow or heavy rain
R
there is interference by other radar sources
R
there are strong radar reflections, for exam-
ple, in parking garages
If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects a vehicle
in front,
DISTRONIC PLUS ma
y unexpectedly
accelerate the vehicle to the stored speed.
156
Driving systems
Driving and parking
This speed may:
R
be too high if you are driving in a filter lane or
an exit lane
R
be so high in the right lane that you pass vehi-
cles driving on the left (left-hand drive coun-
tries)
R
be so high in the left lane that you pass vehi-
cles driving on the right (right-hand drive
countries)
If there is a change of drivers, advise the new
driver of the speed stored.
Cruise control lever
:
To store the current speed or a higher speed
;
To store the current speed or a lower speed
=
To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS
?
To store the current speed or call up the last
stored speed
A
To set the specified minimum distance
Activating DISTRONIC PLUS
Activation conditions
In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, the fol-
lowing conditions must be fulfilled:
R
the engine must be started. It may take up to
two minutes after pulling away before
DISTRONIC PLUS is operational.
R
the parking brake must be released.
R
ESP
®
must be active, but not intervening.
R
Active Parking Assist must not be activated.
R
the transmission must be in position D.
R
the hood must be closed.
R
the driver's door must be closed when you
shift from P to D or your seat belt must be
fastened.
R
the front-passenger door and rear doors must
be closed.
R
the vehicle must not skid.
Activating
X
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ;, or press it up : or down =.
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
X
Press the cruise control lever repeatedly
up : or down = until the desired speed is
set.
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of the
vehicle in front, but only up to the desired
stored speed.
If the vehicle in front of you is stationary, you can
only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once your vehi-
cle is stationary as well.
i
If you do not fully release the accelerator
pedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Override
mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display. The
set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in
front will then not be maintained. You will be
driving at the speed you determine by the
position of the accelerator pedal.
You can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS when
stationary. The lowest speed that can be set is
18 mph (30 km/h).
X
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you ; up : or down = .
DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.
To activate at the current speed/last
stored speed
G
WARNING
If you call up the stored speed and it differs
from the current speed, the vehicle acceler-
ates or decelerates. If you do not know the
Driving systems
157
Driving and parking
Z
stored speed, the vehicle could accelerate or
brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
tions before calling up the stored speed. If you
do not know the stored speed, store the
desired speed again.
X
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you :.
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The first time it
is activated, the current speed is stored. Oth-
erwise, it sets the vehicle cruise speed to the
previously stored value.
Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
Pulling away and driving
X
If you want to pull away with DISTRONIC
PLUS: remove your foot from the brake pedal.
X
Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards
you :.
or
X
Accelerate briefly.
Your vehicle pulls away and adapts its speed
to that of the vehicle in front.
If no vehicle is detected in front, your vehicle
accelerates to the set speed.
The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing
an unidentified obstacle or is driving on a differ-
ent line from another vehicle. The vehicle then
brakes automatically.
If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS
operates in the same way as cruise control.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in
front has slowed down, it brakes your vehicle. In
this way, the distance you have selected is main-
tained.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-moving
vehicle in front, it increases the driving speed.
However, the vehicle is only accelerated up to
the speed you have stored.
Selecting the drive program
DISTRONIC PLUS supports a sporty driving style
when you have selected the S or M (AMG vehi-
cles: S, S+ or M) driving program (
Y page 138).
Acceleration behind the vehicle in front or to the
set speed is then noticeably more dynamic. If
you have selected the E (AMG vehicles: C) driv-
ing program, the vehicle accelerates more gen-
tly. This setting is recommended in stop-and-
start traffic.
Changing lanes
If you change to the passing lane, DISTRONIC
PLUS supports you when:
R
you are driving faster than 45 mph (70 km/h)
R
DISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the distance
to a vehicle in front
R
you switch on the appropriate turn signal
R
DISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger of
collision
If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicle is
accelerated. Acceleration will be interrupted if
changing lanes takes too long or if the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
becomes too small.
i
When you change lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS
monitors the left lane on left-hand-drive vehi-
cles or the right lane on right-hand-drive vehi-
cles.
158
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Stopping
G
WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, even if it is braked
only by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:
R
there is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply.
R
DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated
with the cruise control lever, e.g. by a vehi-
cle occupant or from outside the vehicle.
R
the electrical system in the engine com-
partment, the battery or the fuses have
been tampered with.
R
the battery is disconnected.
R
the accelerator pedal has been depressed,
e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
There is a risk of an accident.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
DISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
For further information on deactivating
DISTRONIC PLUS (
Y page 161).
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehicle in
front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle until it is
stationary.
Once your vehicle is stationary, it remains sta-
tionary and you do not need to depress the
brake.
Depending on the specified minimum distance,
your vehicle will come to a standstill at a suffi-
cient distance behind the vehicle in front. The
specified minimum distance is set using the
control on the cruise control lever.
When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the trans-
mission is shifted automatically to position P if:
R
the driver's door is open and the driver's seat
belt is unfastened.
R
the engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop
function.
R
a system malfunction occurs.
R
the power supply is not sufficient.
Setting a speed
X
Press the cruise control lever up : for a
higher speed or down ; for a lower speed.
X
To adjust the set speed in 1 mph incre-
ments (1 km/h increments): briefly press
the cruise control lever up : or down ; to
the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is pressed
up : or down ;, the last speed stored is
increased or reduced.
X
To adjust the set speed in 5 mph incre-
ments (10 km/h increments): briefly press
the cruise control lever up : or down ; to
the pressure point.
Every time the cruise control lever is pressed
up : or down ;, the last speed stored is
increased or reduced.
i
If you accelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC
PLUS adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last
speed stored after you have finished overtak-
ing.
Setting a specified minimum distance
You can set the specified minimum distance for
DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span
between one and two seconds. With this func-
tion, you can set the minimum distance that
DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front,
dependent on vehicle speed. You can see this
distance in the multifunction display
(
Y page 160).
i
Make sure that you maintain a sufficient
distance to the vehicle in front and comply
with the minimum distance as required by
law. Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front
if necessary.
Driving systems
159
Driving and parking
Z
You can set the specified minimum distance for
DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time span
between one and two seconds. With this func-
tion, you can set the minimum distance that
DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle in front,
dependent on vehicle speed. You can see this
distance in the multifunction display
(
Y page 160).
X
To increase: turn control ; in direction =.
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greater
distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front.
X
To decrease: turn control ; in direction :.
DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorter
distance between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front.
DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the speed-
ometer
When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one or two
segments ; in the set speed range light up.
If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,
segments ; between speed of the vehicle in
front : and stored speed = light up.
i
For design reasons, the speed displayed in
the speedometer may differ slightly from the
speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.
DISTRONIC PLUS displays in the multi-
function display
General notes
In the Assistance menu (Y page 203) of the on-
board computer, you can select the assistance
display.
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is deacti-
vated
:
Vehicle in front, if detected
;
Distance indicator, current distance to the
vehicle in front
=
Specified minimum distance to the vehicle
in front; adjustable
?
Own vehicle
X
Select the Assist. Graphic function using
the on-board computer (
Y page 203).
Display when DISTRONIC PLUS is activa-
ted
:
Vehicle in front, if detected
;
Specified minimum distance to the vehicle
in front; adjustable
=
Own vehicle
?
DISTRONIC PLUS active (text only appears
when the cruise control lever is actuated)
X
Select the Assist. Graphic function using
the on-board computer (
Y page 203).
i
You will see the stored speed for about five
seconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
160
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS
There are several ways to deactivate
DISTRONIC PLUS:
X
Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
wards :.
or
X
Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary
When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, you will
see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off
message in the
multifunction display for approximately five sec-
onds.
i
The last speed stored remains stored until
you switch off the engine.
i
DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if you
depress the accelerator pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS is automatically deactivated
if:
R
you engage the parking brake
R
ESP
®
intervenes or you deactivate ESP
®
R
the transmission is in the P, R or N position
R
you pull the cruise control lever towards you
in order to pull away and the front-passenger
door or one of the rear doors is open
R
the vehicle is skidding
R
you activate Active Parking Assist
If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you will hear
a warning tone. You will see the DISTRONIC
PLUS Off message in the multifunction display
for approximately five seconds.
Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS
General notes
Pay particular attention in the following traffic
situations:
R
Cornering, going into and coming out of a
bend
R
Vehicles traveling on a different line
R
Other vehicles changing lanes
R
Narrow vehicles
R
Obstructions and stationary vehicles
R
Crossing vehicles
In such situations, brake if necessary.
DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.
Cornering, going into and coming out of a
bend
The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detect vehi-
cles when cornering is limited. Your vehicle may
brake unexpectedly or late.
Vehicles traveling on a different line
DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehicles trav-
eling on a different line. The distance to the
vehicle in front will be too short.
Driving systems
161
Driving and parking
Z
Other vehicles changing lanes
DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected the vehicle
cutting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be
too short.
Narrow vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected the vehi-
cle in front on the edge of the road, because of
its narrow width. The distance to the vehicle in
front will be too short.
Obstructions and stationary vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake for obstacles
or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the detec-
ted vehicle turns a corner and reveals an obsta-
cle or stationary vehicle, DISTRONIC PLUS will
not brake for these.
Crossing vehicles
DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detect vehi-
cles that are crossing your lane. Activating
DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights with crossing
traffic, for example, could cause your vehicle to
pull away unintentionally.
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist
and Stop&Go Pilot
General notes
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and
Stop&Go Pilot aids you in keeping the vehicle in
the center of the driving lane by means of mod-
erate steering interventions in the speed range
from 0 - 125 mph (0 - 200 km/h).
It monitors the area in front of your vehicle by
means of multifunction camera :, at the top of
the windshield.
At speeds of 0 - 37 mph (0 - 60 km/h), Stop&Go
Pilot focuses on the vehicle in front, taking into
account lane markings, e.g. when following vehi-
cles in a traffic jam.
At speeds of more than 37 mph (60 km/h)
Steering Assist focuses on detected lane mark-
162
Driving systems
Driving and parking
ings (left and right), and only on the vehicle in
front if lane markings are missing.
If these conditions are not present, Steering
Assist and Stop&Go Pilot cannot provide assis-
tance.
DISTRONIC PLUS must be active in order for the
function to be available.
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style, DISTRONIC
PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor
override the laws of physics. It cannot take
account of road, weather and traffic conditions.
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and
Stop&Go Pilot is only an aid. You are responsible
for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi-
cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay-
ing in your lane.
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and
Stop&Go Pilot does not detect road and traffic
conditions. If you are following a vehicle which is
driving towards the edge of the road, your vehi-
cle could come into contact with the curb or
other road boundaries. Be particularly aware of
other road users, e.g. cyclists, that are directly
next to your vehicle.
Obstacles such as building site huts on the lane
or projecting out into the lane are not detected.
An inappropriate steering intervention, e.g. after
intentionally driving over a lane marking, can be
corrected at any time if you steer slightly in the
opposite direction.
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and
Stop&Go Pilot cannot continuously keep your
vehicle in lane. In some cases, the steering
intervention is not sufficient to bring the vehicle
back to the lane. In such cases, you must steer
the vehic
le yourself to ensure that it does not
leave the lane.
The support provided by the system can be
impaired if:
R
there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient
illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,
fog or spray
R
there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the
sun or reflection from other vehicles (e.g. if
the road surface is wet)
R
the windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or
covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-
ity of the camera
R
no, or several, unclear lane markings are pres-
ent for one lane, e.g. in a construction area
R
the lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
R
the distance to the vehicle in front is too small
and the lane markings thus cannot be detec-
ted
R
the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
branch off, cross one another or merge
R
the road is narrow and winding
R
there are strong shadows cast on the road
The system is switched to passive and no longer
assists you by performing steering interventions
if:
R
you actively change lanes
R
you switch on the turn signal
R
take your hands off the steering wheel or do
not steer for a prolonged period of time
i
After you have finished changing lanes,
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are auto-
matically active again.
DISTRONIC PLUS Steering Assist does not pro-
vide assistance:
R
on very sharp corners
R
when a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire
has been detected and displayed
Pay attention also to the important safety notes
for DISTRONIC PLUS (
Y page 156).
The steering interventions are c
arried out with a
limited steering moment. The system requires
the driver to keep his hands on the steering
wheel and to steer himself.
If you do not steer yourself or if you take your
hands off the steering wheel for a prolonged
period of time, the system will first alert you with
a visual warning. A steering wheel symbol
appears in the multifunction display. If you have
still not started to steer and have not taken hold
of the steering wheel after five seconds at the
latest, a warning tone also sounds to remind you
to take control of the vehicle. Steering Assist
and Stop&Go Pilot are switched to passive.
DISTRONIC PLUS remains active.
Activating Steering Assist and Stop&Go
Pilot
X
Activate the DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering
Assist and Stop&Go Pilot function using the
on-board computer (
Y page 204).
The DTR+: Steering Assistant On
mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are active.
Driving systems
163
Driving and parking
Z
Information in the multifunction display
If Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are activa-
ted but not ready for a steering intervention,
steering wheel symbol : appears in gray. If the
system provides you with support by means of
steering interventions, symbol : is shown in
green.
Deactivating Steering Assist and Stop&Go
Pilot
X
Deactivate the DISTRONIC PLUS with Steer-
ing Assist and Stop&Go Pilot function using
the on-board computer (
Y page 204).
The DTR+: Steering Assistant Off
mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are deac-
tivated.
When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated or not
available, Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are
deactivated automatically.
HOLD function
General notes
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the
following situations:
R
when pulling away, especially on steep slopes
R
when maneuvering on steep slopes
R
when waiting in traffic
The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver
having to depress the brake pedal.
The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD
function deactivated when you depress the
accelerator pedal to pull away.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away
despite being braked by the HOLD function if:
R
there is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply.
R
the HOLD function has been deactivated by
pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
R
the electrical system in the engine com-
partment, the battery or the fuses have
been tampered with.
R
the battery is disconnected
There is a risk of an accident.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
the HOLD function and secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
!
If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is
activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in
certain situations.
To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
the following or other similar situations:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
Activation conditions
You can activate the HOLD function if:
R
the vehicle is stationary
R
the engine is running or if it has been auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop
function
R
the driver's door is closed or your seat belt is
fastened
R
the parking brake is released
R
the transmission is in position D, R or N
R
DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated
164
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Activating the HOLD function
X
Make sure that the activation conditions are
met.
X
Depress the brake pedal.
X
Quickly depress the brake pedal further until
ë : appears in the multifunction display.
The HOLD function is activated. You can
release the brake pedal.
i
If depressing the brake pedal the first time
does not activate the HOLD function, wait
briefly and then try again.
Deactivating the HOLD function
The HOLD function is deactivated automatically
if:
R
you accelerate and the transmission is in
position D or R.
R
you shift the transmission to position P.
R
you depress the brake pedal again with a cer-
tain amount of pressure until ë disap-
pears from the multifunction display.
R
you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.
When the HOLD function is activated, the trans-
mission is shifted automatically to position P if:
R
the driver's door is open and the driver's seat
belt is unfastened.
R
the engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop
function.
R
the hood is opened.
R
a system malfunction occurs.
R
the power supply is not sufficient.
RACE START
Important safety notes
i
Observe the safety notes for the SPORT
handling mode (
Y page 71).
RACE START is intended solely for activation on
dedicated race circuits.
RACE START enables optimal acceleration from
a standing start. The precondition for this is a
suitable high-grip road surface.
i
RACE START is only available in AMG vehi-
cles.
Conditions for activation
You can activate RACE START if:
R
the doors are closed.
R
the engine is running and it has reached an
operating temperature of approximately
176 (80 †). This is the case when the oil
temperature gauge in the multifunction dis-
play is shown in white.
R
SPORT handling mode is activated.
(
Y page 71)
R
the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead
position.
R
the vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal is
depressed (left foot).
R
the transmission is in position D.
Activating RACE START
X
Depress the brake pedal with your left foot
and keep it depressed.
X
Turn the drive program selector clockwise
(
Y page 139) until the RS lamp lights up.
The RACE START Confirm: Paddle UP
Cancel: Paddle DOWN message appears in
the multifunction display.
i
If the activation conditions are no longer ful-
filled, RACE START is canceled. The RACE
START Canceled message appears in the
multifunction display.
X
To cancel: pull the left steering wheel paddle
shifter (
Y page 139).
or
X
To confirm: pull the right steering wheel pad-
dle shifter (
Y page 139).
The RACE
START Available Depress gas
pedal message appears in the multifunction
display.
i
If you do not depress the accelerator pedal
fully within two seconds, RACE START is can-
celed. The RACE
START Not Possible See
Operator's Manual message appears in the
multifunction display.
Driving systems
165
Driving and parking
Z
X
Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
The engine speed rises to approximately
3,500 rpm.
The RACE
START Release brake to start
message appears in the multifunction display.
i
If you do not release the brake pedal within
five seconds, RACE START is canceled. The
RACE START Canceled
message appears in
the multifunction display.
X
Take your foot off the brake, but keep the
accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceler-
ation.
The RACE
START Active message appears in
the multifunction display.
RACE START is deactivated when the vehicle
reaches a speed of approximately 30 mph (Can-
ada: 50 km/h). Drive program S+ is activated.
SPORT handling mode remains activated.
RACE START is deactivated immediately if you
release the accelerator pedal during RACE
START or if any of the activation conditions are
no longer fulfilled. The RACE START Not Pos‐
sible See Operator's Manual message
appears in the multifunction display.
i
If RACE START is used repeatedly within a
short period of time, it is only available again
after the vehicle has been driven a certain
distance.
AIRMATIC
Vehicle level
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When the vehicle is being lowered, people
could become trapped if their limbs are
between the vehicle body and the wheels or
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or
in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches
when the vehicle is being lowered.
Your vehicle regulates its height automatically.
All-round level control ensures the best possible
suspension and constant ground clearance,
even with a laden vehicle. When you drive fast,
the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve
driving safety and to reduce fuel consumption.
The following vehicle levels are possible:
R
Normal
R
Raised: the vehicle is raised by approximately
0.80 in (20 mm) when compared with the nor-
mal level
R
Lowered: the vehicle is raised by approx-
imately 0.40 in (10 mm) when compared with
the normal level
i
These changes in level are so slight that you
are hardly aware of them.
The "Normal" and "Raised" vehicle levels can be
set manually.
The "Lowered” vehicle level is set automatically:
R
at speeds above 70 mph (113 km/h)
R
if you have selected "Sports tuning"
(
Y page 167)
Setting the vehicle level
Select the "Normal" setting for normal road sur-
faces and "Raised" for driving with snow chains
or on particularly poor road surfaces. Your
selection remains stored even if yo
u remove the
Sma
rtKey from the ignition lock.
Setting raised level
X
Start the engine.
If indicator lamp ; is not lit:
X
Press the : button.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. The vehicle height
is adjusted to raised level.
The Vehicle
Rising message appears in the
display.
166
Driving systems
Driving and parking
The "Raised level" setting is canceled if you:
R
drive at a speed over approximately 75 mph
(120 km/h)
R
drive for approximately three minutes at a
speed over 50 mph (80 km/h)
The "Raised level" remains active when you are
not driving within these speed ranges.
Setting the normal level
X
Start the engine.
If indicator lamp ; is lit:
X
Press button : .
Indicator lamp ; goes out. The vehicle is
adjusted to normal level.
Suspension tuning
General notes
The electronically controlled damping system
works continuously. This improves driving
safety and ride comfort.
The damping is tuned individually to each wheel
and depends on:
R
your driving style, e.g. sporty
R
the road surface condition, e.g. bumps
R
your individual selection, i.e. sports or com-
fort
Your selection remains stored even if you
remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
Sports tuning
The firmer suspension tuning in Sport mode
ensures even better contact with the road.
Select this mode when employing a sporty driv-
ing style, e.g. on winding country roads.
X
Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up. Sports suspen-
sion tuning is selected.
The AIRMATIC
SPORT message appears in the
multifunction display.
Comfort tuning
In comfort mode, the driving characteristics of
your vehicle are more comfortable. Therefore,
select this mode if you favor a more comfortable
driving style. Select comfort mode also when
driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on straight
stretches of highway.
X
Press button :.
Indicator lamp = lights up. Comfort tuning is
selected.
The AIRMATIC COMFORT
message appears in
the multifunction display.
AMG adaptive sport suspension sys-
tem
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When the vehicle is being lowered, people
could become trapped if their limbs are
between the vehicle body and the wheels or
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or
in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches
when the vehicle is being lowered.
G
WARNING
Vehicles with level control:
Driving systems
167
Driving and parking
Z
The vehicle is slightly lowered if:
R
you have selected comfort suspension tun-
ing and
R
you lock the vehicle within approximately
60 seconds of switching off the engine
You and people in the vicinity of the wheel
arch or the underbody may thus become trap-
ped. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the
wheel arch or the underbody when you lock
the vehicle.
!
The vehicle is lowered by about 0.8 in
(20 mm) if:
R
you have selected "Comfortable tuning"
R
you switch off the engine and then
R
you lock the vehicle within approximately
60 seconds
When parking, position your vehicle so that it
does not make contact with the curb as the
vehicle is lowered. Your vehicle could other-
wise be damaged.
Suspension tuning
General notes
The electronically controlled damping system
works continuously. This improves driving
safety and ride comfort.
The damping is tuned individually to each wheel
and depends on:
R
your driving style, e.g. sporty
R
the road surface condition, e.g. bumps
R
your individual selection of Sport, Sport + or
Comfort
Sport mode
:
Mode selection button
;
Button to store, recall and display the selec-
ted mode
=
Sport + mode indicator lamp
?
Sport mode indicator lamp
The firmer suspension setting in Sport mode
ensures better contact with the road. Select this
mode when employing a sporty driving style,
e.g. on winding country roads.
X
Press button :.
Indicator lamp ? lights up. You have selected
Sport mode.
The AMG Suspension System SPORT
mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
Sport + mode
The very firm setting of the suspension setting in
Sport + mode ensures the best possible contact
with the road. Select this mode preferably when
driving on race circuits.
If indicator lamps = and ? are off:
X
Press button : twice.
Indicator lamps = and ? light up. You have
selected Sport + mode.
The AMG
Suspension System SPORT + mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
If indicator lamp ? lights up:
X
Press button : once.
Second indicator lamp = lights up. You have
selected Sport + mode.
The AMG
Suspension System SPORT + mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
Comfort mode
When comfort mode is selected, the driving
characteristics of your vehicle are more com-
fortable. Select this mode if you favor a comfort-
168
Driving systems
Driving and parking
oriented driving style. Select comfort mode also
when driving fast on straight roads, e.g. on
straight stretches of highway.
X
Press button : repeatedly until indicator
lamps = and ? go out.
You have selected Comfort mode.
The AMG
Suspension System COMFORT mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
Storing and calling up settings
Once the suspension setting and drive program
have been selected, you can store and call up
your settings using AMG button ;.
X
To store: press and hold AMG button ; until
you hear a tone.
X
To call up: press AMG button ;.
The stored suspension setting and drive pro-
gram are selected.
X
To display: briefly press AMG button ;.
Your selection appears in the multifunction
display.
Vehicle level
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When the vehicle is being lowered, people
could become trapped if their limbs are
between the vehicle body and the wheels or
underneath the vehicle. There is a risk of
injury.
Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or
in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches
when the vehicle is being lowered.
The vehicle may be lowered if you press the sus-
pension setting selector button or the AMG but-
ton. The vehicle also lowers if it is stationary.
!
If Sport or Sport + suspension tuning has
been selected, the vehicle's ground clearance
decreases. Make sure that no objects
become trapped or that the vehicle does not
become damaged, for example, on the curb.
i
The vehicle level may change visibly at the
rear axle if you park the vehicle and the out-
side temperature changes. If the temperature
drops, the vehicle level lowers; with an
increase in temperature, the vehicle level
rises.
Changing the rear axle ride height
This function is only available on the Mercedes-
AMG CLS 63 4MATIC.
The vehicle level at the rear axle depends on the
selected suspension mode and the vehicle
speed.
The vehicle level at the rear axle changes while
driving depending on which suspension mode is
selected:
R
Comfort: +0.4 in (+10 mm)
R
Sport + and Sport: -0.6 in (-15 mm)
When changing from Comfort to Sport or Sport
+, the axle is lowered approximately 1.0 in
(25 mm). When changing from Sport or Sport +
to Comfort, the axle is raised approximately
1.0 in (25 mm). This level change also takes
place when the vehicle is stationary.
If you drive faster than 105 mph (170 km/h), the
rear axle level is set to a middle level. This
increases driving safety and reduces air resist-
ance. If you then drive slower than 93 mph
(150 km/h), the level of the rear axle is again
adjusted to correspond to the selected suspen-
sion mode.
Load compensation
The vehicle can compensate differences in the
vehicle level by raising or lowering the rear axle.
This is the case, for example, if people get out or
if luggage is being loaded.
Load compensation takes place if:
R
a door, the trunk lid or the tailgate is opened
R
the parked vehicle is unlocked
For larger level changes, the engine must be
running.
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can
neither reduce the risk of accident nor override
the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannot take
account of road, weather and traffic conditions.
4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible for
the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
speed, for braking in good time and for staying in
your lane.
If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:
R
Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as
necessary when pulling away.
R
Accelerate less when driving.
Driving systems
169
Driving and parking
Z
!
Never tow the vehicle with one axle raised.
This may damage the transfer case. Damage
of this sort is not covered by the Mercedes-
Benz Limited Warranty. All wheels must
remain either on the ground or be fully raised.
Observe the instructions for towing the vehi-
cle with all wheels in full contact with the
ground.
i
In wintry driving conditions, the maximum
effect of 4MATIC can only be achieved if you
use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains
if necessary.
4MATIC ensures that all four wheels are perma-
nently driven. Together with ESP
®
, it improves
the traction of your vehicle whenever a drive
wheel spins due to insufficient grip.
PARKTRONIC
Important safety notes
PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid with
ultrasonic sensors. It monitors the area around
your vehicle using six sensors in the front
bumper and six sensors in the rear bumper.
PARKTRONIC indicates visually and audibly the
distance between your vehicle and an object.
PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a replace-
ment for your attention to your immediate sur-
roundings. You are always responsible for safe
maneuvering, parking and exiting a parking
space. When maneuvering, parking or pulling
out of a parking space, make sure that there are
no persons, animals or objects in the area in
which you are maneuvering.
!
When parking, pay particular attention to
objects above or below the sensors, such as
flower pots or trailer drawbars. PARKTRONIC
does not detect such objects when they are in
the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. You
could damage the vehicle or the objects.
The sensors may not detect snow and other
objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car
wash, the compressed-air brakes on a truck
or a pneumatic drill could cause PARKTRONIC
to malfunction.
PARKTRONIC may not function correctly on
uneven terrain.
PARKTRONIC is activated automatically when
you:
R
switch on the ignition
R
shift the transmission to position D, R or N
R
release the parking brake
PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above
11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lower
speeds.
Range of the sensors
General notes
PARKTRONIC does not take objects into con-
sideration that are:
R
below the detection range, e.g. people, ani-
mals or objects.
R
above the detection range, e.g. overhanging
loads, truck overhangs or loading ramps.
:
Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side
(example)
The sensors must be free from dirt, ice or slush.
They can otherwise not function correctly. Clean
the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch
or damage them (
Y page 282).
Range
170
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Front sensors
Center Approx. 40 in (approx.
100 cm)
Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.
60 cm)
Rear sensors
Center Approx. 48 in (approx.
120 cm)
Corners Approx. 32 in (approx.
80 cm)
Minimum distance
Center Approx. 8 in (approx. 20 cm)
Corners Approx. 6 in (approx. 15 cm)
If there is an obstacle within this range, the rel-
evant warning displays light up and a warning
tone sounds. If the distance falls below the min-
imum, the distance may no longer be shown.
Warning displays
Warning display for the front area
:
Segments on the left-hand side of the vehi-
cle
;
Segments on the right-hand side of the vehi-
cle
=
Segments showing operational readiness
The warning displays show the distance
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning display for the front area is located on
the dashboard above the center air vents. The
warning display for the rear area is located on
the headliner in the rear compartment.
The warning display for each side of the vehicle
is divided into five yellow and two red segments.
PARKTRONIC is operational if yellow segments
showing operational readiness = light up.
The selected transmission position and the
direction in which the vehicle is rolling deter-
mine which warning display is active when the
engine is running.
Transmission posi-
tion
Warning display
D
Front area activated
R, N or the vehicle is
rolling backwards
Rear and front areas
activated
P
No areas activated
One or more segments light up as the vehicle
approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi-
cle's distance from the obstacle.
From the:
R
sixth segment onwards, you will hear an inter-
mittent warning tone for approximately two
seconds.
R
seventh segment onwards, you will hear a
warning tone for approximately two seconds.
Driving systems
171
Driving and parking
Z
This indicates that you have now reached the
minimum distance.
Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC
:
Indicator lamp
;
Deactivates/activates PARKTRONIC
If indicator lamp ; lights up, PARKTRONIC is
deactivated. Active Parking Assist is then also
deactivated.
i
PARKTRONIC is automatically activated
when you turn the SmartKey to position 2 in
the ignition lock.
172
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Problems with PARKTRONIC
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Only the red segments in
the PARKTRONIC warn-
ing displays are lit. You
also hear a warning tone
for approximately two
seconds.
PARKTRONIC is then
deactivated and the indi-
cator lamp on the
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.
X
If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Only the red segments in
the PARKTRONIC warn-
ing displays are lit.
PARKTRONIC is then
deactivated.
The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.
X
Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 282).
X
Switch the ignition back on.
The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultra-
sound waves.
X
See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.
Active Parking Assist
General notes
Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking aid
with ultrasound. It measures the road on both
sides of the vehicle. A parking symbol indicates
a suitable parking space. Active steering inter-
vention and brake application can assist you
during parking. You may also use PARKTRONIC
(
Y page 170).
Important safety notes
Active Parking Assist is merely an aid. It is not a
replacement for your attention to your immedi-
ate surroundings. You are always responsible
for safe maneuvering, parking and exiting a
parking space. Make sure that no persons, ani-
mals or objects are in the maneuvering range.
When PARKTRONIC is switched off, Active Park-
ing Assist is also unavailable.
G
WARNING
While parking or pulling out of a parking
space, the vehicle swings out and can drive
onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could
result in a collision with another road user.
There is a risk of an accident.
Pay attention to other road users. Stop the
vehicle if necessary or cancel the Active Park-
ing Assist parking procedure.
!
If unavoidable, you should drive over obsta-
cles such as curbs slowly and not at a sharp
angle. Otherwise, you may damage the
wheels or tires.
Active Parking Assist may possibly indicate
parking spaces which are not suitable for park-
ing, for example:
R
where parking or stopping is prohibited
R
in front of driveways or entrances and exits
R
on unsuitable surfaces
Parking tips:
R
On narrow roads, drive as close to the parking
space as possible.
R
Parking spaces that are littered or overgrown
might be identified or measured incorrectly.
R
Parking spaces that are partially occupied by
trailer drawbars might not be identified as
such or be measured incorrectly.
Driving systems
173
Driving and parking
Z
R
Snowfall or heavy rain may lead to a parking
space being measured inaccurately.
R
Pay attention to the PARKTRONIC
(
Y page 171) warning messages during the
parking procedure.
R
You can intervene in the steering procedure
to correct it at any time. Active Parking Assist
will then be canceled.
R
When transporting a load which protrudes
from your vehicle, you should not use Active
Parking Assist.
R
Never use Active Parking Assist when snow
chains are installed.
R
Make sure that the tire pressures are always
correct. This has a direct influence on the
parking characteristics of the vehicle.
Use Active Parking Assist for parking spaces:
R
parallel or at right angles to the direction of
travel
R
that are on straight roads, not bends
R
that are on the same level as the road, e.g. not
on the sidewalk.
Detecting parking spaces
Objects located above the height range of Active
Parking Assist will not be detected when the
parking space is measured. These are not taken
into account when the parking procedure is cal-
culated, e.g. overhanging loads, tail sections or
loading ramps of goods vehicles.
G
WARNING
If there are objects above the detection range:
R
Active Park Assist may steer too early
R
the vehicle may not stop in front of these
objects
You may cause a collision as a result. There is
a risk of an accident.
If objects are located above the detection
range, stop and deactivate Active Parking
Assist.
For further information on the detection range
(
Y page 170).
Active Parking Assist does not assist you park-
ing in spaces at right angles to the direction of
travel if:
R
two parking spaces are located directly next
to one another
R
the parking space is directly next to a low
obstacle such as a low curb
R
you park forwards
Active Parking Assist does not assist you park-
ing in spaces that are parallel or at right angles
to the direction of travel if:
R
the parking space is on a curb
R
the system reads the parking space as being
blocked, for example by foliage or grass pav-
ing blocks
R
the area is too small for the vehicle to maneu-
ver into
R
the parking space is bordered by an obstacle,
e.g. a tree, a post or a trailer
Example: detected parking space
:
Detected parking space on the left
;
Parking symbol
=
Detected parking space on the right
Active Parking Assist is switched on automati-
cally when driving forwards. The system is
operational at speeds of up to approximately
22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the sys-
tem independently locates and measures park-
ing spaces on both sides of the vehicle.
Active Parking Assist will only detect parking
spaces:
R
parallel or at right angles to the direction of
travel
R
that are parallel to the direction of travel and
at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide
R
that are parallel to the direction of travel and
at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) longer than your vehi-
cle
R
that are at right angles to the direction of
travel and at least 39.5 in (1.0 m) wider than
your vehicle
174
Driving systems
Driving and parking
i
Note that Active Parking Assist cannot
measure the length of a parking space if it is at
right angles to the direction of travel. You will
need to judge whether your vehicle will fit into
the parking space.
When driving at speeds below 19 mph
(30 km/h), you will see the parking symbol as a
status indicator in the instrument cluster. When
a parking space has been detected, an arrow
towards the right or the left also appears. By
default, Active Parking Assist only displays park-
ing spaces on the front-passenger side. Parking
spaces on the driver's side are displayed as
soon as the turn signal on the driver's side is
activated. When parking on the driver's side,
this must remain switched on until you acknowl-
edge the use of Active Parking Assist by press-
ing the a button on the multifunction steer-
ing wheel. The system automatically determines
whether the parking space is parallel or at right
angles to the direction of travel.
A parking space is displayed while you are driv-
ing past it, and until you are approximately 50 ft
(15 m) away from it.
Parking
G
WARNING
If you leave the vehicle when it is only being
braked by Active Parking Assist it could roll
away if:
R
there is a malfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply.
R
the electrical system in the engine com-
partment, the battery or the fuses have
been tampered with.
R
the battery is disconnected.
R
the accelerator pedal has been depressed,
e.g. by a vehicle occupant.
There is a risk of an accident.
Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it
against rolling away.
i
When PARKTRONIC detects obstacles,
Active Parking Assist brakes automatically
during the parking process. You are respon-
sible for braking in good time.
X
Stop the vehicle when the parking space sym-
bol shows the desired parking space in the
instrument cluster.
X
Shift the transmission to position R.
The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:
% message appears in the multifunction
display.
X
To cancel the procedure: press the %
button on the multifunction steering wheel or
pull away.
or
X
To park using Active Parking Assist: press
the a button on the multifunction steering
wheel.
The Park Assist Active Accelerate
and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
X
Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
X
Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at all
times. When backing up, drive at a speed
below approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Oth-
erwise Active Parking Assist will be canceled.
Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a
standstill when the vehicle approaches the
rear border of the parking space.
Maneuvering may be required in tight parking
spaces.
The Park Assist Active Select D
Observe Surroundings message appears in
the multifunction display.
X
Shift the transmission to position D while the
vehicle is stationary.
Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
the other direction.
The Park Assist Active Accelerate
and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
i
You will achieve the best results by waiting
for the steering procedure to complete before
pulling away.
X
Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all
times.
Active Parking Assist brakes the vehicle to a
standstill when the vehicle is in the parking
space.
The Park Assist Active Select R
Observe Surroundings message appears in
the multifunction display.
Further transmission shifts may be necessary.
As soon as the parking procedure is complete,
the Park Assist Disabled
message appears
Driving systems
175
Driving and parking
Z
in the multifunction display and you will hear a
tone. The vehicle is now parked. The vehicle is
kept stationary without the driver having to
depress the brake pedal. The braking effect is
canceled when you depress the accelerator
pedal.
Active Parking Assist no longer supports you
with steering interventions and brake applica-
tions. When Active Parking Assist is finished,
you must steer and brake again yourself.
PARKTRONIC is still available.
X
Maneuver if necessary.
X
Always observe the warning messages dis-
played by PARKTRONIC (
Y page 171).
Parking tips:
R
The way your vehicle is positioned in the park-
ing space after parking is dependent on vari-
ous factors. These include the position and
shape of the vehicles parked in front and
behind it and the conditions of the location. It
may be the case that Active Parking Assist
guides you too far into a parking space, or not
far enough into it. In some cases, it may also
lead you across or onto the curb. If necessary,
you should cancel the parking procedure with
Active Parking Assist.
R
You can also select preselect transmission
position D. The vehicle redirects and does not
drive as far into the parking space. Should a
gear be changed too early, the parking pro-
cedure will be canceled. A sensible parking
position can no longer be achieved from this
position.
Exiting a parking space
In order that Active Parking Assist can support
you when exiting the parking space:
R
the border of the parking space must be high
enough at the front and the rear. A curb is too
small, for example.
R
the border of the parking space must not be
too wide, as the position of the vehicle must
not exceed an angle of 45° to the starting
position as it is maneuvering into the parking
space.
R
a maneuvering distance of at least 3.3 ft
(1.0 m) must be available.
i
If PARKTRONIC detects obstacles, Active
Parking Assist brakes automatically whilst the
vehicle exits the parking space. You are
responsible for braking in good time.
Active Parking Assist can only assist you with
exiting a parking space if you have parked the
vehicle parallel to the direction of travel using
Active Parking Assist.
X
Start the engine.
X
Release the parking brake.
X
Switch on the turn signal in the direction you
are pulling away.
X
Shift the transmission to position D or R.
The Start Park Assist? Yes: OK No:
% message appears in the multifunction
display.
X
To cancel the procedure: press the %
button on the multifunction steering wheel or
pull away.
or
X
To exit a parking space using Active Park-
ing Assist: press the a button on the mul-
tifunction steering wheel.
The Park Assist Active Accelerate
and Brake Observe Surroundings mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
X
Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
X
Pull away, being ready to brake at all times. Do
not exceed a maximum speed of approx-
imately 6 mph (10 km/h) when exiting a park-
ing space. Otherwise Active Parking Assist
will be canceled.
X
Shift the transmission to position D or R as
required or according to the message while
the vehicle is stationary.
Active Parking Assist immediately steers in
the other direction. The Park Assist
Active Accelerate and Brake Observe
Surroundings message appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
i
You will achieve the best results by waiting
for the steering procedure to complete before
pulling away.
If you back up after activation, the steering
wheel is moved to the straight-ahead posi-
tion.
X
Drive forwards and back up as instructed by
the PARKTRONIC warning displays.
Once you have exited the parking space com-
pletely, the steering wheel is moved to the
straight-ahead position. You hear a tone and the
Park Assist Finished
message appears in
the multifunction display. You will then have to
steer and merge into traffic on your own.
PARKTRONIC is still available. You can take over
176
Driving systems
Driving and parking
the steering, before the vehicle has exited the
parking space completely. This is useful, for
example when you recognize that it is already
possible to pull out of the parking space.
Canceling Active Parking Assist
You can cancel Active Parking Assist at any
time.
X
Stop the movement of the multifunction
steering wheel or steer yourself.
Active Parking Assist will be canceled at once.
The Park Assist Canceled
message
appears in the multifunction display and you
hear a tone.
or
X
Press the PARKTRONIC button on the center
console (
Y page 172).
PARKTRONIC is switched off and Active Park-
ing Assist is immediately canceled. The Park
Assist Canceled message appears in the
multifunction display and you hear a tone.
Active Parking Assist is canceled automatically
if:
R
the transmission is shifted too early
R
transmission position P is selected
R
parking using Active Parking Assist is no lon-
ger possible
R
you are driving faster than 6 mph (10 km/h)
R
a wheel spins, ESP
®
intervenes or fails. In
such cases the ÷ warning lamp lights up in
the instrument cluster.
A warning tone sounds. The parking symbol dis-
appears and the multifunction display shows the
Park Assist Canceled
message.
When Active Parking Assist is canceled, you
must steer and brake again yourself.
If a system malfunction occurs, the vehicle is
braked to a standstill. To drive on, depress the
accelerator again.
Rear view camera
General notes
Rear view camera : is an optical parking and
maneuvering aid. It shows the area behind your
vehicle with guide lines in the multimedia sys-
tem display.
The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a
mirror image, as in the rear view mirror.
i
The text shown in the multimedia system
display depends on the language setting. The
following are examples of rear view camera
messages in the multimedia system display.
Important safety notes
The rear view camera is only an aid. It is not a
replacement for your attention to your immedi-
ate surroundings. You are always responsible
for safe maneuvering and parking. When maneu-
vering or parking, make sure that there are no
persons, animals or objects in the area in which
you are maneuvering.
Under the following circumstances, the rear
view camera will not function, or will function in
a limited manner:
R
if the trunk lid is open
R
in heavy rain, snow or fog
R
at night or in very dark places
R
if the camera is exposed to very bright light
R
if the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED
lighting (the display may flicker)
R
if there is a sudden change in temperature,
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win-
ter
Driving systems
177
Driving and parking
Z
R
if the camera lens is dirty or obstructed
Observe the notes on cleaning
(
Y page 282)
R
if the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this
event, have the camera position and setting
checked at a qualified specialist workshop
The field of vision and other functions of the rear
view camera may be restricted due to additional
accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.
license plate holder, bicycle rack).
On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis,
leaving the standard height can result in inac-
curacies in the guide lines, depending on tech-
nical conditions.
i
The rear view camera is protected from rain-
drops and dust by means of a flap. When the
rear view camera is activated, this flap opens.
The flap closes again when:
R
you have finished the maneuvering process
R
you switch off the engine
R
you open the trunk
Observe the notes on cleaning (
Y page 282).
For technical reasons, the flap may remain
open briefly after the rear view camera has
been deactivated.
Activating/deactivating the rear view
camera
X
To activate: make sure that the SmartKey is
in position 2 in the ignition lock.
X
Make sure that the Activation by R gear
function is selected in the multimedia system
(see the Digital Operator's Manual).
X
Engage reverse gear.
The rear view camera flap opens. The area
behind the vehicle is shown with guide lines in
the multimedia system display.
The image from the rear view camera is avail-
able throughout the maneuvering process.
To deactivate: the rear view camera deacti-
vates if you shift the transmission to P or after
driving forwards a short distance.
Messages in the multimedia system dis-
play
The rear view camera may show a distorted view
of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not at all.
The rear view camera does not show objects in
the following positions:
R
very close to the rear bumper
R
under the rear bumper
R
in the area immediately above the tailgate
handle
!
Objects not at ground level may appear to
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
R
the bumper of a parked vehicle
R
the drawbar of a trailer
R
the ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
R
the rear section of an HGV
R
a slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than the bottom-
most guideline.
:
Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 13 ft (4.0 m) from the rear of the
vehicle
;
White guide line without turning the steering
wheel, vehicle width including the exterior
mirrors (static)
=
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
?
Yellow lane marking tires at current steering
wheel angle (dynamic)
178
Driving systems
Driving and parking
A
Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-
cle
B
Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
C
Bumper
D
Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
The guide lines are shown when the transmis-
sion is in position R.
The distance specifications only apply to
objects that are at ground level.
:
Front warning display
;
Additional PARKTRONIC measurement
operational readiness indicator
=
Rear warning display
When PARKTRONIC is operational (
Y page 171),
additional measurement operational readiness
indicator ; appears in the multimedia system
display. If the PARKTRONIC warning displays are
active or light up, warning displays : and =
are also active or light up correspondingly.
"Reverse parking" function
Backing up straight into a parking space
without turning the steering wheel
:
White guide line without turning the steering
wheel, vehicle width including the exterior
mirrors (static)
;
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
=
Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1.0 m) from the rear of the vehi-
cle
?
Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
X
Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (
Y page 178).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X
With the help of white guide line :, check
whether the vehicle will fit into the parking
space.
X
Using white guide line : as a guide, carefully
back up until you reach the end position.
Red guide line ? is then at the end of the
parking space. The vehicle is almost parallel
in the parking space.
Driving systems
179
Driving and parking
Z
Reverse perpendicular parking with the
steering wheel at an angle
:
Parking space marking
;
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
X
Drive past the parking space and bring the
vehicle to a standstill.
X
Make sure that the rear view camera is
switched on (
Y page 178).
The lane and the guide lines are shown.
X
While the vehicle is at a standstill, turn the
steering wheel in the direction of the parking
space until yellow guide line ; reaches park-
ing space marking :.
X
Keep the steering wheel in that position and
back up carefully.
:
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
X
Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in
front of the parking space.
The white lane should be as close to parallel
with the parking space marking as possible.
:
White guide line at current steering wheel
angle
;
Parking space marking
X
Turn the steering wheel to the center position
while the vehicle is stationary.
:
Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the rear of the vehicle
;
White guide line without turning the steering
wheel
=
End of parking space
X
Back up carefully until you have reached the
final position.
Red guide line : is then at end of parking
space =. The vehicle is almost parallel in the
parking space.
180
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Wide-angle function
:
Symbol for the wide-angle view function
;
Own vehicle
=
PARKTRONIC warning displays
You can also use the rear view camera to select
a wide-angle view.
When PARKTRONIC is operational (
Y page 171),
a symbol for your own vehicle appears in the
display of the multimedia system. If the
PARKTRONIC warning displays are active, warn-
ing displays = light up in the multimedia system
in yellow or red accordingly.
360° camera
General notes
The 360° camera is a system that consists of
four cameras.
The system processes images from the follow-
ing cameras:
R
Rear view camera
R
Front camera
R
Two cameras in the exterior rear view mirrors
The cameras capture the immediate surround-
ings of the vehicle. The system supports you,
e.g. when parking or if vision is restricted at an
exit.
You can show pictures from the 360° camera in
full-screen mode or in seven different split-
screen views on the multimedia system display.
A split-screen view also includes a top view of
the vehicle. This view is calculated from the data
supplied by the installed cameras (virtual cam-
era).
The six split-screen views are:
R
top view and picture from the rear view cam-
era (130° viewing angle)
R
top view and image from the front camera
(130° viewing angle without displaying the
maximum steering wheel angle)
R
top view and enlarged rear view
R
top view and enlarged front view
R
top view and images from the rear-facing side
cameras (rear wheel view)
R
top view and images from the forward-facing
side cameras (front wheel view)
When the function is active and you shift the
transmission from D or R to N, the dynamic
guidelines are hidden.
When you change between transmission posi-
tions D and R, you see the previously selected
front or rear view.
Distances measured by PARKTRONIC will also
be optically displayed:
R
in split screen view as red or yellow brackets
around the vehicle icon in the top view, or
R
at the bottom right as red or yellow brackets
around the vehicle symbol in full-screen mode
The line thickness and color of the brackets
show how far the vehicle is from an object.
R
yellow brackets with thin lines: PARKTRONIC
is active
R
yellow brackets with normal lines: an object is
present in close range of the vehicle
R
red line: an object is present in the immediate
close range of the vehicle
Important safety notes
The 360°camera is only an aid and may show a
distorted view of obstacles, show them incor-
rectly or not at all. The 360°camera is not a
substitute for attentive driving.
You are always responsible for safe maneuver-
ing and parking. When maneuvering or parking,
make sure that there are no persons, animals or
objects in the area in which you are maneuver-
ing.
You are always responsible for safety, and must
always pay attention to your surroundings when
parking and maneuvering. This applies to the
areas behind, in front of and beside the vehicle.
You could otherwise endanger yourself and oth-
ers.
Driving systems
181
Driving and parking
Z
The 360° camera will not function or will func-
tion in a limited manner:
R
if the doors are open
R
if the exterior mirrors are folded in
R
if the trunk lid is open
R
in heavy rain, snow or fog
R
at night or in very dark places
R
if the cameras are exposed to very bright light
R
if the area is lit by fluorescent bulbs or LED
lighting (the display may flicker)
R
if there is a sudden change in temperature,
e.g. when driving into a heated garage in win-
ter
R
if the camera lenses are dirty or covered
R
if the vehicle components in which the cam-
eras are installed are damaged. In this event,
have the camera position and setting checked
at a qualified specialist workshop
Do not use the 360° camera in this case. You
can otherwise injure others or cause damage to
objects or the vehicle.
Guide lines are always shown at road level.
The field of vision and other functions of the
camera system may be restricted due to addi-
tional accessories on the rear of the vehicle (e.g.
license plate holder, bicycle rack).
On vehicles with height-adjustable chassis,
depending on technical conditions, leaving the
standard height can result in:
R
inaccuracies in the guide lines
R
inaccuracies in the display of generated
images (top view)
Activation conditions
The 360° camera image can be displayed if:
R
your vehicle is equipped with a 360° camera
R
the SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignition
lock
R
the multimedia system is switched on
R
the 360° Camera function is switched on
Switching on the 360° camera
X
Press the Ø button in the center console
for longer than two seconds.
Depending on whether position D or R is
engaged, the following is shown:
R
a split screen with top view and the image
from the front camera or
R
a split screen with top view and the image
from the rear view camera
or
X
Press the Ø button in the center console.
The vehicle menu is displayed.
X
Select 360° Camera and press 7 to confirm.
Depending on whether position D or R is
engaged, the following is shown:
R
a split screen with top view and the image
from the front camera or
R
a split screen with top view and the image
from the rear view camera
Activating the 360° camera using
reverse gear
The 360° camera images can be automatically
displayed by engaging reverse gear.
X
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2
in the ignition lock.
X
Make sure that the Activation by R gear
function is selected in the multimedia system
(see the separate operating instructions).
X
To show the 360° camera image: engage
reverse gear.
The area behind the vehicle is shown in the
multimedia system display in split-screen
mode. You see the top view of the vehicle and
the image from the rear view camera.
Selecting the split-screen and full
screen displays
Switching between split screen views
X
To switch to the line with the vehicle icons:
slide 5 the controller.
X
To select one of the vehicle icons: turn 3
the controller.
X
To switch to 180° View: turn 3 the con-
troller to select 180° View
and press 7 to
confirm.
i
The 180° View option is only available in the
following views:
R
Top view with picture from the rear view
camera
R
Top view with picture from the front camera
182
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Messages in the multimedia system dis-
play
Important safety notes
The system may show a distorted view of obsta-
cles or show them incorrectly or not at all.
Obstacles are not shown by the system in the
following locations:
R
under the front and rear bumpers
R
very close to the front and rear bumpers
R
in close range above the handle on the trunk
lid
R
very close to the exterior mirrors
R
in the transitional areas between the various
cameras in the virtual top view
!
Objects not at ground level may appear to
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
R
the bumper of a parked vehicle
R
the drawbar of a trailer
R
the ball coupling of a trailer tow hitch
R
the rear section of an HGV
R
a slanted post
Use the guidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than the bottom-
most guideline.
Top view with picture from the rear view
camera
:
Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 13 ft (4 m) from the rear of the vehi-
cle
;
Symbol for the split screen setting with top
view and rear view camera image
=
Guide line for the maximum steering angle
?
Yellow lane marking tires at current steering
wheel angle (dynamic)
A
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
B
Vehicle center axle (marker assistance)
C
Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1 m) from the rear of the vehicle
D
Bumper
E
Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.3 m) from the rear of the vehicle
The guide lines are shown when the transmis-
sion is in position R.
The distance specifications only apply to
objects that are at ground level.
Top view with picture from the front cam-
era
:
Symbol for the split screen setting with top
view and front camera image
;
Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 13 ft (4 m) from the front of the
vehicle
=
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle (dynamic)
?
Yellow lane marking tires at current steering
wheel angle (dynamic)
Driving systems
183
Driving and parking
Z
A
Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.3 m) from the front of the vehicle
B
Yellow guide line at a distance of approx-
imately 3 ft (1 m) from the front of the vehi-
cle
Top view and enlarged rear view
:
Symbol for the split screen setting with top
view and rear view camera image enlarged
;
Red guide line at a distance of approximately
12 in (0.3 m) from the rear of the vehicle
This view assists you in estimating the distance
to the vehicle behind you.
i
This setting can also be selected as an
enlarged front view.
Top view with image from the side cam-
eras
:
Symbol for the top view and forward-facing
side camera setting
;
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors (right side of
vehicle)
=
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors (left side of
vehicle)
i
You can also select the side camera setting
for the rear-facing view.
180° view
:
Symbol for the full screen setting with rear
view camera image
;
Own vehicle
=
PARKTRONIC warning displays
i
180° view can also be selected as front
view.
Select this view when you are driving out of an
exit and the view of crossing traffic is restricted,
for example.
Exiting 360° camera display mode
The 360° camera display is stopped
R
when you select transmission position P, or
R
when you are driving at moderate speeds
The previous display appears on the multimedia
system display. You can also switch the display
by selecting the & symbol in the display and
pressing 7 the controller to confirm.
ATTENTION ASSIST
General notes
ATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,
monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is
active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph
(200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSIST
detects typical indicators of fatigue or increas-
ing lapses in concentration on the part of the
driver, it suggests taking a break.
184
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Important safety notes
ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It might not
always recognize fatigue or increasing inatten-
tiveness in time or fail to recognize them at all.
The system is not a substitute for a well-rested
and attentive driver.
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST is
restricted and warnings may be delayed or not
occur at all:
R
if the length of the journey is less than approx-
imately 30 minutes
R
if the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface
is uneven or if there are potholes
R
if there is a strong side wind
R
if you have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds or high rates of accel-
eration
R
if you are predominantly driving at a speed
below 37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph
(200 km/h)
R
if you are driving with the DISTRONIC PLUS
Steering Assist activated
R
if the time has been set incorrectly
R
in active driving situations, such as when you
change lanes or change your speed
The attention level evaluation is deleted and
restarts when the journey is continued, if:
R
you switch off the engine
R
you take off your seat belt and open the driv-
er's door, e.g. for a change of drivers or to
take a break
Displaying the attention level
You can have current status information dis-
played in the assistance menu (
Y page 203) of
the on-board computer.
X
Select the Assistance display for ATTENTION
ASSIST using the on-board computer
(
Y page 203).
The following information is displayed:
R
length of the journey since the last break.
R
the attention level determined by ATTENTION
ASSIST, displayed in a bar display in five levels
from high to low.
R
if ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate
the attention level and cannot output a warn-
ing, the System Suspended
message
appears. The bar display then changes the
display, e.g. if you are driving at a speed below
37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph
(200 km/h).
Activating ATTENTION ASSIST
X
Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-
board computer (
Y page 205).
The system determines the attention level of
the driver depending on the setting selected:
Standard selected: the sensitivity with which
the system determines the attention level is set
to normal.
Sensitive selected: the sensitivity is set higher.
The attention level detected by Attention Assist
is adapted accordingly and the driver is warned
earlier.
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
À symbol and OFF appear in the multifunc-
tion display in the assistance display when the
engine is running.
When ATTENTION ASSIST has been deactivated,
it is automatically reactivated after the engine
has been stopped. The sensitivity selected cor-
responds to the last selection activated (stand-
ard/sensitive).
Warning in the multifunction display
If fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration
are detected, a warning appears in the multi-
function display: Attention
Assist: Take a
Break!
In addition to the message shown in the multi-
function display, you will then hear a warning
tone.
X
If necessary, take a break.
X
Confirm the message by pressing the a
button on the steering wheel.
On long journeys, take regular breaks in good
time to allow yourself to rest. If you do not take
a break, you will be warned again after
15 minutes at the earliest. This will only happen
Driving systems
185
Driving and parking
Z
if ATTENTION ASSIST still detects typical indi-
cators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concen-
tration.
Vehicles with COMAND: if a warning is output
in the multifunction display, a service station
search is performed in the multimedia system.
You can select a service station and navigation
to this service station will then begin. This func-
tion can be activated and deactivated in the
multimedia system.
Traffic Sign Assist
General notes
Traffic Sign Assist displays the maximum speed
permitted to the driver in the instrument cluster.
The data stored in the navigation system and
general traffic regulations are used to determine
the current speed limit.
As Traffic Sign Assist is a map-based system,
traffic signs put up temporarily (e.g. near road-
works) are not detected.
If a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicle is
passed, the display of the speed limits is upda-
ted.
Traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an
additional sign (e.g. in wet conditions) are also
shown.
The traffic signs are only displayed with the
restrictions if:
R
the regulation must be observed with the
restriction, or
R
Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine
whether the restriction applies
If Traffic Sign Assist is unable to determine a
maximum permitted speed from any of the avail-
able sources, no speed limit is displayed in the
instrument cluster either.
Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all coun-
tries. In this case, symbol : is shown in the
assistance graphic display (
Y page 203).
Important safety notes
Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid and is not always
able to correctly display speed limits. Traffic
signs always have priority over the Traffic Sign
Assist display.
The system may be either functionally impaired
or temporarily unavailable if the information in
the digital street map of the navigation system is
incorrect or out of date.
Instrument cluster display
Displaying the assistance graphic
X
Call up the assistance graphics display func-
tion using the on-board computer
(
Y page 203).
X
Select the Traffic Sign Assist display.
Detected traffic signs are displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Speed limit with unknown restriction
:
Maximum permitted speed
;
Maximum permitted speed for vehicles for
which the restriction in the additional sign is
relevant
=
Additional sign for unknown restriction
A maximum permitted speed of 100 mph
(100 km/h) and a speed limit of 80 km/h
(80 mph) apply with an unknown restriction.
Speed limits in wet conditions
:
Maximum permitted speed
;
Additional signs for wet conditions
A maximum permitted speed of 80 mph
(80 km/h) applies in wet conditions and if Traffic
186
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Sign Assist has determined that the restriction
must be observed.
Canceling the speed limit
The speed limit no longer applies :.
i
The unit for the speed limit (km/h or mph)
depends on the country in which you are driv-
ing. It is generally neither shown on the traffic
sign nor on the instrument cluster but must be
taken into account when observing the max-
imum permitted speed.
Lane Tracking package
General notes
The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind
Spot Assist (
Y page 187) and Lane Keeping
Assist (
Y page 189).
Blind Spot Assist
General notes
Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor system to
monitor the areas on both sides of your vehicle.
It supports you from a speed of approximately
20 mph (30 km/h). A warning display in the
exterior mirrors draws your attention to vehicles
detected in the monitored area. If you then
switch on the corresponding turn signal to
change lanes, you will also receive an optical
and audible collision warning. Blind Spot Assist
uses sensors in the rear bumper for monitoring
purposes.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
R
vehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
placing them in the blind spot area
R
vehicles which approach with a large speed
differential and overtake your vehicle
As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not give
warnings in such situations. There is a risk of
an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions care-
fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail to
detect some vehicles and is no substitute for
attentive driving. Always ensure that there is
sufficient distance to the side for other road
users and obstacles.
i
USA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC as
a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor
is intended for use in an automotive radar
system only. Removing, tampering with, or
altering the device will void any warranties,
and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam-
per with, alter, or use in any non-approved
way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
Monitoring range of the sensors
In particular, the detection of obstacles can be
impaired if:
R
there is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
R
there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy
rain, snow or spray
R
there are narrow vehicles, e.g. motorcycles or
bicycles
R
the road has very wide lanes
R
the road has narrow lanes
R
you are not driving in the middle of the lane
R
there are barriers or similar lane borders
Vehicles in the monitoring ra
nge are then not
indicated.
Driving systems
187
Driving and parking
Z
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be
indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-
ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the
case if there are vehicles driving at the inner
edge of their lanes.
Due to the nature of the system:
R
warnings may be issued in error when driving
close to crash barriers or similar solid lane
borders.
R
the warning is canceled when driving for an
extended period next to long vehicles, such as
trucks.
The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assist are
integrated into the sides of the rear bumper.
Make sure that the bumper is free of dirt, ice or
slush in the vicinity of the sensors. The sensors
must not be covered, for example by cycle racks
or overhanging loads. Following a severe impact
or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have
the function of the sensors checked at a quali-
fied specialist workshop. Blind Spot Assist may
otherwise not work properly.
Indicator and warning display
:
Indicator lamp (yellow)
Warning lamp (red)
Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in
the monitoring range are then not indicated.
When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicator
lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow
at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds
above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lamp
goes out and Blind Spot Assist is operational.
If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot
monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the correspond-
ing side lights up red. This warning is always
emitted when a vehicle enters the blind spot
monitoring range from behind or from the side.
When you overtake a vehicle, the warning only
occurs if the difference in speed is less than
7 mph (12 km/h).
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse
gear is engaged. In this event, Blind Spot Assist
is no longer active.
The brightness of the indicator or warning lamps
is adjusted automatically according to the ambi-
ent light.
Collision warning
If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range of
Blind Spot Assist and you switch on the corre-
sponding turn signal, a double warning tone
sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn
signal remains on, detected vehicles are indica-
ted by the flashing of red warning lamp :.
There are no further warning tones.
188
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Switching on Blind Spot Assist
X
Make sure that Blind Spot Assist
(
Y page 205) is activated in the on-board
computer.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light
up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and
then turn yellow.
Lane Keeping Assist
General notes
Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of
your vehicle with camera :, which is mounted
at the top of the windshield. Active Lane Keeping
Assist detects lane markings on the road and
can warn you before you leave your lane unin-
tentionally.
This function is available in the range between
40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h).
A warning may be given if a front wheel passes
over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of
intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for
up to 1.5 seconds.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Lane Keeping Assist may not always clearly
recognize lane markings.
In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:
R
give an unnecessary warning
R
not give a warning
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and stay in lane, in particular if
warned by Lane Keeping Assist.
G
WARNING
The Lane Keeping Assist warning does not
return the vehicle to the original lane. There is
a risk of an accident.
You should always steer, brake or accelerate
yourself, in particular if warned by Lane Keep-
ing Assist.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Lane Keep-
ing Assist can neither reduce the risk of an acci-
dent nor override the laws of physics. Lane
Keeping Assist cannot take into account the
road, traffic and weather conditions. Lane Keep-
ing Assist is merely an aid. You are responsible
for the distance to the vehicle in front, for vehi-
cle speed, for braking in good time and for stay-
ing in your lane.
The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep the vehi-
cle in the lane.
The system may be impaired or may not function
if:
R
there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient
illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,
fog or spray
R
there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the
sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface
is wet)
R
the windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or
covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-
ity of the camera
R
there are no, several or unclear lane markings
for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction
work
R
the lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
R
the distance to the vehicle in front is too small
and the lane markings thus cannot be detec-
ted
R
the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
branch off, cross one another or merge
R
the road is narrow and winding
R
there are strong shadows cast on the road
Switching on Lane Keeping Assist
X
Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
the on-board computer; to do so, select
Standard
or Adaptive (Y page 205).
If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
the lines in the assistance graphics display
Driving systems
189
Driving and parking
Z
(Y page 203) are shown in green. Lane Keep-
ing Assist is ready for use.
Standard
If Standard is selected, no warning vibration
occurs if:
R
you have switched on the turn signals. In this
event, the warnings are suppressed for a cer-
tain period of time.
R
a driving safety system intervenes, such as
ABS, BAS or ESP
®
.
Adaptive
When Adaptive is selected, no warning vibra-
tion occurs if:
R
you have switched on the turn signals. In this
event, the warnings are suppressed for a cer-
tain period of time.
R
a driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ABS,
BAS or ESP
®
.
R
you accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
R
you brake hard.
R
you steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
obstacle or change lanes quickly.
R
you cut the corner on a sharp bend.
In order that you are warned only when neces-
sary and in good time if you cross the lane mark-
ing, the system recognizes certain conditions
and warns you accordingly.
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
R
you approach the outer lane marking on a
bend.
R
the road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway.
R
the system recognizes solid lane markings.
The warning vibration occurs later if:
R
the road has narrow lanes.
R
you cut the corner on a bend.
Active Driving Assistance package
General notes
The Active Driving Assistance package consists
of DISTRONIC PLUS (
Y page 155), Active Blind
Spot Assist (
Y page 190) and Active Lane Keep-
ing Assist (
Y page 193).
Active Blind Spot Assist
General notes
Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor
system, pointed toward the rear of the vehicle,
to monitor the area to the sides of the vehicle
which the driver is unable to see. A warning dis-
play in the exterior mirrors draws your attention
to vehicles detected in the monitored area. If
you then switch on the corresponding turn sig-
nal to change lane, you will also receive an opti-
cal and audible warning. If a risk of lateral colli-
sion is detected, corrective braking may help
you avoid a collision. Before a course-correcting
brake application, Active Blind Spot Assist eval-
uates the space in the direction of travel and at
the sides of the vehicle. For this, Active Blind
Spot Assist uses the forward-facing radar sen-
sors.
Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from a
speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
Important safety notes
Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid and is not
a substitute for attentive driving.
G
WARNING
Active Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
R
vehicles overtaken too closely on the side,
placing them in the blind spot area
R
vehicles which approach with a large speed
differential and overtake your vehicle
As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist may nei-
ther give warnings nor intervene in such sit-
uations. There is a risk of an accident.
Always observe the traffic conditions care-
fully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.
i
USA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC as
a "Vehicular Radar System". The radar sensor
is intended for use in an automotive radar
system only. Removing, tampering with, or
altering the device will void any warranties,
and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam-
per with, alter, or use in any non-approved
way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
190
Driving systems
Driving and parking
i
Canada only: This device complies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the device
will void any warranties, and is not permitted.
Do not tamper with, alter, or use in any non-
approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user's authority to operate the
equipment.
Radar sensors
The Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensors are
integrated into the front and rear bumpers and
behind a cover in the radiator trim. Make sure
that the bumpers and the cover in the radiator
grill are free of dirt, ice or slush. The rear sensors
must not be covered, for example by cycle racks
or overhanging cargo. Following a severe impact
or in the event of damage to the bumpers, have
the function of the radar sensors checked at a
qualified specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot
Assist may otherwise no longer work properly.
Monitoring area
G
WARNING
Active Blind Spot Assist does not detect all
traffic situations and road users. There is a
risk of an accident.
Always make sure that there is sufficient dis-
tance on the side for other traffic or obstacles.
The detection of obstacles can be impaired in
the case of:
R
there is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
R
poor visibility, e.g. due to rain, snow or spray
Vehicles in the monitoring range are then not
indicated or indicated with a delay.
Active Blind Spot Assist may not detect narrow
vehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, or
may only detect them too late.
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be
indicated, especially if the vehicles are not driv-
ing in the middle of their lane. This may be the
case if there are vehicles at the edge of their
lane.
Due to the nature of the system:
R
warnings may be issued in error when driving
close to crash barriers or similar solid lane
borders.
R
the warning is canceled when driving for an
extended period next to long vehicles, such as
trucks.
Driving systems
191
Driving and parking
Z
Warning display
:
Warning display
Active Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds
below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehi-
cles in the monitoring range are then not indi-
cated.
When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated, indi-
cator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up
yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At
speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator
lamp goes out and Active Blind Spot Assist is
operational.
If a vehicle is detected within the blind spot
monitoring range at speeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the correspond-
ing side lights up red. This warning is always
given when a vehicle enters the blind spot mon-
itoring range from behind or from the side. When
you overtake a vehicle, the warning only occurs
if the difference in speed is less than 7 mph
(12 km/h).
The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reverse
gear is engaged. Active Blind Spot Assist is not
operational.
The brightness of the warning lamps is auto-
matically adapted to the brightness of the sur-
roundings.
Visual and acoustic collision warning
If you switch on the turn signals to change lanes
and a vehicle is detected in the side monitoring
range, you receive a visual and acoustic collision
warning. You then hear a double warning tone
and red warning lamp : flashes. If the turn sig-
nal remains on, detected vehicles are indicated
by the flashing of red warning lamp :. There are
no further warning tones.
Course-correcting brake application
If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a lat-
eral collision in the monitoring range, a course-
correcting brake application is carried out. This
is meant to assist you in avoiding a collision.
G
WARNING
A course-correcting brake application cannot
always prevent a collision. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns
you or makes a course-correcting brake appli-
cation. Always maintain a safe distance at the
sides.
If a course-correcting brake application occurs,
red warning lamp : flashes in the exterior mir-
ror and a dual warning tone sounds. In addition,
display ; appears in the multifunction display
underlining the danger of a side collision.
In very rare cases, the system may make an
inappropriate brake application. An inappropri-
ate course-correcting brake application may be
interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the
opposite direction or accelerate, for example.
The course-correcting brake application is avail-
able in the speed range between 20 mph
(30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).
Either no braking application, or a course-cor-
recting brake application adapted to the driving
situation occurs if:
R
there are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash
barriers, located on both sides of your vehicle.
R
a vehicle approaches you too closely at the
side.
R
you have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds.
R
you clearly brake or accelerate.
R
a driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP
®
or PRE-SAFE
®
Brake.
192
Driving systems
Driving and parking
R
ESP
®
is switched off.
R
a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire is
detected.
Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist
X
Make sure that Active Blind Spot Assist
(
Y page 205) is activated in the on-board
computer.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light
up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and
then turn yellow.
Active Lane Keeping Assist
General notes
Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
front of your vehicle by means of multifunction
camera : at the top of the windshield. Various
different areas to the front, rear and side of your
vehicle are also monitored with the aid of the
radar sensor system. Active Lane Keeping
Assist detects lane markings on the road and
can warn you before you leave your lane unin-
tentionally. If you do not react to the warning, a
lane-correcting application of the brakes can
bring the vehicle back into the original lane.
This function is available in the range between
40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h).
For Active Lane Keeping Assist to assist you
when driving, the radar sensor system must be
operational
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style, Active Lane
Keeping Assist can neither reduce the risk of
accident nor override the laws of physics. Active
Lane Keeping Assist cannot take account of
road and weather conditions. It may not recog-
nize traffic situations. Active Lane Keeping
Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for the
distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle
speed, for braking in good time and for staying in
you
r lane.
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot continuously
keep your vehicle in its lane.
G
WARNING
Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot always
clearly detect lane markings.
In such cases, Active Lane Keeping Assist
can:
R
give an unnecessary warning and then
make a course-correcting brake application
to the vehicle
R
not give a warning or intervene
There is a risk of an accident.
Always pay particular attention to the traffic
situation and keep within the lane, especially
if Active Lane Keeping Assist alerts you. Ter-
minate the intervention in a non-critical driv-
ing situation.
The system may be impaired or may not function
if:
R
there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient
illumination of the road, or due to snow, rain,
fog or spray
R
there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the
sun or reflections (e.g. when the road surface
is wet)
R
the windshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or
covered, for instance by a sticker, in the vicin-
ity of the camera
R
the radar sensors in the front or rear bumpers
or the radiator trim are dirty, e.g. obscured by
snow
R
there are no, several or unclear lane markings
for a lane, e.g. in areas with road construction
work
R
the lane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
ered up, e.g. by dirt or snow
R
the distance to the vehicle in front is too small
and the lane markings thus cannot be detec-
ted
R
the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes
branch off, cross one another or merge
Driving systems
193
Driving and parking
Z
R
the road is narrow and winding
R
there are strong shadows cast on the road
If no vehicle is detected in the adjacent lane and
broken lane markings are detected, no lane-cor-
recting brake application is made.
Warning vibration in the steering wheel
A warning may be given if a front wheel passes
over a lane marking. It will warn you by means of
intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for
up to 1.5 seconds.
Lane-correcting brake application
G
WARNING
A lane-correcting brake application cannot
always bring the vehicle back into the original
lane. There is a risk of an accident.
Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself,
especially if Active Lane Keeping Assist warns
you or makes a lane-correcting brake appli-
cation.
G
WARNING
Active Lane Keeping Assist only detects traf-
fic conditions or road users to a limited
extent. In very rare cases, the system may
make an inappropriate brake application, e.g.
after intentionally driving over a solid lane
marking. There is a risk of an accident.
An inappropriate brake application may be
interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in
the opposite direction. Always make sure that
there is sufficient distance on the side for
other traffic or obstacles.
If you leave your lane, under certain circumstan-
ces the vehicle will brake briefly on one side.
This is meant to assist you in bringing the vehicle
back to the original lane.
If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,
display : appears in the multifunction display.
A lane-correcting brake application can be made
after driving over a lane marking recognize as
being solid or broken. Before this, a warning
must be given by means of intermittent vibration
in the steering wheel. In addition, a lane with
lane markings on both sides must be recog-
nized.
In the case of a broken lane marking being
detected, a lane-correcting brake application
can only be made if a vehicle has been detected
in the adjacent lane. The following vehicles can
have an influence on brake application: oncom-
ing traffic, vehicles that are overtaking and vehi-
cles that are driving parallel to your vehicle.
i
A further lane-correcting brake application
can only occur after your vehicle has returned
to the original lane.
No lane-correcting brake application occurs if:
R
you clearly and actively steer, brake or accel-
erate.
R
you cut the corner on a sharp bend.
R
you have adopted a sporty driving style with
high cornering speeds or high rates of accel-
eration.
R
you have switched on the turn signal.
R
a driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP
®
,
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist.
R
ESP
®
is switched off.
R
the transmission is not in position D.
R
an obstacle has been detected in the lane in
which you are dri
ving.
R
when a loss of tire pressure or a defective tire
has been detected and displayed.
There is a possibility that the Active Lane Keep-
ing Assist could misjudge the given traffic sit-
uation. An inappropriate brake application may
be interrupted at any time if you:
R
steer slightly in the opposite direction.
R
switch on the turn signal.
R
clearly brake or accelerate.
A lane-correcting brake application is interrup-
ted automatically if:
R
a driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP
®
,
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake or Active Blind Spot Assist.
R
lane markings can no longer be recognized.
194
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist
X
Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist using
the on-board computer; to do so, select
Standard
or Adaptive (Y page 205).
If you drive at speeds above 40 mph
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
the lines in the assistance graphics display
(
Y page 203) are shown in green. Active Lane
Keeping Assist is ready for use.
If Standard
is selected, no warning vibration
occurs if:
R
you have switched on the turn signal. In this
event, the warnings are suppressed for a
certain period of time.
R
a driving safety system intervenes, such as
ABS, BAS or ESP
®
.
When Adaptive
is selected, no warning vibra-
tion occurs if:
R
you have switched on the turn signal. In this
event, the warnings are suppressed for a
certain period of time.
R
a driving safety system intervenes, e.g.
ABS, BAS or ESP
®
.
R
you accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.
R
you brake hard.
R
you steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid an
obstacle or change lanes quickly.
R
you cut the corner on a sharp bend.
In order that you are warned only when neces-
sary and in good time if you cross the lane mark-
ing, the system recognizes certain conditions
and warns you accordingly.
The warning vibration occurs earlier if:
R
you approach the outer lane marking on a
bend.
R
the road has very wide lanes, e.g. a highway.
R
the system recognizes solid lane markings.
The warning vibration occurs later if:
R
the road has narrow lanes.
R
you cut the corner on a bend.
Driving systems
195
Driving and parking
Z
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the on-board computer.
G
WARNING
If the instrument cluster has failed or mal-
functioned, you may not recognize function
restrictions in systems relevant to safety. The
operating safety of your vehicle may be
impaired. There is a risk of an accident.
Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked
at a qualified specialist workshop immedi-
ately.
The on-board computer only shows messages or
warnings from certain systems in the multifunc-
tion display. You should therefore make sure
your vehicle is operating safely at all times.
If the operating safety of your vehicle is
impaired, pull over as soon as it is safe to do so.
Contact a qualified specialist workshop.
For an overview, see the instrument panel illus-
tration (
Y page 34).
Displays and operation
Speedometer with segments
The segments in the speedometer indicate
which speed range is available.
R
Cruise control activated (Y page 153):
The segments light up from the stored speed
to the type-tested maximum speed.
R
DISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 155):
One or two segments in the set speed range
light up.
R
DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:
The segments between the speed of the vehi-
cle in front and the stored speed light up.
Tachometer
!
Do not drive in the overrevving range, as this
could damage the engine.
The red band in the tachometer indicates the
engine's overrevving range.
The fuel supply is interrupted to protect the
engine when the red band is reached.
Outside temperature display
You should pay special attention to road condi-
tions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
Bear in mind that the outside temperature dis-
play indicates the temperature measured and
does not record the road temperature.
The outside temperature display is in the multi-
function display (
Y page 198).
The multifunction display shows changes in the
outside temperature with a delay.
Coolant temperature display
G
WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is over-
heated or when there is a fire in the engine
compartment could expose you to hot gases
or other service products. There is a risk of
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
!
A display message is shown if the coolant
temperature is too high.
If the coolant temperature is over 248
(120 †), do not continue driving. The engine
will otherwise be damaged.
The coolant temperature gauge is in the instru-
ment cluster on the left-hand side (
Y page 34).
196
Displays and operation
On-board computer and displays
Under normal operating conditions and with the
specified coolant level, the coolant temperature
may rise to 248 (120 †).
Operating the on-board computer
Overview
:
Multifunction display
;
Right control panel
=
Left control panel
X
To activate the on-board computer: turn
the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.
You can control the multifunction display and
the settings in the on-board computer using
the buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel.
Vehicles with the COMAND multimedia sys-
tem: you can find further information on the
Voice Control System in the separate operat-
ing instructions.
Vehicles with the Audio 20 multimedia sys-
tem: you can find further information on
voice-operated navigation in the manufactur-
er's operating instructions.
Left control panel
=
;
R
Calls up the menu and menu bar
9
:
Press briefly:
R
Scrolls in lists
R
Selects a submenu or function
R
In the Audio menu: selects the
previous or next station, when the
preset list or station list is active,
or an audio track or video scene
R
In the Tel (telephone) menu:
switches to the phone book and
selects a name or telephone num-
ber
9
:
Press and hold:
R
In the Audio menu: selects a pre-
set list or a station list in the
desired frequency range, or an
audio track or video scene using
rapid scrolling
R
In the Tel (Telephone) menu:
starts rapid scrolling if the phone
book is open
a
R
Confirms the selection or display
message
R
In the Tel (Telephone) menu:
switches to the telephone book
and starts dialing the selected
number
%
Press briefly:
R
Back
R
Switches off voice-operated navi-
gation or the Voice Control System
R
Hides display messages or calls up
the last Trip
menu function used
R
Exits the telephone book/redial
memory
%
Press and hold:
R
Calls up the standard display in the
Trip
menu
Displays and operation
197
On-board computer and displays
Z
Right control panel
~
R
Rejects or ends a call
R
Exits the telephone book/redial
memory
6
R
Makes or accepts a call
R
Switches to the redial memory
W
X
R
Adjusts the volume
8
R
Mute
?
R
Switches on voice-operated navi-
gation or the Voice Control System
Multifunction display
:
Text field
;
Menu bar
=
Drive program
?
Transmission position
A
Permanent display: outside temperature or
speed
X
To display menu bar ;: press the =
or ; button on the steering wheel.
If you do not press the buttons any longer,
menu bar ; is faded out after a few seconds.
Text field : shows the selected menu or sub-
menu as well as display messages.
Possible displays in the multifunction dis-
play:
R
Z Gearshift recommendation, when shifting
manually (
Y page 140)
R
j Active Parking Assist (Y page 173)
R
CRUISE Cruise control (Y page 153)
R
_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist
(
Y page 110)
R
¤ ECO start/stop function (Y page 130)
R
ë HOLD function (Y page 164)
Menus and submenus
Menu overview
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to call up the menu bar and select a menu.
Operating the on-board computer (
Y page 197).
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you can call up the following menus:
R
Trip menu (Y page 198)
R
Navi menu (navigation instructions)
(
Y page 200)
R
Audio menu (Y page 201)
R
Tel menu (telephone) (Y page 202)
R
DriveAssist menu (assistance)
(
Y page 203)
R
Serv. menu (Y page 205)
R
Sett. menu (settings) (Y page 205)
R
AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
(
Y page 209)
The displays are controlled by the multimedia
system. For this reason, the displays for the
Audio
, Navi and Tel menus may differ slightly
to those in your vehicle.
Trip menu
Standard display
X
Press and hold the % button on the steer-
ing wheel until the Trip
menu with trip odom-
eter : and odometer ; appears.
198
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
Trip computer "From Start" or "From
Reset"
:
Distance
;
Driving time
=
Average speed
?
Average fuel consumption
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Trip
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
From Start
or From Reset.
The values in the From
Start submenu are cal-
culated from the start of a journey whilst the
values in the From Reset
submenu are calcu-
lated from the last time the submenu was reset
(
Y page 199).
In the following cases, the trip computer is auto-
matically reset From Start
:
R
the ignition has been switched off for more
than four hours.
R
999 hours have been exceeded.
R
9,999 miles have been exceeded.
When 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles have been
exceeded, the trip computer is automatically
reset From Reset
.
ECO display
The ECO display is not available in Mercedes-
AMG vehicles.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Trip
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select ECO
DISPLAY.
If the ignition remains switched off for longer
than four hours, the ECO display will be auto-
matically reset.
For more information on the ECO display, see
(
Y page 149).
Displaying the range and current fuel
consumption
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the menu only dis-
plays the approximate range.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Trip
menu.
X
Press 9 or : to select the display with
approximate range and the current fuel con-
sumption.
The approximate range that can be covered
depends on the fuel level and your current
driving style. If there is only a small amount of
fuel left in the fuel tank, a vehicle being refu-
eled C appears instead of approximate
range.
Digital speedometer
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Trip
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select the
digital speedometer.
A gearshift recommendation Z can also
appear in the display.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: a gearshift recom-
mendation is displayed in the status area of
the multifunction display.
Observe the information on gearshift recom-
mendation Z when shifting manually
(
Y page 140).
Resetting values
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Trip
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select the
function that you wish to reset.
X
Press a to confirm your selection.
X
Press : to select Yes and press a to
confirm.
Menus and submenus
199
On-board computer and displays
Z
You can reset the values of the following func-
tions:
R
Trip odometer
R
"From Start" trip computer
R
"From Reset" trip computer
R
ECO display
i
If you reset the values in the ECO display,
the values in the "From Start" trip computer
are also reset. If you reset the values in the
"From Start" trip computer, the values in the
ECO display are also reset.
Navigation system menu
Displaying navigation instructions
In the Navi menu, the multifunction display
shows navigation instructions.
Observe the additional information on naviga-
tion in the separate operating instructions of the
multimedia system.
X
Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa-
rate operating instructions).
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Navi
menu.
Route guidance not active
:
Direction of travel
;
Current road
Route guidance active
No change of direction announced
:
Distance to destination
;
Distance to the next change of direction
=
Current road
?
"Follow the road's course" symbol
Change of direction announced without a
lane recommendation
:
Road into which the change of direction
leads
;
Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
=
Change-of-direction symbol
When a change of direction is announced, you
will see symbol = for the change of direction
and distance graphic ;. The distance indicator
shortens towards the top of the display as you
approach the point of the announced change of
direction.
Change of direction announced with a
lane recommendation
:
Road into which the change of direction
leads
;
Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
=
Lanes not recommended
200
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
?
Recommended lane and new lane during a
change of direction
A
Change-of-direction symbol
On multilane roads, new lane recommendations
can be displayed for the next change of direction
if the digital map supports this data. During the
change of direction, new lanes may be added.
Lane not recommended =: you will not be able
to complete the next change of direction if you
stay in this lane.
Recommended lane and new lane during a
change of direction ?: in this lane you will be
able to complete the next two changes of direc-
tion without changing lane.
Other status indicators of the naviga-
tion system
The navigation system displays additional infor-
mation and the vehicle status.
Possible displays:
R
New Route... or Calculating Route
A new route is calculated.
R
Road Not Mapped
The vehicle position is inside the area of the
digital map but the road is not recognized, e.g.
newly built streets, car parks or private land.
R
No Route
No route could be calculated to the selected
destination.
R
O: you have reached the destination or an
intermediate destination.
Audio menu
Selecting a radio station
:
Active station list
;
Station frequency with memory position
The menu shows station ; with station fre-
quency or station name. The preset position is
only displayed along with station ; if this has
been stored.
X
Switch on the multimedia system and select
Radio (see the separate operating instruc-
tions).
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Audio
menu.
X
To select a preset list or station list: press
and briefly hold the 9 or : button until
the preset list or station list in the desired
frequency range is shown.
X
To select a station: briefly press 9
or :.
i
SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like a
normal radio.
For more information on radio operation, see
"Satellite radio" in the separate operating
instructions.
Operating an audio player or audio
media
Menus and submenus
201
On-board computer and displays
Z
Audio data from various audio devices or media
can be played, depending on the equipment
installed in the vehicle.
X
Switch on the multimedia system and select
audio CD or MP3 mode (see the separate
operating instructions).
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Audio
menu.
X
To select the next/previous track: briefly
press the 9 or : button.
X
To select a track from the track list (rapid
scrolling): press and hold the 9 or :
button until desired track : appears.
If you press and hold 9 or :, the rapid
scrolling speed is increased. Not all audio
drives or data carriers support this function.
If track information is stored on the audio
device or medium, the multifunction display
will show the number and title of the track.
Video DVD operation
Only for vehicles with COMAND: you can use the
Audio
menu to operate video DVDs.
X
Switch on the multimedia system and select
video DVD (see the separate operating
instructions).
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Audio
menu.
X
To select the next or previous scene:
briefly press the 9 or : button.
X
To select a scene from the scene list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9
or : button until desired scene :
appears.
Telephone menu
Introduction
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
When telephoning, you must observe the legal
requirements for the country in which you are
currently driving.
X
Switch on the mobile phone (see the manu-
facturer’s operating instructions).
X
Switch on the multimedia system (see sepa-
rate operating instructions).
X
Establish a Bluetooth
®
connection to the mul-
timedia system (see the separate operating
instructions).
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Tel
menu.
You will see one of the following display mes-
sages in the multifunction display:
R
Phone READY or the name of the network
provider: the mobile phone has found a net-
work and is ready to receive.
R
Phone No Service: there is no network
available or the mobile phone is searching for
a network.
Accepting a call
If someone calls you when you are in the Tel
menu, a display message appears in the multi-
function display.
You can accept a call at any time regardless of
the menu selected.
X
Press the 6 button on the steering wheel
to accept an incoming call.
202
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
Rejecting or ending a call
X
Press the ~ button on the steering wheel
to reject or end a call.
Selecting an entry in the phone book
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Tel
menu.
X
Press the 9, : or a button to
switch to the phone book.
X
Authorize access to the phone book on the
phone.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select the
desired name.
or
X
To start rapid scrolling: press and hold :
or 9 for longer than one second.
The names in the phone book are displayed
quickly one after the other.
Rapid scrolling stops when you release the
button or reach the end of the list.
X
If only one telephone number is stored for
a name: press the 6 or a button to
start dialing.
or
X
If there is more than one number for a
particular name: press the 6 or a
button to display the numbers.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select the
number you want to dial.
X
Press the 6 or a button to start dialing.
or
X
To exit the telephone book: press the ~
or % button.
Redialing
The on-board computer saves the last names or
numbers dialed in the redial memory.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Tel
menu.
X
Press the 6 button to switch to the redial
memory.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select the
desired name or number.
X
Press the 6 or a button to start dialing.
or
X
To exit the redial memory: press the ~
or % button.
Assistance menu
Introduction
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you have the following options in the
DriveAssist
menu:
R
Displaying the assistance graphic
(
Y page 203)
R
Deactivating/activating ESP
®
(except
MercedesAMG vehicles) (
Y page 204)
R
Activating/deactivating Steering Assist and
Stop&Go Pilot of DISTRONIC PLUS
(
Y page 204)
R
Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE
®
Brake
(
Y page 204)
R
Activating/deactivating COLLISION PREVEN-
TION ASSIST PLUS (
Y page 204)
R
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST
(
Y page 205)
R
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist or
Active Blind Spot Assist (
Y page 205)
R
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping Assist
or Active Lane Keeping Assist (
Y page 205)
Displaying the assistance graphic
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the DriveAssist
menu.
X
Press 9 or : to select Assist.
Graphic.
X
Press a to confirm.
The multifunction display shows the
DISTRONIC PLUS distance display in the
assistance graphic.
The assistance graphic shows you the status
and further information on the following driv-
ing systems or driving safety systems:
R
Traffic Sign Assist (Y page 186)
R
DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 155)
R
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake (Y page 73)
R
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
(
Y page 67)
R
ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 184)
Menus and submenus
203
On-board computer and displays
Z
R
Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 189)
R
Active Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 193)
X
Press : to display the ATTENTION ASSIST
assessment.
Deactivating/activating ESP
®
i
Observe the important safety notes on ESP
®
(Y page 69).
G
WARNING
If you deactivate ESP
®
, ESP
®
no longer sta-
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
of skidding and an accident.
Only deactivate ESP
®
in the situations descri-
bed in the following.
It may be best to deactivate ESP
®
in the follow-
ing situations:
R
when using snow chains
R
in deep snow
R
on sand or gravel
Deactivating/activating ESP
®
on Mercedes-
AMG vehicles (
Y page 71).
For further information about ESP
®
, see
(
Y page 69).
X
Start the engine.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the DriveAssist
menu.
X
Press 9 or : to select ESP.
X
Press a to confirm.
The current selection appears.
X
To activate/deactivate: press the a but-
ton again.
ESP
®
is deactivated if the å warning lamp in
the instrument cluster lights up continuously
when the engine is running.
If the ÷ warning lamp and the å warning
lamp are lit continuously, ESP
®
is not available
due to a malfunction.
Observe the information on warning lamps
(
Y page 238).
Observe the information on display messages
(
Y page 213).
Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE
®
Brake
PRESAFE
®
Brake is only available for vehicles
with the Driving Assistance package.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the DriveAssist
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select PRE-
SAFE Brake.
X
Press a to confirm.
The current selection appears.
X
To activate/deactivate: press the a but-
ton again.
When PRE-SAFE
®
Brake is deactivated, the
assistance graphic shows the æ symbol in
the multifunction display.
For more information on PRESAFE
®
Brake, see
(
Y page 73).
Activating/deactivating COLLISION
PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the DriveAssist
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select Col‐
lision Prevent..
X
Press a to confirm.
The current selection appears.
X
To activate/deactivate: press the a but-
ton again.
If COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is
deactivated, the assistance graphic shows
the æ symbol in the multifunction display.
For further information about COLLISION PRE-
VENTION ASSIST PLUS, see (
Y page 67).
Activating/deactivating Steering
Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the DriveAssist
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select DTR
+: Steer. Asst.
X
Press a to confirm.
The current selection appears.
X
To activate/deactivate: press the a but-
ton again.
When Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are
activated, the multifunction display shows the
DTR+: Steer. Asst.
On message.
204
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
Further information about DISTRONIC PLUS
with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
(
Y page 162).
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION
ASSIST
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the DriveAssist
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Attention Assist
.
X
Press a to confirm your selection.
The current selection appears.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to set Off,
Standard
or Sensitive.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
é symbol appears in the multifunction dis-
play in the assistance graphics display.
For further information about ATTENTION
ASSIST, see (
Y page 184).
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot
Assist
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the DriveAssist
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Blind Spot Assist
.
X
Press the a button.
The current selection appears.
X
To activate/deactivate: press the a but-
ton again.
For further information about Blind Spot Assist,
see (
Y page 187).
For further information about Active Blind Spot
Assist, see (
Y page 190).
Activating/deactivating Lane Keeping
Assist
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the DriveAssist
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Lane Keep. Assist
.
X
Press the a button.
The current selection appears.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to set Off,
Standard
or Adaptive.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
For further information about Lane Keeping
Assist, see (
Y page 189).
For further information about Active Lane Keep-
ing Assist, see (
Y page 193).
Service menu
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you have the following options in the
Serv.
menu:
R
Calling up display messages in message
memory (
Y page 212)
R
Restarting the tire pressure loss warning sys-
tem (
Y page 308)
R
Checking the tire pressure electronically
(
Y page 308)
R
Calling up the service due date
(
Y page 278)
Settings menu
Introduction
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you have the following options in the
Sett.
menu:
R
Changing the instrument cluster settings
(
Y page 205)
R
Changing the light settings (Y page 206)
R
Changing the vehicle settings (Y page 207)
R
Changing the convenience settings
(
Y page 208)
R
Restoring the factory settings (Y page 209)
Instrument cluster
Selecting the distance unit
The Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: func-
tion allows you to choose whether certain dis-
plays appear in kilometers or miles in the mul-
tifunction display.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Instrument Cluster
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
Menus and submenus
205
On-board computer and displays
Z
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Display Unit Speed-/Odometer
function.
You will see the selected setting: km
or miles.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
The selected unit of measurement for distance
applies to:
R
the digital speedometer in the Trip menu
R
the odometer and trip odometer
R
the trip computer
R
the current consumption and the range
R
the navigation instructions in the Navi menu
R
cruise control
R
DISTRONIC PLUS
R
ASSYST PLUS service interval display
Selecting permanent display
The Permanent Display: function allows you
to choose whether the multifunction display
always shows the outside temperature or the
speed.
The speed display is inverse to the speedome-
ter.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Instrument Cluster
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Permanent Display:
function.
The current setting, Outside Temperature
or Speedometer [km/h]/Speedometer
[mph], appears.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
Lights
Setting the brightness of the instrument
cluster lighting and switches
The lighting in the instrument cluster, in the dis-
plays and the controls in the vehicle interior can
be adjusted with the Brightness Display/
Switches: function.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Lights
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Brightness Display/Switches:
function.
The current setting appears.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to adjust the
brightness to any level from Level 1
to
Level 5
(bright).
X
Press the a or % button to save the
setting.
If the light switch is set to the Ã, T or
L position, the brightness is dependent
upon the brightness of the ambient light.
i
The light sensor in the instrument cluster
automatically controls the brightness of the
multifunction display.
In daylight, the displays in the instrument
cluster are not illuminated.
Switching the daytime running lamps on/
off
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Lights
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Day. Run. Lights
function.
If the Day. Run. Lights
function has been
switched on, the multifunction display shows
the cone of light and the W symbol in
orange.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
Further information on daytime running lamps
(
Y page 107).
Setting the brightness of the ambient
lighting
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Lights
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Ambient Brightness
function.
The current setting appears.
X
Press a to confirm.
206
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
X
Press the : or 9 button to adjust the
brightness to any level from Off
to Level 5
(bright).
X
Press the a or % button to save the
setting.
Setting the ambient lighting color
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Lights
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Amb. Light Col.
function.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to set the color
to SOLAR
, NEUTRAL or POLAR.
X
Press the a or % button to save the
setting.
Activating/deactivating surround light-
ing and exterior lighting delayed switch-
off
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Lights
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Using : or 9, select the Surround
Lighting function.
If the Surround
Lighting function is activa-
ted, the light cone and the area around the
vehicle are displayed in orange in the multi-
function display.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
Deactivating delayed switch-off of the exterior
lighting temporarily:
X
Before leaving the vehicle, turn the SmartKey
to position 0 in the ignition lock.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
The exterior lighting delayed switch-off is
deactivated.
Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting is
reactivated the next time you start the engine.
If you have activated the Surround Lighting
function and the light switch is set to the Ã
position, the following functions are activated
when it is dark:
R
surround lighting: the exterior lighting
remains lit for 40 seconds after unlocking
with the SmartKey. If you start the engine, the
surround lighting is switched off and auto-
matic headlamp mode is activated
(
Y page 107).
R
exterior lighting delayed switch-off: the
exterior lighting remains lit for 60 seconds
after the engine is switched off. If you close all
the doors and the trunk lid/tailgate, the exte-
rior lighting goes off after 15 seconds.
i
Depending on your vehicle's equipment,
when the surround lighting and delayed
switch-off exterior lighting are on, the follow-
ing light up:
R
Parking lamps
R
Side marker lamps
R
Surround lighting in the exterior mirrors
Activating/deactivating the interior light-
ing delayed switch-off
If you activate the Light. Delay function, the
interior lighting remains on for 20 seconds after
you remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Lights
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Light. Delay
function.
When the Light. Delay
function is activa-
ted, the vehicle interior is displayed in orange
in the multifunction display.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
Vehicle
Activating/deactivating the automatic
door locking mechanism
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Vehicle
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
Menus and submenus
207
On-board computer and displays
Z
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Auto. Door Locks
function.
If the Auto.
Door Locks function is switched
on, the multifunction display shows the vehi-
cle's doors in orange.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
If you activate the Auto.
Door Locks function,
the vehicle is centrally locked above a speed of
around 9 mph (15 km/h).
For further information on the automatic locking
feature, see (
Y page 82).
Activating/deactivating the acoustic
locking verification signal
If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, an
acoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehi-
cle.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Vehicle
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Acoustic Lock
function.
If the Acoustic Lock
function is activated,
the & symbol in the multifunction display
lights up orange.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
Convenience
Activating/deactivating the EASY-
ENTRY/EXIT feature
G
WARNING
When the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjusts
the steering wheel, you and other vehicle
occupants particularly children could
become trapped. There is a risk of injury.
While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is mak-
ing adjustments, make sure that no one has
any body parts in the sweep of the steering
wheel.
If somebody becomes trapped:
R
press one of the memory function position
buttons, or
R
move the switch for steering wheel adjust-
ment in the opposite direction to that in
which the steering wheel is moving.
The adjustment process is stopped.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Convenience
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Using : or 9, select the Easy Entry/
Exit function.
If the Easy
Entry/Exit function is activated,
the vehicle steering wheel is displayed in
orange in the multifunction display.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT
feature (
Y page 102).
Switching the belt adjustment on/off
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Convenience
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Belt Adjustment
function.
When the Belt Adjustment
function is acti-
vated, the seat belt is displayed in orange in
the multifunction display.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
For further information on belt adjustment, see
(
Y page 45).
Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock-
ing feature on/off
This function is only available when the vehicle is
equipped with the electrical fold-in function.
When you switch on the Auto. Mirror Fold‐
ing function, the exterior mirrors are folded in
when the vehicle is locked. If you unlock the
vehicle and then open the driver's or front-
passenger door, the exterior mirrors fold out
again.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Settings
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Convenience
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
208
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Auto. Mirror Folding
function.
If the Auto. Mirror Folding
function is
switched on, the multifunction display shows
the vehicle's exterior mirror in orange.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
If you have switched on the Auto. Mirror
Folding function and you fold in the exterior
mirrors by pressing button :, the exterior mir-
rors will not fold out automatically (
Y page 104).
You can then only fold out the exterior mirrors
using button :.
Restoring the factory settings
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Factory Setting
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
The Reset All Settings?
function
appears.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select No or
Yes
.
X
Press a to confirm the selection.
If you have selected Yes
and confirmed, the
multifunction display shows a confirmation
message.
For safety reasons, the Day Lights
function in
the Lights
submenu is only reset if the vehicle
is stationary.
AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
WARMUP
:
Digital speedometer
;
Gear indicator
=
Upshift indicator
?
Engine oil temperature
A
Coolant temperature
B
Status indicator for ECO start/stop function
(
Y page 130)
X
Press = or ; on the steering wheel to
select the AMG
menu.
Upshift indicator: upshift indicator UP
=
indicates that the engine has reached the
overrevving range when in the manual drive
program.
Engine oil temperature: if the engine is at
normal operating temperature, the multifunc-
tion display shows oil temperature ? in
white.
If the multifunction display shows oil temper-
ature ? in blue, the engine is not yet at nor-
mal operating temperature. Avoid driving at
full engine output during this time.
If the conditions for the ECO start/stop func-
tion are fulfilled and the vehicle is stationary,
the menu shows status indicator B.
SETUP
:
Drive program (C/SS+ or M)
;
ESP
®
mode ON, OFF or SPORT handling
mode SPORT
=
Suspension setting COMFORT, SPORT or
SPORT +
Menus and submenus
209
On-board computer and displays
Z
SETUP shows the drive program, ESP
®
(Elec-
tronic Stability Program) mode and the suspen-
sion setting.
X
Press = or ; on the steering wheel to
select the AMG
menu.
X
Press 9 repeatedly until SETUP is shown.
or
X
Briefly press the AMG button on the center
console (
Y page 168).
RACETIMER
Displaying and starting RACETIMER
The RACETIMER is only intended for use on a
closed race circuit. Do not use the function on
public roads.
:
Lap
;
RACETIMER
You can start the RACETIMER when the engine is
running or if the SmartKey is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X
Press = or ; on the steering wheel to
select the AMG
menu.
X
Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
RACETIMER appears.
X
To start: press the a button to start the
RACETIMER.
Displaying the intermediate time
X
Press the = or ; button to select
Interm. Time
.
X
Press a to confirm.
The intermediate time is shown for five sec-
onds.
Starting a new lap
:
RACETIMER
;
Fastest lap time (best lap)
=
Lap
X
Press a to confirm New Lap.
i
It is possible to store a maximum of sixteen
laps. The 16th lap can only be completed with
Finish Lap
.
Stopping the RACETIMER
X
Press the % button on the steering wheel.
X
Press a to confirm Yes.
The RACETIMER interrupts timing if you stop the
vehicle and turn the SmartKey to position 1 in
the ignition lock. If you turn the key to position 3
and then press a to confirm Start
, timing is
continued.
Resetting the current lap
X
Stop the RACETIMER.
X
Press = or ; to select Reset Lap.
X
Press a to reset the lap time to "0".
Deleting all laps
If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER is
reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are
deleted.
210
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you
have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not
have to be reset.
X
Reset the current lap.
X
Press a to confirm Reset.
Reset Race Timer?
appears in the multi-
function display.
X
Press : Yes to select and confirm with
a.
All laps are deleted.
Overall statistics
:
RACETIMER overall evaluation
;
Total time driven
=
Average speed
?
Distance covered
A
Maximum speed
If you store at least one lap and stop the RACE-
TIMER, an overall evaluation will then be availa-
ble.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the AMG
menu.
X
Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
overall evaluation appears.
Lap statistics
:
Lap
;
Lap time
=
Average lap speed
?
Lap length
A
Top speed during lap
If you store at least two laps and stop the RACE-
TIMER, the lap evaluation function then
becomes available.
X
Press = or ; on the steering wheel to
select the AMG
menu.
X
Press 9 repeatedly until the lap evaluation
appears.
Each lap is shown in a separate submenu. The
fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select a dif-
ferent lap evaluation.
Menus and submenus
211
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Introduction
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual
and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in this
Operator's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority
display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have been rectified, the
corresponding display messages are also deleted.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:
R
HOLD function (Y page 164)
R
Parking (Y page 146)
Hiding display messages
X
Press the a or % button on the steering wheel.
The multifunction display hides the display message.
The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-priority display
messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages
have been remedied.
Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You can call up
the display messages:
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages
, for example.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.
212
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Safety systems
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator's
Manual
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) and ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Pro-
gram) are temporarily not available.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster.
For example, the on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Drive on carefully.
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above
are available again.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.
The $ (USA only) or J (Canada only), ÷, å and !
warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages
213
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
÷
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
ESP
®
is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in the instru-
ment cluster.
The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
T!
÷
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS and ESP
®
are malfunc-
tioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.
In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up in the
instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock
if you brake hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
F(USA
only)
J(Canada
only)
Please
Release Park‐
ing Brake
You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone also
sounds.
X
Release the parking brake.
214
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
$(USA
only)
J(Canada
only)
Check Brake Fluid
Level
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
In addition, the $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) warning lamp
lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.
G
WARNING
The braking effect may be impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving
under any circumstances.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.
#
Check Brake Pad Wear
The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
G
mbrace Inoperative
One or more main features of the mbrace system are malfunctioning.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Collision Preven
tion Assist Plus
Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator's
Manual
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily not operational.
Possible causes are:
R
the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-
tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
R
the system is outside the operating temperature range.
R
the on-board voltage is too low.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Restart the engine.
Collision Preven
tion Assist Plus
Inoperative
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS is temporarily inoperative due
to a malfunction. Adaptive Brake Assist may also have failed.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFE
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
Important functions of PRE-SAFE
®
have failed. All other occupant
safety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
215
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
PRE-SAFE
Functions Currently
Limited See Opera‐
tor's Manual
PRESAFE
®
PLUS or PRESAFE
®
Brake is temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
R
function is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.
R
the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-
tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
R
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: ESP
®
is deactivated
R
the system is outside the operating temperature range.
R
the on-board voltage is too low.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
PRESAFE
®
PLUS and PRESAFE
®
Brake are operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Restart the engine.
X
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: switch ESP
®
on again (Y page 71).
PRE-SAFE
Functions Limited
See Operator's Man
ual
PRESAFE
®
PLUS or PRESAFE
®
Brake is unavailable due to a mal-
function. BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist may also have failed.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
216
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Radar Sensors Dirty
See Operator's Man
ual
At least one of the following driving systems or driving safety systems
is temporarily restricted or inoperative:
R
COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS
R
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake
R
PRE-SAFE
®
PLUS
R
Active Lane Keeping Assist
R
Active Blind Spot Assist
R
DISTRONIC PLUS with Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
If the radar sensor system in front is dirty, Active Blind Spot Assist will
not perform a course-correcting brake application.
Possible causes are:
R
the sensors in the radiator trim and/or in the bumpers are dirty
R
the function of the driving system or driving safety system is
impaired due to heavy rain or snow
A warning tone also sounds.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears. All driving systems or driving safety systems are operative
again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Clean the sensors in the following locations (Y page 282):
R
in the radiator trim
R
in the front bumper
R
in the rear bumper, particularly in the middle of the rear bumper
X
Restart the engine.
The display message disappears.
6
SRS Malfunction Ser
vice Required
The restraint system is faulty. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in
the instrument cluster.
G
WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Observe the additional information on restraint systems (Y page 41).
Display messages
217
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
6
Front Left Malfunc‐
tion Service
RequiredorFront
Right Malfunction
Service Required
The restraint system has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right.
The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
G
WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
6
Rear Left Malfunc‐
tion Service
RequiredorRear
Right Malfunction
Service Required
The restraint system has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right.
The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
G
WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
6
Left Side Curtain
Airbag Malfunction
Service
RequiredorRight
Side Curtain Airbag
Malfunction Service
Required
There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand window curtain air
bag.
The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.
G
WARNING
The left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggered unin-
tentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
218
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Front Passenger Air
bag Disabled
See Operator's Man
ual
The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are deac-
tivated during the journey, although:
R
an adult
or
R
a person of the corresponding stature is on the front-passenger seat
If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system may interpret
the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.
G
WARNING
The front-passenger front air bag and front passenger knee bag may
not be triggered in the event of an accident.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Switch the ignition off.
X
Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.
X
Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X
Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the center
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
R
a self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simulta-
neously for approximately six seconds
R
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up
and remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on,
OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled the front-
passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag
(
Y page 49)
R
the Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐
tor's Manual display messages must not be shown in the mul-
tifunction display
X
Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system
checks have been completed.
X
Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-
function display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-
pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Observe the additional information on OCS (Y page 49).
Front Passenger Air
bag Enabled
The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are enabled
during the journey, even though:
Display messages
219
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
See Operator's Man
ual
R
a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system's
weight threshold is located on the front-passenger seat
or
R
the front-passenger seat is unoccupied
The system may detect objects or forces applying additional weight on
the seat.
G
WARNING
The front-passenger front air bag and front-passenger knee bag may
be triggered unintentionally.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Switch the ignition off.
X
Open the front-passenger door.
X
Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-
passenger seat.
X
Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to the
weight.
The system may otherwise detect the additional weight and inter-
pret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actually is.
X
Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door and
switch on the ignition.
X
Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in the center
console and the multifunction display and check the following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switch
ed o
n:
R
a self-diagnosis is carried out. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamps must light up simultane-
ously for approximately six seconds
R
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must then light up and
remain lit after the self-diagnosis. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS
has deactivated the front-passenger front air bag and front-
passenger knee bag (
Y page 49)
R
the Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Man
ual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's
Manual display messages must not be shown in the multifunction
display
X
Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessary system
checks have been completed.
X
Make sure that the display messages do not appear in the multi-
function display.
If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can be occu-
pied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.
If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operating correctly.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Observe the additional information on OCS (Y page 49).
220
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Lights
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
Check Left Low Beam
(example)
The corresponding bulb is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
i
LED light sources: the display message for the corresponding
lamp only appears when all the LEDs in the lamp have failed.
b
Active Headlamps
Inoperative
The active light function is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Malfunction See
Operator's Manual
The exterior lighting is defective.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Auto Lamp Function
Inoperative
The light sensor is defective.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
b
Switch Off Lights
You leave the vehicle and the lights are switched on. A warning tone
also sounds.
X
Turn the light switch to position Ã.
Adaptive Highbeam
Assist Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
R
the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
R
visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
X
Clean the windshield.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again, the
Adaptive
Highbeam Assist Now Available message is displayed.
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.
Adaptive Highbeam
Assist Inoperative
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
221
On-board computer and displays
Z
Engine
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
+
Check Coolant Level
See Operator's Man‐
ual
The coolant level is too low.
!
Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the engine
cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
X
Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so
(
Y page 276).
X
If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the engine
coolant system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
?
The fan motor is faulty.
X
At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡(120 †), drive to the nearest
qualified specialist workshop.
X
Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in moun-
tainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.
?
Coolant Too Hot
Stop Vehicle Turn
Engine Off
The coolant is too hot.
A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch
fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which
can occur just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-
ing attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Wait until the engine has cooled down.
X
Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked,
e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X
Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out and
the coolant temperature is below 248 (120 †). Otherwise, the
engine could be damaged.
X
Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.
X
If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist work-
shop immediately.
Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant
level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 (120 †).
222
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#
See Operator's Man
ual
The battery is not being charged.
A warning tone also sounds.
Possible causes are:
R
a defective alternator
R
a torn poly-V-belt
R
a malfunction in the electronics
!
Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-
ing attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
#
Stop Vehicle See
Operator's Manual
The battery is no longer being charged and the battery charge level is
too low.
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-
ing attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Observe the instructions in the # See Operator's Manual
display message.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
4
Check Engine Oil At
Next Refueling
The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.
A warning tone also sounds.
!
Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-
erwise be damaged.
X
Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 275).
X
If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 276).
X
Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if you
need to add engine oil more often than usual.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any quali-
fied specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-
benz.com.
4
Check Engine Oil
Level (Add 1 quart)
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.
!
Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine will oth-
erwise be damaged.
X
Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest (Y page 275).
X
If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 276).
X
Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if you
need to add engine oil more often than usual.
Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from any quali-
fied specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-
benz.com.
Display messages
223
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
4
Engine Oil Level
Low Stop Vehicle
Turn Engine Off
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low. There is a risk
of engine damage.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-
ing attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Check the engine oil level (Y page 275).
X
If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 276).
8
Fuel Level Low
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
X
Refuel at the nearest gas station.
C
There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.
X
Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.
8
Gas Cap Loose
The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
X
Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:
X
Close the fuel filler cap.
If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Driving systems
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
À
Attention Assist:
Take a Break!
Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or
a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tone also
sounds.
X
If necessary, take a break.
During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you get
enough rest.
À
Attention Assist
Inoperative
ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
¨
Vehicle Rising
Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.
¨
Vehicle Rising
Please Wait
The vehicle level is too low when the vehicle is stationary. A warning
tone also sounds.
X
Do not pull away.
The vehicle level is set when the display message disappears.
224
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
¨
Stop Vehicle Vehi‐
cle Too Low
You have pulled away while the vehicle level is still too low.
AIRMATIC sets the vehicle to the selected level after a short period.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.
AIRMATIC is defective. A warning tone also sounds.
X
Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
X
Make only slight steering movements. Otherwise, the front fender
or the tires could be damaged if the steering movement is too large.
X
Listen for scraping sounds.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely, paying attention to road and
traffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level.
Depending on the malfunction, it may be possible to raise the vehi-
cle.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
¨
Malfunction
The AIRMATIC function is restricted. The vehicle's handling charac-
teristics may be affected.
X
Do not drive at speeds above 50 mph (80 km/h).
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Traffic Sign Assist
Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator's
Manual
Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
R
the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
R
visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
X
Clean the windshield.
If the system detects that the camera is fully operational, the display
message disappears.
Traffic Sign Assist is operational again.
Traffic Sign Assist
Inoperative
Traffic Sign Assist is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
ë
Off
The HOLD function is deactivated. The vehicle is skidding.
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 164).
Display messages
225
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Lane Keeping Assist
Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator's
ManualorActive Lane
Keeping Assist Cur
rently Unavailable
See Operator's Man
ual
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and
temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
R
the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
R
visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
R
there have been no lane markings for an extended period.
R
the lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operational
again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Clean the windshield.
Lane Keeping Assist
InoperativeorActive
Lane Keeping Assist
Inoperative
Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Blind Spot Assist
Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator's
ManualorActive
Blind Spot Assist
Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator's
Manual
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
R
the radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature
range.
R
the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-
tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Restart the engine.
Blind Spot Assist
InoperativeorActive
Blind Spot Assist
Inoperative
Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective.
The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exterior mirrors.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
226
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Park Assist Canceled
The driver's door is open and the driver's seat belt has not been fas-
tened.
X
Repeat the parking process with the seat belt fastened and the
driver's door closed.
You have inadvertently touched the multifunction steering wheel while
steering intervention was active.
X
While steering intervention is active, make sure that the multifunc-
tion steering wheel is not touched unintentionally.
The vehicle has started to skid and ESP
®
has intervened.
X
Use Active Parking Assist again later (Y page 173).
Park Assist Inoper
ative
You have just carried out a large number of turning or parking maneu-
vers.
Active Parking Assist will become available again after approximately
ten minutes (
Y page 173).
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Switch off and restart the engine.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
PARKTRONIC is defective.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Park Assist Finished
The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.
The display message disappears automatically.
DISTRONIC PLUS Off
DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated.
If a warning tone also sounds, DISTRONIC PLUS has deactivated auto-
matically (
Y page 155)
DISTRONIC PLUS Now
Available
DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having been temporarily
unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS (
Y page 155).
Display messages
227
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
DISTRONIC PLUS Cur
rently Unavailable
See Operator's Man
ual
DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative.
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
R
the radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-
tromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radio stations or
other sources of electromagnetic radiation.
R
the system is outside the operating temperature range.
R
the on-board voltage is too low.
A warning tone also sounds.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Restart the engine.
DISTRONIC PLUS Inop‐
erative
DISTRONIC PLUS is defective.
The following may have also failed:
R
BAS PLUS with Cross-Traffic Assist
R
PRE-SAFE
®
Brake
R
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
DISTRONIC PLUS Sus
pended
You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is no
longer controlling the speed of the vehicle.
X
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.
DISTRONIC PLUS
- - - mph
An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.
X
Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 155).
228
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
DTR+: Steering
Assist. Currently
Unavailable See
Operator's Manual
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are temporarily inoperative.
Possible causes are:
R
the windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.
R
visibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.
R
there have been no lane markings for an extended period.
R
the lane markings are worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.
When the causes stated above no longer apply, the display message
disappears.
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are operative again.
If the display message does not disappear:
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Clean the windshield.
DTR+: Steering
Assist. Inoperative
Steering Assist and Stop&Go Pilot are faulty.
However, the DISTRONIC PLUS functions are still available.
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise Control Inop‐
erative
Cruise control is malfunctioning.
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Cruise Control
- - - mph
A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.
You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), for example.
X
If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and store
the speed.
X
Check the activation conditions for cruise control (Y page 153).
Cruise Control Off
Cruise control has been deactivated.
If a warning tone also sounds, cruise control has deactivated auto-
matically (
Y page 153).
Display messages
229
On-board computer and displays
Z
Tires
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Check
Tire Pressure Soon
The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significant loss
in pressure.
A warning tone also sounds.
Possible causes:
R
you have changed the positions of the wheels and tires or installed
new wheels and tires.
R
the tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped.
G
WARNING
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
R
they may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
R
they may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
R
the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be
greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat
tire (
Y page 287).
X
Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pres-
sure is correct (
Y page 308).
Check Tire Pressure
Then Restart Run
Flat Indicator
The tire pressure loss warning system generated a display message
and has not been restarted since.
X
Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.
X
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 308).
Run Flat Indicator
Inoperative
The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Correct
Tire Pressure
The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tire
pressure difference between the wheels is too great.
X
Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 308).
X
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
X
Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 311).
230
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Check
Tires
The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly. The
wheel position is shown in the multifunction display.
A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
R
they may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
R
they may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly
impair tire traction.
R
the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be
greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat
tire (
Y page 287).
X
Check the tire pressure (Y page 308).
X
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
Warning
Tire Malfunction
The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. The wheel
position is shown in the multifunction display.
G
WARNING
Driving with a flat tire poses a risk of the following hazards:
R
a flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
R
you could lose control of the vehicle.
R
continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
and possibly a fire.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat
tire (
Y page 287).
Tire Press. Monitor
Currently Unavaila‐
ble
Because there is interference from a strong source of radio waves, no
signals from the tire pressure sensors are detected. The tire pressure
monitor is temporarily malfunctioning.
X
Drive on.
The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as the
problem has been resolved.
TirePress. Sen
sor(s) Missing
There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or several
wheels. The pressure of the affected tire does not appear in the mul-
tifunction display.
X
Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified special-
ist workshop.
Display messages
231
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Tire Pressure Moni‐
tor Inoperative No
Wheel Sensors
The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor. The
tire pressure monitor is deactivated.
X
Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.
The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after driving for
a few minutes.
Tire Press. Monitor
Inoperative
The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Vehicle
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Shift to 'P' or 'N'
to Start Engine:
You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission in posi-
tion R or D.
X
Shift the transmission to position P or N.
To Shift from 'P'
Apply Brake
You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever to posi-
tion D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.
X
Depress the brake pedal.
To Deselect P or N,
Depress Brake and
Start Engine
With the engine switched off, you have attempted to shift the trans-
mission out of position P or N into another transmission position.
X
Depress the brake pedal.
X
Start the engine.
Risk of Rolling Away
Vehicle Not in 'P'
The driver's door is open or not fully closed and the transmission is in
position R, N or D.
A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
The vehicle may roll away.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Shift the transmission to position P.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Close the driver's door completely.
Only Shift
to 'P' when Vehicle
is Stationary
The vehicle is moving.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Shift the transmission to position P.
232
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Service Required Do
Not Shift Gears
Visit Dealer
You cannot change the transmission position due to a malfunction.
A warning tone also sounds.
If transmission position D is selected:
X
Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting the trans-
mission from position D.
If transmission position R, N or P is selected:
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Reversing Not Poss.
Service Required
You cannot shift into the transmission position R due to a malfunction.
The transmission positions P, N or D continue to be available.
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission Mal
function Stop
A malfunction has occurred in the mechanical transmission compo-
nents.
A warning tone also sounds. The gearbox automatically shifts to posi-
tion N.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Shift the transmission to position P.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
Auxiliary Battery
Malfunction
The auxiliary battery for the transmission is no longer being charged.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity.
X
Until then, set the transmission to position P before you switch off
the engine.
X
Before leaving the vehicle, apply the parking brake.
N
The trunk lid is open.
X
Close the trunk lid.
M
The hood is open. A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
The open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Close the hood.
C
At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.
X
Close all the doors.
Display messages
233
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
_
Rear Left Backrest
Not LatchedorRear
Right Backrest Not
Latched
The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/or right-
hand side. A warning tone also sounds.
X
Push the backrest back until it engages.
Phone No Service
Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver
range.
X
Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol appears
in the multifunction display.
Ð
Power Steering Mal
function See Opera‐
tor's Manual
The power steering is malfunctioning.
A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
You will need to use more force to steer.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.
X
If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified
specialist workshop.
X
If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
¥
Check Washer Fluid
The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below
the minimum.
X
Add washer fluid (Y page 277).
SmartKey
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Â
Key Does Not Belong
to Vehicle
You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.
X
Use the correct SmartKey.
Â
Take Your Key from
Ignition
The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.
X
Remove the SmartKey.
Â
Obtain a New Key
The SmartKey needs to be replaced.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Â
Replace Key Battery
The battery of the KEYLESS-GO key is discharged.
X
Change the batteries (Y page 79).
234
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Â
Don't Forget Your
Key
The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the ignition lock. You have opened the
driver's door with the engine switched off.
This display message is shown in the multifunction display for a max-
imum of 60 seconds and is simply a reminder.
X
Remember to take the KEYLESS-GO key with you when you leave
the vehicle.
Â
Key Not Detected
(red display message)
The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.
A warning tone also sounds.
If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle cen-
trally or start the engine.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Locate the KEYLESS-GO key.
A strong source of radio waves is causing interference and this is
preventing the KEYLESS-GO key from being recognized when the
engine is running.
A warning tone also sounds.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and bring into key mode.
Â
Key Not Detected
(white display message)
The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.
X
Change the location of the SmartKey with the KEYLESS-GO func-
tions in the vehicle.
If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:
X
Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
Â
Remove 'Start' But
ton and Insert Key
The KEYLESS-GO key can continuously not be detected.
KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. A warning
tone also sounds.
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to the desired
position.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
General notes
Some systems carry out a self-diagnosis when the ignition is switched on. Therefore, some indicator
and warning lamps may light up or flash temporarily. This behavior is non-critical. These indicator
and warning lamps only indicate a malfunction if they light up or flash after starting the engine or
whilst driving.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
235
On-board computer and displays
Z
Safety
Seat belts
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M
Solutions
ü
N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6 seconds.
The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their
seat belts.
X
Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).
ü
N After starting the engine, the red seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition, a
warning tone sounds for up to 6 seconds.
The driver's seat belt is not fastened.
X
Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).
The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.
ü
N The red seat belt warning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the
driver's or the front-passenger door is closed.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
X
Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).
The warning lamp goes out.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat.
X
Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure
place.
The warning lamp goes out.
ü
N The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning
sounds.
The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicle is being
driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph
(25 km/h).
X
Fasten your seat belt (Y page 44).
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The vehicle is being driven faster
than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
X
Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow them in a secure
place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
236
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Safety systems
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M
Solutions
$J
N $ (USA only) or J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is
lit while the vehicle is moving. A warning tone also sounds.
You are driving with the parking brake applied.
X
Release the parking brake.
The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.
$J
N $ (USA only) or J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is
lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be
affected.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
$J
N $ (USA only) or J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is
lit while the engine is running. A warning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
The braking effect may be impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction.
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
237
On-board computer and displays
Z
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M
Solutions
!
N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS (anti-lock braking system) is malfunctioning.
If there is an additional warning tone, the EBD (electronic brake force distribution)
is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-
ple.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that other systems, such
as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, will not be available.
$J
֌
!
N $ (USA only) or J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp and
the yellow ESP
®
, ESP
®
OFF and ABS warning lamps are lit while the engine is
running.
ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above. The front and rear wheels could therefore lock if you brake hard, for exam-
ple.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
238
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M
Solutions
÷
N The yellow ESP
®
warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
ESP
®
or the traction control system has intervened because there is a risk of
skidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.
Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.
X
When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary.
X
Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.
X
Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
X
Do not deactivate ESP
®
.
In rare cases (
Y page 70), it may be best to deactivate ESP
®
.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP
®
(Y page 69).
å
N The yellow ESP
®
OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ESP
®
is deactivated.
G
WARNING
If ESP
®
is switched off, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted, e.g. Active
Blind Spot Assist. The system does not perform course-correcting brake applica-
tions.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Reactivate ESP
®
.
In rare cases (
Y page 70), it may be best to deactivate ESP
®
.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP
®
(Y page 69).
X
Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.
If ESP
®
cannot be activated:
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have ESP
®
checked.
֌
N The yellow ESP
®
and ESP
®
OFF warning lamps are lit while the engine is running.
ESP
®
is malfunctioning.
Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be faulty.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
239
On-board computer and displays
Z
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M
Solutions
M
N Mercedes-AMG vehicles only:
The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
SPORT handling mode is activated.
G
WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions descri-
bed in the "Activating/deactivating ESP" section (
Y page 71).
6
N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The restraint system is faulty.
G
WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered uninten-
tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Have the restraint system checked immediately at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Observe the additional information on restraint systems (
Y page 41).
240
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Engine
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M
Solutions
;
N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
There may be a malfunction, for example:
R
in the engine management
R
in the fuel injection system
R
in the exhaust system
R
in the ignition system
R
in the fuel system
The emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine may be in emergency
mode.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
i
In some states, you must immediately visit a qualified specialist workshop as
soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal
requirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whether such legal
regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving.
8
N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.
X
Refuel at the nearest gas station.
8
N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion.
In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up.
The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
X
Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
X
If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.
X
If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist workshop.
?
N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the
coolant temperature gage is at the start of the scale.
The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gage is defective.
The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is a risk of engine
damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention
to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
241
On-board computer and displays
Z
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M
Solutions
?
N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.
The coolant level is too low.
If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or
the electric engine radiator fan may be malfunctioning.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooled sufficiently.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention
to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has
cooled down.
X
Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes
(
Y page 276).
X
If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.
X
Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,
slush or ice.
X
Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248
(120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.
X
Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.
X
Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain,
and stop-and-go traffic.
?
N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. A warning
tone also sounds.
The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡(120 †). The airflow to the engine
radiator may be blocked or the coolant level may be too low.
G
WARNING
The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which
may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur
just by opening the hood.
There is a risk of injury.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention
to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until the engine has
cooled down.
X
Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning notes
(
Y page 276).
X
If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.
X
Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,
slush or ice.
242
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M
Solutions
X
At coolant temperatures below 248 (120 †), drive to the nearest qualified
specialist workshop.
X
Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain,
and stop-and-go traffic.
Driving systems
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M
Solutions
·
N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. A warning
tone also sounds.
You are approaching a vehicle, a pedestrian or a stationary obstacle in your line of
travel at too high a speed.
X
Be prepared to brake immediately.
X
Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take
evasive action.
Observe the additional information on PRESAFE
®
Brake (Y page 73).
Observe the additional information on the distance warning function of COLLISION
PREVENTION ASSIST PLUS (
Y page 67).
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
243
On-board computer and displays
Z
Tires
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M
Solutions
h
N The yellow combination low tire pressure telltale/TPMS malfunction telltale for
the TPMS (pressure loss or malfunction) is lit.
The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in at least one of the tires.
G
WARNING
Tire pressures that are too low pose the following hazards:
R
they may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed increase.
R
they may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly impair tire trac-
tion.
R
the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may be greatly
impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking maneuvers. Pay
attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 146).
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for a flat tire
(
Y page 287).
X
Check the tire pressure (Y page 308).
X
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
h
N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)
flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit.
The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
G
WARNING
The system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tire pressure.
There is a risk of an accident.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
X
Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.
244
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
General notes
The multimedia system section in this manual
describes the basic principles for operation.
More information can be found in the Digital
Operator's Manual.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
The multimedia system calculates the route to
the destination without taking the following into
account, for example:
R
traffic lights
R
stop and yield signs
R
parking or stopping restrictions
R
road narrowing
R
other road and traffic rules and regulations
The multimedia system may give incorrect nav-
igation recommendations if the actual street/
traffic situation does not correspond with the
digital map's data.
For example:
R
a diverted route
R
the road layout or the direction of a one-way
street has been changed
For this reason, you must always observe road
and traffic rules and regulations during your
journey. Road and traffic rules and regulations
always have priority over multimedia system
driving recommendations.
Navigation announcements are intended to
direct you while driving without diverting your
attention from the road and driving.
Please always use this feature instead of con-
sulting the map display for directions. Looking
at the icons or map display can distract you from
traffic conditions and driving, and increase the
risk of an accident.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equip-
ment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65.
This equipment has very low levels of RF energy
that is deemed to comply without maximum
permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is
desirabl
e tha
t it should be installed and oper-
ated with at least 8inches (20 cm) and more
between the radiator and a person's body
(excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and
legs.)
G
WARNING
Modifications to electronic components, their
software as well as wiring can impair their
function and/or the function of other net-
worked components. In particular, systems
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
result, these may no longer function as inten-
ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
the vehicle. There is an increased risk of an
accident and injury.
Never tamper with the wiring as well as elec-
tronic components or their software. You
should have all work to electrical and elec-
tronic equipment carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
If you make any changes to the vehicle elec-
tronics, the general operating permit is ren-
dered invalid.
Function restrictions
For safety reasons, some functions are restric-
ted or unavailable while the vehicle is in motion.
You will notice this, for example, because either
you will not be able to select certain menu items
or a message will appear to this effect.
Function restrictions
245
Multimedia system
Z
Operating system
Overview
General notes
!
Do not use the space in front of the display
for storage. Objects placed here could dam-
age the display or impair its function. Avoid
any direct contact with the display surface.
Pressure on the display surface may result in
impairments to the display, which could be
irreversible.
Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your
ability to read the display.
The display has an automatic temperature-con-
trolled switch-off feature. The brightness is
automatically reduced if the temperature is too
high. The display may temporarily switch off
completely.
Cleaning instructions
!
Do not touch the display. The display has a
very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a
risk of scratching. If you have to clean the
screen, however, use a mild cleaning agent
and a soft, lint-free cloth.
The display must be switched off and have
cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not
apply pressure to the display surface when
cleaning it, as this could cause irreversible dam-
age to the display.
Switching the multimedia system
on/off
X
Press the q control knob.
Adjusting the volume
X
Turn the q control knob.
The volume is adjusted:
R
for the currently selected media source
R
during traffic or navigation announcements
R
in hands-free mode during a phone call
Switching the sound on or off
X
Press the 8 button on the control panel.
If the audio output is switched off, the status
line will show the 8 symbol. If you switch
the media source or set the volume, the sound
is automatically switched on.
i
Navigation announcements will be heard
even if the sound is muted.
Functions
The multimedia system has the following func-
tions:
R
Radio mode
R
Media mode with media search
R
Sound systems
R
Navigation system
COMAND: navigation via the hard drive
Audio 20: navigation via SD card
R
Communication functions
R
SIRIUS Weather (COMAND)
R
Vehicle functions with system settings
R
Favorites functions
Controller
The controller in the center console lets you:
R
select menu items on the display
R
enter characters
R
select a destination on the map
R
save entries
The controller can be:
R
turned 3
R
slid left or right 1
R
slid forwards or back 4
R
slid diagonally 2
R
pressed briefly or pressed and held 7
Back button
You can use the % button to exit a menu or to
call up the basic display of the current operating
mode.
X
To exit the menu: briefly press the %
button.
The multimedia system changes to the next
higher menu level in the current operating
mode.
X
To call up the basic display: press the %
button for longer than two seconds.
The multimedia system changes to the basic
display of the current operating mode.
246
Operating system
Multimedia system
Favorites
Calling up and exiting favorites
X
To call up: press the ò button on the con-
troller.
X
Select a favorite, e.g. Vehicle.
The favorites are displayed.
X
To exit: press the ò button again.
Adding favorites
Adding a predefined favorite
:
Adds a new favorite
;
Renames a selected favorite
=
Moves a selected favorite
?
Deletes a selected favorite
X
Press the ò button.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
The menu bar is shown.
X
Select Reassign.
The categories are displayed.
X
Select a category.
The favorites are displayed.
X
Select a favorite.
X
Add a favorite at the desired position.
If a favorite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten.
Adding your own favorite
X
Select VehicleQClimate Control.
X
Press and hold the ò button until the
favorites are displayed.
X
Add a favorite at the desired position.
If a favorite has already been added at this
position, it will be overwritten.
Navigation mode
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipment integrated in the vehi-
cle while driving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legal requirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the navigation system.
General notes
Among other things, correct functioning of the
navigation system depends on GPS reception. In
certain situations, GPS reception may be
impaired, there may be interference or there
may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or
parking garages.
Audio 20 is equipped with MARGIN
®
MAP PILOT
(see the manufacturer's operating instructions).
The Garmin
®
MAP PILOT operating instructions
are stored on the SD memory card as a PDF file.
The SD card box contains a quick guide.
The following descriptions apply to navigation
with COMAND. Further information can be
found in the Digital Operator's Manual.
Selecting a route type and route options
Multimedia system:
X
Select NaviQNavigation.
The map shows the vehicle's current position.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
X
Select OptionsQRoute Settings.
Notes for route types:
R
Eco Route
R
Dynamic Traffic Route (only available in
the USA and Canada)
Traffic reports on the route for the route guid-
ance are taken into account.
Operating system
247
Multimedia system
Z
R
Dynamic TRF. Route After Request (only
available in the USA and Canada)
You can decide whether or not current traffic
reports should be taken into account for route
calculation.
R
Calculate Alternative Routes
Different routes are being calculated. In order
to do so, instead of Start
, select the menu
item Continue
.
Notes for route options:
R
Use Toll Roads
The route calculation includes roads which
require you to pay a usage fee (toll).
R
Number of Occupants in the Vehicle:
(only available in the USA)
Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the access
conditions for carpool lanes.
Carpool lanes will be included if the carpool
lanes option is activated.
Entering an address
Multimedia system:
X
Select NaviQNavigation.
The map shows the vehicle's current position.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
X
Select DestinationQAddress Entry.
Enter an address, e.g. as follows:
R
city or ZIP code, street, house number
R
state/province, city or ZIP code
R
city or ZIP code, center
R
street, city or ZIP code, intersection
X
Select City.
The city in which the vehicle is currently loca-
ted (current vehicle position) is at the top.
Below this, you will see locations for which
route guidance has already been carried out.
X
Enter the city.
The G symbol: the location is contained on
the digital map multiple times.
X
To switch to the list: slide the 5 control-
ler.
X
Select the location.
If available, the zip code is shown. If there are
different ZIP codes available for the location,
the corresponding digits are displayed with an
X
.
X
Enter the street and house number.
The address is in the menu.
Further options for destination entry:
R
search for a keyword
The keyword search finds destinations using
fragments of words.
R
select the last destination
R
select a contact
R
select a POI
You can search for a POI by location, name or
telephone number.
R
select destination on the map
R
enter intermediate destination
You can map the route to the destination
yourself with up to four intermediate destina-
tions.
R
select destinations from Mercedes-Benz
Apps
R
select geo-coordinates
Calculating the route
Prerequisite: the address has been entered and
is in the menu.
X
Select Start or Continue.
The route is calculated with the selected route
type and the selected route options.
If route guidance has already been activated,
a prompt will appear asking whether you wish
to end the current route guidance.
X
Select Yes or Set as Intermediate Des‐
tination.
Yes
cancels the current route guidance and
starts route calculation to the new destina-
tion.
Set as Intermediate Destination
adds
the new destination in addition to the existing
destination and opens the intermediate des-
tinations list.
Connecting a mobile phone
Prerequisites
For telephony via the Bluetooth
®
interface, you
require a Bluetooth
®
-capable mobile phone. The
mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile
1.0 or above.
248
Operating system
Multimedia system
Multimedia system:
X
Select VehicleQSystem Set‐
tingsQActivate Bluetooth.
X
Activate Bluetooth
®
O.
Mobile phone:
X
Activate Bluetooth
®
and, if necessary, Blue-
tooth
®
visibility for other devices (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
The Bluetooth
®
device names for all of one man-
ufacturer's products might be identical. To
make it possible to clearly identify your mobile
phone, change the device name (see the man-
ufacturer's operating instructions).
If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone
Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message
Access Profile) Bluetooth
®
profiles, the follow-
ing information will be transmitted after you
connect:
R
Phone book
R
Call lists
R
Text messages and e-mails
i
Further information on suitable mobile
phones can be obtained on the Internet at:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/
connect
i
In the USA you can also contact the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).
In Canada, you can get in touch with the Cus-
tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.
Searching for and authorizing a mobile
phone
Before using your mobile phone with the multi-
media system for the first time, you will need to
search for the phone and then authorize (con-
nect) it. Depending on the mobile phone, author-
ization either takes place by means of Secure
Simple Pairing or by entering a passkey. The
multimedia system automatically makes the
procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone
available. The mobile phone is always connec-
ted automatically after authorization. Further
information on using a mobile phone with the
multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's
Manual).
If the multimedia system does not detect your
mobile phone, this may be due to particular
security settings on your mobile phone (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
Only one mobile phone can be connected to the
multimedia system at any one time.
Searching for a mobile phone
Multimedia system:
X
Select Tel/®QConnect
DeviceQSearch for PhonesQStart
Search.
The available mobile phones are displayed.
Symbols in the device list
Sym-
bol
Explanation
Ï
New mobile phone found, not yet
authorized.
Ñ
Mobile phone is authorized, but is
not connected
#
Mobile phone is authorized and
connected
Connecting a mobile phone
Authorization using Secure Simple Pairing:
X
Select mobile phone.
A code is displayed in the multimedia system
and on the mobile phone.
X
If codes match: select Yes on the multimedia
system.
X
Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depend-
ing on the mobile phone used, confirm the
connection to the multimedia system and for
the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth
®
profiles. The
prompt to confirm may take up to two
minutes to be displayed (see the manufactur-
er's operating instructions).
X
If the codes are different: select No on the
multimedia system.
The process is canceled.
Repeat authorization.
Authorization by entering a passkey:
X
Select Bluetooth
®
name of the mobile phone.
The input menu for the passkey is displayed.
X
Choose a one to sixteen-digit number combi-
nation as a passkey.
X
Enter the passkey on the multimedia system.
X
Press ¬ to confirm.
X
Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile
phone. Depending on the mobile phone used,
Operating system
249
Multimedia system
Z
confirm the connection to the multimedia sys-
tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth
®
profiles. The prompt to confirm may take up
to two minutes to be displayed (see the man-
ufacturer's operating instructions).
Switching between mobile phones
If you have authorized more than one mobile
phone, you can switch between the individual
phones.
Multimedia system:
X
Select Connect Device.
X
Select a mobile phone from the device list.
Media mode
General notes
If you wish to play external media sources, the
default display must already be turned on. Fur-
ther information on media mode (see the Digital
Operator's Manual).
The following external media sources can be
used:
R
Apple
®
devices (e.g. iPhone
®
)
R
USB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3 player)
R
CD
R
DVD (COMAND Online)
R
SD cards
R
via devices connected by Bluetooth
®
i
Information on single CD/DVD drive or DVD
changer (see the Digital Operator's Manual).
Using the device list
Multimedia system:
X
Select MediaQDevices.
The available media sources will be shown.
The # dot indicates the current setting.
X
Select the media source.
Playable files are played.
Inserting/removing an SD memory card
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
SD memory cards are small parts. They can be
swallowed and cause asphyxiation. This
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
injury.
Keep SD memory cards out of the reach of
children. If an SD memory card is swallowed,
seek immediate medical attention.
!
If you are no longer using the SD memory
card, you should remove it and take it out of
the vehicle. High temperatures can damage
the card.
Inserting an SD memory card
The SD card slot is on the control panel.
X
Insert the SD memory card into the SD card
slot until it engages. The side with the con-
tacts must face downwards.
Ejecting an SD memory card
X
Press the memory card.
The memory card is ejected.
X
Remove the memory card.
Connecting USB devices
There are two USB ports in the stowage space
under the armrest.
X
Connect the USB device to the USB port.
X
Select the media source (Y page 250).
250
Operating system
Multimedia system
Stowage areas
Loading guidelines
G
WARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-
larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-
den change in direction.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping before the
journey.
G
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Exhaust
gases can enter the vehicle interior if the
trunk lid is open when the engine is running,
especially if the vehicle is in motion. There is a
risk of poisoning.
Always switch off the engine before opening
the trunk lid. Never drive with the trunk lid
open.
G
WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
become very hot. If you come into contact
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
yourself. There is a risk of injury.
Always be particularly careful around the
exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow
these components to cool down before touch-
ing them.
The handling characteristics of a laden vehicle
are dependent on the distribution of the load
within the vehicle. For this reason, you should
observe the following notes when transporting a
load:
R
Never exceed the maximum permissible
gross vehicle mass or the gross axle weight
rating for the vehicle (including occupants).
The values are specified on the vehicle iden-
tification plate on the B-pillar of the driver's
door.
R
The trunk is the preferred place to carry
objects.
R
Position heavy loads as far forwards as pos-
sible and as low down in the trunk as possible.
R
The load must not protrude above the upper
edge of the seat backrests.
R
Always place the load against the rear or front
seat backrests. Make sure that the seat
backrests are securely locked into place.
R
Always place the load behind unoccupied
seats if possible.
R
Use the cargo tie-down rings and the parcel
nets to transport loads and luggage.
R
Use cargo tie-down rings and fastening mate-
rials appropriate for the weight and size of the
load.
R
Secure the load with sufficiently strong and
wear-resistant tie-downs. Pad sharp edges for
protection.
Stowage spaces
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If objects in the passenger compartment are
stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In
addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces
and mobile phone brackets cannot always
retain all objects they contain. There is a risk
of injury, particularly in the event of sudden
braking or a sudden change in direction.
R
Always stow objects so that they cannot be
thrown around in such situations.
R
Always make sure that objects do not pro-
trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or
stowage nets.
R
Close the lockable stowage spaces before
starting a journey.
R
Always stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in
the trunk.
Observe the loading guidelines (
Y page 251).
Stowage areas
251
Stowage and features
Z
Glove box
X
To open: pull handle : and open glove box
flap ;.
X
To close: fold glove box flap ; upwards until
it engages.
i
The glove box can be ventilated
(
Y page 125).
The glove box can only be locked and unlocked
using the mechanical key.
X
To lock: insert the mechanical key into the
lock and turn it 90° clockwise to position 2.
X
To unlock: insert the mechanical key into the
lock and turn it 90° counter-clockwise to
position 1.
Eyeglasses compartment
There is a compartment to stow eyeglasses in
the headliner on the driver's side.
X
To open: pull down eyeglasses compart-
ment : by the handle.
Stowage compartments in the center
console
Except Mercedes-AMG vehicles
X
To open: slide the cover forwards by han-
dle : in the direction of the arrow until it
engages.
X
To close: briefly press the front of handle :.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
252
Stowage areas
Stowage and features
X
Briefly press trim :.
i
The stowage tray can be removed.
Stowage compartment under the arm-
rest
X
To open: pull handle : up.
The armrest folds out.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol-
lowing may be in the stowage compartment: a
multimedia connector unit with an SD card slot
and 2 USB ports (Media Interface), e.g. for use
with an iPod
®
, iPhone
®
or MP3 player; see the
separate operating instructions.
Stowage compartment under the front
seats
G
WARNING
If you exceed the maximum load for the stow-
age compartment, the cover may not be able
to restrain the items. Items may be thrown out
of the stowage compartment and hit vehicle
occupants. There is a risk of injury, particu-
larly in the event of sudden braking or a sud-
den change in direction.
Never exceed the maximum permissible load
for the stowage compartment. Stow and
secure heavy objects in the trunk.
The maximum permissible load of the stowage
compartment is 3.3 lbs (1.5 kg).
X
To open: pull handle : up and fold cover ;
forwards.
i
On vehicles with a fire extinguisher, the fire
extinguisher is located in the stowage com-
partment under the driver's seat.
Stowage compartments in the rear cen-
ter console
X
To open: slide covers : and ; in the direc-
tion of the arrow.
i
There is a 12 V power socket in the front
stowage compartment.
Stowage compartment in the rear seat
armrest
!
Do not sit on or support your body weight on
the rear seat armrest when it is folded down,
as you could otherwise damage it.
!
Close the cover of the stowage compart-
ment before folding the rear seat armrest
back into the seat backrest.
Stowage areas
253
Stowage and features
Z
X
To open: fold down seat armrest ;.
X
Fold cover : of the armrest upwards.
Stowage nets
Stowage nets are located in the front-passenger
footwell and on the left-hand side of the trunk.
Observe the loading guidelines (
Y page 251)
and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces
(
Y page 251).
Rear bench seat through-loading fea-
ture
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the rear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are not engaged they could fold for-
wards, e.g. when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
R
The vehicle occupant would thereby be
pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench
seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest. The
seat belt can no longer offer the intended
level of protection and could even cause
injuries.
R
Objects or loads in the trunk cannot be
restrained by the seat backrest.
There is an increased risk of injury.
Before every trip, make sure that the seat
backrests and the rear bench seat/rear seat
are engaged.
Observe the loading guidelines (
Y page 251).
The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backrests
can be folded down separately to increase the
trunk capacity.
Folding the seat backrest forward
i
Vehicles with memory function: when you
fold one or both parts of the rear seat back-
rest forwards, the respective front seat
moves forward slightly, when necessary, in
order to avoid contact.
X
Vehicles without memory function: if neces-
sary, move the driver's or front-passenger
seat forward.
X
Open the trunk.
X
Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seat backrest
release handle :.
The corresponding rear seat backrest is
released.
X
Fold rear seat backrest ; forwards.
X
Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
back if necessary.
Folding the seat backrest back
!
Make sure that the seat belt does not
become trapped when folding the rear seat
254
Stowage areas
Stowage and features
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-
aged.
X
Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
forward if necessary.
X
Fold rear seat backrest : back until it
engages.
If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and
locked, this will be shown in the multifunction
display in the instrument cluster. A warning
tone also sounds.
X
Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
back if necessary.
i
You should always engage the rear seat
backrests if you do not need the through-
loading feature. This will prevent unauthor-
ized access to the trunk from the vehicle inte-
rior.
Securing cargo
Cargo tie-down rings
General notes
Observe the following notes on securing loads:
R
Observe the loading guidelines (Y page 251).
R
Secure the load using the cargo tie-down
rings.
R
Distribute the load on the cargo tie-down
rings evenly.
R
Do not use elastic straps or nets to secure a
load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip
protection for light loads.
R
Do not route tie-downs across sharp edges or
corners.
R
Pad sharp edges for protection.
Trunk
:
Cargo tie-down rings
EASY-PACK trunk box
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When the load surface moves up, your hands
may become trapped on the frame of the
EASY-PACK trunk box. There is a risk of injury.
When the load surface moves up, make sure
that your hands are not within the sweep of
the load surface. If someone becomes trap-
ped, carefully push the center of the load sur-
face downward.
!
When the EASY-PACK trunk box is pulled
out, no objects may be placed on the frame of
the box, nor should the frame be pushed from
above. Otherwise, the box could be damaged.
!
Sharp-edged, pointed or fragile objects can
damage the EASY-PACK trunk box and then
be thrown out. There is a risk of injury.
Do not transport sharp-edged, pointed or
fragile objects in the EASY-PACK trunk box.
Always store and secure these or similar
objects in the trunk outside of the EASY-PACK
trunk box.
!
If you exceed the maximum permitted load
of the EASY-PACK trunk box, objects can be
thrown out of the EASY-PACK trunk box and
strike vehicle occupants. There is a risk of
injury, particularly in the event of sudden
braking or a sudden change in direction.
Always observe the maximum permitted load
of the EASY-PACK trunk box. Always store
Stowage areas
255
Stowage and features
Z
and secure heavy objects in the trunk outside
of the EASY-PACK trunk box.
The maximum permitted load of the EASY-PACK
trunk box is 22 lbs (10 kg). With a load of above
approximately 11 lbs (5 kg), the bottom of the
box moves downward until it rests on the mat of
the trunk floor. Thus, overloading of the box is
avoided.
Adjusting the height to any position
X
Pull the box out by handle : in the direction
of the arrow all the way to the stop.
X
Lowering the load surface: push the center
of load surface ; down by hand in the direc-
tion of the arrow until load surface ; has
reached the desired position and the box is
the desired size.
X
To raise the load surface: press switch =.
Load surface ; of the box moves up auto-
matically.
X
To stow the box: push the box in by han-
dle : all the way to the stop.
Removing and installing
X
To install: insert retainer ; of box : into
slots =
X
Raise box : and press hooks A into anchor-
age ? as far as they will go.
X
Turn left-hand rotating catch B clockwise
and right-hand rotating catch B counter-
clockwise by 90°.
X
To remove: turn left-hand rotating catch B
counter-clockwise and right-hand rotating
catch B clockwise by 90°.
X
Move box : downwards and pull it out from
anchorages ?.
i
Store the EASY-PACK trunk box on a flat
surface after removal, e.g. on a suitable shelf.
Stowage well under the trunk floor
!
Unhook the handle before again before clos-
ing the trunk lid and clip it in securely to pre-
vent the handle flap from protruding. Other-
wise, you could damage the handle.
The TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. are
located in the stowage compartment.
X
To open: pull handle : up.
256
Stowage areas
Stowage and features
X
Hook handle : into rain trough ;.
Roof carrier
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When you load the roof, the center of gravity
of the vehicle rises and the driving character-
istics change. If you exceed the maximum roof
load, the driving characteristics, as well as
steering and braking, will be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
Never exceed the maximum roof load and
adjust your driving style.
!
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
use roof carriers that have been tested and
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This
helps to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Position the load on the roof carrier in such a
way that the vehicle will not sustain damage
even when it is in motion.
Ensure that, depending on the vehicle's
equipment, you can raise the sliding sunroof
fully and open the trunk lid fully when the roof
carrier is installed.
!
To avoid damaging or scratching the covers,
do not use metallic or hard objects to open
them.
You will find information on the maximum roof
load in the "Technical data" section
(
Y page 336).
An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load
may become detached from the vehicle. You
must therefore ensure that you observe the roof
carrier manufacturer's installation instructions.
Attaching the roof carrier
X
Open covers : carefully in the direction of
the arrow.
X
Only secure the roof carrier to the anchorage
points under covers :.
X
Observe the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
Features
Cup holder
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If objects in the passenger compartment are
stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In
addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces
and mobile phone brackets cannot always
retain all objects they contain. There is a risk
of injury, particularly in the event of sudden
braking or a sudden change in direction.
R
Always stow objects so that they cannot be
thrown around in such situations.
R
Always make sure that objects do not pro-
trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or
stowage nets.
R
Close the lockable stowage spaces before
starting a journey.
R
Always stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in
the trunk.
!
Do not expose drinks bottles in the cup
holder in the center console to continuous,
Features
257
Stowage and features
Z
strong and direct sunlight. The passenger
compartment in the area of the center con-
sole can otherwise be damaged by the con-
centrated and reflected sunlight.
Observe the loading guidelines (
Y page 251).
Cup holder in the front-compartment
center console
Except Mercedes-AMG vehicles
:
Cup holder
You can remove the cup holder's rubber mat for
cleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm water only.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
:
Cup holder
;
Cover
You can remove the rubber mat of the cup
holder in the direction of the arrow to clean it.
Clean with clear, lukewarm water only.
X
To open: slide cover ; to its foremost posi-
tion.
Cup holder in the rear-compartment
center console
X
To open: slide cover : forwards.
X
To remove the insert: slide catch ; inwards
in the direction of the arrow.
X
Remove cup holder insert = upwards.
X
To re-install the insert: place the insert in
the stowage space.
X
Slide catch ; outwards in the direction of the
arrow until it engages.
You can remove the insert and the rubber mat of
the cup holder to clean them. Clean them with
clean, lukewarm water only.
Cup holder in the rear seat armrest
!
Do not sit on or support your body weight on
the rear seat armrest when it is folded down,
as you could otherwise damage it.
!
Close the cup holder before folding the rear
seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holder
could be damaged.
X
Fold down the rear seat armrest.
X
To open: raise the rear seat armrest cover.
X
Press release catch :.
Cup holder ; folds out forwards.
258
Features
Stowage and features
X
Swing the rear seat armrest cover back down,
if necessary.
X
To close: raise the rear seat armrest cover.
Swing cup holder ; back until it engages.
Bottle holder
G
WARNING
If objects in the passenger compartment are
stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be
thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In
addition, cupholders, open stowage spaces
and mobile phone brackets cannot always
retain all objects they contain. There is a risk
of injury, particularly in the event of sudden
braking or a sudden change in direction.
R
Always stow objects so that they cannot be
thrown around in such situations.
R
Always make sure that objects do not pro-
trude from stowage spaces, parcel nets or
stowage nets.
R
Close the lockable stowage spaces before
starting a journey.
R
Always stow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
ted, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in
the trunk.
Observe the loading guidelines (
Y page 251).
!
Make sure that any bottles weighing more
than 1.1 lb(0.5 kg) that are stored in the bottle
holder, rest on the vehicle floor. The bottle
holder could otherwise be damaged.
X
Press the outer edge of button : and slide in
the direction of the arrow until the bottle fits
into the opening.
X
Insert the bottle into the bottle holder.
The bottle holder is suitable for bottles with a
capacity of 25 fl. oz. (0.7 l) to 54 fl. oz. (1.5 l).
The bottle holder does not secure the bottles; it
merely prevents them from tipping over.
Sun visors
Overview
G
WARNING
If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded
up when the vehicle is in motion, you could be
blinded by incident light. There is a risk of an
accident.
Always keep the mirror cover folded down
while driving.
:
Mirror light
;
Bracket
=
Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket
?
Vanity mirror
A
Mirror cover
Vanity mirror in the sun visor
Mirror light : only functions if the sun visor is
clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover A has
been folded up.
Features
259
Stowage and features
Z
Glare from the side
X
Fold down sun visor :.
X
Pull sun visor : out of retainer ;.
X
Swing sun visor : to the side.
X
Slide sun visor : horizontally as required.
Rear window roller sunblind
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Parts of the body could be trapped in the
sweep of the roller sunblind when the roller
sunblind is extended or retracted. There is a
risk of injury.
When extending or retracting make sure that
no parts of the body are in the sweep of the
roller sunblind. Briefly press the button again
if someone becomes trapped. The opening or
closing process is briefly stopped. The roller
sunblind then returns to its initial position.
!
Make sure that the roller sunblind can move
freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblind or other
objects could be damaged.
Extending/retracting from the driver's
seat
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (
Y page 127).
X
To extend or retract: briefly press button :.
The roller sunblind fully extends or fully
retracts.
X
To stop: briefly press button : again.
The roller sunblind stops briefly and moves
back into the out-of-use position.
Ashtray
Front ashtray
!
The stowage space under the ashtray is not
heat resistant. Before placing lit cigarettes in
the ashtray, make sure that the ashtray is
properly engaged. Otherwise, the stowage
space could be damaged.
Except Mercedes-AMG vehicles
X
To open: slide cover : forwards until it
engages.
X
To remove the insert: hold insert = by the
ribbing at the sides and lift it up ; and out.
260
Features
Stowage and features
X
To re-install the insert: press insert = into
the holder until it engages.
X
To close: briefly press cover : at the front.
The cover moves back.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
X
To open: briefly press the trim on cover :.
The stowage compartment opens.
X
To remove the insert: slide insert ; for-
wards in the direction of the arrow.
X
Remove insert ;.
X
To re-install the insert: place the insert into
the holder and press it in the opposite direc-
tion of the arrow until it engages.
X
To close: fold down cover :.
You can remove the ashtray insert and use the
resulting compartment for stowage.
Rear-compartment ashtray
X
To open: slide cover ; forwards.
X
To remove the insert: pull insert : up and
out.
X
To install the insert: install insert : into the
holder from above and press down into the
holder until it engages.
Cigarette lighter
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
You can burn yourself if you touch the hot
heating element or the socket of the cigarette
lighter.
In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:
R
the hot cigarette lighter falls
R
a child holds the hot cigarette lighter to
objects, for example
There is a risk of fire and injury.
Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.
Always make sure that the cigarette lighter is
out of reach of children. Never leave children
unsupervised in the vehicle.
Your attention must always be focused on the
traffic conditions. Only use the cigarette lighter
when road and traffic conditions permit.
Cigarette lighter in the front compart-
ment
Except Mercedes-AMG vehicles
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 127).
X
To open: slide cover : forwards until it
engages.
X
Press in cigarette lighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically
when the heating element is red-hot.
X
To close: briefly press cover : at the front.
The cover moves back.
Features
261
Stowage and features
Z
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 127).
X
To open: briefly press the trim on cover :.
The stowage compartment opens.
X
Press in cigarette lighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically
when the heating element is red-hot.
12 V sockets
General notes
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 127).
The sockets can be used for accessories with a
maximum draw of 180 W (15 A). Accessories
include such items as chargers for mobile
phones.
If you use the sockets for long periods when the
engine is switched off, the battery may dis-
charge.
An emergency cut-out ensures that the on-
board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-
board voltage is too low, the power to the sock-
ets is automatically cut. This ensures that there
is sufficient power to start the engine.
Socket in the front-compartment center
console
Except Mercedes-AMG vehicles
X
To open: slide cover : forwards until it
engages.
X
Lift up the cover of socket ;.
X
To close: briefly press cover : at the front.
The cover moves back.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
X
To open: briefly press the trim on cover :.
The stowage compartment opens.
X
Lift up the cover of socket ;.
X
To close: fold down cover :.
262
Features
Stowage and features
Socket in the rear-compartment center
console
X
Slide cover ; forwards.
X
Lift up the cover of socket :.
mbrace
General notes
The mbrace system is only available in the USA.
You must have a license agreement to activate
the mbrace service. Make sure that your system
is activated and operational. To log in, press the
ï MB Info call button. If any of the steps
mentioned are not carried out, the system may
not be activated.
If you have questions about the activation, con-
tact one of the following telephone hotlines:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or
1-866-990-9007
Shortly after successfully registering with the
mbrace service, a user ID and password will be
sent to you by mail. You can use this password
to log onto the mbrace area under "Owners
Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
The system is available if:
R
it has been activated and is operational
R
the corresponding mobile phone network is
available for transmitting data to the Cus-
tomer Center
R
a service subscription is available
R
the starter battery is sufficiently charged
Determining the location of the vehicle on a map
is only possible if:
R
GPS reception is available.
R
the vehicle position can be forwarded to the
Customer Assistance Center.
The mbrace system
To adjust the volume during a call, proceed as
follows:
X
Press the W or X button on the multi-
function steering wheel.
or
X
Use the volume control on the multimedia
system.
The system offers various services, e.g.:
R
Automatic and manual emergency call
R
Roadside Assistance call
R
MB Info call
You can find information and a description of all
available features under "Owners Online" at
http://www.mbusa.com.
System self-test
After you have switched on the ignition, the sys-
tem carries out a self-diagnosis.
A malfunction in the system has been detected
if one of the following occurs:
R
The indicator lamp in the SOS button does not
come on during the system self-test.
R
The indicator lamp in the F Roadside
Assistance button does not light up during
self-diagnosis of the system.
R
The indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call
button does not light up during self-diagnosis
of the system.
R
The indicator lamp in one or more of the fol-
lowing buttons continues to light up red after
the system self-diagnosis:
-
SOS button
-
F Roadside Assistance call button
-
ï MB Info call button
R
The Inoperative or the Service Not
Activated message appears in the multi-
function display after the system self-diagno-
sis.
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above,
the system may not operate as expected. In the
Features
263
Stowage and features
Z
event of an emergency, help will have to be
summoned by other means.
Have the system checked at the nearest author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the fol-
lowing service hotlines:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or
1-866-990-9007
Emergency call
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,
even if you have pressed the SOS button in an
emergency if:
R
you see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-
cle, e.g. if there is a fire after an accident
R
the vehicle is on a dangerous section of
road
R
the vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be
seen by other road users, particularly when
dark or in poor visibility conditions
There is a risk of an accident and injury.
Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-
lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.
Move to a safe location along with other vehi-
cle occupants. In such situations, secure the
vehicle in accordance with national regula-
tions, e. g. with a warning triangle.
General notes
Observe the notes on system activation
(
Y page 263).
An emergency call is dialed automatically if an
air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is trig-
gered. You cannot end an automatically trig-
gered emergency call yourself.
An emergency call can also be initiated man-
ually.
As soon as the emergency call has been initi-
ated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button
flashes. The Connecting Call
message
appears in the multifunction display.
The audio output is muted.
Once the connection has been made, the Call
Connected message appears in the multifunc-
tion display.
All important information on the emergency is
transmitted, for example:
R
current location of the vehicle (as determined
by the GPS system)
R
vehicle identification number
R
information on the severity of the accident
Shortly after the emergency call has been initi-
ated, a voice connection is automatically estab-
lished between the Customer Assistance Center
and the vehicle occupants.
R
If the vehicle occupants respond, the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
attempts to get more information on the
emergency.
R
If there is no response from the vehicle occu-
pants, an ambulance is immediately sent to
the vehicle.
If no voice connection can be established to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
the system has been unable to initiate an emer-
gency call.
This can occur, for example, if the relevant
mobile phone network is not available. The indi-
cator lamp in the SOS button flashes continu-
ously.
The Call Failed
message appears in the mul-
tifunction display and must be confirmed.
In this case, summon assistance by other
means.
Making an emergency call
X
To initiate an emergency call manually:
press cover : briefly to open.
X
Press and hold the SOS button for at least one
second ;.
The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes
until the emergency call is concluded.
264
Features
Stowage and features
X
Wait for a voice connection to the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Assistance Center.
X
After the emergency call, close cover :.
If the mobile phone network is unavailable,
mbrace will not be able to make the emergency
call. If you leave the vehicle immediately after
pressing the SOS button, you will not know
whether mbrace placed the emergency call. In
this case, always summon assistance by other
means.
Roadside Assistance button
X
To call Roadside Assistance: press Road-
side Assistance button :.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Cus-
tomer Assistance Center.
The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance
button : flashes while the call is active. The
Connecting Call
message appears in the
multifunction display. The audio output is
muted.
If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐
nected message appears in the multifunction
display.
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
R
current location of the vehicle
R
vehicle identification number
The multimedia system display indicates that a
call is active. During the call, you can change to
the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but-
ton on the multimedia system, for example.
Voice output is not available in this case.
A voice connection is established between the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
and the vehicle occupants.
From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
can ascertain the nature of the problem
(
Y page 268).
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz tech-
nician or makes arrangements for your vehicle
to be transported to the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
You may be charged for services such as repair
work and/or towing.
You can find more information in the separate
mbrace manual.
The system has not been able to initiate a Road-
side Assistance call, if:
R
the indicator lamp for Roadside Assistance
call button F is flashing continuously.
R
no voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center was estab-
lished.
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net-
work is not available, for example.
The Call Failed
message appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
X
To end a call: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
X
Press the corresponding multimedia system
button for ending a phone call.
MB Info call button
X
To call MB Info: press MB Info call button :.
This initiates a call to the Mercedes-Benz Cus-
tomer Assistance Center.
The indicator lamp in MB Info call button :
flashes while the connection is being made.
The Connecting Call
message appears in
Features
265
Stowage and features
Z
the multifunction display. The audio output is
muted.
If a connection can be made, the Call Con‐
nected message appears in the multifunction
display.
If a mobile phone network and GPS reception
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
R
current location of the vehicle
R
vehicle identification number
The multimedia system display indicates that a
call is active. During the call, you can change to
the navigation menu by pressing the NAVI but-
ton on COMAND, for example.
Voice output is not available in this case.
A voice connection is established between the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
and the vehicle occupants.
You receive information about operating your
vehicle, about the nearest authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center and about other prod-
ucts and services from Mercedes-Benz.
You can find further information on the mbrace
system under "Owners Online" at http://
www.mbusa.com.
The system has not been able to initiate an MB
Info call, if:
R
the indicator lamp in MB Info call button ï
is flashing continuously.
R
no voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center was estab-
lished.
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone net-
work is not available, for example.
The Call Failed
message appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
X
To end a call: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
X
Press the corresponding multimedia system
button for ending a phone call.
Call priority
When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside
Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergency call
can still be initiated. In this case, an emergency
call will take priority and override all other active
calls.
The indicator lamp of the respective button
flashes until the call is ended.
An emergency call can only be terminated by the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
All other calls can be ended by pressing:
R
the ~ button on the multifunction steering
wheel
R
the corresponding button on the multimedia
system to end the voice call
When a call is initiated, the audio system is
muted.
The mobile phone is no longer connected to the
multimedia system.
However, if you want to use your mobile phone,
do so only when the vehicle is stationary and in
a safe location.
Downloading destinations
Downloading destinations
Downloading destinations gives you access to a
database with over 15 million points of interest
(POIs). These can be downloaded on the navi-
gation system in your vehicle. If you know the
destination, the address can be downloaded.
Alternatively, you can obtain the location of
Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations
in the vicinity.
Furthermore, you can download routes with up
to four way points.
You are prompted to confirm route guidance to
the address entered.
X
SelectYes by turning 3 or sliding 1
the controller and confirm with 7.
The system calculates the route and subse-
quently starts the route guidance with the
address entered.
If you select No
the address can be stored in
the address book.
The destination download function is available
if:
R
the vehicle is equipped with a navigation sys-
tem.
R
the relevant mobile phone network is availa-
ble and data transfer is possible.
Route Assistance
This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Package
and cannot be purchased separately.
266
Features
Stowage and features
You can use the route assistance function even
if the vehicle is not equipped with a navigation
system.
Within the framework of this service, you receive
a professional and reliable form of navigation
support without having to leave your vehicle.
The customer service representative finds a
suitable route depending on your vehicle's cur-
rent position and the desired destination. You
will then be guided live through the current route
section.
Search & Send
General notes
To use "Search & Send", your vehicle must be
equipped with mbrace and a navigation system.
Additionally, an mbrace service subscription
must be completed.
"Search & Send" is a destination entry service. A
destination address which is found on Google
Maps
®
can be transferred via mbrace directly to
your vehicle's navigation system.
Specifying and sending the destination
address
X
Go to the website http://maps.google.com
and enter a destination address into the entry
field.
X
To send the destination address to the e-
mail address of your mbrace account:
click on the corresponding button on the web-
site.
Example:
If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then
'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address will
be sent to your vehicle.
X
When the "Send" dialog window appears:
Enter the e-mail address you specified when
setting up your mbrace account into the cor-
responding field.
X
Click "Send".
Information on specific commands such as
"Address entry" or "Send" can be found on the
website.
Calling up a transmitted destination
address
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 127).
The transmitted destination address is loaded
into the vehicle's navigation system.
A display message appears, asking whether
navigation should be started.
X
SelectYes by turning 3 or sliding 1
the controller and confirm with 7.
The system calculates the route and subse-
quently starts the route guidance with the
address entered.
If you select No
the address can be stored in
the address book.
If you have sent more than one destination
address, each individual destination must be
confirmed separately.
Destination addresses are loaded in the same
order as the order in which they were sent.
If you own multiple Mercedes-Benz vehicles with
mbrace and activated mbrace accounts:
If multiple vehicles are registered under the
same e-mail address, the destination will be
sent to all the vehicles.
Vehicle remote opening
You can use the vehicle remote opening if you
have unintentionally locked your vehicle and a
replacement SmartKey is not available.
The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Assistance Center.
The vehicle can be immediately opened
remotely within four days of the ignition being
turned off. After this time, the remote unlocking
may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After
30 days, the vehicle can no longer be opened
remotely.
The vehicle remote unlocking feature is availa-
ble if the relevant mobile phone network is avail-
able and a data connection is possible.
X
Contact the following service hotlines:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
or 1-866-990-9007
You will be asked for your password.
X
Return to your vehicle at the time agreed upon
with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assis-
tance Center.
Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened via:
R
the Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-
tion
R
the telephone application (e. g. for iPhone
®
,
Android)
To do this, you will need your identification num-
ber and password.
Features
267
Stowage and features
Z
Vehicle remote closing
The vehicle remote-closing feature can be used
when you have forgotten to lock the vehicle and
you are no longer nearby.
The vehicle can then be locked by the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Assistance Center.
The vehicle can be immediately remotely locked
within four days of the ignition being turned off.
After this time, remote closing may be delayed
by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehicle
can no longer be locked remotely.
The vehicle remote closing feature is available if
the relevant mobile phone network is available
and a data connection is possible.
X
Contact the following service hotlines:
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
or 1-866-990-9007
You will be asked for your password.
The next time you are inside the vehicle and you
switch on the ignition, the Doors Locked
Remotely message appears in the multifunction
display.
Alternatively, the vehicle can be locked via:
R
the Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-
tion
R
the telephone application (e.g. for iPhone
®
,
Android)
To do this, you will need your identification num-
ber and password.
Stolen vehicle recovery service
If your vehicle has been stolen:
X
Notify the police.
The police will issue a numbered incident
report.
X
This number will be forwarded to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
together with your PIN.
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center then tries to locate the system. The
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
contacts you and the local law enforcement
agency if the vehicle is located.
However, only the law enforcement agency is
informed of the location of the vehicle.
If the anti-theft alarm system is activated for
longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center is automatically
notified.
Vehicle Health Check
With the Vehicle Health Check, the Customer
Assistance Center can provide improved sup-
port for problems with your vehicle. During an
existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the
Customer Assistance Center.
The customer service representative can use
the received data to decide what kind of assis-
tance is required. You are then, for example,
guided to the nearest authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center or a recovery vehicle is called.
If vehicle data needs to be transferred during an
MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call, this is
initiated by the Customer Assistance Center.
The Roadside Assistance Connected
mes-
sage appears in the display. If the Vehicle Health
Check can be started, the Request
for Vehi‐
cle Diagnostics Received Start vehi‐
cle diagnostics? message appears in the
display.
X
Press the Yes button to confirm the message.
X
When the Vehicle Diagnostics Please
Start Ignition message appears: turn the
SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock
(
Y page 127).
X
If the Please follow the instructions
received by phone and move your vehi‐
cle to a safe position. message
appears: please follow the instructions
received by phone and move your vehicle to a
safe position.
The message in the display disappears.
The vehicle operating state check begins.
During this procedure, you will see the Vehi‐
cle Diagnostics Active message.
If you select Cancel
, the Vehicle Health
Check is canceled completely.
When the check is complete, the Sending
vehicle diagnostics data. (Voice con‐
nection may be interrupted during
data transfer) message appears. The vehicle
data can now be sent.
X
Press the OK button to confirm the message.
The voice connection with the Customer
Assistance Center is terminated.
The Vehicle Diagnostics: Transfer‐
ring Data... message appears.
The vehicle data is sent to the Customer
Assistance Center.
Depending on what the customer service rep-
resentative agreed with you, the voice connec-
268
Features
Stowage and features
tion is re-established after the transfer is com-
plete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a
later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or
phone.
Another function of the Vehicle Health Check is
the transfer of service data to the Customer
Assistance Center. If a service is due, the display
shows a message to this effect together with
information about any special offers at your
workshop.
This information can also be called up under
"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
Information on the data stored in the vehicle
(
Y page 30).
Information on Roadside Assistance
(
Y page 27).
Downloading routes
Downloading routes allows you to transfer and
save predefined routes in the navigation sys-
tem.
A route can be prepared and sent by either a
customer service representative or under "Own-
ers Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
Each route can include up to four way points.
Once a route has been received by the naviga-
tion system, you will see the External
desti‐
nation ICON_POI_Category Name_1 has
been saved to "Previous destina‐
tions". Would you like to start navi‐
gation? message on the multimedia system
display.
The route is saved.
X
To start route guidance: select Yes.
An overview of the route is shown in the dis-
play.
If you select No
, the saved route can be called
up later in the navigation menu.
X
Select Start.
Starting route guidance.
Downloaded and saved routes can be called up
again.
You can find further information in the separate
multimedia system operating instructions.
Speed alert
You can define the upper speed limit, which
must not be exceeded by the vehicle.
If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle,
a message will be sent to the Customer Assis-
tance Center. The Customer Assistance Center
then forwards this information to you.
You can select the way in which you receive this
information beforehand. Possible options
include text message, e-mail or an automated
call.
The data you receive contains the following
information:
R
the location where the speed limit was excee-
ded
R
the time at which the speed limit was excee-
ded
R
the selected speed limit which was exceeded
Geo fencing
Geo fencing allows you to select areas which the
vehicle should not enter or leave. You will be
informed if the vehicle crosses the boundaries
of the selected areas. You can select the way in
which you receive this information beforehand.
Possible options include text message, e-mail or
an automated call.
The area can be determined as either a circle or
a polygon with a maximum of ten corners. You
can specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Dif-
ferent settings are possible for each area.
These settings can be called up under "Owners
Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info call and
inform the customer service representative that
you wish to activate geo fencing.
Currently inactive areas can be activated by text
message.
Triggering the vehicle alarm
With this function, you can trigger the vehicle's
panic alarm via text message. An alarm sounds
and the exterior lighting flashes. Depending on
the setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten sec-
onds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off.
Garage door opener
General notes
The HomeLink
®
garage door opener integrated
in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up
to three different door and gate systems.
Features
269
Stowage and features
Z
Use the integrated garage door opener only on
garage doors that:
R
have safety stop and reverse features and
R
meet current U.S. federal safety standards
Once programed, the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the
function of the garage door system's remote
control. Please also read the operating instruc-
tions for the garage door system.
When programming a garage door opener, park
the vehicle outside the garage. Do not run the
engine while programming.
Certain garage door drives are incompatible
with the integrated garage door opener. If you
have difficulty programing the integrated garage
door opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Alternatively, you can call the following tele-
phone assistance services:
R
USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
R
Canada: Customer Service at
1-800-387-0100
R
HomeLink
®
hotline 1-800-355-3515 (free of
charge)
More information on HomeLink
®
and/or com-
patible products is also available online at
http://www.homelink.com.
Notes on the declaration of conformity
(
Y page 28).
USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4
Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When you operate or program the garage door
with the integrated garage door opener, per-
sons in the range of movement of the garage
door can become trapped or struck by the
garage door. There is a risk of injury.
When using the integrated garage door
opener, always make sure that nobody is
within the range of movement of the garage
door.
G
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
out sufficient ventilation.
Programming
Programming buttons
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
(
Y page 270).
Garage door remote control A is not included
with the integrated garage door opener.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 127).
X
Select one of buttons ; to ? to use to con-
trol the garage door drive.
X
To start programming mode: press and
hold one of buttons ; to ? on the integrated
garage door opener.
The garage door opener is now in program-
ming mode. After a short time, indicator
lamp : lights up yellow.
Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soon as
button ;, = or ? is stored for the first time.
If the selected button has already been pro-
grammed, indicator lamp : will only light up
yellow after ten seconds have elapsed.
X
Release button ;, = or ?. Indicator
lamp : flashes yellow.
X
To program the remote control: point
garage door remote control A towards but-
tons ; to ? on the rear-view mirror at a dis-
tance of 2 to 8 in (5 to 20 cm).
X
Press and hold button B on remote control
A until indicator lamp : lights up green.
When indicator lamp : lights up green: pro-
gramming is finished.
270
Features
Stowage and features
When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro-
gramming was successful. The next step is to
synchronize the rolling code (
Y page 271).
X
Release button B on remote control A for
the garage door drive system.
If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the
programing procedure for the corresponding
button on the rear-view mirror. When doing
so, vary the distance between remote control
A and the rear-view mirror.
The required distance between remote con-
trol A and the integrated garage door opener
depends on the garage door drive system.
Several attempts might be necessary. You
should test every position for at least
25 seconds before trying another position.
Synchronizing the rolling code
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
(
Y page 270).
If the garage door system uses a rolling code,
you will also have to synchronize the garage
door system with the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you will
need to use the programming button on the door
drive control panel. The programming button
may be located in different places depending on
the manufacturer. It is usually located on the
door drive unit on the garage ceiling.
Familiarize yourself with the garage door drive
operating instructions, e.g. under "Program-
ming additional remote controls", before carry-
ing out the following steps.
Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage
door or gate opener drive. Make sure that nei-
ther your vehicle nor any persons/objects are
present within the sweep of the door or gate.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 127).
X
Get out of the vehicle.
X
Press the programming button on the door
drive unit.
Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate
the next step.
X
Get into the vehicle.
X
Press previously programmed button ;, =
or ? on the integrated garage door opener
repeatedly and in quick succession until the
door closes.
The rolling code synchronization is then com-
plete.
Notes on programming the remote con-
trol
Canadian radio frequency laws require a "break"
(or interruption) of the transmission signals
after broadcast
ing for a few seconds. Therefore,
these signals may not last long enough for the
integrated garage door opener. The signal is not
recognized during programming. Comparable
with Canadian law, some U.S. garage door open-
ers also feature a "break".
Proceed as follows:
R
if you live in Canada
R
if you have difficulties programming the
garage door opener (regardless of where you
live) when using the programming steps
X
Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the
integrated garage door opener.
After a short time, indicator lamp : lights up
yellow.
X
Release the button.
Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.
X
Press button B of garage door remote con-
trol A for two seconds, then release it for two
seconds.
X
Press button B again for two seconds.
X
Repeat this sequence on button B of remote
control A until indicator lamp : lights up
green.
When indicator lamp : lights up green: pro-
gramming is finished.
When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro-
gramming was successful. The next step is to
synchronize the rolling code.
X
Release button B of remote control A of the
garage door drive.
If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the
programming process for the corresponding
button on the rear-view mirror. When doing
so, vary the distance between remote control
A and the rear-view mirror.
The required distance between remote con-
trol A and the integrated garage door opener
depends on the garage door drive system.
Several attempts might be necessary. You
should test every position for at least
25 seconds before trying another position.
Features
271
Stowage and features
Z
Problems when programming
If you are experiencing problems programing
the integrated garage door opener on the rear-
view mirror, take note of the following instruc-
tions:
R
Check the transmitter frequency used by
garage door drive remote control A and
whether it is supported. The transmitter fre-
quency can usually be found on the back of
the garage door drive remote control.
The integrated garage door opener is com-
patible with devices that have units which
operate in the frequency range of 280 to
433 MHz.
R
Replace the batteries in garage door remote
control A. This increases the likelihood that
garage door remote control A will transmit a
strong and precise signal to the integrated
garage door opener.
R
When programming, hold remote control A
at varying distances and angles from the but-
ton which you are programming. Try various
angles at a distance between 2and 12 inches
(5to 30 cm) or at the same angle but at varying
distances.
R
If another remote control is available for the
same garage door drive, repeat the same pro-
gramming steps with this remote control.
Before performing these steps, make sure
that new batteries have been installed in
garage door drive remote control A.
R
Note that some remote controls only transmit
for a limited amount of time (the indicator
lamp on the remote control goes out). Press
button B on remote control A again before
transmission ends.
R
Align the antenna cable of the garage door
opener unit. This can improve signal recep-
tion/transmission.
Opening/closing the garage door
After it has been programmed, the integrated
garage door opener performs the function of the
garage door system remote control. Please also
read the operating instructions for the garage
door system.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 127).
X
Press button ;, = or ? which you have
programmed to operate the garage door.
Garage door system with a fixed code: indi-
cator lamp : lights up green.
Garage door system with a rolling code: indi-
cator lamp : flashes green.
The transmitter will transmit a signal as long
as the button is pressed. The transmission is
halted after a maximum of ten seconds and
indicator lamp : lights up yellow.
X
Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary.
Clearing the memory
Make sure that you clear the memory of the
integrated garage door opener before selling the
vehicle.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 127).
X
Press and hold buttons ; and ?.
The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow
and then green.
X
Release buttons ; and ?.
The memory of the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.
Floormats
G
WARNING
Objects in the driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.
Make sure that all objects in the vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
272
Features
Stowage and features
X
Slide the relevant seat back.
X
To install: place the floormat in the footwell.
X
Press studs : onto retainers ;.
X
To remove: pull the floormat off retainers ;.
X
Remove the floormat.
Features
273
Stowage and features
Z
Engine compartment
Hood
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the hood is unlatched, it may open up when
the vehicle is in motion and block your view.
There is a risk of an accident.
Never unlatch the hood while driving. Before
every trip, ensure that the hood is locked.
G
WARNING
When opening and closing the hood, it may
suddenly fall into the closed position. There is
a risk of injury to persons within range of
movement of the hood.
Open and close the hood only when no one is
within its range of movement.
G
WARNING
Opening the hood when the engine is over-
heated or when there is a fire in the engine
compartment could expose you to hot gases
or other service products. There is a risk of
injury.
Let an overheated engine cool down before
opening the hood. If there is a fire in the
engine compartment, keep the hood closed
and contact the fire department.
G
WARNING
The engine compartment contains moving
components. Certain components, such as
the radiator fan, may continue to run or start
again suddenly when the ignition is off. There
is a risk of injury.
If you need to do any work inside the engine
compartment:
R
switch off the ignition
R
never reach into the area where there is a
risk of danger from moving components,
such as the fan rotation area
R
remove jewelry and watches
R
keep items of clothing and hair, for exam-
ple, away from moving parts
G
WARNING
The ignition system and the fuel injection sys-
tem work under high voltage. If you touch
components which are under voltage, you
could get an electric shock. There is a risk of
injury.
Never touch components of the ignition sys-
tem or fuel injection system when the ignition
is switched on.
Opening the hood
G
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
G
WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before opening the hood.
!
Make sure that the windshield wipers are
not folded away from the windshield. You
could otherwise damage the windshield wip-
ers or the hood.
274
Engine compartment
Maintenance and care
X
Make sure that the windshield wipers are
turned off.
X
Pull release lever : on the hood.
The hood is released.
X
Reach into the gap, pull hood catch handle ;
up and lift the hood.
If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in
(40 cm), the hood is opened and held open
automatically by the gas-filled strut.
Closing the hood
X
Lower the hood and let it fall from a height of
approximately 8 in (20 cm).
X
Check that the hood has engaged properly.
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not
properly engaged. Open it again and close it
with a little more force.
Engine oil
General notes
Depending on your driving style, the vehicle
consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per
600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may
be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if
you frequently drive at high engine speeds.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be
in a different location.
When checking the oil level:
R
park the vehicle on a level surface.
R
the engine should be switched off for approx-
imately five minutes if the engine is at normal
operating temperature.
R
if the engine is not at normal operating tem-
perature, e.g. if the engine was only started
briefly, wait about 30 minutes before carrying
out the measurement.
Checking the oil level using the oil dip-
stick
G
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
Example
X
Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide
tube.
X
Wipe off oil dipstick :.
X
Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube
to the stop, and take it out again.
If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX
mark ;, the oil level is correct.
X
If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or
below, add 1.0 l of engine oil.
Engine compartment
275
Maintenance and care
Z
Adding engine oil
G
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
G
WARNING
If engine oil comes into contact with hot com-
ponents in the engine compartment, it may
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to
the filler neck. Let the engine cool down and
thoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-
ponents before starting the engine.
H
Environmental note
When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If
oil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmful to
the environment.
!
Only use engine oils and oil filters that have
been approved for vehicles with a service sys-
tem. You can obtain a list of the engine oils
and oil filters tested and approved in accord-
ance with the Mercedes-Benz Specifications
for Service Products at any Mercedes-Benz
Service center.
Damage to the engine or exhaust system is
caused by the following:
R
using engine oils and oil filters that have not
been specifically approved for the service
system
R
replacing engine oil and oil filters after the
interval for replacement specified by the
service system has been exceeded
R
using engine oil additives.
!
Do not add too much oil. adding too much
engine oil can result in damage to the engine
or to the catalytic converter. Have excess
engine oil siphoned off.
Example
X
Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove it.
X
Add engine oil.
If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on
the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) of engine
oil.
X
Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn
clockwise.
Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.
X
Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick
(
Y page 275).
Further information on engine oil (Y page 333).
Additional service products
Checking coolant level
G
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
G
WARNING
The cooling system is pressurized, particularly
when the motor is warm. If you open the cap,
you could be scalded if hot coolant sprays out.
There is a risk of injury.
Let the engine cool down before you open the
cap. Wear gloves and eye protection. Slowly
open the cap to relieve pressure.
276
Engine compartment
Maintenance and care
X
Park the vehicle on a level surface.
Only check the coolant level when the vehicle
is on a level surface and the engine has cooled
down.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 127).
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press the
Start/Stop button twice (
Y page 127).
X
Check the coolant temperature display in the
instrument cluster.
The coolant temperature must be below
158 (70 †).
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 127).
X
Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter-clock-
wise to allow excess pressure to escape.
X
Turn cap : further counter-clockwise and
remove it.
If the coolant is at the level of marker bar =
in the filler neck when cold, there is enough
coolant in coolant expansion tank ;.
If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the filler neck
when warm, there is enough coolant in expan-
sion tank ;.
X
If necessary, add coolant that has been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X
Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as far as
it will go.
For further information on coolant, see
(
Y page 334).
Adding washer fluid to the windshield
washer system/headlamp cleaning
system
G
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
G
WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if
it comes into contact with hot engine compo-
nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of
fire and injury.
Make sure that no windshield washer con-
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
X
To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.
X
Add the premixed washer fluid.
X
To close: press cap : onto the filler neck
until it engages.
If the washer fluid level drops below the recom-
mended minimum of 1 liter, a message appears
in the multifunction display prompting you to
add washer fluid (
Y page 234).
Further information on windshield washer fluid/
antifreeze (
Y page 335).
Maintenance
ASSYST PLUS
Service messages
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
informs you of the next service due date.
Information on the type of service and service
intervals (see the separate Maintenance Book-
let).
Maintenance
277
Maintenance and care
Z
You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or at
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
i
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display
does not show any information on the engine
oil level. Observe the notes on the engine oil
level (
Y page 275).
The multifunction display shows a service mes-
sage for several seconds, e.g.:
R
Service A in .. days
R
Service A Due
R
Service A Exceeded by .. Days
Depending on the operating conditions of the
vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the
next service due date is displayed.
The letter A
or B, possibly in connection with a
number or another letter, indicates the type of
service. A
stands for a minor service and B for a
major service.
You can obtain further information from an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The ASSYST PLUS service interval display does
not take into account any periods of time during
which the battery is disconnected.
Maintaining the time-dependent service sched-
ule:
X
Note down the service due date displayed in
the multifunction display before disconnect-
ing the battery.
or
X
After reconnecting the battery, subtract the
battery disconnection periods from the ser-
vice date shown on the display.
Hiding a service message
X
Press the a or % button on the steering
wheel.
Displaying service messages
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Serv.
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select the
ASSYST
PLUS submenu and confirm by press-
ing the a button.
The service due date appears in the multi-
function display.
Information about Service
Resetting the ASSYST PLUS service inter-
val display
!
If the ASSYST PLUS service interval display
has been inadvertently reset, this setting can
be corrected at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Have service work carried out as described in
the Maintenance Booklet. This may otherwise
lead to increased wear and damage to the
major assemblies or the vehicle.
A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. an author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset the
ASSYST PLUS service interval display after the
service work has been carried out. You can also
obtain further information on maintenance
work, for example.
Special service requirements
The specified maintenance interval takes only
the normal operation of the vehicle into
account. Under arduous operating conditions or
increased load on the vehicle, maintenance
work must be carried out more frequently, for
example:
R
regular city driving with frequent intermediate
stops
R
if the vehicle is primarily used to travel short
distances
R
use in mountainous terrain or on poor road
surfaces
R
if the engine is often left idling for long periods
Under these or similar conditions, have, for
example, the air filter, engine oil and oil filter
replaced or changed more frequently. Under
arduous operating conditions, the tires must be
checked more often. Further information can be
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g.
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Driving abroad
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is
also available in other countries. You can obtain
further information from any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
278
Maintenance
Maintenance and care
Care
General notes
H
Environmental note
Dispose of empty packaging and cleaning
cloths in an environmentally responsible man-
ner.
!
For cleaning your vehicle, do not use any of
the following:
R
dry, rough or hard cloths
R
abrasive cleaning agents
R
solvents
R
cleaning agents containing solvents
Do not scrub.
Do not touch the surfaces or protective films
with hard objects, e.g. a ring or ice scraper.
You could otherwise scratch or damage the
surfaces and protective film.
!
Do not park the vehicle for an extended
period straight after cleaning it, particularly
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
should drive for a few minutes after cleaning.
Braking heats the brake discs and the brake
pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle
can then be parked.
Regular care of your vehicle is a condition for
retaining the quality in the long term.
Use care products and cleaning agents recom-
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Washing the vehicle and cleaning the
paintwork
Automatic car wash
G
WARNING
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
After the vehicle has been washed, brake
carefully while paying attention to the traffic
conditions until full braking power is restored.
!
If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function is
activated, the vehicle brakes automatically in
certain situations.
To prevent damage to the vehicle, deactivate
DISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function in
the following or other similar situations:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
!
Never clean your vehicle in a Touchless
Automatic Car Wash as these use special
cleaning agents. These cleaning agents can
damage the paintwork or plastic parts.
!
Make sure that:
R
the side windows and the sliding sunroof
are fully closed.
R
the ventilation/heating is switched off (the
OFF button has been pressed).
R
the windshield wiper switch is in position 0.
Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.
!
In car washes with a towing mechanism,
make sure that the automatic transmission is
in transmission position N, otherwise the
vehicle could be damaged.
R
Vehicles with a SmartKey:
Do not remove the SmartKey from the igni-
tion lock. Do not open the driver's door or
front-passenger door when
the en
gine is
switched off. Otherwise, the automatic
transmission selects park position P auto-
matically and locks the wheels. You can
prevent this by shifting the automatic trans-
mission to N beforehand.
R
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
Do not open the driver's door or front-
passenger door when the engine is
switched off. Otherwise, the automatic
transmission selects park position P auto-
matically and locks the wheels.
Observe the following to make sure that the
automatic transmission stays in position N:
X
Make sure the vehicle is stationary and the
ignition is switched off.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 127).
Use the SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop
button on vehicles with KEYLESS-GO.
X
Depress and hold the brake pedal.
X
Shift the automatic transmission to position
N.
Care
279
Maintenance and care
Z
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
Release the parking brake.
X
Switch off the ignition and leave the SmartKey
in the ignition lock.
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car
wash from the very start.
If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
cleaning it in an automatic car wash.
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax
from the windshield and the wiper blades. This
will prevent smears and reduce wiping noises
caused by residue on the windshield.
Washing by hand
In some countries, washing by hand is only
allowed at specially equipped washing bays.
Observe the legal requirements in each country.
X
Do not use hot water and do not wash the
vehicle in direct sunlight.
X
Use a soft sponge to clean.
X
Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car
shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X
Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a gen-
tle jet of water.
X
Do not point the water jet directly towards the
air inlet.
X
Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge
frequently.
X
Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry
thoroughly with a chamois.
X
Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paint-
work.
Carefully remove all deposits of road salt as
soon as possible when driving in winter.
Power washers
G
WARNING
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassis components. Compo-
nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-
edly. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassis components replaced imme-
diately.
!
Always maintain a distance of at least
11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and the
power washer nozzle. Information about the
correct distance is available from the equip-
ment manufacturer.
Move the power washer nozzle around when
cleaning your vehicle.
Do not aim directly at any of the following:
R
tires
R
door gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.
R
electrical components
R
battery
R
connectors
R
lights
R
seals
R
trim
R
ventilation slots
Damaged seals or electrical components can
lead to leaks or failures.
Cleaning the paintwork
!
Do not affix:
R
stickers
R
films
R
magnetic plates or similar items
to painted surfaces. You could otherwise
damage the paintwork.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by
corrosion and damage caused by inadequate
care cannot always be completely repaired. In
such cases, visit a qualified specialist workshop.
X
Remove dirt immediately, where possible,
while avoiding rubbing too hard.
X
Soak insect remains with insect remover and
rinse off the treated areas afterwards.
X
Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off
the treated areas afterwards.
X
Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils,
fuels and greases by rubbing gently with a
cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter
fluid.
X
Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
X
Use silicone remover to remove wax.
If water no longer forms "beads" on the paint
surface, use the paint care products recommen-
ded and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the
case approximately every three to five months,
280
Care
Maintenance and care
depending on the climate conditions and the
care product used.
If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if the
paint has become dull, the paint cleaner recom-
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz
should be used.
Do not use these care products in the sun or on
the hood while the hood is hot.
X
Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-
Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paint-
work quickly and provisionally.
Matte finish care
!
Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy
wheels. Polishing causes the finish to shine.
!
The following may cause the paint to
become shiny and thus reduce the matte
effect:
R
strong rubbing of the paintwork with
unsuitable materials
R
frequent use of automatic car washes
R
washing the vehicle in direct sunlight
!
Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing
products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax. These
products are only suitable for high-gloss sur-
faces. Their use on vehicles with matte finish
leads to considerable surface damage (shiny,
mottled areas).
Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
!
Do not use wash programs with a hot wax
treatment under any circumstances.
Observe these notes if your vehicle has a clear
matte finish. This will help you to avoid damage
to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment.
These notes also apply to light alloy wheels with
a clear matte finish.
i
The vehicle should preferably be washed by
hand using a soft sponge, car shampoo and
plenty of water.
i
Use only insect remover and car shampoo
from the range of recommended and
approved Mercedes-Benz care products.
Cleaning the vehicle parts
Cleaning the wheels
G
WARNING
The water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassis components. Compo-
nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-
edly. There is a risk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassis components replaced imme-
diately.
!
Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products
to remove brake dust. This could damage
wheel bolts and brake components.
!
Do not park the vehicle for an extended
period straight after cleaning it, particularly
after having cleaned the wheels with wheel
cleaner. Wheel cleaners could cause
increased corrosion of the brake discs and
brake pads/linings. For this reason, you
should drive for a few minutes after cleaning.
Braking heats the brake discs and the brake
pads/linings, thus drying them. The vehicle
can then be parked.
Cleaning the windows
G
WARNING
You could become trapped by the windshield
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
wiper blades.
!
Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,
solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-
vents to clean the inside of the windows. Do
not touch the insides of the windows with
hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There
is otherwise a risk of damaging the windows.
!
Clean the water drainage channels of the
windshield and the rear window at regular
intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and
pollen may under certain circumstances pre-
Care
281
Maintenance and care
Z
vent water from draining away. This can lead
to corrosion damage and damage to elec-
tronic components.
X
Clean the inside and outside of the windows
with a damp cloth and a cleaning product that
is recommended and approved by Mercedes-
Benz.
Cleaning wiper blades
G
WARNING
You could become trapped by the windshield
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk of
injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before cleaning the windshield or
wiper blades.
!
Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise, the
wiper blade could be damaged.
!
Do not clean wiper blades too often and do
not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graph-
ite coating could be damaged. This could
cause wiper noise.
!
Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
back. The windshield could be damaged if the
wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
X
Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the
windshield.
X
Carefully clean the wiper blades with a damp
cloth.
X
Fold the windshield wiper arms back again
before switching on the ignition.
Cleaning the exterior lighting
!
Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
which are suitable for plastic light lenses.
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
could scratch or damage the plastic light len-
ses.
X
Clean the plastic lenses of the exterior light-
ing using a wet sponge and a mild cleaning
agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or
cleaning cloths.
Mirror turn signals
!
Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
that are suitable for plastic lenses. Unsuitable
cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could
scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the
mirror turn signals.
X
Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turn sig-
nals in the exterior mirror housing using a wet
sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.
Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning
cloths.
Cleaning the sensors
!
If you clean the sensors with a power
washer, make sure that you keep a distance
of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle
and the power washer nozzle. Information
about the correct distance is available from
the equipment manufacturer.
X
Clean sensors : of the driving systems with
water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.
Cleaning the rear view camera
!
Do not clean the camera lens and the area
around the rear view camera with a power
washer.
282
Care
Maintenance and care
X
Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean cam-
era lens :.
Cleaning the 360° camera
!
Do not clean the camera lens and the area
around the 360° camera with a power
washer.360
X
Use clear water and a soft cloth to clean cam-
era lens :.
Cleaning the exhaust pipes
G
WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
become very hot. If you come into contact
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
yourself. There is a risk of injury.
Always be particularly careful around the
exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow
these components to cool down before touch-
ing them.
!
Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-
based cleaning agents, such as bathroom
cleaner or wheel cleaner.
Impurities combined with the effects of road grit
and corrosive environmental factors may cause
flash rust to form on the surface. You can
restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by
cleaning it regularly, especially in winter and
after washing.
X
Clean the exhaust pipe with a care product
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Interior care
Cleaning the display
!
For cleaning, do not use any of the following:
R
alcohol-based thinner or gasoline
R
abrasive cleaning agents
R
commercially-available household cleaning
agents
These may damage the display surface. Do
not put pressure on the display surface when
cleaning. This could lead to irreparable dam-
age to the display.
X
Before cleaning the display, make sure that it
is switched off and has cooled down.
X
Clean the display surface using a commer-
cially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD
display cleaner.
X
Dry the display surface using a dry microfiber
cloth.
Cleaning the plastic trim
G
WARNING
Care products and cleaning agents containing
solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to
become porous. As a result, plastic parts may
come loose in the event of air bag deploy-
ment. There is a risk of injury.
Do not use any care products and cleaning
agents to clean the cockpit.
!
Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces:
R
stickers
R
films
R
scented oil bottles or similar items
You can otherwise damage the plastic.
!
Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or
sunscreen to come into contact with the plas-
Care
283
Maintenance and care
Z
tic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of
the surfaces.
X
Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-free
cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
X
Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-
ucts recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
The surface may change color temporarily.
Wait until the surface is dry again.
Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or
selector lever
X
Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use
leather care agents that have been recom-
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele-
ments
!
Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents
such as tar remover, wheel cleaners, polishes
or waxes. There is otherwise a risk of damag-
ing the surface.
!
Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.
The trim pieces have a chrome look but are
mostly made of anodized aluminum and can
lose their shine if chrome polish is used. Use
a damp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning
the trim pieces.
If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very
dirty, you can use a chrome polish. If you are
unsure as to whether the trim pieces are
chrome-plated or not, consult an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a
damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.
X
Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaning
products recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning the seat covers
General notes
!
Do not use a microfiber cloth to clean covers
made out of real leather, artificial leather or
DINAMICA. If used often, these can damage
the cover.
i
Note that regular care is essential to ensure
that the appearance and comfort of the cov-
ers is retained over time.
Genuine leather seat covers
Leather is a natural product.
It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for
example:
R
differences in the texture
R
marks caused by growth and injury
R
slight nuances of color
These are characteristics of leather and not
material defects.
!
To retain the natural appearance of the
leather, observe the following cleaning
instructions:
R
Clean genuine leather covers carefully with
a damp cloth and then wipe the covers
down with a dry cloth.
R
Make sure that the leather does not
become soaked. It may otherwise become
rough and cracked.
R
Only use leather care agents that have
been tested and approved by Mercedes-
Benz. You can obtain these from a qualified
specialist workshop.
Seat covers of other materials
!
Observe the following when cleaning:
R
clean artificial leather covers with a cloth
moistened with a solution contai
ning 1%
detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).
R
clean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth
moistened with a solution containing 1%
detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub
carefully and always wipe entire seat sec-
tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave
the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results
depend on the type of dirt and how long it
has been there.
R
clean DINAMICA covers with a damp cloth.
Make sure that you wipe entire seat sec-
tions to avoid leaving visible lines.
Cleaning the seat belts
G
WARNING
Seat belts can become severely weakened if
bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat
belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of
an accident. This poses an increased risk of
injury or fatal injury.
Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
284
Care
Maintenance and care
!
Do not clean the seat belts using chemical
cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by
heating at temperatures above 176 ‡(80 †)
or in direct sunlight.
X
Use clean, lukewarm water and soap solution.
Cleaning the headliner and carpets
X
Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush or
dry shampoo.
X
Carpets: use the carpet and textile cleaning
agents recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Care
285
Maintenance and care
Z
Where will I find...?
Vehicle tool kit
General notes
The vehicle tool kit can be found in the stowage
well under the trunk floor (
Y page 256).
Vehicles with a "Minispare" emergency
spare wheel
:
Vehicle tool kit tray
;
Stowage well
=
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel
X
Open the trunk lid.
X
Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 256).
The vehicle tool kit contains:
R
Folding wheel chock
R
Fuse allocation chart
R
Jack
R
Alignment bolt
R
One pair of gloves
R
Lug wrench
R
Towing eye
i
Example: equipment and country-specific
variations possible.
Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit
:
Towing eye
;
Tire sealant filler bottle
=
Tire inflation compressor
?
Fuse allocation chart
X
Open the trunk lid.
X
Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 256).
i
Example: equipment and country-specific
variations possible.
Vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
:
Towing eye
;
One pair of gloves
=
Jack
?
Folding wheel chock
A
Alignment bolt
B
Sheet for faulty wheel
C
Tire inflation compressor
D
Lug wrench
E
Fuse allocation chart
X
Open the trunk lid.
X
Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 256).
286
Where will I find...?
Breakdown assistance
i
Example: equipment and country-specific
variations possible.
Vehicles with alloy wheels and hub caps
On vehicles with alloy wheels and hub caps, a
socket is also provided.
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
Your vehicle may be equipped with:
R
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat proper-
ties) (
Y page 287)
Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehi-
cles with MOExtended tires
R
a TIREFIT kit (Y page 286)
R
an emergency spare wheel (Y page 326)
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It
is therefore recommended that you additionally
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount
tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.
winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from
a qualified specialist workshop.
Information on changing and mounting wheels
(
Y page 320).
X
Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground, as far away as possible from
traffic.
X
Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(
Y page 146).
X
If possible, bring the front wheels into the
straight-ahead position.
X
Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that "nor-
mal" level is selected (
Y page 166).
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or, on vehicles with KEYLESSGO:
X
Open the driver's door.
The on-board electronics now have status 0.
This is the same as the SmartKey having been
removed.
X
Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 127).
X
Make sure that the passengers are not endan-
gered as they do so. Make sure that no one is
near the danger area while a wheel is being
changed. Anyone who is not directly assisting
in the wheel change should, for example,
stand behind the barrier.
X
Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention to traffic
conditions when doing so.
X
Close the driver's door.
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
properties)
General notes
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char-
acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi-
cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one
or more tires. The affected tire must not show
any clearly visible damage.
You can recognize MOExtended tires by the
MOExtended marking which appears on the
sidewall of the tire. You will find this marking
next to the tire size designation, the load-bear-
ing capacity and the speed index (
Y page 315).
MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc-
tion with an active tire pressure loss warning
system or with an active tire pressure monitor.
If a pressure loss warning message appears
in the multifunction display:
R
observe the instructions in the display mes-
sages (
Y page 230).
R
check the tire for damage.
R
if driving on, observe the following notes.
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is
approximately 50 miles (80 km) when the vehi-
cle is partially laden. When the vehicle is fully
laden it is approximately 19 miles (30 km).
In addition to the vehicle load, the driving dis-
tance possible depends upon:
R
vehicle speed
R
road condition
R
outside temperature
The driving distance p
ossible in run-flat mode
may be reduced by extreme driving conditions
or maneuvers, or it can be increased through a
moderate style of driving.
The driving distance possible in run-flat mode is
counted from the moment the tire pressure loss
warning appears in the multifunction display.
You must not exceed a maximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
Flat tire
287
Breakdown assistance
When replacing one or all tires, please observe
the following specifications for your vehicle's
tires:
R
size
R
the type and
R
the "MOExtended" mark
If a tire has gone flat and cannot be replaced
with a MOExtended tire, a standard tire may be
used as a temporary measure. Make sure that
you use the proper size and type (summer or
winter tire).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It
is therefore recommended that you additionally
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount
tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.
winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from
a qualified specialist workshop.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When driving in emergency mode, the driving
characteristics deteriorate, e.g. when corner-
ing, accelerating quickly and when braking.
There is a risk of an accident.
Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.
Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,
and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,
off-road). This applies in particular to a laden
vehicle.
Stop driving in emergency mode if:
R
you hear banging noises.
R
the vehicle starts to shake.
R
you see smoke and smell rubber.
R
ESP
®
is intervening constantly.
R
there are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.
After driving in emergency mode, have the
wheel rims checked at a qualified specialist
workshop with regard to their further use. The
defective tire must be replaced in every case.
TIREFIT kit
Important safety notes
TIREFIT is a tire sealant.
You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of up to
0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in the tire
tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tempera-
tures down to Ò4 (Ò20 †).
G
WARNING
In the following situations, the tire sealant is
unable to provide sufficient breakdown assis-
tance, as it is unable to seal the tire properly:
R
there are cuts or punctures in the tire larger
than those mentioned above.
R
the wheel rim is damaged.
R
you have driven at very low tire pressures or
on a flat tire.
There is a risk of an accident.
Do not drive the vehicle. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
The tire sealant is harmful and causes irrita-
tion. It must not come into contact with your
skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed. Do not
inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealant away
from children. There is a risk of injury.
If you come into contact with the tire sealant,
observe the following:
R
Rinse off the tire sealant from your skin
immediately with water.
R
If the tire sealant comes into contact with
your eyes, immediately rinse them thor-
oughly with clean water.
R
If tire sealant is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly and drink
plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,
and seek medical attention immediately.
R
Immediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with tire sealant.
R
If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
attention immediately.
288
Flat tire
Breakdown assistance
!
Do not operate the tire inflation compressor
for longer than eight minutes at a time without
a break. It may otherwise overheat.
The tire inflation compressor can be operated
again once it has cooled down.
Comply with the manufacturer’s safety instruc-
tions on the sticker on the tire inflation com-
pressor.
Using the TIREFIT kit
X
Do not remove any foreign objects which have
penetrated the tire, e.g. screws or nails.
X
Remove the tire sealant bottle, the accompa-
nying TIREFIT sticker and the tire inflation
compressor from the stowage well under-
neath the trunk floor (
Y page 286).
X
Affix part : of the TIREFIT sticker to the
instrument cluster within the driver's field of
vision.
X
Affix part ; of the TIREFIT sticker near the
valve on the wheel with the defective tire.
X
Pull connector ? with the cable and hose A
out of the tire inflation compressor housing.
X
Screw hose A onto flange B of tire sealant
bottle :.
X
Place tire sealant bottle : head downwards
into recess ; of the tire inflation compres-
sor.
X
Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty
tire.
X
Screw filler hose D onto valve C.
X
Insert connector ? into a 12 V socket
(
Y page 262) in your vehicle.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 127).
X
Press on and off switch = on the tire inflation
compressor to I.
The tire inflation compressor is switched on.
The tire is inflated.
First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The
pressure can briefly rise to approximately
500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the tire inflation com-
pressor during this phase.
X
Let the tire inflation compressor run for a
maximum of five minutes. The tire should then
have attained a pressure of at least 180 kPa
(1.8 bar/26 psi).
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pres-
sure reached" (
Y page 290).
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
not been attained after five minutes, see "Tire
pressure not reached" (
Y page 290).
If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affected
areas as quickly as possible. Use plain water if
possible.
If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, have
them cleaned with perchloroethylene at a dry
cleaner as soon as possible.
Flat tire
289
Breakdown assistance
Z
Tire pressure not reached
If a pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not
been attained after five minutes:
X
Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X
Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
Note that tire sealant may escape when you
unscrew the filler hose.
X
Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approx-
imately 30 ft (10 m).
X
Pump up the tire again.
After a maximum of five minutes the tire pres-
sure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/
26 psi).
G
WARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached
after the specified time, the tire is too badly
damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the
tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tire
pressure that is too low can significantly
impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-
acteristics. There is a risk of accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
Tire pressure reached
G
WARNING
A tire temporarily sealed with tire sealant
impairs the driving characteristics and is not
suitable for higher speeds. There is a risk of
accident.
You should therefore adapt your driving style
accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed
the specified maximum speed with a tire that
has been repaired using tire sealant.
The maximum speed for a tire sealed with tire
sealant is 50 mph (80 km/h). The upper part of
the TIREFIT sticker must be affixed to the instru-
ment cluster in the driver's field of vision.
!
After use, excess tire sealant may run out of
the filler hose. This could cause stains.
Therefore, place the tire sealant bottle with
filler hose in the plastic bag which is con-
tained in the TIREFIT kit.
H
Environmental note
Have the used tire sealant bottle disposed of
professionally, e.g. at a qualified specialist
workshop.
If a tire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
been attained after five minutes:
X
Switch off the tire inflation compressor.
X
Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
X
Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tire infla-
tion compressor.
X
Pull away immediately.
X
Stop after driving for approximately ten
minutes and check the tire pressure with the
tire inflation compressor.
The tire pressure must now be at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).
G
WARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached
after driving for a short period, the tire is too
badly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair
the tire in this instance. Damaged tires and a
tire pressure that is too low can significantly
impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-
acteristics. There is a risk of accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact a qualified
specialist workshop.
i
In cases such as the one mentioned above,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Cen-
ter. Or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
X
Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and
Loading Information placard on the driver's
side B-pillar or the tire pressure table in the
fuel filler flap for values.
X
To increase the tire pressure: switch on the
tire inflation compressor.
290
Flat tire
Breakdown assistance
X
To reduce the tire pressure: depress pres-
sure release button E next to pressure gauge
F.
X
When the tire pressure is correct, unscrew the
filler hose from the valve of the sealed tire.
X
Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve of the
sealed tire.
X
Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire infla-
tion compressor.
The filler hose remains attached to the tire
sealant bottle.
X
Drive to the nearest qualified specialist work-
shop and have the tire changed there.
X
Have the tire sealant bottle and the filler hose
replaced as soon as possible at a qualified
specialist workshop.
X
Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every
four years at a qualified specialist workshop.
Battery (vehicle)
Important safety notes
Special tools and expert knowledge are required
when working on the battery, e.g. removal and
installation. You should therefore have all work
involving the battery carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can lead, for example, to a short circuit and
thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can
lead to function restrictions applying to
safety-relevant systems, e.g the lighting sys-
tem, the ABS (anti-lock braking system) or the
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program). The oper-
ating safety of your vehicle may be restricted.
You could lose control of the vehicle, for
example:
R
when braking
R
in the event of abrupt steering maneuvers
and/or when the vehicle's speed is not
adapted to the road conditions
There is a risk of an accident.
In the event of a short circuit or a similar inci-
dent, contact a qualified specialist workshop
immediately. Do not drive any further. You
should have all work involving the battery car-
ried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
For further information about ABS (
Y page 64)
and ESP
®
(Y page 69).
G
WARNING
Electrostatic build-up can lead to the creation
of sparks, which could ignite the highly explo-
sive gases of a battery. There is a risk of an
explosion.
Before handling the battery, touch the vehicle
body to remove any existing electrostatic
build-up.
The highly flammable gas mixture forms when
charging the battery as well as when jump-start-
ing.
Always make sure that neither you nor the bat-
tery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of
electrostatic charge can be caused, for exam-
ple:
R
by wearing clothing made from synthetic
fibers
R
due to friction between clothing and seats
R
if you push or pull the battery across the car-
pet or other synthetic materials
R
if you wipe the battery with a cloth
G
WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produ-
ces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or
sparks are created, the hydrogen gas can
ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
Battery (vehicle)
291
Breakdown assistance
Z
R
Make sure that the positive terminal of a
connected battery does not come into con-
tact with vehicle parts.
R
Never place metal objects or tools on a bat-
tery.
R
It is important that you observe the descri-
bed order of the battery terminals when
connecting and disconnecting a battery.
R
When jump-starting, make sure that the
battery poles with identical polarity are
connected.
R
It is particularly important to observe the
described order when connecting and dis-
connecting the jumper cables.
R
Never connect or disconnect the battery
terminals while the engine is running.
G
WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
the battery. Keep children away from batter-
ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with
plenty of clean water and seek medical atten-
tion.
H
Environmental note
Batteries contain dangerous
substances. It is against the
law to dispose of them with
the household rubbish. They
must be collected separately
and recycled to protect the
environment.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentally friendly
manner. Take discharged
batteries to a qualified spe-
cialist workshop or a special
collection point for used bat-
teries.
!
Have the battery checked regularly at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Observe the service intervals in the Mainte-
nance Booklet or contact a qualified specialist
workshop for more information.
!
Always have work on batteries carried out at
a qualified specialist workshop. Should it, in
exceptional circumstances, be absolutely
necessary to disconnect the 12-volt battery
yourself, observe the following:
R
secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
away.
R
switch off the ignition.
R
always disconnect the negative terminal
clamp first, followed by the positive termi-
nal clamp.
After the battery has been disconnected, the
transmission is locked in position P.
After the work has been done, install the bat-
tery and replace the cover of the positive ter-
minal clamp firmly.
Comply with safety precautions and take pro-
tective measures when handling batteries.
Risk of explosion.
Fire, open flames and smoking are
prohibited when handling the bat-
tery. Avoid creating sparks.
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact
with skin, eyes or clothing.
Wear suitable protective clothing,
especially gloves, apron and face-
guard.
Rinse any acid spills immediately
with clear water. Contact a physician
if necessary.
Wear eye protection.
Keep children away.
Observe this Operator's Manual.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use batteries which have
been tested and approved for your vehicle by
292
Battery (vehicle)
Breakdown assistance
Mercedes-Benz. These batteries provide
increased impact protection to prevent vehicle
occupants from suffering acid burns should the
battery be damaged in the event of an accident.
In order for the battery to achieve the maximum
possible service life, it must always be suffi-
ciently charged.
Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may
discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle.
In this case, have the battery disconnected at a
qualified specialist workshop. You can also
charge the battery with a charger recommended
by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified special-
ist workshop for further information.
Have the battery condition of charge checked
more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for
short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a
lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialist
workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle
parked for a long period of time.
Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle
and do not require any electrical consumers.
The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus
conserving battery power.
If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. if
you reconnect the battery, you will have to:
R
set the clock. Information on setting the clock
can be found in the Digital Operator's Manual
On vehicles with a multimedia system, the
time is set automatically.
R
reset the function for folding the exterior mir-
rors in/out automatically, by folding the mir-
rors out once (
Y page 104)
Charging the battery
G
WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive
gases can escape from the battery. There is a
risk of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
ventilation while charging and jump-starting.
Do not lean over a battery.
G
WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
the battery. Keep children away from batter-
ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with
plenty of clean water and seek medical atten-
tion.
G
WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at tempera-
tures below freezing point. When jump-start-
ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases
can escape from the battery. There is a risk of
an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
charging it or jump-starting.
!
Only use battery chargers with a maximum
charging voltage of 14.8 V.
!
Only charge the battery using the jump-
starting connection point.
The jump-starting connection point is in the
engine compartment (
Y page 294).
X
Open the hood.
X
Connect the battery charger to the positive
terminal and ground point in the same order
as when connecting the donor battery in the
jump-starting procedure (
Y page 294).
If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at
low temperatures, it is very likely that the dis-
charged battery has frozen. In this case, you
may neither charge the battery nor jump-start
the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out bat-
tery may be shorter. The starting characteristics
may be impaired, especially at low tempera-
tures. Have the thawed-out battery checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Never charge a battery still installed in the vehi-
cle unless a battery charger unit approved by
Mercedes-Benz is being used . A battery charger
unit specially adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehi-
cles and tested and approved by Mercedes-
Benz is available as an accessory. It permits the
charging of the battery in its installed position.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for further information and availability. Read the
battery charger's operating instructions before
charging the battery.
Battery (vehicle)
293
Breakdown assistance
Z
Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point in the engine com-
partment, consisting of a positive terminal and a ground point.
G
WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the
battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of
clean water and seek medical attention.
G
WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk
of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-
tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.
G
WARNING
During the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparks
are created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.
R
Make sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with
vehicle parts.
R
Never place metal objects or tools on a battery.
R
It is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting
and disconnecting a battery.
R
When jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.
R
It is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting
the jumper cables.
R
Never connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.
G
WARNING
A discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the
vehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
!
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be
damaged by the non-combusted fuel.
If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do not light up,
it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neither charge the
battery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The
starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out
battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
294
Jump-starting
Breakdown assistance
Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged, the
engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumper cables.
Observe the following points:
R
The battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible, jump-
start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.
R
You may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.
R
Only jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.
R
Only use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.
R
If the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected for
a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.
R
Make sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:
R
the jumper cables are not damaged.
R
when the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal clamp
do not come into contact with other metal sections.
R
the jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engine is
running, such a
s the V-belt pulley or the fan.
X
Apply the parking brake firmly.
X
Shift the transmission to position P.
X
Make sure that the ignition is switched off. All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster must be
off. When using the SmartKey, turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it
(
Y page 127).
X
Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.
X
Open the hood.
Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting
device.
X
Slide cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow.
X
Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal = of donor battery B using the
jumper cable, always begin with positive terminal ; on your own vehicle first.
X
Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.
Jump-starting
295
Breakdown assistance
Z
X
Connect negative terminal ? of donor battery B to ground point A of your vehicle using the
jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicle B first.
X
Start the engine.
X
Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.
X
First, remove the jumper cables from ground point A and negative terminal ?, then from pos-
itive clamp ; and positive terminal =. Begin each time at the contacts on your own vehicle first.
X
Close cover : of positive clamp ; after removing the jumper cables.
X
Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.
i
Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at any qualified
specialist workshop.
Towing and tow-starting
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Functions relevant to safety are restricted or
no longer available if:
R
the engine is not running.
R
the brake system or the power steering is
malfunctioning.
R
there is a malfunction in the voltage supply
or the vehicle's electrical system.
If your vehicle is being towed, much more
force may be necessary to steer or brake.
There is a risk of an accident.
In such cases, use a tow bar. Before towing,
make sure that the steering moves freely.
G
WARNING
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle
and its weight is greater than the permissible
gross weight of your vehicle, the:
R
the towing eye could detach itself
R
the vehicle/trailer combination could roll-
over.
There is a risk of an accident.
When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,
its weight should not be greater than the per-
missible gross weight of your vehicle.
Details on the permissible gross vehicle weight
of your vehicle can be found on the vehicle iden-
tification plate (
Y page 330).
!
When COLLISION PREVENTION ASSIST
PLUS, DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD function
is activated, the vehicle brakes automatically
in certain situations.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
these systems in the following or similar sit-
uations:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
!
Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at the
towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle could be
damaged.
!
Do not use the towing eye for recovery, this
could damage the vehicle. If in doubt, recover
the vehicle with a crane.
!
When towing, pull away slowly and
smoothly. If the tractive power is too high, the
vehicles could be damaged.
!
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. This
could damage the vehicle.
!
When towing vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,
use the key instead of the Start/Stop button.
Otherwise, the automatic transmission may
shift to position P when the driver's or front-
passenger door are opened, which could lead
to damage to the transmission.
!
The vehicle can be towed a maximum of
30 miles (50km). The towing speed of 30 mph
(50 km/h) must not be exceeded.
If the vehicle has to be towed more than
30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must be
raised and transported.
296
Towing and tow-starting
Breakdown assistance
!
If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, its
weight must not exceed the maximum per-
missible gross vehicle weight of your vehicle.
It is better to have the vehicle transported than
to have it towed away.
If the vehicle has suffered transmission damage,
have it transported on a transporter or trailer.
The automatic transmission must be in position
N when the vehicle is being towed.
The battery must be connected and charged.
Otherwise, you:
R
cannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock
R
cannot shift the automatic transmission to
position N
In the event of damage to the electrical sys-
tem
If the battery is defective, the automatic trans-
mission will be locked in position P. To shift the
automatic transmission to position N, you must
provide power to the vehicle's electrical system
in the same way as when jump-starting
(
Y page 294).
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or
trailer.
Disarm the automatic locking feature before the
vehicle is towed (
Y page 82). You could other-
wise be locked out when pushing or towing the
vehicle.
Installing/removing the towing eye
Installing the towing eye
G
WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe may be very hot. There is
a risk of burns when removing the rear cover.
Do not touch the exhaust pipe. Take particular
care when removing the rear cover.
All vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
The mountings for the removable towing eyes
are located in the bumpers. They are at the front
and at the rear, behind the covers.
X
Remove the towing eye from the vehicle tool
kit (
Y page 286).
X
Pull cover : out of the bumper in the direc-
tion of the arrow by inserting your fingers into
the recess.
X
Press the mark on cover ; inwards in the
direction of the arrow.
X
Remove cover ; from the opening.
X
Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it
will go and tighten it.
Towing and tow-starting
297
Breakdown assistance
Z
Removing the towing eye
X
Unscrew and remove the towing eye.
X
Position cover : on top of the bumper and
press it in at the bottom until it engages.
X
Attach cover ; to the bumper and press until
it engages.
X
Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.
Towing a vehicle with both axles on
the ground
It is important that you observe the safety
instructions when towing away your vehicle
(
Y page 296).
The automatic transmission automatically shifts
to position P when you open the driver's or front-
passenger door or when you remove the Smart-
Key from the ignition lock. In order to ensure
that the automatic transmission stays in posi-
tion N when towing the vehicle, you must
observe the following points:
X
Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use the Smart-
Key instead of the Start/Stop button
(
Y page 128).
X
Depress and hold the brake pedal.
X
Shift the automatic transmission to position
N.
X
Release the brake pedal.
X
Release the parking brake.
X
Switch on the hazard warning lamps
(
Y page 109).
X
Leave the SmartKey in position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
In order to signal a change of direction when
towing the vehicle with the hazard warning
lamps switched on, use the combination switch
as usual. In this case, only the indicator lamps
for the direction of travel flash. After resetting
the combination switch, the hazard warning
lamp starts flashing again.
Towing the vehicle with the rear axle
raised
!
Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
with either the front or the rear axle raised, as
doing so will damage the transmission.
!
Vehicles with automatic transmission must
not be towed with the rear axle raised. The
vehicle/trailer combination may otherwise
swerve or even roll over.
Transporting the vehicle
4MATIC vehicles/vehicles with auto-
matic transmission
!
When the vehicle is loaded for transport, the
front and rear axles must be stationary and on
the same transportation vehicle. Positioning
over the connection point of the transport
vehicle is not permitted. The drive train may
otherwise be damaged.
All vehicles
!
You may only secure the vehicle by the
wheels, not by parts of the vehicle such as
axle or steering components. Otherwise, the
vehicle could be damaged.
The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicle
onto a trailer or transporter for transporting pur-
poses.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
X
Shift the automatic transmission to position
N.
298
Towing and tow-starting
Breakdown assistance
As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:
X
Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by
applying the parking brake.
X
Shift the automatic transmission to posi-
tion P.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition
lock and remove it.
X
Secure the vehicle.
Notes on 4MATIC vehicles
!
Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towed
with either the front or the rear axle raised, as
doing so will damage the transmission.
If the vehicle has transmission damage or dam-
age to the front or rear axle, have it transported
on a transporter or trailer.
In the event of damage to the electrical sys-
tem
If the battery is defective, the automatic trans-
mission will be locked in position P. To shift the
automatic transmission to position N, you must
provide power to the vehicle's electrical system
in the same way as when jump-starting
(
Y page 294).
Have the vehicle transported on a transporter or
trailer.
Tow-starting (emergency engine
starting)
!
Vehicles with automatic transmission must
not be started by tow-starting. This could oth-
erwise damage the transmission.
i
You can find information on "Jump-starting"
under (
Y page 294).
Fuses
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if
you replace it with a fuse with a higher amper-
age, the electric cables could be overloaded.
This could result in a fire. There is a risk of an
accident and injury.
Always replace faulty fuses with the specified
new fuses having the correct amperage.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the
same rating, which you can recognize by the
color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the
fuse allocation chart.
The fuse allocation chart is located in the vehicle
tool kit in the stowage compartment under the
trunk floor (
Y page 286).
If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have the
cause traced and rectified at a qualified special-
ist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
!
Only use fuses that have been approved for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the
correct fuse rating for the system concerned.
Otherwise, components or systems could be
damaged.
!
Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
!
When closing the cover, make sure that it is
lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seep-
ing in or dirt could otherwise impair the oper-
ation of the fuses.
The fuses in your vehicle serve to close down
faulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all the compo-
nents on the circuit and their functions stop
operating.
Before changing a fuse
Pay attention to the important safety notes
(
Y page 299).
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Switch off all electrical consumers.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(
Y page 146).
X
Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or, on vehicles with KEYLESSGO:
X
Open the driver's door.
The on-board electronics now have status 0.
This is the same as the SmartKey having been
removed.
X
Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 127).
All indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
must be off.
Fuses
299
Breakdown assistance
Z
The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:
R
Fuse box in the engine compartment on the
left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in
the direction of travel
R
Fuse box in the trunk on the right-hand side of
the vehicle, when viewed in the direction of
travel
Fuse box in the engine compartment
Pay attention to the important safety notes
(
Y page 299).
G
WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.
Always switch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before opening the hood.
X
Make sure that the windshield wipers are
turned off.
X
Open the hood (Y page 274).
X
Use a dry cloth to remove any moisture from
the fuse box.
X
To open: take lines : out of the guides.
X
Move lines : to one side.
X
Open retaining clamps ;.
X
Remove the fuse box cover forwards.
X
To close: check whether the seal is lying cor-
rectly in the cover.
X
Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse box into
the retainer.
X
Fold down the cover and close clamps ;.
X
Secure lines : in the guides.
X
Close the hood.
Fuse box in the trunk
Pay attention to the important safety notes
(
Y page 299).
X
Open the trunk lid.
X
To open: release cover : at the top right and
left-hand sides with a flat object.
X
Open cover : downwards in the direction of
the arrow.
300
Fuses
Breakdown assistance
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,
the wheel brakes or suspension components
may be damaged. There is a risk of an acci-
dent.
Always replace wheels and tires with those
that fulfill the specifications of the original
part.
When replacing wheels, make sure to use the
correct:
R
designation
R
model
When replacing tires, make sure to use the
correct:
R
designation
R
manufacturer
R
model
G
WARNING
A flat tire severely impairs the driving, steer-
ing and braking characteristics of the vehicle.
There is a risk of accident.
Tires without run-flat characteristics:
R
do not drive with a flat tire.
R
immediately replace the flat tire with your
emergency spare wheel or spare wheel, or
consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Tires with run-flat characteristics:
R
pay attention to the information and warn-
ing notices on MOExtended tires (tires with
run-flat characteristics).
Accessories that are not approved for your vehi-
cle by Mercedes-Benz or are not being used cor-
rectly can impair the operating safety.
Before purchasing and using non-approved
accessories, visit a qualified specialist work-
shop and ask about:
R
suitability
R
legal stipulations
R
factory recommendations
Further information regarding wheels and tires
can be found under "Wheel/tire combinations"
(
Y page 325).
You can ask for information regarding permitted
wheel-tire combinations at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Information on tire pressure can be found:
R
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
(
Y page 311)
R
in the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
(
Y page 144)
R
under "Tire pressure" (Y page 304)
Operation
Information on driving
Check the tire pressure when the vehicle is
heavily laden and adjust prior to a trip.
While driving, pay attention to vibrations, noises
and unusual handling characteristics, e.g. pull-
ing to one side. This may indicate that the
wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspect that
a tire is defective, reduce your speed immedi-
ately. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible to
check the wheels and tires for damage. Hidden
tire damage could also be causing the unusual
handling characteristics. If you find no signs of
damage, have the tires and wheels checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
When parking your vehicle, make sure that the
tires do not get deformed by the curb or other
obstacles. If they cannot be avoided, drive over
obstacles such as curbs slowly and at an obtuse
angle. Otherwise, you may damage the wheels
or tires.
Regular checking of wheels and tires
G
WARNING
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-
sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
and replace any damaged tires immediately.
Operation
301
Wheels and tires
Z
Check wheels and tires for damage at least once
a month. Check wheels and tires after driving
off-road or on rough roads. Damaged wheels
can cause a loss of tire pressure. Pay particular
attention to damage such as:
R
cuts in the tires
R
punctures
R
tears in the tires
R
bulges on tires
R
deformation or severe corrosion on wheels
Regularly check the tire tread depth and the
condition of the tread across the whole width of
the tire (
Y page 302). If necessary, turn the
front wheels to full lock in order to inspect the
inner side of the tire surface.
All wheels must have a valve cap to protect the
valve against dirt and moisture. Do not mount
anything onto the valve other than the standard
valve cap or other valve caps approved by
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. Do not use any
other valve caps or systems, e.g. tire pressure
monitoring systems.
Regularly check the pressure of all the tires par-
ticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tire pres-
sure as necessary (
Y page 304).
Observe the notes on the emergency spare
wheel (
Y page 326).
The service life of tires depends, among other
things, on the following factors:
R
driving style
R
tire pressure
R
distance covered
Notes on tire tread
G
WARNING
Insufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.
The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.
This means that on wet road surfaces, the risk
of hydroplaning increases, in particular where
speed is not adapted to suit the driving con-
ditions. There is a risk of accident.
If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tires
may exhibit different levels of wear at differ-
ent locations on the tire tread. Thus, you
should regularly check the tread depth and
the condition of the tread across the entire
width of all tires.
Minimum tire tread depth for:
R
Summer tires: â in (3 mm)
R
M+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
For safety reasons, replace the tires before
the legally prescribed limit for the minimum
tire tread depth is reached.
Marking : shows where the bar indicator
(arrow) for tread wear is integrated into the tire
tread.
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by law.
Six indicators are positioned on the tire tread.
They are visible once a tread depth of approx-
imately á in (1.6 mm) has been reached. If this
is the case, the tire is so worn that it must be
replaced.
Selecting, mounting and replacing
tires
R
Only mount tires and wheels of the same type
and make.
Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-
ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.
Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with
run-flat characteristics" section (
Y page 287).
R
Only mount tires of the correct size onto the
wheels.
R
Break in new tires at moderate speeds for the
first 60 miles(100 km). They only reach their
full performance after this distance.
R
Do not drive with tires which have too little
tread depth, as this significantly reduces the
traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).
R
Replace the tires after six years at the latest,
regardless of wear.
Observe the notes on the emergency spare
wheel (
Y page 326).
302
Operation
Wheels and tires
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
properties)
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char-
acteristics), you can continue to drive your vehi-
cle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one
or more tires.
MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc-
tion with an active tire pressure loss warning
system or with an active tire pressure monitor
and on wheels specifically tested by Mercedes-
Benz.
Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a
flat tire (
Y page 287).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It
is therefore recommended that you additionally
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount
tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.
winter tires. A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from
a qualified specialist workshop.
Winter operation
General notes
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at a qualified
specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"
section (
Y page 320).
Driving with summer tires
At temperatures below 45 (+7 †), summer
tires lose elasticity and therefore traction and
braking power. Change the tires on your vehicle
to M+S tires. Using summer tires at very cold
temperatures could cause cracks to form,
thereby damaging the tires permanently.
Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibility for
this type of damage.
G
WARNING
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation pres-
sure loss. As a result, you could lose control of
your vehicle. There is a risk of accident.
Check the tires regularly for signs of damage
and replace any damaged tires immediately.
M+S tires
G
WARNING
M+S tires with a tire tread depth of less than
ã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winter
and do not provide sufficient traction. There is
a risk of an accident.
M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ã in
(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
At temperatures below 45 ‡(+7 †), use winter
tires or all-season tires. Both types of tire are
identified by the M+S marking.
Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake
symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide
the best possible grip in wintry road conditions.
Only these tires will allow driving safety systems
such as ABS and ESP
®
to function optimally in
winter. These tires have been developed specif-
ically for driving in snow.
Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all
wheels to maintain safe handling characteris-
tics.
Always observe the maximum permissible
speed specified for the M+S tires you have
mounted.
When you have mounted the M+S tires:
X
Check the tire pressures (Y page 307).
X
Vehicles for Canada: restart the tire pres-
sure loss warning system (
Y page 308).
X
Restart the tire pressure monitor
(
Y page 311).
Information about driving with an emergency
spare wheel (
Y page 326).
Snow chains
G
WARNING
If snow chains are installed to the front
wheels, they may drag against the vehicle
body or chassis components. This could
cause damage to the vehicle or the tires.
There is a risk of an accident.
Winter operation
303
Wheels and tires
Z
To avoid hazardous situations:
R
never install snow chains to the front
wheels
R
always install snow chains in pairs to the
rear wheels.
!
On vehicles with AIRMATIC, you must drive
at raised vehicle level if snow chains have
been mounted. The vehicle may otherwise be
damaged.
!
On some tire sizes there is not enough space
for snow chains. To avoid damage to the vehi-
cle or tires, observe the "Wheel and tire com-
binations" section under "Tires and wheels".
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use snow chains that have
been specially approved for your vehicle by
Mercedes-Benz, or are of a corresponding
standard of quality. For more information, con-
tact a qualified specialist workshop.
If you intend to mount snow chains, please bear
the following points in mind:
R
Snow chains may not be mounted on all
wheel/tire combinations. Permissible wheel-
tire combinations (
Y page 325).
R
Only use snow chains when driving on roads
completely covered by snow. Remove the
snow chains as soon as possible when you
come to a road that is not snow-covered.
R
Local regulations may restrict the use of snow
chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if
you wish to mount snow chains.
R
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 31 mph (50 km/h).
i
You may wish to deactivate ESP
®
when pull-
ing away with snow chains installed:
R
All vehicles (except MercedesAMG vehi-
cles) (
Y page 70)
R
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: (Y page 71)
You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in a
controlled manner, achieving an increased
driving force (cutting action).
Information about driving with an emergency
spare wheel (
Y page 326).
Tire pressure
Tire pressure specifications
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
following risks:
R
the tires may burst, especially as the load
and vehicle speed increase.
R
the tires may wear excessively and/or
unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
traction.
R
the driving characteristics, as well as steer-
ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.
There is a risk of an accident.
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures
and check the pressure of all the tires includ-
ing the spare wheel:
R
monthly, at least
R
if the load changes
R
before beginning a long journey
R
under different operating conditions, e.g.
off-road driving
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
The data on the Tire and Loading Information
placard and tire pressure table shown here are
examples. Tire pressure specifications are vehi-
cle-specific and may deviate from the data
shown here. The tire pressure specifications
that are valid for your vehicle can be found on
the Tire and Loading Information placard and
tire pressure table on the vehicle.
General notes
The recommended tire pressures for the tires
mounted at the factory can be found on the
labels described here.
Operation with an emergency spare wheel:
information on operation with an emergency
spare wheel can be found in the general notes in
the "Emergency spare wheel" section
(
Y page 326).
Further information on tire pressures can be
obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.
304
Tire pressure
Wheels and tires
Tire and Loading Information placard
:
Recommended tire pressures
The Tire and Loading Information placard is on
the B-pillar on the driver's side (
Y page 311).
The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
tains the recommended tire pressures for cold
tires. The recommended tire pressures are valid
for the maximum permissible load and up to the
maximum permissible vehicle speed.
Tire pressure table
The tire pressure table is on the inside of the fuel
filler flap. It shows the tire pressure for all tires
permitted at the factory for this vehicle; see
illustration (example).
The tire pressure table contains the recommen-
ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-
ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-
ditions.
If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the fol-
lowing tire pressure information is only valid for
that tire size; see illustration (example).
The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully
laden" are defined in the table for different num-
bers of occupants and amounts of luggage. The
actual number of seats may differ.
Some tire pressure tables show only the rim
diameters instead of the full tire size, e.g. R18.
Rim diameter is part of the tire size and can be
found on the tire sidewall (
Y page 315).
If the tire pressures have been set to the lower
values for lighter loads and/or lower road
speeds, the pressures should be reset to the
higher values:
R
if you want to drive with an increased load
and/or
R
if you want to drive at higher road speeds
The tire pressures for increased loads and/or
higher road speeds, shown in the tire pressure
table, may have a negative effect on driving
comfort.
If the tire pressure is not set correctly, this can
lead to an excessive build up of heat and a sud-
den loss of pressure.
For more information, contact a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Tire pressure
305
Wheels and tires
Z
Important notes on tire pressure
G
WARNING
If the tire pressure drops repeatedly, the
wheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tire
pressure that is too low may result in a tire
blow-out. There is a risk of an accident.
R
Check the tire for foreign objects.
R
Check whether the wheel is losing air or the
valve is leaking.
If you are unable to rectify the damage, con-
tact a qualified specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, the tire valves may be overloaded and
malfunction, which can cause tire pressure
loss. Due to their design, retrofitted tire pres-
sure monitors keep the tire valve open. This
can also result in tire pressure loss. There is a
risk of an accident.
Only screw the standard valve cap or other
valve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz for
your vehicle onto the tire valve.
Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tire
pressure. The outer appearance of a tire does
not permit any reliable conclusion about the tire
pressure. On vehicles equipped with the elec-
tronic tire pressure monitor, the tire pressure
can be checked in the on-board computer.
The tire temperature and pressure increase
when the vehicle is in motion. This is dependent
on the driving speed and the load.
Therefore, you should only correct tire pres-
sures when the tires are cold.
The tires are cold:
R
if the vehicle has been parked with the tires
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours
and
R
if the vehicle has not been driven further than
1 mile (1.6 km)
The tire temperature changes depending on the
outside temperature, the vehicle speed and the
tire l
oad. If the tire temperature changes by
18 (10 †), the tire pressure changes by
approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take
this into account when checking the pressure of
warm tires. Only correct the tire pressure if it is
too low for the current operating conditions. If
you check the tire pressure when the tires are
warm, the resulting value will be higher than if
the tires were cold. This is normal. Do not
reduce the tire pressure to the value specified
for cold tires. The tire pressure would otherwise
be too low.
Observe the recommended tire pressures for
cold tires:
R
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
R
in the tire pressure table on the fuel filler flap
(
Y page 144)
Underinflated or overinflated tires
Underinflated tires
G
WARNING
Tires with pressure that is too low can over-
heat and burst as a consequence. In addition,
they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-
ular wear, which can severely impair the brak-
ing properties and the driving characteristics.
There is a risk of an accident.
Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all the
tires, including the spare wheel.
Underinflated tires may:
R
overheat, leading to tire defects
R
adversely affect handling
R
wear excessively and/or unevenly
R
have an adverse effect on fuel consumption
Overinflated tires
G
WARNING
Tires with excessively high pressure can burst
because they are damaged more easily by
road debris, potholes etc. In addition, they
also suffer from irregular wear, which can
severely impair the braking properties and the
driving characteristics. There is a risk of an
accident.
Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all the
tires, including the spare wheel.
306
Tire pressure
Wheels and tires
Overinflated tires may:
R
increase the braking distance
R
adversely affect handling
R
wear excessively and/or unevenly
R
have an adverse effect on ride comfort
R
be more susceptible to damage
Maximum tire pressures
:
Example: maximum permissible tire pres-
sure
Never exceed the maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure. Always observe the recom-
mended tire pressure for your vehicle when
adjusting the tire pressure (
Y page 304).
i
The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-
cific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration.
Checking the tire pressures
Important safety notes
Observe the notes on tire pressure
(
Y page 304).
Information on air pressure for the tires on your
vehicle can be found:
R
on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information
placard on the B-pillar
R
in the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
(
Y page 144)
R
in the "Tire pressure" section
Checking tire pressures manually
To determine and set the correct tire pressure,
proceed as follows:
X
Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be
checked.
X
Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto
the valve.
X
Read the tire pressure and compare it to the
recommended value on the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the tire pressure table
(
Y page 304).
X
If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tire
pressure to the recommended value.
X
If the tire pressure is too high, release air. To
do so, press down the metal pin in the valve,
using the tip of a pen for example. Then check
the tire pressure again using the tire pressure
checker.
X
Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
X
Repeat these steps for the other tires.
Tire pressure loss warning system
(Canada only)
General notes
While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressure
loss warning system monitors the set tire pres-
sure using the rotational speed of the wheels.
This enables the system to detect significant
pressure loss in a tire. If the speed of rotation of
a wheel changes as a result of a loss of pressure,
a corresponding warning message will appear in
the multifunction display.
You can recognize the tire pressure loss warning
by the Run Flat Indicator Active Press
'OK' to Restart message which appears in
the Serv.
menu of the multifunction display.
Information on the message display can be
found in the "Restarting the tire pressure loss
warning system" section (
Y page 308).
Important safety notes
The tire pressure warning system does not warn
you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe
the notes on the recommended tire pressure
(
Y page 304).
The tire pressure loss warning does not replace
the need to regularly check the tire pressure. An
even loss of pressure on several tires at the
Tire pressure
307
Wheels and tires
Z
same time cannot be detected by the tire pres-
sure loss warning system.
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you
of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is
penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a
sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a
halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering
movements.
The function of the tire pressure loss warning
system is limited or delayed if:
R
snow chains are mounted on your vehicle's
tires.
R
road conditions are wintry.
R
you are driving on sand or gravel.
R
you adopt a very sporty driving style (corner-
ing at high speeds or driving with high rates of
acceleration).
R
you are driving with a heavy load (in the vehi-
cle or on the roof).
Restarting the tire pressure loss warn-
ing system
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system if
you have:
R
changed the tire pressure
R
changed the wheels or tires
R
mounted new wheels or tires
X
Before restarting, make sure that the tire
pressures are set properly on all four tires for
the respective operating conditions.
The recommended tire pressure can be found
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side. Addition-
ally, a tire pressure table is attached to the
fuel filler flap. The tire pressure loss warning
system can only give reliable warnings if you
have set the correct tire pressure. If an incor-
rect tire pressure is set, these incorrect val-
ues will be monitored.
X
Also observe the notes in the section on tire
pressures (
Y page 304).
X
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2
in the ignition lock (
Y page 127).
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Serv.
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button on the steering
wheel to select the Tire Pressure
menu.
X
Press the a button.
The Run Flat Indicator Active Press
'OK' to Restart message appears in the
multifunction display.
If you wish to confirm the restart:
X
Press the a button.
The Tire Pressure Now OK?
message
appears in the multifunction display.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select Yes.
X
Press the a button.
The Run Flat Indicator Restarted
mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
After a teach-in period, the tire pressure loss
warning system will monitor the set tire pres-
sures of all four tires.
If you wish to cancel the restart:
X
Press the % button.
or
X
When the Tire Pressure Now OK? message
appears, press the 9 or : button to
select Cancel
.
X
Press the a button.
The tire pressure values stored at the last
restart will continue to be monitored.
Tire pressure monitor
General notes
If a tire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi-
cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire
pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure mon-
itor warns you if the pressure drops in one or
more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only
functions if the corresponding sensors are
installed in all wheels.
Information on tire pressures is displayed in the
multifunction display. After a few minutes of
driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is
shown in the Service
menu of the multifunction
display, see illustration (example).
308
Tire pressure
Wheels and tires
For information on the message display, refer to
the "Checking the tire pressure electronically"
section (
Y page 310).
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked at least once every two
weeks when cold and inflated to the pressure
recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the driver's door B-pillar or the tire pres-
sure label on the inside of the fuel filler flap. If
your vehicle has tires of a different size than
the size indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information placard or, if available, the tire
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-
sure telltale when one or more of your tires
are significantly underinflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale lights up,
you should stop and check your tires as soon
as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly underin-
flated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's
handling and stopping ability. Please note that
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if
underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-
sure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-
tem detects a malfunction, the warning lamp
will flash for approximately a minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will be repeated every time the vehi-
cle is started as long as the malfunction
exists. When the malfunction indicator is illu-
minated, the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of incom-
patible replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate Tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
It is the driver's responsibility to set the tire
pressure to that recommended for cold tires
which is suitable for the operating situation
(
Y page 304). Note that the correct tire pressure
for the current operating situation must first be
taught-in to the tire pressure monitor. If there is
a substantial loss of pressure, the warning
threshold for the warning message is aligned to
the reference values taught-in. Restart the tire
pre
ssure moni
tor after adjusting the pressure of
the cold tires (
Y page 311). The current pres-
sures are saved as new reference values. As a
result, a warning message will appear if the tire
pressure drops significantly.
The tire pressure monitor does not warn you of
an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe the
notes on the recommended tire pressure
(
Y page 304).
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you
of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is
penetrated by a foreign object. In the event of a
sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a
halt by braking carefully. Avoid abrupt steering
movements.
Tire pressure
309
Wheels and tires
Z
The tire pressure monitor has a yellow warning
lamp in the instrument cluster for indicating
pressure loss or a malfunction. Whether the
warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates
whether a tire pressure is too low or the tire
pressure monitor is malfunctioning:
R
if the warning lamp is lit continuously, the tire
pressure on one or more tires is significantly
too low. The tire pressure monitor is not mal-
functioning.
R
if the warning lamp flashes for around a
minute and then remains lit constantly, the
tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
In addition to the warning lamp, a message
appears in the multifunction display. Observe
the information on display messages
(
Y page 230).
It may take up to ten minutes for a malfunction
of the tire pressure monitor to be indicated. A
malfunction will be indicated by the tire pres-
sure warning lamp flashing for approximately
one minute and then remaining lit. When the
malfunction has been rectified, the tire pressure
warning lamp goes out after a few minutes of
driving.
The tire pressure values indicated by the on-
board computer may differ from those meas-
ured at a gas station with a pressure gauge. The
tire pressures shown by the on-board computer
refer to those measured at sea level. At high
altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a
pressure gauge are higher than those shown by
the on-board computer. In this case, do not
reduce the tire pressures.
The operation of the tire pressure monitor can
be affected by interference from radio transmit-
ting equipment (e.g. radio headphones, two-way
radios) that may be being operated in or near the
vehicle.
Checking the tire pressure electroni-
cally
X
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2
in the ignition lock (
Y page 127).
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Service
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Tire Pressure
.
X
Press the a button.
The current tire pressure of each tire is shown
in the multifunction display.
If the vehicle has been parked for over
20 minutes, the Tire pressures will be
displayed after driving a few minutes
message appears.
After a teach-in process, the tire pressure mon-
itor automatically detects new wheels or new
sensors. As long as a clear allocation of the tire
pressure value to the individual wheels is not
possible, the Tire
Pressure Monitor Active
display message is shown instead of the tire
pressure display. The tire pressures are already
being monitored.
If an emergency spare wheel is mounted, the
system may continue to show the tire pressure
of the wheel that has been removed for a few
minutes. If this occurs, note that the value dis-
played for the position where the spare wheel is
mounted is not the same as the current tire
pressure of the emergency spare wheel.
Tire pressure monitor warning mes-
sages
If the tire pressure monitor detects a pressure
loss in one or more tires, a warning message is
shown in the multifunction display. The yellow
tire pressure warning lamp then lights up.
R
If the Correct Tire Pressure message
appears in the multifunction display, the tire
pressure in at least one tire is too low. The tire
pressure must be corrected when the oppor-
tunity arises.
R
If the Check Tires message appears in the
multifunction display, the tire pressure in one
or more tires has dropped significantly. The
tires must be checked.
R
If the Warning Tire Malfunction message
appears in the multifunction display, the tire
pressure in one or more tires is dropping sud-
denly. The tires must be checked.
Observe the instructions and safety notes in the
display messages in the "Tires" section
(
Y page 230).
If the wheel positions on the vehicle are rotated,
the tire pressures may be displayed for the
wrong positions for a short time. This is rectified
after a few minutes of driving, and the tire pres-
sures are displayed for the correct positions.
310
Tire pressure
Wheels and tires
Restarting the tire pressure monitor
When you restart the tire pressure monitor, all
existing warning messages are deleted and the
warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the cur-
rently set tire pressures as the reference values
for monitoring. In most cases, the tire pressure
monitor will automatically detect the new refer-
ence values after you have changed the tire
pressure. However, you can also define refer-
ence values manually as described here. The tire
pressure monitor then monitors the new tire
pressure values.
X
Set the tire pressure to the value recommen-
ded for the corresponding driving situation on
the Tire and Loading Information placard on
the driver's side B-pillar (
Y page 304).
You can find more tire pressure values for
various operating conditions in the tire pres-
sure table inside the fuel filler flap
(
Y page 304).
X
Make sure that the tire pressure is correct on
all four wheels.
X
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2
in the ignition lock.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Service
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Tire Pressure
.
X
Press the a button.
The multifunction display shows the current
tire pressure for the individual tires or the
Tire pressures will be displayed
after driving a few minutes message.
X
Press the : button.
The Use
Current Pressures as New Ref‐
erence Values message appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
If you wish to confirm the restart:
X
Press the a button.
The Tire
Press. Monitor Restarted mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
After driving for a few minutes, the system
checks whether the current tire pressures are
within the specified range. The new tire pres-
sures are then accepted as reference values
and monitored.
If you wish to cancel the restart:
X
Press the % button.
The tire pressure values stored at the last
restart will continue to be monitored.
Loading the vehicle
Instruction labels for tires and loads
G
WARNING
Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a
blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the
steering and driving characteristics and lead
to brake failure. There is a risk of accident.
Observe the load rating of the tires. The load
rating must be at least half of the GAWR of
your vehicle. Never overload the tires by
exceeding the maximum load.
Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the
maximum possible load.
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is
on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire
and Loading Information placard shows the
maximum permissible number of occu-
pants and the maximum permissible vehicle
load. It also contains details of the tire sizes
and corresponding pressures for tires
mounted at the factory.
(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-
pillar on the driver's side. The vehicle iden-
tification plate informs you of the gross
vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the
vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the
fuel and the cargo. You can also find infor-
mation about the maximum gross axle
weight rating on the front and rear axle.
The maximum gross axle weight rating is
the maximum weight that can be carried by
one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed
the maximum load or the maxi
mum g
ross
axle weight rating for the front or rear axle.
:
B-pillar, driver's side
Loading the vehicle
311
Wheels and tires
Z
Maximum permissible gross vehicle
weight rating
X
Specification for maximum gross vehicle
weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading
Information placard: "The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."
The gross weight of all vehicle occupants, load
and luggage must not exceed the specified
value.
i
The specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the illustration
are examples. The maximum permissible
gross vehicle weight rating is vehicle-specific
and may differ from that in the illustration.
You can find the valid maximum permissible
gross vehicle weight rating for your vehicle on
the Tire and Loading Information placard.
Number of seats
Maximum number of seats : indicates the
maximum number of occupants allowed to
travel in the vehicle. This information can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information plac-
ard.
i
The specifications shown on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in the illustration
are examples. The number of seats is vehicle-
specific and can differ from the details shown.
The number of seats in your vehicle can be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
Determining the correct load limit
Step-by-step instructions
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pur-
suant to the "National Traffic and Motor Vehicle
Safety Act of 1966".
X
Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle’s
Tire and Loading Information placard.
X
Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
X
Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kilograms or
XXX lbs.
X
Step 4: The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage load capa-
city. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals
1400 lbs and there will be five 150-lb pas-
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
X
Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-
cle. That weight may not safely exceed the
available cargo and luggage load capacity cal-
culated in step 4.
312
Loading the vehicle
Wheels and tires
Example: steps 1 to 3
The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities with varying
seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use a load limit of
1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actual load
limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (
Y page 311).
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximum luggage load.
Step 1
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Combined maximum
weight of occupants
and cargo (data from
the Tire and Loading
Information placard)
1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)
Step 2
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Number of people in
the vehicle (driver and
occupants)
5 3 1
Distribution of the
occupants
Front: 2
Rear: 3
Front: 1
Rear: 2
Front: 1
Weight of the occu-
pants
Occupant 1: 150 lbs
(68 kg)
Occupant 2: 180 lbs
(82 kg)
Occupant 3: 160 lbs
(73 kg)
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
(63 kg)
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
(54 kg)
Occupant 1: 200 lbs
(91 kg)
Occupant 2: 190 lbs
(86 kg)
Occupant 3: 150 lbs
(68 kg)
Occupant 1: 150 lbs
(68 kg)
Gross weight of all
occupants
750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
Step 3
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Permissible load (maxi-
mum gross vehicle
weight rating from the
Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard minus
the gross weight of all
occupants)
1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò
750 lbs (340 kg) =
750 lbs (340 kg)
1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò
540 lbs (245 kg)
=960 lbs (435 kg)
1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò
150 lbs (68 kg) =
1350 lbs (612 kg)
Loading the vehicle
313
Wheels and tires
Z
Vehicle identification plate
Even if you have calculated the total cargo care-
fully, you should still make sure that the gross
vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight
rating are not exceeded. Details can be found on
the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on
the driver's side of the vehicle (
Y page 311).
Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all pas-
sengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if
applicable) must not exceed the permissible
gross vehicle weight.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maxi-
mum permissible weight that can be carried by
one axle (front or rear axle).
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the
maximum permissible values (gross vehicle
weight and maximum gross axle weight rating),
have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occu-
pants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable)
weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge.
All about wheels and tires
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-
ards
Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand-
ards
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S.
government specifications. Their purpose is to
provide drivers with uniform reliable information
on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers
have to grade tires using three performance fac-
tors: : tread wear grade, ; traction grade and
= temperature grade. These regulations do not
apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in
North America are provided with the corre-
sponding quality grading markings on the side-
wall of the tire.
Quality grades can be found, where applicable,
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width.
Example:
R
Treadwear grade: 200
R
Traction grade: AA
R
Temperature grade: A
All passenger car tires must conform to the stat-
utory safety requirements in addition to these
grades.
i
The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-
cific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified U.S.
government course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half times as well
on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices
and differences in road characteristics and cli-
mate.
Traction
G
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-
acteristics.
!
Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to
the drive train.
The traction grades from highest to lowest
are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas-
ured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and con-
crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy
road is always lower than on dry road surfaces.
314
All about wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
You should pay special attention to road condi-
tions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimum tread
depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires.
Observe the legally required minimum tire tread
depth (
Y page 302). Winter tires can reduce the
braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in
comparison with summer tires. The braking dis-
tance is still much further than on surfaces that
are not icy or covered with snow. Take appro-
priate care when driving.
Further information on winter tires (M+S tires)
(
Y page 303).
Temperature
G
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause excessive heat
build-up and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-
tained high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Tire labeling
Overview
:
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
(
Y page 319)
;
Department of Transportation, Tire Identifi-
cation Number (
Y page 318)
=
Maximum load rating (Y page 317)
?
Maximum tire pressures (Y page 307)
A
Manufacturer
B
Tire material (Y page 318)
C
Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity
and speed rating (
Y page 315)
D
Load index (Y page 317)
E
Tire name
The markings described above are on the tire in
addition to the tire name (sales designation) and
the manufacturer's name.
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.
Tire size designation, load-bearing
capacity and speed rating
G
WARNING
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-
city and the approved maximum speed could
lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There
is a risk of accident.
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
All about wheels and tires
315
Wheels and tires
Z
tire load rating and speed rating required for
your vehicle.
:
Tire width
;
Nominal aspect ratio in %
=
Tire code
?
Rim diameter
A
Load bearing index
B
Speed rating
General: depending on the manufacturer's
standards, the size imprinted in the tire wall may
not contain any letters or may contain one letter
that precedes the size description.
If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-
tion (as shown above): these are passenger
vehicle tires according to European manufac-
turing standards.
If "P" precedes the size description: these are
passenger vehicle tires according to U.S. man-
ufacturing standards.
If "LT" precedes the size description: these are
light truck tires according to U.S. manufacturing
standards.
If "T" precedes the size description: compact
emergency wheels with high tire pressure that
are only designed for temporary use in an emer-
gency.
Tire width: tire width : shows the nominal tire
width in millimeters.
Aspect ratio: aspect ratio ; is the size ratio
between the tire height and tire width and is
shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calculated
by dividing the tire width by the tire height.
Tire code: tire code = specifies the tire type.
"R" represents radial tires; "D" represents diag-
onal
tires
; "B" represents diagonal radial tires.
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameter
of the bead seat, not the diameter of the rim
flange. The rim diameter is specified in
inches (in).
Load-bearing index: load-bearing index A is a
numerical code that specifies the maximum
load-bearing capacity of a tire.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum permissible
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side (
Y page 311).
Example:
Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximum
load of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires can bear.
For further information on the maximum tire
load in kilograms and lbs, see (
Y page 317).
For further information on the load bearing
index, see "Load index" (
Y page 317).
Speed rating: speed rating B specifies the
approved maximum speed of the tire.
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.
Regardless of the speed rating, always observe
the speed limits. Drive carefully and adapt your
driving style to the traffic conditions.
Summer tires
Index Speed rating
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)
R
Optionally, tires with a maximum speed of
over 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" in
the size description, depending on the man-
ufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).
R
If a service specification is available, the max-
imum speed is limited according to the speed
316
All about wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
rating in the service specification. Example:
245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In this example, "97 Y" is
the service specification. The letter "Y" rep-
resents the speed rating. The maximum
speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph
(300 km/h).
If the size description of your tire includes
"ZR" and there are no service specifications,
ask the tire manufacturer in order to find out
the maximum speed.
R
The size description for all tires with maxi-
mum speeds of over 186 mph (300 km/h)
must include "ZR", and the service specifica-
tion must be given in parentheses. Example:
275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)" indi-
cates that the maximum speed of the tire is
over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire man-
ufacturer about the maximum speed.
All-weather tires and winter tires
Index Speed rating
Q M+S
1
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
T M+S
1
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
H M+S
1
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
V M+S
1
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
i
Not all tires with the M+S marking provide
the driving characteristics of winter tires. In
addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also
have the i snowflake symbol on the tire
wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the require-
ments of the Rubber Manufacturers Associa-
tion (RMA) and the Rubber Association of
Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on
snow. They have been especially developed
for driving on snow.
An electronic speed limiter prevents your vehi-
cle from exceeding the following speeds:
R
all vehicles (except AMG vehicles): 130 mph
(210 km/h)
R
AMG vehicles: 155 mph (250 km/h)
R
AMG vehicles with Performance Package:
186 mph (300 km/h)
The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory
may be higher than the maximum speed that the
electronic speed limiter permits.
Make sure that your tires have the required
speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The
required speed rating for your vehicle can be
found in the "Tires" section (
Y page 325).
Further information about reading tire data can
be obtained from any qualified specialist work-
shop.
Load index
In addition to the load bearing index, load
index : may be imprinted after the letters that
identify speed index B on the sidewall of the
tire (
Y page 315).
R
If no specification is given: no text (as in the
example above), represents a standard load
(SL) tire
R
XL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced tire
R
Light Load: represents a light load tire
R
C, D, E: represents a load range that depends
on the maximum load that the tire can carry at
a certain pressure
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.
Maximum load rating
Maximum tire load : is the maximum permis-
sible weight for which the tire is approved.
1
Or M+S i for winter tires.
All about wheels and tires
317
Wheels and tires
Z
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum permissible
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side (
Y page 311).
i
The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-
cific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man-
ufacturer or retreader must imprint a TIN in or on
the sidewall of each tire produced.
The TIN is a unique identification number. The
TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders
to inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-
relevant matters. It makes it possible for the
purchaser to easily identify the affected tires.
The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifica-
tion code ;, tire size =, tire type code ? and
manufacturing date A.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol : marks that the tire complies with the
requirements of the U.S. Department of Trans-
portation.
Manufacturer identification code: manufac-
turer identification code ; provides details on
the tire manufacturer. New tires have a code
with two symbols. Retreaded tires have a code
with four symbols.
For further information about retreaded tires,
see (
Y page 325).
Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.
Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by
the manufacturer as a code to describe specific
characteristics of the tire.
Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A
provides information about the age of a tire. The
first and second positions represent the week of
manufacture, starting with "01" for the first cal-
endar week. Positions three and four rep
rese
nt
the year of manufacture. For example, a tire that
is marked "2614" was manufactured in week 26
in 2014.
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.
Tire characteristics
This information describes the type of tire cord
and the number of layers in sidewall : and
under tire tread ;.
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.
Definition of terms for tires and loading
Tire ply composition and material used
Describes the number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread
and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon,
polyester and other materials.
Bar
Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds
per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa)
are the equivalent of 1 bar.
DOT (Department of Transportation)
DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of the
U S Department of Transportation.
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants for which the vehicle
is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).
318
All about wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
A uniform standard to grade the quality of tires
with regards to tread quality, tire traction and
temperature characteristics. The quality grad-
ing assessment is made by the manufacturer
following specifications from the U.S. govern-
ment. The ratings are molded into the sidewall of
the tire.
Recommended tire pressures
The recommended tire pressure applies to the
tires mounted at the factory.
The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
tains the recommended tire pressures for cold
tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for the maxi-
mum permissible vehicle speed.
The tire pressure table contains the recommen-
ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-
ing conditions, i.e. differing load and speed con-
ditions.
Increased vehicle weight due to optional
equipment
The combined weight of all standard and
optional equipment available for the vehicle,
regardless of whether it is actually installed on
the vehicle or not.
Rim
This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is
mounted.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight
rating. The actual load on an axle must never
exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross
axle weight rating can be found on the vehicle
identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's
side.
Speed rating
The speed rating is part of the tire identification.
It specifies the speed range for which the tire is
approved.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of
the vehicle including fuel, tools, the spare wheel,
accessories installed, occupants, luggage and
the drawbar noseweight, if applicable. The gross
vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehi-
cle weight rating GVWR as specified on the vehi-
cle identification plate on the B-pillar on the
driver's side.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross
weight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight of the
vehicle including all accessories, occupants,
fuel, luggage and the
drawbar n
oseweight, if
applicable). The gross vehicle weight rating is
specified on the vehicle identification plate on
the B-pillar on the driver's side.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The maximum weight is the sum of:
R
the curb weight of the vehicle
R
the weight of the accessories
R
the load limit
R
the weight of the factory installed optional
equipment
Kilopascal (kPa)
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-
sponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tire pressure is
bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of
1 bar.
Load index
In addition to the load-bearing index, the load
index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of
the tire. This specifies the load-bearing capacity
more precisely.
Curb weight
The weight of a vehicle with standard equipment
including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning sys-
tem and optional equipment if these are instal-
led in the vehicle, but does not include passen-
gers or luggage.
Maximum load rating
The maximum tire load is the maximum permis-
sible weight in kilograms or lbs for which a tire is
approved.
Maximum permissible tire pressure
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.
Maximum load on one tire
Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by
dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by
two.
All about wheels and tires
319
Wheels and tires
Z
PSI (pounds per square inch)
A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.
Aspect ratio
Relationship between tire height and tire width
in percent.
tire pressure
Pressure inside the tire applying an outward
force to every square inch of the tire's surface.
The tire pressure is specified in pounds per
square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar.
The tire pressure should only be corrected when
the tires are cold.
Cold tire pressure
The tires are cold:
R
if the vehicle has been parked with the tires
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours
and
R
if the vehicle has not been driven further than
1 mile (1.6 km)
Tread
The part of the tire that comes into contact with
the road.
Bead
The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely
on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the
bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from
the wheel rim.
Sidewall
The part of the tire between the tread and the
bead.
Weight of optional extras
The combined weight of those optional extras
that weigh more than the replaced standard
parts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These
optional extras, such as high-performance
brakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-per-
formance battery, are not included in the curb
weight and the weight of the accessories.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
This is a unique identifier which can be used by
a tire manufacturer to identify tires, for example
for a product recall, and thus identify the pur-
chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur-
er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and
the manufacturing date.
Load bearing index
The load bearing index (also load index) is a code
that contains the maximum load bearing capa-
city of a tire.
Traction
Traction is the result of friction between the tires
and the road surface.
Treadwear indicators
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distrib-
uted over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level
with the bars, the wear limit of á in (1.6 mm)
has been reached.
Occupant distribution
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at their
designated seating positions.
Total load limit
Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg
(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats in
the vehicle.
Changing a wheel
Flat tire
The "Breakdown assistance" section
(
Y page 287) contains information and notes on
how to deal with a flat tire. Information on driv-
ing with MOExtended tires in the event of a flat
tire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tires
with run-flat characteristics" (
Y page 287).
Vehicle with emergency spare wheel: in the
event of a flat tire, the emergency spare wheel is
mounted as described under "Mounting a
wheel" (
Y page 321).
Rotating the wheels
G
WARNING
Interchanging the front and rear wheels may
severely impair the driving characteristics if
the wheels or tires have different dimensions.
The wheel brakes or suspension components
may also be damaged. There is a risk of acci-
dent.
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels
and tires are of the same dimensions.
320
Changing a wheel
Wheels and tires
!
On vehicles equipped with a tire pressure
monitor, electronic components are located
in the wheel.
Tire-mounting tools should not be used near
the valve. This could damage the electronic
components.
Only have tires changed at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Always observe the instructions and safety
notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
(
Y page 321).
The wear patterns on the front and rear tires
differ, depending on the operating conditions.
Rotate the wheels before a clear wear pattern
has formed on the tires. Front tires typically
wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in
the center.
On vehicles that have the same size front and
rear wheels, you can rotate the wheels accord-
ing to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's
warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no
warranty book is available, the tires should be
rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to
10,000 km). Depending on tire wear, this may
be required earlier. Do not change the direction
of wheel rotation.
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the
brake disc thoroughly every time a wheel is rota-
ted. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary,
restart the tire pressure loss warning system
(
Y page 308) or the tire pressure monitor
(
Y page 311).
Direction of rotation
Tires with a specified direction of rotation have
additional benefits, e.g. if there is a risk of hydro-
planing. These advantages can only be gained if
the tires are installed corresponding to the
direction of rotation.
An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its
correct direction of rotation.
Storing wheels
Store wheels that are not being used in a cool,
dry and preferably dark place. Protect the tires
from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.
Mounting a wheel
Preparing the vehicle
X
Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground.
X
Apply the parking brake.
X
Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead
position.
X
Shift the transmission to position P.
X
Vehicles with AIRMATIC: make sure that "nor-
mal" level is selected (
Y page 166).
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or, on vehicles with KEYLESSGO:
X
Open the driver's door.
The on-board electronics now have status 0.
This is the same as the SmartKey having been
removed.
X
Remove the Start/Stop button from the igni-
tion lock (
Y page 127).
X
If included in the vehicle equipment, remove
the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle
(
Y page 286).
X
Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.
Securing the vehicle to prevent it from
rolling away
If your vehicle is equipped with a wheel chock, it
can be found in the tire-change tool kit
(
Y page 286).
The folding wheel chock is an additional safety
measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling
away, for example when changing a wheel.
X
Fold both plates upwards :.
X
Fold out lower plate ;.
X
Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the
openings in base plate =.
Changing a wheel
321
Wheels and tires
Z
X
Place chocks or other suitable items under
the front and rear of the wheel that is diago-
nally opposite the wheel you wish to change.
Raising the vehicle
G
WARNING
If you do not position the jack correctly at the
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
There is a risk of injury.
Only position the jack at the appropriate jack-
ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack
must be positioned vertically, directly under
the jacking point of the vehicle.
!
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jacking points. Other-
wise, your vehicle could be damaged.
Observe the following when raising the vehicle:
R
To raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe-
cific jack that has been tested and approved
by Mercedes-Benz. If used incorrectly, the
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
R
The jack is designed only to raise and hold the
vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being
changed. It must not be used for performing
maintenance work under the vehicle.
R
Avoid changing the wheel on uphill and down-
hill slopes.
R
Before raising the vehicle, secure it from roll-
ing away by applying the parking brake and
inserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage the
parking brake while the vehicle is raised.
R
The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and
non-slip surface. On a loose surface, a large,
flat, load-bearing underlay must be used. On a
slippery surface, a non-slip underlay must be
used, e.g. rubber mats.
R
Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects
as a jack underlay. Otherwise, the jack will not
be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity
due to the restricted height.
R
Make sure that the distance between the
underside of the tires and the ground does not
exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).
R
Never place your hands and feet under the
raised vehicle.
R
Do not lie under the vehicle.
R
Do not start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
R
Do not open or close a door or the trunk lid
when the vehicle is raised.
R
Make sure that no persons are present in the
vehicle when the vehicle is raised.
Vehicles with alloy wheels and hub caps: the
wheel bolts are covered by a hub cap. Before you
can unscrew the wheel bolts, you must remove
the hub cap.
X
To remove: take socket ; and lug wrench
= from the vehicle tool kit (
Y page 286).
X
Position socket ; on hub cap :.
X
Position lug wrench = on socket ;.
X
Using lug wrench =, turn hub cap : coun-
ter-clockwise and remove it.
X
To install: before installing, check hub cap :
and the wheel area for soiling and clean if
necessary.
X
Put hub cap : in position and turn until it is in
the right position.
X
Position socket ; on hub cap :.
X
Attach lug wrench = to socket ; and
tighten hub cap :.
The tightening torque must be
18 lb-ft (25 Nm).
i
Note that the hub cap should be tightened
to the specified torque of 18 lb-ft (25 Nm).
322
Changing a wheel
Wheels and tires
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
the hub cap installed at a qualified specialist
workshop.
X
Using lug wrench =, loosen the bolts on the
wheel you wish to change by about one full
turn. Do not unscrew the bolts completely.
Jacking points
X
Position jack A at jacking point ?.
X
Make sure the foot of the jack is directly
beneath the jacking point.
X
Turn crank B clockwise until jack A sits
completely on jacking point ?. The base of
the jack must lie evenly on the ground.
X
Turn crank B until the tire is raised a maxi-
mum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground.
Removing a wheel
!
Mercedes-AMG vehicles with ceramic-
brake disc: during removal and repositioning
of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the
ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore,
you should proceed carefully and get a sec-
ond person assist to you. Alternatively, you
can use a second alignment bolt.
!
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty
surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could
otherwise be damaged when you screw them
in.
X
Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt com-
pletely.
X
Screw alignment bolt : into the thread
instead of the wheel bolt.
X
Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.
X
Remove the wheel.
Changing a wheel
323
Wheels and tires
Z
Mounting a new wheel
G
WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
bolts to come loose. As a result, you could
lose a wheel while driving. There is a risk of
accident.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of
damage to the threads, contact a qualified
specialist workshop immediately. Have the
damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
G
WARNING
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip
over. There is a risk of injury.
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
Always pay attention to the instructions and
safety notes in the "Changing a wheel" section
(
Y page 320).
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-
sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
only use wheel bolts which have been approved
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective
wheel.
!
Mercedes-AMG vehicles with ceramic-
brake disc: during removal and repositioning
of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the
ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Therefore,
you should proceed carefully and get a sec-
ond person assist to you. Alternatively, you
can use a second alignment bolt.
!
To prevent damage to the paintwork, hold
the wheel securely against the wheel hub
while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
X
Clean the wheel and wheel hub contact sur-
faces.
X
Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the align-
ment bolt and push it on.
X
Tighten the wheel bolts until they are finger-
tight.
X
Unscrew the alignment bolt.
X
Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-
tight.
X
Vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel:
inflate the collapsible spare wheel
(
Y page 327).
Only then lower the vehicle.
Lowering the vehicle
G
WARNING
The wheels could work loose if the wheel nuts
and bolts are not tightened to the specified
tightening torque. There is a risk of accident.
Have the tightening torque immediately
checked at a qualified specialist workshop
after a wheel is changed.
!
Vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel:
before lowering the vehicle, inflate the col-
lapsible spare wheel with the tire inflation
compressor. The wheel rim could otherwise
be damaged.
X
Turn the crank of the jack counter-clockwise
until the vehicle is once again standing firmly
on the ground.
X
Place the jack to one side.
324
Changing a wheel
Wheels and tires
X
Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a crosswise
pattern in the sequence indicated (: to A).
The specified tightening torque is 96 lb-ft
(130 Nm).
X
Turn the jack back to its initial position.
X
Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicle tools
in the trunk again.
X
Check the tire pressure of the newly mounted
wheel and adjust it if necessary.
Observe the recommended tire pressure
(
Y page 304).
When you are driving with the collapsible spare
wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss warning
system or the tire pressure monitor cannot func-
tion reliably. Only restart the tire pressure loss
warning system or tire pressure monitor when
the defective wheel has been replaced with a
new wheel.
Vehicles with a tire pressure control sys-
tem: all installed wheels must be equipped with
functioning sensors.
Wheel and tire combinations
You can ask for information regarding permitted
wheel-tire combinations at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
!
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use tires and wheels
which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz
specifically for your vehicle.
These tires have been specially adapted for
use with the control systems, such as ABS or
ESP
®
, and are marked as follows:
R
MO = Mercedes-Benz Original
R
MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended
(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)
R
MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only cer-
tain AMG tires)
Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tires may
only be used on wheels that have been spe-
cifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Only use tires, wheels or accessories tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Certain
characteristics, e.g. handling, vehicle noise
emissions or fuel consumption, may other-
wise be adversely affected. In addition, when
driving with a load, tire dimension variations
could cause the tires to come into contact
with the bodywork and axle components. This
could result in damage to the tires or the vehi-
cle.
Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability for dam-
age resulting from the use of tires, wheels or
accessories other than those tested and
approved.
Information on tires, wheels and approved
combinations can be obtained from any quali-
fied specialist workshop.
!
Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-
ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ-
ous damage cannot always be detected on
retreaded tires. As a result, Mercedes-Benz
cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded
tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if
you have no information about their previous
usage.
The recommended pressures for various oper-
ating conditions can be found:
R
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar on the driver's side
R
in the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
Observe the notes on recommended tire pres-
sures under various operating conditions
(
Y page 304).
Check tire pressures regularly, and only when
the tires are cold. Comply with the maintenance
recommendations of the tire manufacturer in
the vehicle document wallet.
Wheel and tire combinations
325
Wheels and tires
Z
Notes on the vehicle equipment always equip
the vehicle with:
R
with tires of the same size on a given axle (left
and right)
R
the same type of tires at a given time (summer
tires, winter tires, MOExtended tires)
Exception: it is permissible to install a differ-
ent type or make in the event of a flat tire.
Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with
run-flat characteristics" section (
Y page 287).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory. It
is therefore recommended that you additionally
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit if you mount
tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.
winter tires. A TIREFIT kit may be obtained from
a qualified specialist workshop.
Emergency spare wheel
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The wheel or tire size as well as the tire type of
the spare wheel or emergency spare wheel
and the wheel to be replaced may differ.
Mounting an emergency spare wheel may
severely impair the driving characteristics.
There is a risk of an accident.
To avoid hazardous situations:
R
adapt your driving style accordingly and
drive carefully.
R
never mount more than one spare wheel or
emergency spare wheel that differs in size.
R
only use a spare wheel or emergency spare
wheel of a different size briefly.
R
do not switch ESP
®
off.
R
have a spare wheel or emergency spare
wheel of a different size replaced at the
nearest qualified specialist workshop.
Observe that the wheel and tire dimensions
as well as the tire type must be correct.
When using an emergency spare wheel or spare
wheel of a different size, you must not exceed
the maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Snow chains must not be mounted on emer-
gency spare wheels.
General notes
You can ask for information regarding permitted
emergency spare wheels at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
You should regularly check the pressure of the
emergency spare wheel, particularly prior to
long trips, and correct the pressure as neces-
sary (
Y page 304). The value on the wheel is
valid.
An emergency spare wheel may also be moun-
ted against the direction of rotation. Observe
the time restriction on use as well as the speed
limitation specified on the emergency spare
wheel.
Replace the tires after six years at the latest,
regardless of wear. This also applies to the
emergency spare wheel.
i
When you are driving with the collapsible
spare wheel mounted, the tire pressure loss
warning system or the tire pressure monitor
cannot function reliably. Only restart the tire
pressure loss warning system or tire pressure
monitor when the defective wheel has been
replaced with a new wheel.
Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: after
mounting an emergency spare wheel, the sys-
tem may still display the tire pressure of the
removed wheel for a few minutes. The value
displayed for the mounted emergency spare
wheel is not the same as the current tire pres-
sure of the emergency spare wheel.
"Minispare" emergency spare wheel/
collapsible spare wheel
Opening the stowage well
The emergency spare wheel can be found in the
stowage well under the trunk floor.
326
Emergency spare wheel
Wheels and tires
X
Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 256).
X
Remove stowage space :.
Removing the "Minispare" emergency
spare wheel
X
Turn stowage well ; counter-clockwise and
remove it together with vehicle tool kit
tray :.
X
Remove "Minispare" emergency spare wheel
=.
Always observe the instructions and safety
notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
(
Y page 321).
Removing the collapsible spare wheel
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
The emergency spare wheel can be found in the
stowage well under the trunk floor.
X
Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 256).
X
Reach into cutout : in the tool holder and lift
it up.
X
Remove collapsible spare wheel ;.
Always observe the instructions and safety
notes in the "Mounting a wheel" section
(
Y page 321).
Stowing a used collapsible spare
wheel
!
Only place the collapsible spare wheel in the
vehicle when it is dry. Otherwise, moisture
may get into the vehicle.
Take the following steps to stow a used collaps-
ible spare wheel. Otherwise, it will not fit into the
spare wheel well. Mercedes-Benz recommends
that you have this work performed at a qualified
specialist workshop, e.g. at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
Unscrew the valve cap from the valve.
X
Use the back of the valve cap to unscrew the
valve insert from the valve and release the air.
i
Fully deflating the tires can take a few
minutes.
X
Screw the valve insert back into the valve.
X
Screw the valve cap back on.
X
Remove the protective sheet from the vehicle
tool kit and pull it over the collapsible spare
wheel.
X
Stow the collapsible spare wheel in the emer-
gency spare wheel well under the trunk.
Inflating the collapsible spare wheel
!
Inflate the collapsible spare wheel using the
tire inflation compressor before lowering the
vehicle. The wheel rim could otherwise be
damaged.
!
Do not operate the tire inflation compressor
for longer than eight minutes at a time without
a break. It may otherwise overheat.
The tire inflation compressor can be operated
again once it has cooled down.
Comply with the manufacturer's safety instruc-
tions on the tire inflation compressor label and
on the tire sealant bottle.
X
Mount the collapsible spare wheel as descri-
bed (
Y page 321).
The collapsible spare wheel must be mounted
before it is inflated.
X
Remove the tire inflation compressor from
the stowage space under the trunk floor
(
Y page 286).
Emergency spare wheel
327
Wheels and tires
Z
X
Pull connector ? and the hose out of the
housing.
X
Remove the cap from the valve on the col-
lapsible spare wheel.
X
Screw union nut : of the hose onto the valve.
X
Make sure on/off switch A of the tire infla-
tion compressor is set to 0.
X
Insert connector ? into a 12 V socket
(
Y page 262) in your vehicle.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 127).
X
Press on/off switch A on the tire inflation
compressor to I.
The tire inflation compressor is switched on.
The tire is inflated. The tire pressure is shown
on pressure gauge =.
X
Inflate the tire to the specified tire pressure.
The specified tire pressure is printed on the
yellow label of the emergency spare wheel.
X
When the specified tire pressure has been
reached, press on/off switch A on the elec-
tric air pump to 0.
The tire inflation compressor is switched off.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition
lock.
X
If the tire pressure is higher than the specified
pressure, press pressure release valve but-
ton ; until the correct tire pressure has been
reached.
X
Unscrew air hose union nut : from the valve.
X
Screw the cap onto the valve of the collapsi-
ble spare wheel again.
X
Stow connector ? and the hose in the lower
section of the tire inflation compressor.
X
Stow the tire inflation compressor in the vehi-
cle.
328
Emergency spare wheel
Wheels and tires
Information regarding technical data
i
The data stated here specifically refers to a
vehicle with standard equipment. Consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for the
data for all vehicle variants and trim levels.
Vehicle electronics
Retrofitting two-way radios and
mobile phones (RF transmitters)
G
WARNING
The electromagnetic radiation from modified
or incorrectly retrofitted RF-transmitters can
interfere with the vehicle electronics. This can
compromise the operational safety of the
vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
You should have all work to electrical and
electronic equipment carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
The electromagnetic radiation from incor-
rectly operated RF transmitters can interfere
with the vehicle electronics, for example:
R
if the RF transmitter is not connected with
an exterior antenna
R
the exterior antenna has been installed
incorrectly or is not a low-reflection type
This can compromise the operational safety
of the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.
Have the low-reflection exterior antenna
mounted at a qualified specialist workshop.
When operating RF transmitters in the vehi-
cle, always connect them with the low-reflec-
tion exterior antenna.
!
The operating permit may be invalidated if
the instructions for installation and use of RF
transmitters are not observed.
In particular, the following conditions must be
complied with:
R
only approved wavebands may be used.
R
compliance with the maximum permissible
output in these wavebands is required.
R
only approved antenna positions may be
used.
Excessive levels of electromagnetic radiation
may cause damage to your health and the health
of others. Using an exterior antenna takes into
account current scientific discussions relating
to the possible health hazards
tha
t may result
from electromagnetic fields.
The following antenna positions may be used if
RF transmitters have been properly installed:
Approved antenna positions
:
Front roof area
;
Rear roof area
=
Rear fender
?
Trunk lid
i
When installing an antenna on the front roof
area of vehicles with a sliding sunroof,
observe the sweeping range of the roof.
On the rear fenders, it is recommended to
position the antenna on the side of the vehicle
closest to the center of the road.
Use the Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609
when retrofitting RF transmitters (Road Vehicles
- EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarket
radio frequency transmitting equipment).
Observe the legal requirements for retrofittings.
If your vehicle has installations for two-way radio
equipment, use the power supply or antenna
connections intended for use with the basic wir-
ing. Be sure to observe the manufacturer's addi-
tional instructions when installing.
Deviations with respect to wavebands, maxi-
mum transmission outputs or antenna positions
must be approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Vehicle electronics
329
Technical data
Z
The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the
base of the antenna must not exceed the fol-
lowing values:
Waveband Maximum
transmission
output
Short wave
3 - 54 MHz
100 W
4 m waveband
74 - 88 MHz
30 W
2 m waveband
144 - 174 MHz
50 W
Trunked radio/Tetra
380 - 460 MHz
10 W
70 cm waveband
400 - 460 MHz
35 W
Mobile communications
(2G/3G/4G)
10 W
The following can be used in the vehicle without
restrictions:
R
RF transmitters with a maximum transmis-
sion output of up to 100 mW
R
RF transmitters with transmitter frequencies
in the 380 - 410 MHz waveband and a maxi-
mum transmission output of up to 2 W
(trunked radio/Tetra)
R
Mobile telephones (2G/3G/4G)
There is no restriction for antenna positions on
the outside of the vehicle for the following wave-
bands:
R
Trunked radio/Tetra
R
70 cm waveband
R
2G/3G/4G
Identification plates
Vehicle identification plate with vehi-
cle identification number (VIN)
X
Open the front left-hand door.
You will see vehicle identification plate :.
Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)
;
VIN
=
Vehicle model
Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only)
;
VIN
=
Paint code
i
The data shown on the vehicle identification
plate is used only as an example. This data is
different for every vehicle and can deviate
330
Identification plates
Technical data
from the data shown here. You can find the
data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle
identification plate.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
X
Slide the right-hand front seat to its rearmost
position.
X
Fold floor covering : upwards.
You will see VIN ;.
Engine number
:
Emission control information plate, includ-
ing the certification of both federal and Cali-
fornian emissions standards
;
Engine number (stamped into the crank-
case)
=
VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)
Service products and filling capaci-
ties
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Service products may be poisonous and haz-
ardous to health. There is a risk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storage
and disposal of service products on the labels
of the respective original containers. Always
store service products sealed in their original
containers. Always keep service products out
of the reach of children.
H
Environmental note
Dispose of service products in an environ-
mentally responsible manner.
Service products include the following:
R
Fuels
R
Lubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)
R
Coolant
R
Brake fluid
R
Windshield washer fluid
R
Climate control system refrigerant
Components and service products must be
matched. Only use products recommended by
Mercedes-Benz. Damage which is caused by the
use of products which have not been recom-
mended is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
warranty or goodwill gestures. They are listed in
this Mercedes-Benz Operator's Manual in the
appropriate section.
Information on tested and approved products
can be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center or on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
You can recognize service products approved by
Mercedes-Benz by the following inscription on
the containers:
R
MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
R
MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
Other designations or recommendations indi-
cate a level of quality or a specification in
accordance with an MB Sheet Number (e.g. MB
229.5). They have not necessarily been
approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Service products and filling capacities
331
Technical data
Z
Other identifications, for example:
R
0 W-30
R
5 W-30
R
5 W-40
Fuel
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
incorrectly, there is a risk of fire and explo-
sion.
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
refueling.
G
WARNING
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
There is a risk of injury.
You must make sure that fuel does not come
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
vapors. Keep fuel away from children.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following:
R
Wash away fuel from skin immediately
using soap and water.
R
If fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical assistance with-
out delay.
R
If fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
tance without delay. Do not induce vomit-
ing.
R
Immediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with fuel.
Tank capacity
Missing values were not available at time of
going to print.
Model Total capa-
city
MercedesAMG vehicles
All other models
21.1 US gal
(80.0 l)
Model Of which
reserve
MercedesAMG vehicles
All other models
Approx.
2.4 US gal
(9.0 l)
Gasoline
Fuel grade
!
Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition
if you accidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.
Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.
Even small amounts of the wrong fuel could
result in damage to the fuel system and the
engine. Notify a qualified specialist workshop
and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
completely.
!
Only refuel using unleaded premium grade
gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.
i
E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.
Your vehicle is E10-compatible. You can
refuel your vehicle using E10 fuel.
!
Only use the fuel recommended. Operating
the vehicle with other fuels can lead to engine
failure.
!
Do not use the following:
R
E15 (gasoline with 15% ethanol)
R
E85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)
R
E100 (100% ethanol)
R
M15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)
R
M30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)
R
M85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)
R
M100 (100% methanol)
332
Service products and filling capacities
Technical data
R
Gasoline with metalliferous additives
R
Diesel
Do not mix such fuels with the fuel recom-
mended for your vehicle.
!
To ensure the longevity and full perform-
ance of the engine, only premium-grade
unleaded gasoline must be used.
If standard unleaded gasoline is unavailable
and you have to refuel with unleaded gasoline
of a lower grade, observe the following pre-
cautions:
R
Only fill the fuel tank to half full with regular
unleaded gasoline and fill the rest with pre-
mium-grade unleaded gasoline as soon as
possible.
R
Do not drive at the maximum speed.
R
Avoid sudden acceleration and engine
speeds over 3,000 rpm.
You will usually find information about the fuel
grade on the pump. If you cannot find the label
on the pump, ask the staff for assistance.
i
For further information, consult a qualified
specialist workshop or visit
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
As a temporary measure, if the recommended
fuel is not available, you may also use regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of
87 AKI/91 RON. This may reduce engine per-
formance and increase fuel consumption. Avoid
driving at full throttle and sudden acceleration.
Never refuel using fuel with a lower AKI.
Information on refueling (
Y page 144).
Additives
i
In some countries, the available gasoline
may not be sufficiently low in sulfur. This fuel
can temporarily produce unpleasant odors,
especially on short journeys.
As soon as sul-
f
ur-free fuel (sulfur content <10 ppm) is used
for refueling, the odors are reduced.
Engine oil
General notes
!
Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a spec-
ification other than is necessary to fulfill the
prescribed service intervals. Do not change
the engine oil or oil filter in order to achieve
longer replacement intervals than those pre-
scribed. You could otherwise cause engine
damage or damage to the exhaust gas after-
treatment.
Follow the instructions in the service interval
display regarding the oil change. Otherwise,
you may damage the engine and the exhaust
gas aftertreatment.
When handling engine oil, observe the important
safety notes on service products (
Y page 331).
The engine oils are matched to the performance
of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals.
You should therefore only use engine oils and oil
filters that are approved for vehicles with main-
tenance systems.
For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,
consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Or visit the website
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
The table shows which engine oils have been
approved for your vehicle.
Model MB-Freigabe
or MB-
Approval
All models
229.5
Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils
for MercedesAMG vehicles.
i
MB approval is indicated on the oil contain-
ers.
Service products and filling capacities
333
Technical data
Z
Filling capacities
The following values refer to an oil change
including the oil filter.
Model Capacity
CLS 400
CLS 400 4MATIC
6.9 US qt (6.5 l)
CLS 550
CLS 550 4MATIC
8.5 US qt (8.0 l)
MercedesAMG
vehicles
9.0 US qt (8.5 l)
Additives
!
Do not use any additives in the engine oil.
This could damage the engine.
Brake fluid
G
WARNING
The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake
fluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in the
brake system when the brakes are applied
hard. This would impair braking efficiency.
There is a risk of an accident.
You should have the brake fluid renewed at
the specified intervals.
Comply with the important safety notes for ser-
vice products when handling brake fluid
(
Y page 331).
The brake fluid change intervals can be found in
the Maintenance Booklet.
Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-
Benz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MB-
Approval 331.0.
Information about approved brake fluid can be
obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or
on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
i
Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop and the replace-
ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.
Coolant
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-
ponents in the engine compartment, it may
ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.
Let the engine cool down before you add anti-
freeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled
next to the filler neck. Thoroughly clean the
antifreeze from components before starting
the engine.
!
Only add coolant that has been premixed
with the desired antifreeze protection. You
could otherwise damage the engine.
Further information on coolants can be found
in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Ser-
vice Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on the
Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
Or contact a qualified specialist workshop.
!
Always use a suitable coolant mixture, even
in countries where high temperatures prevail.
Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not
sufficiently protected from corrosion and
overheating.
i
Have the coolant regularly replaced at a
qualified specialist workshop and the replace-
ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.
Comply with the important safety precautions
for service products when handling coolant
(
Y page 331).
The coolant is a mixture of water and anti-
freeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performs the fol-
lowing tasks:
R
corrosion protection
R
antifreeze protection
R
raising the boiling point
If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to
-35 (-37 †), the boiling point of the coolant
during operation is approximately 266
(130 †).
334
Service products and filling capacities
Technical data
The antifreeze concentrate/corrosion inhibitor
concentration in the engine cooling system
should:
R
be at least 50%. This will protect the engine
cooling system against freezing down to
approximately -35 (-37 †).
R
not exceed 55% (antifreeze protection down
to -49 ‡[-45 †]). Otherwise, heat will not be
dissipated as effectively.
Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/
corrosion inhibitor concentrate in accordance
with MB Specifications for Service Products
310.1.
i
When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled
with a coolant mixture that ensures adequate
antifreeze and corrosion protection.
i
The coolant is checked with every mainte-
nance interval at a qualified specialist work-
shop.
Filling capacities
Model Capacity
CLS 400
CLS 400 4MATIC
Approx. 10.9 US qt
(10.3 l)
CLS 550
CLS 550 4MATIC
Approx. 11.5 US qt
(10.9 l)
MercedesAMG
vehicles
Approx. 11.4 US qt
(10.8 l)
Windshield washer system
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Windshield washer concentrate could ignite if
it comes into contact with hot engine compo-
nents or the exhaust system. There is a risk of
fire and injury.
Make sure that no windshield washer con-
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
!
Only use washer fluid that is suitable for
plastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB
WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluid could dam-
age the plastic lenses of the headlamps.
!
Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit
washer fluid should be mixed together. The
spray nozzles may otherwise become
blocked.
Do not use distilled or de-ionised water, other-
wise, the level sensor may give a false reading.
When handling washer fluid, observe the impor-
tant safety notes on service products
(
Y page 331).
At temperatures above freezing:
X
Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of
water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB
SummerFit.
Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.
At temperatures below freezing:
X
Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture of
water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.
For the correct mixing ratio refer to the infor-
mation on the antifreeze reservoir.
i
Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-
merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluid all
year round.
Climate control system refrigerant
Important safety notes
The climate control system of your vehicle is fil-
led with refrigerant R134a.
The instruction label regarding the refrigerant
type used can be found on the radiator cross
member.
!
Only the refrigerant R134a and the PAG oil
approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used.
The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with
any other PAG oil that is not approved for
R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climate
control system may be damaged.
Service work, such as topping up refrigerant or
replacing components, may only be carried out
by a qualified specialist workshop. All applicable
regulations must be adhered to, SAE standard
J639 included.
Always have work on the climate control system
carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
Service products and filling capacities
335
Technical data
Z
Refrigerant instruction label
Example: refrigerant instruction label
:
Warning symbol
;
Refrigerant filling capacity
=
Applicable standards
?
PAG oil part number
A
Type of refrigerant
Warning symbol : advises you about:
R
possible dangers
R
having service work carried out at a qualified
specialist workshop
Filling capacities
MercedesAMG
vehicles
Capacity
Refrigerant
22.6 ± 0.4 oz
(640 ± 10 g)
PAG oil
4.2 oz
(120 g)
All other models Capacity
Refrigerant
20.8 ± 0.4 oz
(590 ± 10 g)
PAG oil
4.2 oz
(120 g)
Vehicle data
General notes
Please note that for the specified vehicle data:
R
the heights specified may vary as a result of:
-
tires
-
load
-
condition of the suspension
-
optional equipment
R
optional equipment reduces the maximum
payload.
Dimensions and weights
Model
: Opening height
MercedesAMG
vehicles
71.1 in
(1805 mm)
CLS 400
CLS 400 4MATIC
70.7 in
(1796 mm)
CLS 550
CLS 550 4MATIC
70.3 in
(1786 mm)
MercedesAMG
vehicles
Vehicle length
195.6 in (4967 mm)
Vehicle width
including exterior
mirrors
81.7 in (2075 mm)
Vehicle height
56.3 in (1431 mm)
Wheelbase
113.1 in (2874 mm)
Turning radius
36.9 ft (11.25 m)
336
Vehicle data
Technical data
MercedesAMG
vehicles
Maximum roof load
220 lb (100 kg)
Maximum trunk
load
220 lb (100 kg)
All other models
Vehicle width
including exterior
mirrors
81.7 in (2075 mm)
Wheelbase
113.1 in (2874 mm)
Maximum roof load
220 lb (100 kg)
Maximum trunk
load
220 lb (100 kg)
Model Vehicle length
CLS 400
CLS 400 4MATIC
194.4 in (4937 mm)
CLS 550
CLS 550 4MATIC
195.0 in (4952 mm)
Model Vehicle height
CLS 400
CLS 400 4MATIC
56.1 in (1424 mm)
CLS 550
CLS 550 4MATIC
55.8 in (1418 mm)
Model Turning radius
CLS 400
36.7 ft (11.18 m)
CLS 400 4MATIC
37.8 ft (11.51 m)
CLS 550
36.8 ft (11.21 m)
CLS 550 4MATIC
37.8 ft (11.53 m)
Vehicle data
337
Technical data
Z
338
339
340
6

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Spelregels
1

Forum

Mercedes-CLS-2016

Misbruik melden

Gebruikershandleiding.com neemt misbruik van zijn services uitermate serieus. U kunt hieronder aangeven waarom deze vraag ongepast is. Wij controleren de vraag en zonodig wordt deze verwijderd.

Product:

Bijvoorbeeld antisemitische inhoud, racistische inhoud, of materiaal dat gewelddadige fysieke handelingen tot gevolg kan hebben.

Bijvoorbeeld een creditcardnummer, een persoonlijk identificatienummer, of een geheim adres. E-mailadressen en volledige namen worden niet als privégegevens beschouwd.

Spelregels forum

Om tot zinvolle vragen te komen hanteren wij de volgende spelregels:

Belangrijk! Als er een antwoord wordt gegeven op uw vraag, dan is het voor de gever van het antwoord nuttig om te weten als u er wel (of niet) mee geholpen bent! Wij vragen u dus ook te reageren op een antwoord.

Belangrijk! Antwoorden worden ook per e-mail naar abonnees gestuurd. Laat uw emailadres achter op deze site, zodat u op de hoogte blijft. U krijgt dan ook andere vragen en antwoorden te zien.

Abonneren

Abonneer u voor het ontvangen van emails voor uw Mercedes CLS 2016 bij:


U ontvangt een email met instructies om u voor één of beide opties in te schrijven.


Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Vul uw emailadres in en ontvang de handleiding van Mercedes CLS 2016 in de taal/talen: Engels als bijlage per email.

De handleiding is 8,68 mb groot.

 

U ontvangt de handleiding per email binnen enkele minuten. Als u geen email heeft ontvangen, dan heeft u waarschijnlijk een verkeerd emailadres ingevuld of is uw mailbox te vol. Daarnaast kan het zijn dat uw internetprovider een maximum heeft aan de grootte per email. Omdat hier een handleiding wordt meegestuurd, kan het voorkomen dat de email groter is dan toegestaan bij uw provider.

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Stel uw vraag over deze PDF

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Als u niet binnen een kwartier uw email met handleiding ontvangen heeft, kan het zijn dat u een verkeerd emailadres heeft ingevuld of dat uw emailprovider een maximum grootte per email heeft ingesteld die kleiner is dan de grootte van de handleiding.

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

Controleer uw email en volg de aanwijzingen op om uw inschrijving definitief te maken

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Als u de handleiding per email wilt ontvangen, vul dan een geldig emailadres in.

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Wilt u een email ontvangen bij een antwoord en/of nieuwe vragen? Vul dan hier uw emailadres in.



Info